diff options
Diffstat (limited to '35139.txt')
| -rw-r--r-- | 35139.txt | 16653 |
1 files changed, 16653 insertions, 0 deletions
diff --git a/35139.txt b/35139.txt new file mode 100644 index 0000000..0f81535 --- /dev/null +++ b/35139.txt @@ -0,0 +1,16653 @@ +The Project Gutenberg EBook of Manual for Noncommissioned Officers and +Privates of Cavalry of the Army of the United States 1917 +to be also used by Engineer Companies (Mounted) for Cavalry Instruction +and Training, by U. S. War Department + +This eBook is for the use of anyone anywhere at no cost and with +almost no restrictions whatsoever. You may copy it, give it away or +re-use it under the terms of the Project Gutenberg License included +with this eBook or online at www.gutenberg.org + + +Title: Manual for Noncommissioned Officers and Privates of Cavalry of the Army +of the United States 1917 to be also used by Engineer Companies (Mounted) +for Cavalry Instruction and Training + +Author: U. S. War Department + +Release Date: February 1, 2011 [EBook #35139] + +Language: English + +Character set encoding: ASCII + +*** START OF THIS PROJECT GUTENBERG EBOOK MANUAL FOR NONCOMMISSIONED *** + + + + +Produced by Chris Curnow, Christine P. Travers and the +Online Distributed Proofreading Team at http://www.pgdp.net + + + + + + + + + + WAR DEPARTMENT + + + MANUAL + FOR NONCOMMISSIONED OFFICERS AND + PRIVATES OF + CAVALRY + OF THE ARMY OF THE UNITED STATES + + + 1917 + + + TO BE ALSO USED BY ENGINEER COMPANIES + (MOUNTED) FOR CAVALRY INSTRUCTION + AND TRAINING + + + + + WASHINGTON + GOVERNMENT PRINTING OFFICE + 1917 + + + + + WAR DEPARTMENT, + Document No. 620. + _Office of The Adjutant General._ + + + + + ADDITIONAL COPIES + OF THIS PUBLICATION MAY BE PROCURED FROM + THE SUPERINTENDENT OF DOCUMENTS + GOVERNMENT PRINTING OFFICE + WASHINGTON, D. C. + AT + 50 CENTS PER COPY + + + + + WAR DEPARTMENT, + WASHINGTON, _June 28, 1917_. + +The following Manual for Noncommissioned Officers and Privates of +Cavalry is published for the information and guidance of all +concerned. + +[2582824 C.--A. G. O.] + +BY ORDER OF THE SECRETARY OF WAR: + + TASKER H. BLISS, + _Major General, Acting Chief of Staff_. + +OFFICIAL: + + H. P. MCCAIN, + _The Adjutant General_. + + + + +TABLE OF CONTENTS. + + Page. + CHAPTER I. MILITARY DISCIPLINE AND COURTESY.................. 9 + Section 1. Oath of enlistment.............................. 9 + Section 2. Obedience....................................... 9 + Section 3. Loyalty........................................ 11 + Section 4. Discipline..................................... 11 + Section 5. Military courtesy.............................. 13 + Section 6. Saluting....................................... 13 + Section 7. Rules governing saluting....................... 15 + Section 8. Courtesies in conversation..................... 18 + + + CHAPTER II. ARMS, UNIFORMS, AND EQUIPMENT................... 20 + Section 1. The rifle...................................... 20 + Section 2. Care of the rifle.............................. 21 + Section 3. Cleaning the rifle............................. 23 + Section 4. Uniforms....................................... 27 + Section 5. The service kit................................ 30 + Section 6. The surplus kit................................ 32 + Section 7. Assembling equipment........................... 33 + + + CHAPTER III. RATIONS AND FORAGE............................. 36 + Section 1. The ration..................................... 36 + Section 2. Individual cooking............................. 37 + Section 3. The forage ration.............................. 41 + + + CHAPTER IV. PERSONAL HYGIENE AND CARE OF THE FEET........... 43 + + + CHAPTER V. EXTRACTS FROM CAVALRY DRILL REGULATIONS, 1916.... 50 + Section 1. Definitions.................................... 50 + Section 2. General provisions, individual instruction..... 54 + Section 3. School of the trooper, dismounted.............. 57 + Section 4. School of the trooper, mounted................ 112 + Section 5. General provisions, elementary collective + instruction................................... 134 + Section 6. Basic principles of the drill................. 134 + Section 7. The school of the squad....................... 139 + Section 8. Tent pitching................................. 176 + + + CHAPTER VI. FIELD SERVICE.................................. 180 + Section 1. Principles of training........................ 180 + Section 2. Combat........................................ 181 + Section 3. Patrolling.................................... 199 + Section 4. Advance guards................................ 210 + Section 5. Rear guards................................... 212 + Section 6. Flank guards.................................. 213 + Section 7. Outposts...................................... 213 + Section 8. Rifle trenches................................ 219 + + + CHAPTER VII. MARCHING AND CAMPING.......................... 223 + Section 1. Breaking camp and preparation for a march..... 223 + Section 2. Marches, camps................................ 225 + + + CHAPTER VIII. TARGET PRACTICE.............................. 233 + Section 1. Preliminary training and marksmanship......... 233 + Section 2. Sight adjustment.............................. 233 + Section 3. Table of sight corrections.................... 235 + Section 4. Aiming........................................ 235 + Section 5. Battle sight.................................. 236 + Section 6. Trigger squeeze............................... 237 + Section 7. Firing positions.............................. 238 + Section 8. Calling the shot.............................. 240 + Section 9. Coordination.................................. 241 + Section 10. Advice to riflemen........................... 241 + Section 11. The course in small-arms firing.............. 243 + Section 12. Targets...................................... 244 + Section 13. Pistol and revolver practice................. 245 + + + CHAPTER IX. EXTRACTS FROM MANUAL OF INTERIOR GUARD + DUTY, 1914..................................... 254 + Section 1. Introduction.................................. 254 + Section 2. Classification of interior guards............. 255 + Section 3. Details and rosters........................... 255 + Section 4. Commander of the guard........................ 258 + Section 5. Sergeant of the guard......................... 263 + Section 6. Corporal of the guard......................... 266 + Section 7. Musicians of the guard........................ 271 + Section 8. Orderlies and color sentinels................. 271 + Section 9. Privates of the guard......................... 273 + Section 10. Orders for sentinels......................... 273 + Section 11. Countersigns and paroles..................... 282 + Section 12. Guard patrols................................ 283 + Section 13. Watchmen..................................... 283 + Section 14. Compliments from guards...................... 284 + Section 15. Prisoners.................................... 286 + Section 16. Guarding prisoners........................... 289 + Section 17. Stable guards................................ 292 + Section 18. Flags........................................ 296 + Section 19. Reveille and retreat gun..................... 298 + Section 20. Guard mounting............................... 298 + Section 21. Relieving the old guard...................... 306 + + + CHAPTER X. MAP READING AND SKETCHING....................... 309 + Section 1. Military map reading.......................... 309 + Section 2. Sketching..................................... 322 + + + CHAPTER XI. MESSAGE BLANKS................................. 325 + + + CHAPTER XII. SIGNALS AND CODES............................. 326 + + + CHAPTER XIII. FIRST-AID RULES.............................. 338 + + + CHAPTER XIV. LAWS AND REGULATIONS.......................... 350 + Section 1. General provisions............................ 350 + Section 2. The Army of the United States................. 351 + Section 3. Rank and precedence of officers and + noncommissioned officers...................... 351 + Section 4. Insignia of officers and noncommissioned + officers...................................... 353 + Section 5. Extracts from the Articles of War............. 353 + + + CHAPTER XV. ENGLISH-FRENCH VOCABULARY...................... 371 + + + APPENDIX. FORM FOR LAST WILL AND TESTAMENT................. 389 + + + + +MANUAL + +FOR + +NONCOMMISSIONED OFFICERS AND PRIVATES Of CAVALRY + +OF THE + +ARMY OF THE UNITED STATES. + + + + +CHAPTER I. + +MILITARY DISCIPLINE AND COURTESY. + + +=Section 1. Oath of enlistment.= + +Every soldier on enlisting in the Army takes upon himself the +following obligation: + +"I, ----, do solemnly swear (or affirm) that I will bear true faith +and allegiance to the United States of America; that I will serve them +honestly and faithfully against all-their enemies whomsoever; and that +I will obey the orders of the President of the United States, and the +orders of the officers appointed over me according to the Rules and +Articles of War." (109th Article of War.) + + +=Section 2. Obedience.= + +The very first paragraph in the Army Regulations reads: + +"All persons in the military service are required to =obey strictly= +and to =execute promptly= the lawful orders of their superiors." + +Obedience is the first and last duty of a soldier. It is the +foundation upon which all military efficiency is built. Without it an +army becomes a mob, while with it a mob ceases to be a mob and becomes +possessed of much of the power of an organized force. It is a quality +that is demanded of every person in the Army from the highest to the +lowest. Each enlisted man binds himself, by his enlistment oath, to +obedience. Each officer, in accepting his commission, must take upon +himself the same solemn obligation. + +Obey strictly and execute promptly the lawful orders of your +superiors. It is enough to know that the person giving the order, +whether he be an officer, a noncommissioned officer, or a private +acting as such, is your lawful superior. You may not like him, you may +not respect him, but you must respect his position and authority, and +reflect honor and credit upon yourself and your profession by yielding +to all superiors that complete and unhesitating obedience which is the +pleasure as well as the duty of every true soldier. + +Orders must be strictly carried out. It is not sufficient to comply +with only that part which suits you or which involves no work or +danger or hardship. Nor is it proper or permissible, when you are +ordered to do a thing in a certain way or to accomplish a work in a +definitely prescribed manner, for you to obtain the same results by +other methods. + +Obedience must be =prompt and unquestioning=. When any soldier (and +this word includes officers as well as enlisted men) receives an +order, it is not for him to consider whether the order is a good one +or not, whether it would have been better had such an order never been +given, or whether the duty might be better performed by some one else, +or at some other time, or in some other manner. His duty is, first, to +understand just what the order requires, and, second, to proceed at +once to carry out the order to the best of his ability. + +"Officers and men of all ranks and grades are given a certain +independence in the execution of the tasks to which they are assigned +and are expected to show initiative in meeting the different +situations as they arise. Every individual, from the highest commander +to the lowest private, must always remember that inaction and neglect +of opportunities will warrant more severe censure than an error in the +choice of the means." (_Preface, Field Service Regulations._). + + +=Section 3. Loyalty.= + +But even with implicit obedience you may yet fail to measure up to +that high standard of duty which is at once the pride and glory of +every true soldier. Not until you carry out the desires and wishes of +your superiors in a hearty, willing, and cheerful manner are you +meeting all the requirements of your profession. For an order is but +the will of your superior, however it may be expressed. Loyalty means +that you are for your organization and its officers and +noncommissioned officers--not against them; that you always extend +your most earnest and hearty support to those in authority. No soldier +is a loyal soldier who is a knocker or a grumbler or a shirker. Just +one man of this class in a troop breeds discontent and dissatisfaction +among many others. You should, therefore, not only guard against doing +such things yourself but should discourage such actions among any of +your comrades. + + +=Section 4. Discipline.= + +"1. All persons in the military service are required to obey strictly +and to execute promptly the lawful orders of their superiors. + +"2. Military authority will be exercised with firmness, kindness, and +justice. Punishments must conform to law and follow offenses as +promptly as circumstances will permit. + +"3. Superiors are forbidden to injure those under their authority by +tyrannical or capricious conduct or by abusive language. While +maintaining discipline and the thorough and prompt performance of +military duty, all officers, in dealing with enlisted men, will bear +in mind the absolute necessity of so treating them as to preserve +their self-respect. Officers will keep in as close touch as possible +with the men under their command and will strive to build up such +relations of confidence and sympathy as will insure the free approach +of their men to them for counsel and assistance. This relationship may +be gained and maintained without relaxation of the bonds of discipline +and with great benefit to the service as a whole. + +"Courtesy among military men is indispensable to discipline; respect +to superiors will not be confined to obedience on duty, but will be +extended on all occasions. + +"5. Deliberations or discussions among military men, conveying praise +or censure, or any mark of approbation, toward others in the military +service, and all publications relating to private or personal +transactions between officers are prohibited. Efforts to influence +legislation affecting the Army or to procure personal favor or +consideration should never be made except through regular military +channels; the adoption of any other method by any officer or enlisted +man will be noted in the military record of those concerned." (_Army +Regulations._) + +"The discipline which makes the soldier of a free country reliable in +battle is not to be gained by harsh or tyrannical treatment. On the +contrary, such treatment is far more likely to destroy than to make an +army. It is possible to impart instruction and give commands in such +manner and in such tone of voice as to inspire in the soldier no +feeling but an intense desire to obey, while the opposite manner and +tone of voice can not fail to excite strong resentment and a desire to +disobey. The one mode or the other of dealing with subordinates +springs from a corresponding spirit in the breast of the commander. He +who feels the respect which is due to others can not fail to inspire +in them regard for himself, while he who feels, and hence manifests, +disrespect toward others, especially his inferiors, can not fail to +inspire hatred against himself." (_Address of Maj. Gen. John M. +Schofield to the United States Corps of Cadets, Aug. 11, 1879._) + +When, by long-continued drill and subordination, you have learned your +duties, and obedience becomes second nature, you have acquired +discipline. It can not be acquired in a day nor a month. It is a +growth. It is the habit of obedience. To teach this habit of obedience +is the main object of the close-order drill, and, if good results are +to be expected, the greatest attention must be paid to even the +smallest details. The troop, platoon, or squad must be formed promptly +at the prescribed time--not a minute or even a second late. All must +wear the exact uniform prescribed and in the exact manner prescribed. +When at attention there must be no gazing about, no raising of hands, +no chewing or spitting in ranks. The manual of the rifle, the pistol, +the saber, and all movements must be executed absolutely as +prescribed. A drill of this kind teaches discipline. A careless, +sloppy drill breeds disobedience and insubordination. In other words, +discipline simply means efficiency. + + +=Section 5. Military courtesy.= + +In all walks of life men who are gentlemanly and of good breeding are +always respectful and courteous to those about them. It helps to make +life move along more smoothly. In civil life this courtesy is shown by +the custom of tipping the hat to ladies, shaking hands with friends, +and greeting persons with a nod or a friendly "Good morning," etc. + +In the Army courtesy is just as necessary, and for the same reasons. +It helps to keep the great machine moving without friction. + +"Courtesy among military men is indispensable to discipline; respect +to superiors will not be confined to obedience on duty, but will be +extended on all occasions." (_Par. 4, Army Regulations, 1913._) + +One method of extending this courtesy is by saluting. When in ranks +the question of what a private should do is simple--he obeys any +command that is given. It is when out of ranks that a private must +know how and when to salute. + + +=Section 6. Saluting.= + +In the old days the free men of Europe were all allowed to carry +weapons, and when they met each would hold up his right hand to show +that he had no weapon in it and that they met as friends. Slaves or +serfs, however, were not allowed to carry weapons, and slunk past the +free men without making any sign. In this way the salute came to be +the symbol or sign by which soldiers (free men) might recognize each +other. The lower classes began to imitate the soldiers in this +respect, although in a clumsy, apologetic way, and thence crept into +civil life the custom of raising the hand or nodding as one passed an +acquaintance. The soldiers, however, kept their individual salute, and +purposely made it intricate and difficult to learn in order that it +could be acquired only by the constant training all real soldiers +received. To this day armies have preserved their salute, and when +correctly done it is at once recognized and never mistaken for that of +the civilian. All soldiers should be careful to execute the salute +exactly as prescribed. The civilian or the imitation soldier who tries +to imitate the military salute, invariably makes some mistake which +shows that he is not a real soldier; he gives it in an apologetic +manner, he fails to stand or march at attention, his coat is +unbuttoned or hat on awry, or he fails to look the person saluted in +the eye. There is a wide difference in the method of rendering and +meaning between the civilian salute as used by friends in passing, or +by servants to their employers, and the MILITARY SALUTE, the symbol +and sign of the military profession. + +=To salute with the hand=, first assume the position of a soldier or +march at attention. Look the officer you are to salute straight in the +eye. Then, when the proper distance separates you, raise the right +hand smartly till the tip of the forefinger touches the lower part of +the headdress or forehead above the right eye, thumb and fingers +extended and joined, palm to the left, forearm inclined at about 45 deg., +hand and wrist straight. Continue to look the officer you are saluting +straight in the eye and keep your hand in the position of salute until +the officer acknowledges the salute or until he has passed. Then drop +the hand smartly to the side. The salute is given with the right hand +only. + +=To salute with the rifle=, bring the rifle to right shoulder arms if +not already there. Carry the left hand smartly to the small of the +stock, forearm horizontal, palm of the hand down, thumb and fingers +extended and joined, forefinger touching the end of the cocking piece. +Look the officer saluted in the eye. When the officer has acknowledged +the salute or has passed, drop the left hand smartly to the side and +turn the head and eyes to the front. The rifle salute may also be +executed from the order or trail. See paragraph 94, Infantry Drill +Regulations, and paragraph 111, Cavalry Drill Regulations, 1916. + +=To salute with the pistol when drawn=, assume the position of =Raise +Pistol=, muzzle up, the hand holding the stock with the thumb and last +three fingers, forefinger outside the guard, barrel to the rear and +inclined to the front at an angle of 30 deg., hand as high as the neck and +6 inches in front of the point of the right shoulder. The pistol is +carried in the holster, except when about to be used. It will not be +drawn for the purpose of saluting. When armed only with the pistol in +the holster, salute with the hand. + +=To salute with the saber=, bring the saber to carry saber if not +already there, carry the saber to the front with arm half extended +until the thumb is about 6 inches in front of the chin, the blade +vertical, guard to the left, all four fingers grasping the grip, the +thumb extending along the back in the groove, the fingers pressing the +back of the grip against the heel of the hand. Look the officer +saluted in the eye. When the officer has acknowledged the salute or +has passed, bring the saber down with the blade against the hollow of +the right shoulder, guard to the front, right hand at the hip, the +third and fourth fingers on the back of the grip and the elbow back. + +Always stand or march at attention before and during the salute. The +hat should be on straight, coat completely buttoned up, and hands out +of the pockets. + + +=Section 7. Rules governing saluting.= + +=912.= (1) Salutes shall be exchanged between officers and enlisted +men not in a military formation, nor at drill, work, games, or mess, +on every occasion of their meeting, passing near or being addressed, +the officer junior in rank or the enlisted man saluting first. + +(2) When an officer enters a room where there are several enlisted men +the word "attention" is given by some one who perceives him, when all +rise, uncover, and remain standing at attention until the officer +leaves the room or directs otherwise. Enlisted men at meals stop +eating and remain seated at attention. + +(3) An enlisted man, if seated, rises on the approach of an officer, +faces toward him, stands at attention, and salutes. Standing, he faces +an officer for the same purpose. If the parties remain in the same +place or on the same ground, such compliments need not be repeated. +Soldiers actually at work do not cease work to salute an officer +unless addressed by him. + +(4) Before addressing an officer an enlisted man makes the prescribed +salute with the weapon with which he is armed, or if unarmed, with the +right hand. He also makes the same salute after receiving a reply. + +=913.= (1) In uniform, covered or uncovered, but not in formation, +officers and enlisted men, salute military persons as follows: With +arms in hand, the salute prescribed for that arm (sentinels on +interior guard duty excepted); without arms, the right-hand salute. + +(2) In civilian dress, covered or uncovered, officers and enlisted men +salute military persons with the right-hand salute. + +(3) Officers and enlisted men will, render the prescribed salutes in a +military manner, the officer junior in rank or the enlisted men +saluting first. When several officers in company are saluted all +entitled to the salute shall return it. + +(4) Except in the field under campaign or simulated campaign +conditions, a mounted officer (or soldier) dismounts before addressing +a superior officer not mounted. + +(5) A man in formation shall not salute when directly addressed, but +shall come to attention if at rest or at ease. + +=914.= (1) Saluting distance is that within which recognition is easy. +In general, it does not exceed 30 paces. + +(2) When an officer entitled to the salute passes in rear of a body of +troops, it is brought to attention while he is opposite the post of +the commander. + +=915.= In public conveyances, such as railway trains and street cars, +and in public places, such as theaters, honors and personal salutes +may be omitted when palpably inappropriate or apt to disturb or annoy +civilians present. + +=925.= Soldiers at all times and in all situations pay the same +compliments to officers of the Army, Navy, Marine Corps, and +Volunteers, and to officers of the National Guard as to officers of +their own regiment, corps, or arm of service. + +=918.= Sentinels on post doing interior guard duty conform to the +foregoing principles, but salute by presenting arms when armed with +the rifle. They will not salute if it interferes with the proper +performance of their duties. Troops under arms will salute as +prescribed in drill regulations. + +=919.= (1) Commanders of detachments or other commands will salute +officers of grades higher than the person commanding the unit by first +bringing the unit to attention and then saluting as required by +subparagraph (1), paragraph 913. If the person saluted is of a junior +or equal grade, the unit need not be at attention in the exchange of +salutes. + +(2) If two detachments or other commands meet, their commanders will +exchange salutes, both commands being at attention. + +=920.= Salutes and honors, as a rule, are not paid by troops actually +engaged in drill, on the march, or in the field under campaign or +simulated campaign conditions. Troops on the service of security pay +no compliments whatever. + +=921.= If the command is in line at a halt (not in the field) and +armed with the rifle, or with sabers drawn, it shall be brought to +=present arms= or =present saber= before its commander salutes in the +following cases: When the National Anthem is played, or when =to the +color= or =to the standard= is sounded during ceremonies, or when a +person is saluted who is its immediate or higher commander or a +general officer, or when the national or regimental color is saluted. + +=922.= At parades and other ceremonies, under arms, the command shall +render the prescribed salute and shall remain in the position of +salute while the National Anthem is being played; also at retreat and +during ceremonies when to the color is played, if no band is present. +If not under arms, the organizations shall be brought to attention at +the first note of the National Anthem, =to the color= or =to the +standard=, and the salute rendered by the officer or noncommissioned +officer in command as prescribed in regulations, as amended herein. + +=910.= Whenever the National Anthem is played at any place when +persons belonging to the military service are present, all officers +and enlisted men not in formation shall stand at attention facing +toward the music (except at retreat, when they shall face toward the +flag). If in uniform, covered, they shall salute at the first note of +the anthem, retaining the position of salute until the last note of +the anthem. If not in uniform and covered, they shall uncover at the +first note of the anthem, holding the headdress opposite the left +shoulder and so remain until its close, except that in inclement +weather the headdress may be slightly raised. + +The same rules apply when =to the color= or =to the standard= is +sounded as when the National Anthem is played. + +When played by an Army band, the National Anthem shall be played +through without repetition of any part not required to be repeated to +make it complete. + +The same marks of respect prescribed for observance during the playing +of the National Anthem of the United States shall be shown toward the +national anthem of any other country when played upon official +occasions. + +=917.= Officers and enlisted men passing the uncased color will render +honors as follows: If in uniform, they will salute as required by +subparagraph (5), paragraph 759; if in civilian dress and covered, +they will uncover, holding the headdress opposite the left shoulder +with the right hand; if uncovered, they will salute with the +right-hand salute. + +The national flag belonging to dismounted organizations is called a +color; to mounted organizations, a standard. An uncased color is one +that is not in its waterproof cover. + +Privates do not salute noncommissioned officers. =Prisoners are not +permitted to salute;= they merely come to attention if not actually at +work. The playing of the National Anthem as a part of a medley is +prohibited in the military service. + + +=Section 8. Courtesies in conversation.= + +In speaking to an officer, always stand at attention and use the word +"Sir." Examples: + +"Sir, Private Brown, Company B, reports as orderly." + +"Sir, the first sergeant directed me to report to the captain." + +(Question by an officer:) "To what company do you belong?" + +(Answer:) "Company H, sir." + +(Question by an officer:) "Has first call for drill sounded?" + +(Answer:) "No, sir;" or "Yes, sir; it sounded about five minutes ago." + +(Question by an officer:) "Can you tell me, please, where Major +Smith's tent is?" + +(Answer:) "Yes, sir; I'll take you to it." + +Use the third person in speaking to an officer. Examples: + +"Does the Lieutenant wish," etc. + +"Did the Captain send for me?" + +In delivering a message from one officer to another, always use the +form similar to the following: "Lieutenant A presents, his compliments +to Captain B and states," etc. This form is not used when the person +sending or receiving the message is an enlisted man. + +In all official conversation refer to other soldiers by their titles, +thus: Sergeant B, Private C. + +=909.= In rendering personal honors, when the command _present arms_, +officers and men in uniform who are not in formation and are in view +and within saluting distance shall salute and shall remain in the +position of salute until the end of the ruffles and flourishes, or, if +none, until _order arms_. (_Cavalry Drill Regulations, 1916._) + +This extract covers the conduct of officers and soldiers who may be in +the vicinity of troops rendering honors to the President or other +persons entitled to personal salutes. + + + + +CHAPTER II. + +ARMS, UNIFORMS, AND EQUIPMENT. + + +=Section 1. The rifle.= + +The rifle now used by the Army of the United States is the United +States magazine rifle, model of 1903, caliber .30. + +It is 43.212 inches long and weighs 8.69 pounds. + +The bayonet weighs 1 pound and the blade is 16 inches long. + +The rifle is sighted for ranges up to 2,850 yards. + +The maximum range, when elevated at an angle of 45 degrees, is 4,891 +yards (389 yards less than 3 miles). + +The smooth bore of the rifle is 0.30 inch in diameter. It is then +rifled 0.004 inch deep, making the diameter from the bottom of one +groove to the bottom of the opposite groove 0.308 inch. The rifling +makes one complete turn in each 10 inches of the barrel. + +The accompanying plate shows the names of the principal parts of the +rifle. + +The only parts of a rifle that an enlisted man is permitted to take +apart are the bolt mechanism and the magazine mechanism. Learn how to +do this from your squad leader, for you must know how in order to keep +your rifle clean. Never remove the hand guard or the trigger guard, +nor take the sights apart unless you have special permission from a +commissioned officer. + +The cartridge used for the rifle is called the .30-caliber model 1906 +cartridge. There are four types of cartridges. + +=The ball cartridge= consists of the brass case or shell, the primer, +the charge of smokeless powder, and the bullet. The bullet has a sharp +point, is composed of a lead core and a jacket of cupro nickel, and +weighs 150 grains. The bullet of this cartridge, when fired from the +rifle, starts with an initial velocity at the muzzle of 2,700 feet +per second. + +=The blank cartridge= contains a paper cup instead of a bullet. It it +dangerous up to 100 feet. Firing blank cartridges at a represented +enemy at ranges less than 100 yards is prohibited. + +=The guard cartridge= has a smaller charge of powder than the ball +cartridge, and five cannelures encircle the body of the shell at about +the middle to distinguish it from the ball cartridge. It is intended +for use on guard or in riot duty, and gives good results up to 200 +yards. The range of 100 yards requires a sight elevation of 450 yards, +and the range of 200 yards requires an elevation of 650 yards. + +=The dummy cartridge= is tin plated and the shell is provided with six +longitudinal corrugations and three circular holes. The primer +contains no percussion composition. It is intended for drill purposes +to accustom the soldier to the operation of loading the rifle. + +All cartridges are secured five in a clip to enable five cartridges to +be inserted into the magazine at one motion. Sixty ball cartridges in +12 clips are packed in a cloth bandoleer to facilitate issue and +carrying. When full the bandoleer weighs about 3.88 pounds. Bandoleers +are packed 20 in a box, or 1,200 rounds in all. The full box weighs 99 +pounds. + + +=Section 2. Care of the rifle.= + +Every part of the rifle must be kept free from rust, dust, and dirt. A +dirty or rusty rifle is a sure sign that the soldier does not realize +the value of his weapon, and that his training is incomplete. The +rifle you are armed with is the most accurate in the world. If it gets +dirty or rusty it will deteriorate in its accuracy and working +efficiency, and no subsequent care will restore it to its original +condition. =The most important part of the rifle to keep clean is the +bore.= If, after firing, the bore is left dirty over night, it will be +badly rusted in the morning; therefore your rifle must be cleaned not +later than the evening of the day on which it was fired. The fouling +of the blank cartridge is as dangerous to the bore as the fouling of +the ball cartridge. + +Never attempt to polish any part that is blued. If rust appears, +remove by rubbing with oil. Never use emery paper, pomade, or any +preparation that cuts or scratches, to clean any part of the rifle. + +To beautify and preserve the stock rub with raw linseed, oil. The use +of any other preparation on the stock is strictly forbidden. + +Always handle your rifle with care. Don't throw it around as though it +were a club. Don't stand it up against anything so that it rests +against the front sight. Don't leave a stopper or a rag in the bore; +it will cause rust to form at that point. It may also cause the gun +barrel to burst if a shot is fired before removing it. + +Guard the sights and muzzle carefully from any blow that might injure +them. The front sight cover should always be on the rifle except when +rifle is being fired. This is especially necessary to protect the +front sight while rifle is being carried in scabbard by a mounted man. + +In coming to the "order arms," lower the piece =gently= to the ground. + +When there is a cartridge in the chamber the piece is always carried +locked. In this position the safety lock should be kept turned fully +to the right, since if it be turned to the left nearly to the "ready" +position and the trigger be pulled, the rifle will be discharged when +the safety lock is turned to the "ready" position at any time later +on. + +Cartridges can not be loaded from the magazine unless the bolt is +drawn fully to the rear. When the bolt is closed, or only partly open, +the cut-off may be turned up or down as desired, but if the bolt is +drawn fully to the rear, the magazine can not be cut off unless the +top cartridge or the follower be pressed down slightly and the bolt +pushed forward so that the cut-off may be turned "off." + +In the case of a misfire, don't open the bolt immediately, as it may +be a hangfire. Misfires are often due to the fact that the bolt handle +was not fully pressed down. Sometimes in pulling the trigger the +soldier raises the bolt handle without knowing it. + +Unless otherwise ordered, arms will be unloaded before being taken to +quarters or tents, or as soon as the men using them are relieved from +duty. + +=Keep the working parts oiled.= + +In every troop there should be at least one copy of the Manual of the +Ordnance Department entitled "Description and Rules for the Management +of the U. S. Magazine Rifle." This manual gives the name and a cut of +every part of the rifle, explains its use, shows how to take the rifle +apart and care for the same, and also gives much other valuable and +interesting information. + + +=Section 3. Cleaning the rifle.= + +"=Cleaning the rifle.=--(_a_) The proper care of the bore requires +conscientious, careful work, but it pays well in the attainment of +reduced labor of cleaning, prolonged accuracy life of the barrel, and +better results in target practice. Briefly stated, the care of the +bore consists in removing the fouling, resulting from firing, to +obtain a chemically clean surface, and in coating this surface with a +film of oil to prevent rusting. The fouling which results from firing +is of two kinds--one, the products of combustion of the powder; the +other, cupro-nickel scraped off (under the abrading action of +irregularities or grit in the bore). Powder fouling, because of its +acid reaction, is highly corrosive; that is, it will induce rust and +must be removed. Metal fouling of itself is inactive, but may cover +powder fouling and prevent the action of cleaning agents until +removed, and when accumulated in noticeable quantities it reduces the +accuracy of the rifle. + +(_b_) Powder fouling may be readily removed by scrubbing with hot soda +solution, but this solution has no effect on the metal fouling of +cupro-nickel. It is necessary, therefore, to remove all metal fouling +before assurance can be had that all powder fouling has been removed +and that the bore may be safely oiled. Normally, after firing a barrel +in good condition the metal fouling is so slight as to be hardly +perceptible. It is merely a smear of infinitesimal thickness, easily +removed by solvents of cupro-nickel. However, due to pitting, the +presence of dust, other abrasives, or to accumulation, metal fouling +may occur in clearly visible flakes or patches of much greater +thickness, much more difficult to remove. + +(_c_) In cleaning the bore after firing it is well to proceed as +follows: Swab out the bore with soda solution (subparagraph _j_) to +remove powder fouling. A convenient method is to insert the muzzle of +the rifle into the can containing the soda solution and, with the +cleaning rod inserted from the breech, pump the barrel full a few +times. Remove and dry with a couple of patches. Examine the bore to +see that there are in evidence no patches of metal fouling which, if +present, can be readily detected by the naked eye, then swab out with +the swabbing solution--a dilute metal-fouling solution (subparagraph +_j_). The amount of swabbing required with the swabbing solution can +be determined only by experience, assisted by the color of the +patches. Swabbing should be continued, however, as long as the wiping +patch is discolored by a bluish-green stain. Normally a couple of +minutes' work is sufficient. Dry thoroughly and oil. + +(_d_) The proper method of oiling a barrel is as follows; Wipe the +cleaning rod dry; select a clean patch and thoroughly saturate it with +sperm oil or warmed cosmic, being sure that the cosmic has penetrated +the patch; scrub the bore with the patch, finally drawing the patch +smoothly from the muzzle to the breech, allowing the cleaning rod to +turn with the rifling. The bore will be found now to be smooth and +bright so that any subsequent rust and sweating can be easily detected +by inspection. + +(_e_) If patches of metal fouling are seen upon visual inspection of +the bore the standard metal fouling solution prepared as hereinafter +prescribed must be used. After scrubbing out with the soda solution, +plug the bore from the breech with a cork at the front end of the +chamber or where the rifling begins. Slip a 2-inch section of rubber +hose over the muzzle down to the sight and fill with the standard +solution to at least one-half inch above the muzzle of the barrel. Let +it stand for 30 minutes, pour out the standard solution, remove hose +and breech plug, and swab out thoroughly with soda solution to +neutralize and remove all trace of ammonia and powder fouling. Wipe +the barrel clean, dry, and oil. With few exceptions, one application +is sufficient, but if all fouling is not removed, as determined by +careful visual inspection of the bore and of the wiping patches, +repeat as described above. + +(_f_) After properly cleaning with either the swabbing solution or the +standard solution, as has just been described, the bore should be +clean and safe to oil and put away, but as a measure of safety a patch +should always be run through the bore on the next day and the bore +and wiping patch examined to insure that cleaning has been properly +accomplished. The bore should then be oiled, as described above. + +(_g_) If the swabbing solution or the standard metal-fouling solution +is not available, the barrel should be scrubbed, as already described, +with the soda solution, dried, and oiled with a light oil. At the end +of 24 hours it should again be cleaned, when it will usually be found +to have "sweated"; that is, rust having formed under the smear of +metal fouling where powder fouling was present, the surface is puffed +up. Usually a second cleaning is sufficient, but to insure safety it +should be again examined at the end of a few days, before final +oiling. The swabbing solution should always be used, if available, for +it must be remembered that each puff when the bore "sweats" is an +incipient rust pit. + +(_h_) A. clean dry surface having been obtained, to prevent rust it is +necessary to coat every portion of this surface with a film of neutral +oil. If the protection required is but temporary and the arm is to be +cleaned or fired in a few days, sperm oil may be used. This is easily +applied and easily removed, but has not sufficient body to hold its +surface for more than a few days. If rifles are to be prepared for +storage or shipment, a heavier oil, such as cosmic, must be used. + +(_i_) In preparing arms for storage or shipment they should be cleaned +with particular care, using the metal-fouling solution as described +above. Care should be taken, insured by careful inspection on +succeeding day or days, that the cleaning is properly done and all +traces of ammonia solution removed. The bore is then ready to be +coated with cosmic. At ordinary temperatures cosmic is not fluid. In +order, therefore, to insure that every part of the surface is coated +with a film of oil the cosmic should be warmed. Apply the cosmic first +with a brush; then, with the breech plugged, fill the barrel to the +muzzle, pour out the surplus, remove the breechblock, and allow to +drain. It is believed that more rifles are ruined by improper +preparation for storage than from any other cause. If, the bore is not +clean when oiled--that is, if powder fouling is present or rust has +started--a half inch of cosmic on the outside will not stop its +action, and the barrel will be ruined. Remember that the surface must +be perfectly cleaned before the heavy oil is applied. If the +instructions as given above are carefully followed, arms may be stored +for years without harm. + +(_j_) Preparation of solutions: + +_Soda solution._--This should be a saturated solution of sal soda +(bicarbonate of soda). A strength of at least 20 per cent is +necessary. The spoon referred to in the following directions is the +model 1910 spoon issued in the mess outfit. + +Sal soda, one-fourth pound, or four (4) heaping spoonfuls. + +Water, 1 pint or cup, model of 1910, to upper rivets. + +The sal soda will dissolve more readily in hot water. + +_Swabbing solution._--Ammonium persulphate, 60 grains, one-half +spoonful smoothed off. + +Ammonia, 28 per cent, 6 ounces, or three-eighths of a pint, or 12 +spoonfuls. + +Water, 4 ounces, or one-fourth pint, or 8 spoonfuls. + +Dissolve the ammonium persulphate in the water and add the ammonia. +Keep in tightly corked bottle; pour out only what is necessary at the +time, and keep the bottle corked. + +_Standard metal fouling solution._--Ammonium persulphate, 1 ounce, or +2 medium heaping spoonfuls. + +Ammonium carbonate, 200 grains, or 1 heaping spoonful. + +Ammonia, 28 per cent, 6 ounces, or three-eighths pint, or 12 +spoonfuls. + +Water, 4 ounces, or one-fourth pint, or 8 spoonfuls. + +Powder the persulphate and carbonate together, dissolve in the water +and add the ammonia; mix thoroughly and allow to stand for one hour +before using. It should be kept in a strong bottle, tightly corked. +The solution should not be used more than twice, and used solution +should not be mixed with unused solution, but should be bottled +separately. The solution, when mixed, should be used within 30 days. +Care should be exercised in mixing and using this solution to prevent +injury to the rifle. An experienced noncommissioned officer should mix +the solution and superintend its use. + +Neither of these ammonia solutions have any appreciable action on +steel when not exposed to the air, but If allowed to evaporate on +steel they attack it rapidly. Care should, therefore, be taken that +none spills on the mechanism and that the barrel is washed out +promptly with soda solution. The first application of soda solution +removes the greater portion of the powder fouling and permits a more +effective and economical use of the ammonia solution. These ammonia +solutions are expensive and should be used economically. + +(_k_) It is a fact recognized by all that a highly polished steel +surface-rusts, much less easily than one which is roughened; also that +a barrel which is pitted fouls much more rapidly than one which is +smooth. Every effort, therefore, should be made to prevent the +formation of pits, which are merely enlarged rust spots, and which not +only affect the accuracy of the arm but increase the labor of +cleaning. + +(_l_) The chambers of rifles are frequently neglected because they are +not readily inspected. Care should be taken to see that they are +cleaned as thoroughly as the bore. A roughened chamber delays greatly +the rapidity of fire, and not infrequently causes shells to stick. + +(_m_) A cleaning rack should be provided for every barrack. Rifles +should always be cleaned from the breach, thus avoiding possible +injury to the rifling at the muzzle, which would affect the shotting +adversely. If the bore for a length of 6 inches at the muzzle is +perfect, a minor injury near the chamber will have little effect on +the accuracy of the rifle. The rifle should be cleaned as soon as the +firing for the day is completed. The fouling is easier to remove then, +and if left longer it will corrode the barrel. + +(_n_) The principles as outlined above apply equally well for the care +of the barrel of the automatic pistol. Special attention should be +paid to cleaning the chamber of the pistol, using the soda solution. +It has been found that the chamber pits readily if it is not carefully +cleaned, with the result that the operation of the pistol is made less +certain." (_Par, 134, Small Arms Firing Manual, 1913._) + + +=Section 4. Uniforms.= + +Uniforms and clothing issued to enlisted men must not be sold, pawned, +loaned, given away, lost, or damaged through neglect or carelessness. +Any soldier who violates this rule may be tried by a military court +and punished. + +All uniforms and articles of clothing issued to enlisted men, whether +or not charged on their clothing allowance, remain the property of +the United States and do not become the property of the soldier either +before or after discharge from the service. Under the law a soldier +honorably discharged from the Army of the United States is authorized +to wear his uniform from the place of his discharge to his home within +three months after the date of such discharge. To wear the uniform +after three months from the date of such discharge renders such person +liable to fine or imprisonment, or both. + +The =dress uniform= dismounted (the blue uniform) consists of the +dress cap, dress coat, dress trousers, and russet-leather shoes. The +straight, standing, military, white linen collar, showing no opening +in front, is always worn with this uniform, with not to exceed +one-half inch showing above the collar of the coat. Turndown, +piccadilly, or roll collars are not authorized. + +When under arms, white gloves and the garrison belt are worn. The +dress uniform mounted is the same as dismounted, except that riding +gloves, leggings, and spurs are worn, and the saddle cloth, showing +regimental number and troop letter, is placed over the saddle blanket. + +The =full-dress uniform= is the same as the dress uniform, with the +breast cord added. + +The =service uniform= is either cotton (summer) or woolen (winter) +olive drab. + +For duty in the field it consists of the service hat, with cord sewed +on, service coat or sweater, service breeches, olive-drab flannel +shirt, leggings, russet-leather shoes, spurs, riding gloves, and +identification tag. In cold weather olive-drab woolen gloves may be +prescribed. + +In warm weather the coat, sweater, and riding gloves may be omitted +when authorized by the commanding officer. + +When not in the field, the service cap is worn instead of the campaign +hat. Under arms, dismounted, white gloves and the garrison belt (or +russet-leather belt and cartridge box) are worn. + +Spurs and riding gloves are worn on all mounted duty or when on +mounted pass. + +Wear the exact uniform prescribed by your commanding officer, whether +you are on duty or off duty. + +Never wear a mixed uniform as, for instance, a part of the service +uniform with the blue uniform. + +Never wear any part of the uniform with civilian clothes. It is very +unsoldierly, for example, to wear a civilian overcoat over the uniform +or to wear the uniform overcoat over a civilian suit. + +Keep the uniform clean and neat and in good repair. + +Grease spots and dust and dirt should be removed as soon as possible. + +Rips and tears should be promptly mended. In taking the field always +wear new clothing as it may be some time before you are again +supplied, and old clothing on field service goes to pieces rapidly. + +Missing buttons and cap and collar ornaments should be promptly +replaced. + +There is but one correct and soldierly way to wear the cap. Never wear +it on the back or side of the head. + +The service hat should be worn in the regulation shape, peaked, with +four indentations, and with hat cord sewed on. Do not cover it with +pen or pencil marks. The chin cord should always be in order and fit +for long field service. + +Never appear outside your room or tent with your coat or olive-drab +shirt unbuttoned or collar of coat unhooked. Chevrons, service +stripes, and campaign medals and badges are a part of the uniform and +must be worn as prescribed. + +When coats are not worn with the service uniform olive-drab shirts are +prescribed. + +Suspenders must never be worn exposed to view. + +Never appear in breeches without leggings. + +Leather leggings should be kept clean. Saddle soap should be used to +clean _all leather_. Should the shoes, leggings, or leather equipment +be soaked by rain or swimming they will not become hard if covered +with a light coat of neat's-foot oil applied just before they dry out. +All new leather should be oiled before being placed in service. +Leather can be preserved for years by the use of saddle soap and +neat's-foot oil, but once it becomes hard and cracked nothing will +make it serviceable. Canvas leggings should be scrubbed when dirty. + +Russet-leather (tan) shoes should be kept clean. Leather cleaned with +saddle soap can be polished by rubbing with a flannel cloth. + +The overcoat when worn must be buttoned throughout and the collar +hooked. When the belt is worn it will be worn outside the overcoat. + + +=Section 5. The service kit.= + +The service kit is composed of two parts--(_a_) the field kit, which +includes everything the soldier wears or carries with him in the +field, and (_b_) the surplus kit. + +The field kit consists of-- + + (1) The clothing worn on the person. + (2) Arms and equipment, consisting of-- + +(_a_) Arms and equipments of all enlisted men (except buglers +and members of bands and machine-gun troops): + + 1 brush and thong.[1] + 1 canteen, cavalry.[2] + 1 canteen strap, cavalry.[2] + 90 cartridges, ball, caliber .30 + 21 cartridges, ball, pistol, caliber .45. + 1 cartridge belt, caliber .30, cavalry. + 1 cartridge-belt suspenders, pair. + 1 cup + 1 fork. + 1 front-sight cover + 1 gun sling. + 1 knife. + 2 magazines, pistol, extra. + 1 magazine pocket web, double + 1 meat can + 1 oiler and thong case.[1]. + 1 pistol + 1 pistol holster. + 1 pouch for first-aid packet. + 1 rifle scabbard. + 1 rifle, United States, caliber .30. + 1 saber and scabbard, cavalry. + 1 saber knot. + 1 saber straps, pair. + 1 spoon. + 1 spurs, pair. + 1 spur straps, set. + +(_b_) Members of bands and buglers: + + 1 canteen, cavalry.[2] + 1 canteen strap, cavalry.[2] + 21 cartridges, ball, pistol, caliber .45. + 1 cup. + 1 fork. + 1 knife. + 2 magazines, pistol, extra. + 1 meat can. + 1 pistol belt without saber ring. + 1 pistol. + 1 pistol holster. + 1 pouch for first-aid packet. + 1 spoon. + 1 spurs, pair. + 1 spur straps, set. + +(_c_) In addition to (_b_) first sergeant of headquarters troop (drum +major) will have: + + 1 saber and scabbard, cavalry, 2 saber straps. + 1 saber knot. + +(_d_) For members of machine-gun troops, except that buglers attached +to machine-gun troops (only) will have 1 pistol belt without saber +ring in lieu of 1 cartridge belt, 1 cartridge-belt suspenders, pair, +and 1 magazine pocket, web, double: + + 1 bolo. + 1 bolo scabbard. + 1 canteen, cavalry.[4] + 1 canteen strap, cavalry.[4] + 21 cartridges, ball, pistol, caliber .45. + 1 cartridge belt, caliber .30, cavalry. + 1 cartridge-belt suspenders, pair. + 1 cup. + 1 fork. + 1 knife. + 2 magazines, pistol, extra. + 1 magazine pocket, web, doubles. + 1 meat can. + 1 pistol. + 1 pistol holster. + 1 pouch for first-aid packet. + 1 spoon. + 1 spurs, pair. + 1 spur straps, set. + +(_e_) Horse equipments for each enlisted man individually mounted on a +horse: + + 1 bridle, cavalry, model of 1909 + or 1912, or curb bridle, model + of 1902. + 1 bridle, watering, if curb bridle + model of 1902 is issued. + 1 currycomb. + 1 halter headstall. + 1 halter tie rope. + 1 horse brush. + 1 lariat. + 1 lariat strap. + 1 link + 1 nose bag, or feed bag (with + grain bag). + 1 picket pin. + 1 saddle, cavalry, complete.[3] + 1 saddlebags, pair. + 1 saddle blanket. + 1 surcingle. + + [Footnote 1: To be omitted if rifle is provided with + spare-part container.] + + [Footnote 2: In lieu of these the canteen, model of 1910, + with canteen cover, dismounted, may be issued.] + + [Footnote 3: One saddle for each troop and the saddles for + the 2 color sergeants are to be provided with a guidon + stirrup.] + + [Footnote 4: In lieu of these the canteen, model of 1910, + with canteen cover, dismounted, may be issued.] + + +=Care of saddlery. + +(Cav. Drill Reg. 1916.)= + +=975.= The saddlery and equipment must always be cleaned after use. +This duty, like the care of the horse, is to be regarded as part of +the mounted duty itself; thus a drill is not over until horse, +saddlery, arms, and equipments have been put again in condition. +According to need, the leather is simply wiped off with a damp sponge +or fully taken apart and well soaped and cleaned. In no case must it +be soaked in water. + +If the soap used does not contain a sufficient amount of free oil the +leather must be oiled to keep it pliable. A mixture of one-half +neat's-foot oil and one-half mutton tallow, well rubbed in, keeps +leather in good condition. Special care is taken to keep the underside +of the skirts of the saddle and the parts which do not come in contact +with the clothing well oiled. The seat and outside of the skirts will +rarely require oil. + +Metal parts are kept clean and free from rust; they may require oiling +if not regularly used. + +The saddle blanket must be kept clean and soft and free from wrinkles. +After use it must be dried and then well shaken (unfolded). It must +never be folded wet and left thus with the saddle. Provision will be +made in the saddle room or stables for hanging it up to dry. + +When necessary the blanket should be thoroughly cleansed by repeated +immersions in tepid soapsuds and hung over a pole or line to dry +without wringing or pressing it. + + +=Section 6. The surplus kit.= + + The surplus kit for each man consists of-- + 1 breeches, pair. + 1 drawers, pair. + 1 shirt, olive drab. + 1 shoes, russet-leather, pair. + 2 stockings, pair. + 1 undershirt. + 1 shoe laces, extra, pair. + +Each surplus kit bag contains 1 jointed cleaning rod and case. + +Squad leaders are responsible that surplus kit bags are kept in order +and fully packed in the field.[5] Men are allowed access to them for +the purpose of making substitutions. + +The surplus kits are packed in surplus kit bags, one for each squad, +one for sergeants, and one for cooks and buglers. + +The kit of each man will be packed as follows: + +Stockings to be rolled tightly, one pair in the toe of each shoe; +shoes placed together, heels at opposite ends, soles outward, wrapped +tightly in underwear, and bundle securely tied around the middle by +the extra pair of the shoe laces, each bundle to be tagged with the +company number of the owner. These individual kits will be packed in +the surplus kit bag in two layers of four kits each, the breeches and +olive drab shirts to be neatly folded and packed on the top and sides +of the layers, the jointed cleaning rod and case, provided for each +squad, being attached by the thongs on the inside of the bag. + +When overcoats or sweaters are not prescribed to be worn on the person +they will be collected into bundles of convenient size and secured by +burlap or other suitable material, or will be boxed. They will be +marked ready for shipment to be forwarded when required.[5] + + [Footnote 5: In campaign or simulated campaign, when an + organization is restricted to its prescribed field-train + transportation, surplus kits, overcoats, and sweaters are + stored on the line of communications or other designated + place with the permanent camp equipment of the organization.] + + +=Section 7. Assembling equipment.= + +TO MAKE THE BLANKET ROLL. + +Spread the shelter half, triangular part to the right, buttons +underneath. Fold triangular part across shelter half, making a +rectangle. + +Fold blanket through center, parallel to stripes; fold again through +center perpendicular to stripes. Lay folded blanket on shelter half, +longer side of blanket parallel to and 1 inch from edge of shelter +half opposite straps and equidistant from sides. Place tent, +pole, folded, close to and parallel to near edge of blanket, end of +pole flush with left side of blanket; pins and tent rope to be +similarly placed at right side of blanket, occupying about the same +space as pole. Arrange the clothing and toilet articles on right and +left sides of blanket, leaving center space clear. + +Fold the free portions of the right and left sides of shelter half +over the blanket. Fold the far edge of the shelter half 6 inches +toward the blanket, making a pocket. + +With hands and knees roll the blanket and shelter half toward and into +the pocket. Buckle straps around roll, strap buckles on line with +shelter half buttons. + + +ROLL THE OVERCOAT AND SLICKER. + +Turn the garment inside out, collar extended, and fold once the long +way. Roll tightly from the front edge, making roll the full length of +garment. + + +TO PACK THE McCLELLAN SADDLE. + +Put saddle pockets on saddle; fasten straps to cincha rings. Place +articles pertaining to the man in near pocket, those pertaining to the +horse in off pocket. + +The overcoat, slicker, or both, to be strapped on pommel, collar to +left. + +Blanket roll to be strapped on cantle. Feed bag, if empty, neatly +folded on top of roll, "U. S." up. If grain is carried, the grain bag +is tied inside the feed bag, which is strapped on top of the pommel +roll, above the overcoat or slicker. + +Lariat, in uniform coils of about 10-inch diameter, fastened to near +cantle ring by lariat strap fastened to one ring and passing through +the other; coil secured by two outside straps of saddle pocket flap. +To prevent flapping and injuring adjacent troopers and horses the +picket pin may be inserted through the saddlebag strap ring, point +downward, or it may be placed horizontally under the flap straps of +the near saddlebag, point to the rear. + +Canteen snapped into off cantle ring, canteen strap passing through +handle of cup, except the cup model 1910, which is fitted over the +bottom of the canteen, model 1910, inside the cover. + +Rifle on near side; saber on off side, attached to pommel ring. + +The surcingle is buckled over the saddle. The two extra fitted +horseshoes, one front and one hind, may be wired, one on bottom of +each stirrup, or they may be fastened together with a nail and carried +in off saddle pocket. To prevent rust the horseshoe nails should +always be well oiled and wrapped in canvas or leather. They are +carried in the off saddle pocket. + +The two reserve rations, extra ammunition, and other extra articles +should be so distributed between the two pockets as to balance the +weight on the horse. + +[Illustration: McCLELLAN SADDLE. + +Full pack, near side.] + +[Illustration: McCLELLAN SADDLE. + +Full pack, off side.] + +[Illustration: EQUIPMENT ARRANGED FOR INSPECTION. + +The arrangement should be uniform in each regiment.] + +[Illustration: SHELTER TENT AND EQUIPMENT ARRANGED FOR INSPECTION. + +The arrangement should be uniform in each regiment.] + +[Illustration: PLATE A.] + +[Illustration: PLATE B.] + + + + +CHAPTER III. + +RATIONS AND FORAGE. + + +=Section 1. The ration.= + +A ration is the allowance of food for one man for one day. + +In the field there are three kinds of rations issued, as follows: + +The _garrison ration_ is intended to be issued in kind whenever +possible. The approximate net weight of this ration is 4.5 pounds. + +The _reserve ration_ is the simplest efficient ration, and constitutes +the reserve carried for field service. It consists of-- + + Ounces. + Bacon 12 + Hard bread 16 + Coffee, roasted and ground 1.12 + Sugar 2.4 + Salt .16 + ------ + Approximate net weight pounds 2 + +The _field ration_ is the ration prescribed in orders by the commander +of the field forces. It consists of the reserve ration, in whole or in +part, supplemented by articles requisitioned or purchased locally or +shipped from the rear. + +In campaign a command carries as a part of its normal equipment the +following rations: + + (_a_) On each man: At least two days' reserve rations. + (_b_) In the ration section of the field train, for each man: + Two days' field and one day's reserve, and for each + animal two days' grain rations. + (_c_) In the supply train: + Of an infantry division, two days' field and grain + rations. + Of a cavalry division, one day's field and grain + rations. + +In addition to the foregoing, commanders will require each man on the +march to carry the unconsumed portion of the day's ration issued the +night before for the noonday meal. In the same manner, cavalry and +field artillery carry on their horses a portion of their grain ration +issued the night before for a noonday feed. Reserve rations are +consumed only in case of extreme necessity, when other supplies are +not available. They are not to be consumed or renewed without an +express order from the officer in command of the troops who is +responsible for the provision of supplies, namely, the division +commander or other independent-detachment commander. Every officer +within the limits of his command is held responsible for the +enforcement of this regulation. Reserve rations consumed must be +replaced at the first opportunity. + + +=Section 2. Individual cooking.= + +Sometimes rations for several days are issued to the soldier at one +time, and in such cases you should be very careful to so use the +rations that they will last you the entire period. If you stuff +yourself one day, or waste your rations, you will have to starve later +on. + +Generally the cooking for the troop will be done by the troop cook, +but sometimes every soldier will have to prepare his own meals, using +only his field mess kit for the purpose. + +The best fire for individual cooking is a small, clear one, or, better +yet, a few brisk coals. To make such a fire, first gather a number of +sticks about 1 inch in diameter. These should be dry. Dead limbs +adhering to a tree are dryer than those picked up from the ground. +Split some of these and shave them up into kindling. Dig a trench in +the ground, laid with the wind, about a foot long, 4 inches wide, and +6 inches deep. Start the fire in this trench gradually, piling on the +heavier wood as the fire grows. When the trench is full of burning +wood, allow it a few minutes to burn down to coals and stop blazing +high. Then rest the meat can and cup over the trench and start +cooking. Either may be supported, if necessary, with green sticks. If +you can not scrape a trench in the soil, build one up out of rocks or +with two parallel logs. + +The following recipes have been furnished from the office of the +Quartermaster General, United States Army: + +_Coffee._--Fill the cup two-thirds full of water and bring to a boil. +Add one heaping spoonful of coffee and stir well, adding one spoonful +of sugar if desired. Boil five minutes and then set it to the side of +the fire to simmer for about 10 minutes. Then, to clear the coffee, +throw in a spoonful or two of cold water. This coffee is of medium +strength and is within the limit of the ration if made but twice a +day. + +_Cocoa._--Take two-thirds of a cupful of water, bring to a boil, add +one heaping spoonful of cocoa, and stir until dissolved. Add one +spoonful of sugar, if desired, and boil for five minutes. + +_Chocolate._--Take two-thirds of a cupful of water, bring to a boil, +add a piece of chocolate about the size of a hickory nut, breaking or +cutting it into small pieces and stirring until dissolved. Add one +spoonful of sugar, if desired, and boil for five minutes. + +_Tea._--Take two-thirds of a cupful of water, bring to a boil, add +one-half of a level spoonful of tea, and then let it stand or "draw" +for three minutes. If allowed to stand longer the tea will get bitter, +unless separated from the tea leaves. + + +MEATS. + +_Bacon._--Cut slices about five to the inch, three of which should +generally be sufficient for one man for one meal. Place in a meat can +with about one-half inch of cold water. Let come to a boil and then +pour the water off. Fry over a brisk fire, turning the bacon once and +quickly browning it. Remove the bacon to lid of meat can, leaving the +grease for frying potatoes, onions, rice, flapjacks; etc., according +to recipe. + +_Fresh meat_ (to fry).--To fry, a small amount of grease (one to two +spoonfuls) Is Necessary. Put grease in the meat can and let come to a +smoking temperature, then drop in the steak and, if about one-half +inch thick, let fry for about one minute before turning, depending +upon whether it is desired it shall be rare, medium, or well done. +Then turn and fry briskly as before. Salt and pepper to taste. + +Applies to beef, veal, pork, mutton, venison, etc. + +_Fresh meat_ (to broil).--Cut in slices about one inch thick, from +half as large as the hand to four times that size. Sharpen a stick or +branch of convenient length--say, from two to four feet long--and +weave the point of the stick through the steak several times, so that +it may be readily turned over a few brisk coals or on the windward +side of a small fire. Allow to brown nicely, turning frequently. Salt +and pepper to taste. Meat with considerable fat is preferred, though +any meat may be broiled in this manner. + +_Fresh meat_ (to stew).--Cut into chunks from one-half inch to one +inch cubes. Fill cup about one-third full of meat and cover with about +one inch of water. Let boil or simmer about one hour, or until tender. +Add such fibrous vegetables as carrots turnips, or cabbage, cut into +small chunks, soon after the meat is put on to boil, and potatoes, +onions, or other tender vegetables when the meat is about half done. +Amount of vegetables to be added, about the same as meat, depending +upon supply and taste. Salt and pepper to taste. Applies to all fresh +meat and fowls. The proportion of meat and vegetables used varies with +their abundance, and fixed quantities can not be adhered to. Fresh +fish can be handled as above, except that it is cooked much quicker, +and potatoes and onions and canned corn are the only vegetables +generally used with it, thus making a chowder. A slice of bacon would +greatly improve the flavor. May be conveniently cooked in meat can or +cup. + + +VEGETABLES. + +_Potatoes_ (fried).--Take two medium-sized potatoes or one large one +(about one-half pound), peel and cut into slices about one-fourth inch +thick and scatter well in the meat can in which the grease remains +after frying the bacon. Add sufficient water to half cover the +potatoes, cover with the lid to keep the moisture in, and let come to +a boil for about 15 to 20 minutes. Remove the cover and dry as +desired. Salt and pepper to taste. During the cooking the bacon +already prepared may be kept on the cover, which is most conveniently +placed bottom side up over the cooking vegetables. + +_Onions_ (fried).--Same as potatoes. + +_Potatoes_ (boiled).--Peel two medium-sized potatoes (about one-half +pound) or one large one, and cut in coarse chunks of about the same +size--say, 1-1/2-inch cubes. Place in meat can and three-fourths fill +with water. Cover with lid and let boil or simmer for 15 or 20 +minutes. They are done when easily penetrated with a sharp stick. Pour +off the water and let dry out for one or two minutes over hot ashes or +light coals. + +_Potatoes_ (baked).--Take two medium-sized potatoes (about one-half +pound) or one large one cut in half. Lay in a bed of light coals and +cover with same and smother with ashes. Do not disturb for 30 or 40 +minutes, when they should be done. + +_Canned tomatoes._--One 2-pound can is generally sufficient for five +men. + +_Stew._--Pour into the meat can one man's allowance of tomatoes and +add about two large hardtacks broken into small pieces and let come to +a boil. Add salt and pepper to taste, or add a pinch of salt and +one-fourth spoonful of sugar. + +_Or_, having fried the bacon, pour the tomatoes into the meat can, the +grease remaining, and add, if desired, two broken hardtacks. Set over +a brisk fire and let come to a boil. + +_Or_, heat the tomatoes just as they come from the can, adding two +pinches of salt and one-half spoonful of sugar, if desired. + +_Or_, especially in hot weather, eaten cold with hard bread, they are +very palatable. + +_Rice._--Take about two-thirds of a cupful of water, bring to a boil, +add 4 heaping spoonfuls of rice, and boil until the grains are soft +enough to be easily mashed between the fingers (about 20 minutes). Add +two pinches of salt and, after stirring, pour off the water and empty +rice out on meat can. Bacon grease or sugar may be added. + +_Corn meal, fine hominy, oatmeal._--Take about one-third of a cupful +of water, bring to a boil, add 4 heaping spoonfuls of the meal or +hominy, and boil about 20 minutes. Then add about two pinches of salt +and stir well. + +_Dried beans and peas._--Put 4 heaping spoonfuls in about two-thirds +of a cupful of water and boil until soft. This generally takes from +three to four hours. Add one pinch of salt. About half an hour before +the beans are done add one slice of bacon. + + +HOT BREADS. + +_Flapjacks._--Take 6 spoonfuls of flour and one-third spoonful of +baking powder and mix thoroughly (or dry mix in a large pan before +issue, at the rate of 25 pounds of flour and 3 half cans of baking +powder for 100 men). Add sufficient cold water to make a batter that +will drip freely from the spoon, adding a pinch of salt. Pour into the +meat can, which should contain the grease from fried bacon or a +spoonful of butter or fat, and place over medium hot coals sufficient +to bake, so that in from 5 to 7 minutes the flapjack may be turned by +a quick toss of the pan. Fry from 5 to 7 minutes longer, or until by +examination it is found to be done. + +_Hoecake._--Hoecake is made exactly the same as flapjacks by +substituting _corn meal_ for _flour_. + +_Emergency rations._--Detailed instructions as to the manner of +preparing the emergency ration are found on the label of each can. +Remember that even a very limited amount of bacon or hard bread, or +both, consumed with the emergency ration makes it far more palatable, +and generally extends the period during which it can be consumed with +relish. For this reason it would be better to husband the supply of +hard bread and bacon for use with the emergency ration when it becomes +evident that the latter must be consumed rather than to retain the +emergency ration to the last extremity and force its exclusive use for +a longer period than two or three days. + + +=Section 3. The forage ration.= + +"_1077, Army Regulations._--The forage ration for a horse is 14 pounds +of hay and 12 pounds of oats, corn, or barley, and 3-1/3 pounds of +straw (or hay) for bedding; for a Field Artillery horse of the +heavy-draft type, weighing 1,300 pounds or over, 17 pounds of hay and +14 pounds of oats, corn, or barley, and 3-1/3 pounds of straw (or hay) +for bedding; for a mule, 14 pounds of hay and 9 pounds of oats, corn, +or barley, and 3-1/3 pounds of straw (or hay) for bedding. To each +animal 3 pounds of bran may be issued in lieu of that quantity of +grain. + +"The commanding officer may, in his discretion, vary the proportions +of the components of the ration (1 pound of grain, 1-1/2 pounds of +hay, and 2 pounds of straw being taken as equivalents), and in the +field may substitute other recognized articles of forage obtained +locally, the variation or the substitution not to exceed the money +value of the components of the ration at the contract rates in effect +at the time of change. + +"_1078, Army Regulations._--Where grazing is practicable, or when +little work is required of the animals, commanding officers will +reduce the forage ration. When, on the other hand, conditions demand +it, they are authorized to increase the ration, not in excess, +however, of savings made." + +In the field the authorized allowances must often be reduced and +supplemented by grazing and other kinds of food, such as green forage, +beans, peas, rice, palay, wheat, and rye. Wheat and rye should be +crushed and fed sparingly (about one-fourth of the allowance). For +unshelled corn, add about one-quarter weight. + +On the march the grain ration is the only forage carried. It consists +of 12 pounds of grain for each horse and 9 pounds of grain for each +mule. Recourse must be had to grazing if it is not possible to procure +long forage in the country traversed. + +In campaign a command carries as a part of its normal equipment the +following forage: + +(_a_) For each draft animal: On each vehicle a _reserve_ of one day's +grain ration for its draft animals. + +(_b_) On animals and vehicles: A portion of their grain ration issued +the night before, for a noonday feed. + +(_c_) In the ration section of the field train, for each animal, two +days' grain rations. + +(_d_) In supply train of an Infantry division two days' grain +rations, and of a Cavalry division one day's grain ration. + + + + +CHAPTER IV. + +PERSONAL HYGIENE AND CARE OF THE FEET. + + +PERSONAL HYGIENE. + +History shows that in almost every war many more men die of disease +than from wounds received in battle. Much of this disease is +preventable and is due either to the ignorance or carelessness of the +person who has the disease or of other persons about him. It is a +terrible truth that one man who violates any of the great rules of +health may be the means of killing many more of his comrades than are +killed by the bullets of the enemy. + +=It is therefore most important that every soldier should learn how to +take care of his health when in the field and that he should also +insist that his comrades do not violate any of the rules prescribed +for this purpose.= + +A great many diseases are due to germs, which are either little +animals or little plants so very small that they can only be seen by +aid of the microscope. All diseases caused by germs are "catching." +All other diseases are not "catching." + +There are only five ways of catching disease: + +(_a_) Getting certain germs on the body by touching some one or +something which has them on it. Thus, one may catch venereal diseases, +smallpox, measles, scarlet fever, chicken pox, mumps, boils, body +lice, ringworm, barber's itch, dhobie itch, and some other diseases. +Wounds are infected in this manner. + +(_b_) Breathing in certain germs which float in the air. In this way +one may catch pneumonia, consumption, influenza, diphtheria, whooping +cough, tonsilitis, spinal meningitis, measles, and certain other +diseases. + +(_c_) Taking certain germs in through the mouth in eating or drinking. +Dysentery, cholera, typhoid fever, diarrhea, and intestinal worms may +be caught in this manner. + +(_d_) Having certain germs injected into the body by the bites of +insects, such as mosquitoes, fleas, and bedbugs. Malaria, yellow +fever, dengue fever, and bubonic plague may be caught in this way. + +(_e_) Inheriting the germ from one's parents. + +Persons may have these germs sometimes without apparently being sick +with any disease. Such persons and persons who are sick with the +diseases are a great source of danger to others about them. Germs +which multiply in such persons are found in their urine and excretions +from the bowels; in discharges from ulcers and abscesses; in the spit +or particles coughed or sneezed into the air; in the perspiration or +scales from the skin; and in the blood sucked up by biting insects. + +Those who have taken care of their health and who have not become +weakened by bad habits, exposure, and fatigue are not only less liable +to catch disease, but are more apt to recover when taken sick. + +Knowing all these things, the soldier can understand the reasons for +the following rules and how important it is that they should be +carried out by each and every person: + +Stay away from persons having "catching" diseases. + +If you have any disease, don't try to cure it yourself, but go to the +surgeon. Insist that other soldiers do likewise. + +Typhoid fever is one of the most dangerous and common camp diseases. +Modern medicine has, however, discovered an effective preventative for +this disease in the typhoid prophylactic, which renders the person +immune from typhoid fever. The treatment consists in injecting into +the arm a preventative serum. The injection is given three times at +10-day intervals. + +Association with lewd women is dangerous. It may result in disabling +you for life. It is the cause of a disease (syphilis) which may be +transmitted by a parent to his children. Soldiers with venereal +diseases should not use basins or toilet articles used by others, as +the germs of these diseases if gotten into the eye very often cause +blindness. Likewise, if they use the same drinking cup used by others +they may give others the disease. They should promptly report their +trouble to the surgeon, that they may receive the best medical advice +and attention. + +Should a soldier expose himself to infection by having intercourse +with an unknown woman, he should report as soon as possible afterwards +to the regimental infirmary for prophylactic treatment, which, if +taken within a few hours after intercourse, will prevent to a large +degree the liability of contracting any disease. + +Cooked germs are dead and therefore harmless. Water, even when clear, +may be alive with deadly germs. Therefore, when the conditions are +such that the commanding officer orders all drinking water to be +boiled, be careful to live up to this order. + +Use the latrines and don't go elsewhere to relieve yourself. In open +latrines cover your deposit with dirt, as it breeds flies and may also +be full of germs. + +Flies carry germs from one place to another. Therefore, see that your +food and mess kit are protected from them. + +All slops and scraps of food scattered about camp soon produce bad +odors and draw flies. Therefore do your part toward keeping the camp +free from disease by carefully depositing such refuse in the pits or +cans used for this purpose. + +Urinate only in the latrines, or in the cans set out for this purpose, +never on the ground around camp, because it not only causes bad smells +but urine sometimes contains the germs of "catching" diseases. + +Soapy water thrown on the ground soon produces bad odors. Therefore in +camps of several days' duration this water should be thrown in covered +pits or in cans used for this purpose. + +As certain mosquitoes can transmit malaria and yellow fever, use your +mosquito bar for this reason as well as for personal comfort. + +Keep your mouth clean by brushing your teeth once or twice a day. It +helps to prevent the teeth from decaying. Decayed teeth cause +toothache. They also lead one to swallow food without properly chewing +it, and this leads to stomach troubles of various kinds. Food left +around and between the teeth is bad for the teeth and forms good +breeding places for germs. + +Keep the skin clean. Through the pores of the skin the body gets rid +of much waste and poisonous matter. Therefore remove this and keep the +pores open by bathing once every day, if possible. If water is scarce, +rub the body over with a wet towel. If no water is at hand, take a dry +rub. Wash carefully the armpits, between the legs, and under the +foreskin, as this will prevent chafing. + +The skin protects the sensitive parts underneath from injury and helps +to keep out germs. Therefore when blisters are formed don't tear off +the skin. Insert a needle under the skin a little distance back from +the blister and push it through to the opposite side. Press out the +liquid through the holes thus formed. Heat the needle red hot first, +with a match or candle, to kill the germs. + +When the skin is broken (in cuts and wounds) keep the opening covered +with a bandage to keep out germs and dirt; otherwise the sore may +fester. Pus is always caused by germs. + +Keep your hair short. Long hair and a long beard in the field +generally means a dirty head and a dirty face and favors skin +diseases, lice, and dandruff. + +=Don't let any part of the body become chilled, as this very often is +the direct cause of diarrhea, dysentery, pneumonia, rheumatism, and +other diseases.= + +Wet clothes may be worn while marching or exercising without bad +results, but there is great danger if one rests in wet clothing, as +the body may become chilled. + +Don't sit or lie or sleep directly on damp ground, as this is sure to +chill the body. + +When hot or perspiring or when wearing damp clothes, don't remain +where a breeze can strike you. You are sure to become chilled. + +Every day, if possible, hang your blanket and clothing out to air in +the sun; shake or beat them with a small stick. Germs and vermin don't +like this treatment, but damp, musty clothing suits them very well. +Wash your shirts, underwear, and socks frequently. The danger of blood +poisoning from a wound is greatly increased if the bullet passes +through dirty clothes. + +Ditch your tent as soon as you can, particularly a shelter tent, even +if you camp for one night only. Otherwise a little rain may ruin a +whole night's rest. + +Always prepare your bed before dark. Level off the ground and scrape +out a little hollow for your hips. Get some straw or dry grass if +possible. Green grass or branches from trees are better than nothing. +Sleep on your poncho. This keeps the dampness from coming up from the +ground and chilling the body. Every minute spent in making a good bed +means about an hour's good rest later on. + +Avoid the food and drink found for sale in the cheap stands about +camp. The quality is generally bad, and it is often prepared in filthy +places by very dirty persons. + +The use of intoxicating liquor is particularly dangerous in the field. +Its excessive use, even at long intervals, breaks down one's system. +Drinking men are more apt to get sick and less liable to get well than +are their more sober comrades. If alcohol is taken at all, it is best +after the work of the day is over. It should never be taken when the +body is exposed to severe cold, as it diminishes the resistance of the +body. Hot tea or coffee is much preferable under these circumstances. + + +CARE OF THE FEET. + +A soldier can not march with sore feet, and marching is the main part +of an infantryman's daily duty in the field. _All soldiers_ should be +familiar with the proper methods of caring for the feet. Sore feet are +generally due to carelessness, neglect, or ignorance on the part of +the soldier. + +The most important factor in the care of the feet and the marching +ability of the soldier is the shoe. Civilian shoes, particularly +light, patent leather, or low shoes, are sure to cause injury and in +time will ruin a man's foot. Only the marching shoe issued by the +Quartermaster Corps should be worn, and they must be properly fitted +to the individual. It will not suffice to order a marching shoe of the +same size as one's ordinary civilian shoes, for it must be remembered +that a soldier may have to march many miles daily over rough roads and +carrying a heavy pack. The pack itself causes the foot to spread out +to a larger size, and the rough roads give so much exercise to the +muscles of the feet that they swell greatly through the increased +blood supply. (For directions as to measuring the foot for the +marching shoe, see General Order No. 26, War Department, 1912, a copy +of which should be on hand in each company.) + +Do not start out on a march wearing new shoes. This is a frequent +cause of sore feet. New shoes should be properly broken in before +beginning a march by wearing them for several hours daily for a week +before the march, and they should be adapted to the contours of the +feet by stretching them with shoe stretchers with adjustable knobs to +take the pressure off painful corns and bunions. Such stretchers are +issued by the Quartermaster Corps, and there should be one or more +pair in every company of infantry. Should this be impracticable, then +the following is suggested: + +The soldier stands in his new shoes in about 2-1/2 inches of water for +about five minutes until the leather is thoroughly pliable and moist; +he should then walk for about an hour on a level surface, letting the +shoes dry on his feet, to the irregularities of which the leather is +thus molded in the same way as it was previously molded over the shoe +last. On taking the shoes off a very little neat's-foot oil should be +rubbed into the leather to prevent its hardening and cracking. + +If it is desired to waterproof shoes at any time, a considerable +amount of neat's-foot oil should be rubbed into the leather. +Waterproof leather causes the feet of some men to perspire unduly and +keeps them constantly soft. + +Light woolen or heavy woolen socks will habitually be worn for +marching. Cotton socks will not be worn unless specifically ordered by +the surgeon. The socks will be large enough to permit free movement of +the toes, but not so loose as to permit of wrinkling. Darned socks, or +socks with holes in them, will not be worn in marching. + +Until the feet have hardened they should be dusted with foot powder, +which can be obtained at the regimental infirmary, before each day's +march. Clean socks should be worn daily. + +As soon as possible after reaching camp after a day of marching the +feet should be washed with soap and water, and the soldier should put +on a dry pair of socks and his extra pair of shoes from his surplus +kit. If the skin is tender, or the feet perspire, wash with warm salt +water or alum water, but do not soak the feet a long time, as this, +although very comforting at the time, tends to keep them soft. Should +blisters appear on the feet, prick and evacuate them by pricking at +the lower edge with a pin which has been passed through the flame of a +match and cover them with zinc oxide plaster applied hot. This plaster +can be obtained on request at the regimental infirmary. If serious +abrasions appear on the feet, or corns, bunions, and ingrowing nails +cause trouble, have your name placed on sick report and apply to the +surgeon for treatment. Cut the toenails square (fairly close in the +middle, but leaving the sides somewhat longer), as this prevents +ingrowing nails. + + + + +CHAPTER V. + +EXTRACTS FROM CAVALRY DRILL REGULATIONS. + +UNITED STATES ARMY, 1916. + + +=Section 1. Definitions.= + +=Alignment.=--The placing of several troopers or units on the same +straight line; also the line on which such adjustment is made. + +=Assembly.=--The grouping =in order=, and in a close-order formation, +of the elements of a command. The special arrangement and condition +that constitute =order= for each unit are explained in the +corresponding part of the text. The purpose of the assembly is to +bring about a close-order formation in order. + +=Base.=--The element on which a formation or movement is regulated. +The base may be a trooper, two, four, section, platoon, or larger +unit. When the base is a single trooper in ranks, he may also be +termed the =guide=. + +=Center.=--The middle point or element of a command. If the number of +elements considered be even, the right center element will be meant +when the center element is referred to. + +=Column.=--A formation in which the elements of a command are placed +one behind the other. The elements here referred to may be troopers, +twos, fours, sections, platoons, or larger units. When used in these +regulations as a =word of command=, without qualifying words +indicating the kind of column (as =of twos=, =of platoons=, etc.), +=column= signifies =a column of fours=. In all other cases the word is +to be understood in its general sense unless the context indicates +the contrary. + +=Deployment.=--An evolution in which the command extends its front, as +in forming line from column or in passing from close order to extended +order. + +=Depth.=--The space from front to rear of any formation, including the +front and rear elements. + +=Directing leader.=--The leader of a subordinate unit who temporarily +conducts the march when the commander is not leading in person. A +trooper in the rank of a platoon or smaller unit who similarly +conducts the march is termed =a directing guide=. + +=Direction of march.=--The direction in which the base of the command +in question, whether actually in march or halted, is facing at the +instant considered. + +=Disposition.=--The distribution of the elements of a command, and the +formations and duties assigned to each for the accomplishment of a +common purpose. + +=Distance.=--The space between men or bodies of troops measured in the +direction of depth. Distance is measured--mounted, from the croup of +the horse in front to the head of the horse in rear; dismounted, from +the back of the trooper in front to the breast of the trooper in rear. + +=Dress.=--The act of taking a correct alignment. + +=Drill.=--The exercises and evolutions, taught on the drill ground and +executed in accordance with definitely prescribed methods. + +=Echelon.=--A body of troops is in _echelon_ with reference to another +when it is more advanced or less advanced and unmasks or uncovers the +other body, wholly or in part; units thus placed are called +_echelons_. + +=Element.=--One of the component subdivisions of a command. As used in +these regulations the term _element_ is a general one and may mean a +single trooper, a set of twos, a four, section, platoon, or larger +unit, according to the command and formation that are being +considered. The expression =elements of the column= refers to the +several troopers, fours, platoons, or other units that are placed +successively, one behind another, in any column formation. + +=Evolutions.=--Movements by which a command changes its position or +passes from one formation to another. + +=File closers.=--Officers or noncommissioned officers placed out of +ranks, whose duty it is to supervise the men in ranks and see that the +orders of the commander are carried out. For convenience, this term is +applied to any man posted as a file closer. + +=Flank.=--The right or left of a command in line or column. In +speaking of the enemy the term right flank or left flank is used to +designate the flank that would be so designated by him. + +=Flank guard.=--An element of a command disposed with a view to +protecting a flank. + +=Foragers.=--Mounted troopers distributed in line in extended order; +also the formation in which the troopers are so distributed. + +=Formation.=--The arrangement of the elements of a command in line, +column, or echelon. + +=Gait.=--One of the special movements of the horse, as the walk, the +trot, or the gallop. + +=Gait of march.=--The gait at which the base of the command in +question is moving at the instant considered. + +=Horse length.=--A term of measurement. For convenience in estimating +space, a horse length is considered as 3 yards; by actual measure it +is about 8 feet. + +=Interval.=--The lateral space between the elements or fractions of a +command. Interval is measured: Mounted, from the left knee of the man +at the right of the open space to the right knee of the man at the +left of the open space; dismounted, interval is measured on similar +principles, but from elbow to elbow. + +=Line.=--A formation in which the different elements are abreast of +each other. When the elements are in column the formation is called a +line of columns. + +=Maneuvers.=--Operations against an outlined or actual force under a +separate commander, who, within the limits of the assumed situation, +is free to adopt any formations and make any movements he chooses. + +=Order.=--An indication of the will of the commander in whatever form +conveyed. An order may be given orally, by signal, or in any manner +that is intelligible to those for whom it is intended. The +expression, =in order=, has no reference to this definition, but is +used to indicate a special arrangement and condition of the elements +of a command. + +=Order, close.=--This includes formations in which the intervals and +distances between elements are habitually based upon those required +for forming the normal line formation of each unit of the formation. + +=Order, extended.=--The formation in which the troopers, or the +subdivisions, or both, are separated by intervals or distances greater +than in close order. + +=Pace.=--Used with reference to gait, pace signifies the rate of speed +of the gait. Used as a unit of measure, pace signifies a step of 30 +inches. + +=Patrol.=--A group detached from a command and operating with specific +mission, usually related to security or information. The term is +ordinarily applied to groups varying in size from two men to a +platoon. They are frequently designated by special names connected +with their principal mission or their composition; as, =reconnoitering +patrols=, =combat patrols=, =visiting patrols=, =officer's patrols=. + +=Ployment.=--An evolution in which the command diminishes its front, +as in passing from line to column, or from extended order to close +order. + +=Rally.=--The rapid grouping behind the leader of the elements of a +command, without reference to their previous situation or formation. + +The object of the rally is to reestablish cohesion with a view to +immediate action, or to form line in a new direction when the regular +method of forming line would be slow or complicated. It is executed in +the order of arrival of the elements of the command without regard to +their normal order. The formation in which each unit is rallied is +fixed in the drill instructions of that unit. + +=Rank.=--Two or more troopers placed side by side. + +=Scouts.=--Individual troopers detached from their commands and +operating with a definite mission related to security or information. + +=Skirmishers.=--Dismounted troopers in line in extended order; also +the formation in which the troopers are so placed. + +=Successive formation.=--A formation in which the elements take their +places successively. + +=Tactical exercise.=--An operation against an outlined or represented +enemy whose movements are restricted with a view to illustrating some +particular tactical principle. + + +PART I.--INDIVIDUAL INSTRUCTION. + +=Section 2. General provisions.= + +=34.=[6] Thorough training in the school of the trooper is the basis +of efficiency. + + [Footnote 6: The numbers refer to paragraphs in the Cavalry + Drill Regulations, 1916.] + +=35.= Short and frequent drills are preferable to long ones, which +exhaust the attention of both instructor and recruit. + +=36.= As the instruction progresses, the recruits will be grouped +according to proficiency, in order that all may advance as rapidly as +their abilities permit. Those who lack aptitude and quickness will be +separated from the others and placed under experienced drillmasters. + +=37.= The individual dismounted instruction of the recruit is +habitually given by experienced noncommissioned officers, especially +selected for that purpose. All such instruction is under the careful +personal supervision of a commissioned officer, and in the +corresponding mounted instruction it is desirable that the actual +instructor be a commissioned officer when this is practicable. All +lieutenants will be required to instruct recruits in person +sufficiently to acquire skill in such work. + +When recruits, upon their arrival at a station, are assigned to their +respective troops for training, the captains prescribe and supervise +the instruction. + +=38.= The instructor will always maintain a military bearing and by a +quiet, firm demeanor, set a proper example to his men. A calm and even +temper is indispensable. Unnecessarily loud commands and prolonged +explanations are to be avoided. + +As the recruits become somewhat proficient in the school of the +trooper, the officer superintending the instruction may call upon them +in turn to drill the squad in his presence and to correct any errors +that may be observed. This will increase their interest, hasten their +instruction, and facilitate judgment upon their fitness for the duties +of noncommissioned officers. + +=39.= A carefully thought out program of instruction, prepared in +advance and based upon the probable time and facilities for +instruction that the case in question may present, is essential to +economy of time and effort and to systematic, thorough instruction. + +=40.= The preliminary individual instruction, dismounted and mounted, +should be carried on during different drill hours of the same days. +This preliminary phase should include, in addition to regular drill, +instruction in: The elements of discipline; the names of the various +parts of the arms and equipment; the proper care of arms, equipment, +and clothing; elementary instructions as to the names of those parts +of the horse that are frequently referred to at drill and stable duty; +grooming; a few simple rules regarding the care of the horse; personal +hygiene; and other related subjects. + +=41.= As soon as the instruction shall have advanced so far as to +include the few necessary preliminary drills, collective instruction +=in the school of the squad= will be taken up. This instruction may, +like the individual instruction, properly be carried on during +different hours of the same drill days, in both mounted and dismounted +phases. The recruits meanwhile continue their progress in the +individual instruction. + +=42.= The progress in =mounted= collective instruction must be +carefully regulated in accordance with the recruit's confidence and +skill in the management of his mount, and must progress no faster than +the recruit's horsemanship justifies; but this restriction need not +affect the =dismounted= collective instruction, and the latter may +properly be carried forward as rapidly as the state of the dismounted +individual instruction will permit. By the time the recruit's +instruction in equitation has progressed so as to prepare him for +mounted drills at the faster gaits, he should have learned the +mechanism of all the movements by executing them at a walk. His course +of dismounted training should meanwhile have included not only the +close-order movements of the squad but the mechanism of extended +order, practice in the use of the saber, a little preparatory range +practice with the rifle and pistol, and work in the nature of minor +field exercises involving dismounted fire action. He should, during +the same period, have learned the mechanism of passing from mounted +action to dismounted action and should have acquired familiarity with +all commands and signals used in the squad. The recruit will thus +ordinarily be ready to enter with reasonable efficiency upon certain +phases of the work in the platoon and troop before his individual +mounted instruction is completed. + +=43.= There are two kinds of commands: + +The =preparatory= command, such as =forward=, indicates the movement +that is to be executed. + +The command of =execution=, such as =MARCH=, =HALT=, or =ARMS=, causes +the execution. + +=Preparatory= commands are distinguished by =boldface type=, those of +execution by =CAPITALS=. + +The =preparatory= command should be given at such an interval of time +before the command of =execution= as to admit of being properly +understood; the command of =execution= should be given at the instant +the movement is to commence. + +The preparatory command is enunciated distinctly, with a rising +inflection at the end, and in such manner that the command of +execution may be more energetic. + +On foot, the command of execution is firm in tone and brief. + +In mounted movements the preparatory command is usually somewhat +prolonged to insure its being heard, and the command of execution is +always prolonged. + +_Commands will be given no louder than is necessary._ + +Laxness or indifference suggested in the manner of giving a command is +certain to result in corresponding carelessness of execution. + +=44.= To revoke a preparatory command, or being at the halt, to begin +anew a movement improperly begun: =AS YOU WERE=. Any movement ceases +and the former position is resumed. + +=45.= To stay the execution of a movement when marching, for the +correction of errors, the commands may be given: 1. =In place=, 2. +=HALT=. All halt and stand fast. If executed dismounted, the position +of the rifle is not changed. To resume the movement, the commands are: +1. =Resume=; or, 1. =Resume, trot=; or, 1. =Resume, gallop=. 2. +=MARCH=. The movement is then completed as if it had not been +interrupted. + +=46.= Movements that may be executed toward either flank are explained +as toward but one flank, it being necessary to substitute the word +"left" for "right," and the reverse, to have the explanation of the +corresponding movement toward the other flank. The commands are given +for the execution of the movements toward either flank. The substitute +word of the command is placed within parentheses. + +=47.= Any movement may be executed either from the halt or when +marching unless otherwise prescribed. + +Any movement on foot not specially excepted may be executed in double +time. + +If at a halt, or if marching in quick time, the command =double time= +precedes the command of execution. + +=48.= As instructors, officers and noncommissioned officers go +wherever their presence is necessary. + +=49.= Before beginning work, the instructor always assures himself +that those under his charge are neatly dressed and in proper uniform. +At mounted formations he will also require that horses be properly +groomed and that equipments be in good condition and adjusted as +prescribed. + +=50.= The value of recruit drill as an exercise in teaching discipline +must be kept constantly in view by the instructor. No phase of the +instruction is of such great ultimate importance. + + +=Section 3. School of the trooper, dismounted.= + +=51.= The object of this school is to develop the strength and agility +of the trooper, to give him a military bearing, to fix in him the +habit of sustained attention and instant obedience, to prepare him for +instruction in mounted combat with the saber and pistol, and to train +him in dismounted combat with the rifle. + +In order to make rapid progress in those exercises which form the +basis of instruction of the trooper, it is necessary that the lessons +should, as far as practicable, be given individually. + +=52.= _Cautions to instructors._--The instructor explains briefly each +movement, first executing it himself if practicable. He requires the +recruits to take the proper positions unassisted and does not touch +them for the purpose of correcting them, except when they are unable +to correct themselves. He avoids keeping them too long at the same +movement, although each should be understood before passing to +another. He exacts by degrees the desired precision and uniformity. +Recruits should be allowed to stand at ease frequently. During these +pauses the instructor will not be idle, but opportunity will be taken +to talk to the men, to encourage them to ask questions, and so to +develop their confidence and common sense. + +=53.= During the period devoted to preliminary instruction, without +arms, the recruit will be prepared for subsequent instruction with +arms by being taught the names of the principal parts of the different +weapons and the proper methods of cleaning, disassembling, assembling, +and operating the latter. + + +PHYSICAL TRAINING. + +=54.= The physical training of the soldier must receive due attention. +Its direct results are to increase the soldier's strength, agility, +and endurance, and it has indirect results of far-reaching value in +connection with discipline and morale. It should begin with his first +instruction as a recruit and be continued throughout his entire +enlistment. The methods prescribed in the authorized Manual of +Physical Training will be followed with a view to making the soldier's +development thorough and well balanced, and to prevent the instruction +from becoming unnecessarily tedious and monotonous. + +=55.= In the earlier phases of the recruit instruction, and under +temporary conditions that do not favor the carrying out of a more +comprehensive scheme of training, special attention will be given to +the =setting-up exercises=. Running, jumping, and swimming are phases +of training of special importance to the soldier. + + +INDIVIDUAL INSTRUCTION WITHOUT ARMS. + +=56.= For this instruction a few recruits, usually not exceeding 3 or +4, are placed (as a squad) in single rank, facing to the front. + +=57.= To teach the recruits how to form in ranks the instructor will +first place them in single rank, arranged according to height, the +tallest man on the right, with intervals of about 4 inches between +men, and will explain that the object of these intervals is to give +freedom of movement in marching and in the use of the rifle in ranks. +He will then direct each man singly to place the palm of the left hand +on the hip, fingers pointing downward, and draw attention to the fact +that the indicated interval of about 4 inches may be verified by each +man so placing himself that his right arm, when hanging naturally at +his side, touches the elbow of the man on his right. When this is +understood, he will cause the recruits to fall out and successively to +place themselves as before, each man verifying his interval by causing +his right arm to touch the left elbow of the man on his right, the +latter's hand being on his hip, as already explained. He will then +explain that at the command =FALL IN= the men will, beginning with the +right trooper, successively and quickly take their places in rank, +each man placing the left hand at the hip as above and dropping his +hand to his side as soon as the man on his left has the proper +interval. + +=58.= The recruits having had sufficient instruction to understand how +to form by command, the instructor commands: =FALL IN=. + +The men assemble as prescribed in par. 57, each taking the position of +=attention= as described below. + +As soon as the recruits have had sufficient preliminary instruction +they will habitually be formed as regularly prescribed for a squad. + + +POSITION OF THE TROOPER, OR ATTENTION (DISMOUNTED). + +=59.= Heels on the same line and as near each other as the +conformation of the man permits. + +Feet turned out equally and forming an angle of about 45 deg.. + +Knees straight without stiffness. + +Hips level and drawn back slightly; body erect and resting equally on +hips; chest lifted and arched; shoulders square and falling equally. + +Arms and hands hanging naturally, thumb along the seam of the +breeches. + +Head erect and squarely to the front, chin drawn in so that the axis +of the head and neck is vertical; eyes to the front. + +Weight of the body resting equally upon the heels and balls of the +feet. + + +THE RESTS. + +=60.= Being at a halt, the commands are: =FALL OUT=; =REST=; =AT +EASE=; and 1. =Parade=, 2. =REST=. + +At the command =fall out=, the men may leave the ranks, but are +required to remain in the immediate vicinity. They resume their former +places, at attention, at the command =fall in=. + +At the command =rest=, each man keeps one foot in place, but is not +required to preserve silence or immobility. + +At the command =at ease=, each man keeps one foot in place and is +required to preserve silence, but not immobility. + +1. =Parade=, 2. =REST=. Carry the right foot 6 inches straight to the +rear, left knee slightly bent; clasp the hands, without constraint, in +front of the center of the body, fingers joined, left hand uppermost, +left thumb clasped by the thumb and forefinger of the right hand; +preserve silence and steadiness of position. + +=61.= Being in march, at the command: 1. =Route order=, 2. =MARCH=; or +1. =At ease=, 2. =MARCH=, the men keep their places in ranks, but are +not required to keep the step; at =route order=, they are not required +to preserve silence. If halted from =route order=, the men stand at +=rest=; if halted from =at ease=, they remain at ease. + +Marching at =route order= or =at ease=, rifles are carried at will, +the muzzles elevated. + +=62.= To resume the attention: 1. =Squad=, 2. =ATTENTION=. + +If at a halt, the men take the position of the trooper, dismounted +(par. 59). If marching, the cadenced step in quick time is resumed, +and rifles, if carried, are brought to the right shoulder. + +=63.= To dismiss the squad: =DISMISSED=. + + +EYES RIGHT OR LEFT. + +=64.= 1. =Eyes=, 2. =RIGHT=, 3. =FRONT=. + +At the command =right=, turn the head to the right oblique, eyes fixed +on the line of eyes of the man in, or supposed to be in, the same +rank. At the command =front=, turn the head and eyes to the front. + + +FACINGS. + +=65.= To the flank: 1. =Right=, 2. =FACE=. + +Raise slightly the left heel and right toe; face to the right, turning +on the right heel, assisted by a slight pressure on the ball of the +left foot; place the left foot by the side of the right. Left face is +executed on the left heel in the corresponding manner. + +=66.= To the rear: 1. =About=, 2. =FACE=. + +Carry the toe of the right foot about a half foot length to the rear +and slightly to the left of the left heel without changing the +position of the left foot; face to the rear, turning to the right on +the left heel and right toe; place the right heel by the side of the +left. + +=67.= 1. =Hand=, 2. =SALUTE=. + +Raise the right hand smartly till the tip of the forefinger touches +the lower part of the headdress above the right eye, thumb and fingers +extended and joined, palm to the left, forearm inclined at about 45 deg., +hand and wrist straight; at the same time look toward the person +saluted. + +(=TWO=), Drop the arm smartly by the side. The salute for officers is +the same (Fig. 1). + +[Illustration: FIG. 1, par. 67.] + + +STEPS AND MARCHES. + +=68.= All steps and marchings executed from a halt, except right step, +begin with the left foot. + +=69.= The length of the full step in =quick time= is 30 inches, +measured from heel to heel, and the cadence is at the rate of 120 +steps per minute. + +The length of the full step in =double time= is 36 inches; the cadence +is at the rate of 180 steps per minute. + +The instructor, when necessary, indicates the cadence of the step by +calling =one=, =two=, =three=, =four=, or =left=, =right=, the instant +the left and right foot, respectively, should be planted. + +=70.= All steps and marchings and movements involving march are +executed in quick time unless the squad be marching in double time, or +double time be added to the command; in the latter case double time is +added to the preparatory command. + +Example: 1. =Forward, double time=, 2. =MARCH=. + +=71.= It should be explained to the recruits that in collective drills +and exercises one of the troopers, termed the =guide=, habitually has +to follow a leader or direct himself upon some designated objective, +the other troopers regulating their march so as, in line, to march +abreast of the guide, maintaining their approximate intervals. The +necessity, in this connection, for learning to march steadily in a +given direction without wavering from side to side should further be +pointed out. Each recruit should then be practiced individually in +marching upon a designated objective, selecting for that purpose two +points of direction on the straight line that passes through the +trooper and the objective and keeping constantly in the prolongation +of that line. When the objective is sufficiently distinct it should be +taken as one of the points of direction and another point in line with +the trooper and the objective, and either nearer or more distant than +the latter be selected as a second point to fix the direction of +march. + + +QUICK TIME AND DOUBLE TIME. + +=72.= Being at a halt, to march forward in quick time: 1. =Forward=, +2. =MARCH=. + +At the command =forward=, shift the weight of the body to the right +leg, left knee straight. + +At the command =march=, move the left foot smartly straight forward 30 +inches from the right, sole near the ground, and plant it without +shock; next, in like manner, advance the right foot and plant it as +above; continue the march. The arms swing naturally. + +=73.= Being at a halt, or in march in quick time, to march forward in +double time: 1. =Forward=, =double time=, 2. =MARCH.= + +If at a halt, at the first command shift the weight, of the body to +the right leg. At the command march, raise the forearms, fingers +closed, to a horizontal position along the waist line, take up an easy +run with the step and cadence of double time, allowing a natural +swinging motion to the arms. + +If marching in quick time, at the command =MARCH=, given as either +foot strikes the ground, take one step in quick time and then step off +in double time. + +=74.= To resume the quick time: 1. =Quick time=, 2. =MARCH.= + +At the command =march=, given as either foot strikes the ground, +advance and plant the other foot in double time; resume the quick +time, dropping the hands by the sides. + + +TO MARK TIME. + +=75.= Being in march: 1. =Mark time=, 2. =MARCH.= + +At the command =march=, given as either foot strikes the ground, +advance and plant the other foot; bring up the foot in rear and +continue the cadence by alternately raising each foot about 2 inches +and planting it on line with the other. + +Being at a halt, at the command march, raise and plant the feet as +described above. + + +THE HALF STEP. + +=76.= 1. =Half step=, 2. =MARCH.= + +Take steps of 15 inches in quick time, 18 inches in double time. + +=77.= =Forward=, =half step=, =halt=, and =mark time= may be executed +one from the other in quick or double time. + +To resume the full step from half step or mark time: 1. =Forward=, 2. +=MARCH=. + + +SIDE STEP. + +=78.= Being at a halt or mark time: 1. =Right (left) step=, 2. +=MARCH.= + +Carry and plant the right foot 15 inches to the right; bring the left +foot beside it and continue the movement in the cadence of quick time. + +The side step is used for short distances only and is not executed in +double time. + +If at order arms, the side step is executed =at trail= without other +command. + + +BACK STEP. + +=79.= Being at a halt or mark time: 1. =Backward=, 2. =MARCH.= + +Take steps of 15 inches straight to the rear. + +The back step is used for short distances only and is not executed in +double time. + +If at order arms, the back step is executed =at trail= without other +command. + + +TO HALT. + +=80.= To stop the march in quick or double time: 1. =Squad=, 2. +=HALT.= + +At the command _halt_, given as either foot strikes the ground, plant +the other foot as in marching; raise and place the rear foot by the +side of the other. If in double time, drop the hands by the sides. + + +TO MARCH BY THE FLANK. + +=81.= Being in march: 1. =By the right (left) flank=, 2. =MARCH.= + +At the command march, given as the right foot strikes the ground, +advance and plant the left foot, then face to the right in marching, +and step off in the new direction with the right foot. + +This movement is not executed by =signal= except in =foragers=. + + +TO MARCH TO THE REAR. + +=82.= Being in march: 1. =To the rear=, 2. =MARCH.= + +At the command =march=, given as the right foot strikes the ground, +advance and plant the left foot, turn to the right-about on the balls +of both feet, and immediately step off with the left foot. + +If marching in double time, turn to the right-about, taking four steps +in place, keeping the cadence, and then step off with the left foot. + +This movement is not executed by =signal= except in =foragers=. + + +CHANGE STEP. + +=83.= Being in march: 1. =Change step=, 2. =MARCH.= + +At the command =march=, given as the right, foot, strikes the ground, +advance and plant the left foot, plant the toe of the right foot near +the heel of the left, and step off with the left foot. + +The change on the right foot is similarly executed, the command +=MARCH= being given as the left foot strikes the ground. + + +TO COUNT FOURS. + +=84.= Being in line, at the command, =COUNT FOURS=, all the troopers +in the rank except the right trooper execute =eyes right= and, +beginning on the right, count successively =1=, =2=, =3=, =4=. Each +turns his head and eyes to the front as he counts. + +Fours may be counted at the halt or marching, mounted or dismounted, +in line or in column of twos or troopers. In counting fours in column +of twos or troopers the elements count off successively from front to +rear in the column and from right to left in each two. =Eyes right= is +not executed when counting fours from column of twos or troopers. + + +TO TAKE INTERVALS AND DISTANCES. + +=85.= Being in line at a halt: 1. =Take intervals, to the right +(left)=, 2. =MARCH=, 3. =Squad=, 4. =HALT.= + +At the command =march=, all face to the right and the leading trooper +steps off; the other men step off in succession, each following the +preceding trooper at four paces. + +At the command =halt=, given when all have their intervals, all halt +and face to the front. + +=86.= Being at intervals, to assemble the squad: 1. =Assemble to the +right (left)=, 2. =MARCH.= The trooper on the right stands fast. The +other troopers face to the right, close by the shortest line and face +to the front. + +=87.= Being in line at a halt and fours having been counted: 1. =Take +distance=, 2. =MARCH=, 3. =Squad=, 4. =HALT.= + +At the command =march=, No. 1 moves straight to the front; Nos. 2, 3, +and 4 in the order named, move straight to the front, each stepping +off so as to follow the preceding man at 4 paces. The command halt is +given when all have their distances. + +If there be more than one No. 1, all the Nos. 1 move forward together, +guiding on the right trooper. The same principle applies to the other +numbers. + +=88.= The normal interval and distance of 4 paces indicated, +respectively, in pars. 34 and 36, may be increased or diminished by +adding to the corresponding preparatory command the indication of the +interval or distance desired; thus: 1. =Take interval to the right at +1 pace=, 2. =MARCH=, etc.; 1. =Take distance, at 2 paces=, 2. =MARCH=, +etc. + +=89.= Being at distances, to assemble the squad: 1. =Assemble=, 2. +=MARCH.= + +No. 1 of the front rank stands fast; the other numbers move forward to +their proper places in line. + + +INDIVIDUAL INSTRUCTION WITH ARMS. + +MANUAL OF THE RIFLE. + +=90.= When the recruit has made fair progress in the instruction +without arms, including that required by par. 53, he is taught the +manual of arms. Instruction without arms and that with arms alternate. + +=91.= The following rules govern the carrying of the rifle: + +=First.= The rifle is not carried with cartridges in either the +chamber or the magazine except when specifically ordered. When so +loaded, or supposed to be loaded, it is habitually carried locked; +that is, with the =safety lock= turned to the "safe." At all other +times it is carried unlocked, with the trigger pulled. + +=Second.= Whenever troops are formed under arms, rifles are +immediately inspected at the commands: 1. =Inspection=, 2. =ARMS=; 3. +=Order (right shoulder, port)=, 4. =ARMS.= + +A. similar inspection is made immediately before dismissal. + +If cartridges are found in the chamber or magazine they are removed +and placed in the belt. + +=Third.= The cut-off is kept turned "off" except when cartridges are +actually used. + +=Fourth.= =Fall in= is executed with the rifle at the order arms. +=Fall out=, =rest=, and =at ease= are executed as without arms. On +resuming =attention= the position of order arms is taken. + +=Fifth.= If at the order, unless otherwise prescribed, the rifle is +brought to the right shoulder at the command =march=, the three +motions corresponding with the first three steps. Movements may be +executed at =the trail= by prefacing the preparatory command with the +words =at trail=, as, 1. =At trail=, =forward=, 2. =MARCH=; the trail +is taken at the command =march=. + +When the facings, alignments, open and close ranks, taking interval, +and assemblings are executed from the order, raise the rifle to the +trail while in motion and resume the order on halting. + +=Sixth.= The rifle is brought to the order on halting. The execution +of the order begins when the halt is completed. + +=Seventh.= A disengaged hand in double time is held as when without +arms. + +=92.= The following rules govern the execution of the manual of arms: + +=First.= In all positions of the left hand at the balance (center of +gravity) the thumb clasps the rifle; the sling is included in the +grasp of the hand. (Figs. 6, 12.) + +=Second.= In all positions of the rifle "diagonally across the body" +the position of the rifle, left arm, and hand are the same as in port +arms. (Fig. 6.) + +=Third.= In resuming the order from any position in the manual, the +motion next to the last concludes with the butt of the rifle about 3 +inches from the ground, barrel to the rear, the left hand above and +near the right, steadying the rifle, fingers extended and joined, +forearm and wrist straight and inclining downward, all fingers of the +right hand grasping the rifle. To complete the order, lower the rifle +gently to the ground with the right hand, drop the left quickly by the +side, and take the position of order arms. (Fig. 2.) + +Allowing the rifle to drop through the right hand to the ground, or +other similar abuse of the arm to produce effect in executing the +manual, is prohibited. + +=Fourth.= The cadence of the motions is that of quick time; the +recruits are first required to give their whole attention to the +details of the motions, the cadence being gradually acquired as they +become accustomed to handling their rifles. + +=Fifth.= The manual is taught at a halt and the movements are for the +purpose of instruction, divided into motions and executed in detail; +in this case the command of =execution= determines the prompt +execution of the first motion, and the commands, =two=, =three=, +=four=, that of the other motions. + +To execute the movements in detail, the instructor first cautions: =By +the numbers=; all movement divided into motions are then executed as +above explained until he cautions: =Without the numbers=; or commands +movements other than those in the manual of arms. + +=Sixth.= Whenever circumstances require, the regular positions of the +manual of arms and the firings may be ordered without regard to the +previous position of the rifle. + +Under exceptional conditions of weather or fatigue the rifle may be +carried in any manner directed. + +[Illustration: FIG. 2, par. 92.] + +[Illustration: FIG. 3, par. 93.] + +[Illustration: FIG. 4, par. 93.] + +=93.= =Position of order arms, standing=: The butt rests evenly on the +ground, barrel to the rear, toe of the butt on a line with toe of, and +touching, the right shoe, arms and hands hanging naturally, right hand +holding the rifle between the thumb and fingers. + +=94.= =Being at order arms=: 1. =Present=, 2. =ARMS.= + +With the right hand carry the rifle in front of the center of the +body, barrel to the rear and vertical, grasp it with the left hand at +the balance, forearm horizontal and resting against the body. (=TWO=) +Grasp the small of the stock with the right hand. (Fig. 5.) + +[Illustration: FIG. 5, par. 94.] + +=95.= =Being at order arms=: 1. =Port=, 2. =ARMS.= + +With the right hand raise and throw the rifle diagonally across the +body, grasp it smartly with both hands; the right, palm down, at the +small of the stock; the left, palm up, at the balance; barrel up, +sloping to the left and crossing opposite the junction of the neck +with the left shoulder; right forearm horizontal; left forearm resting +against the body; the rifle in a vertical plane parallel to the front. +(Fig. 6.) + +[Illustration: FIG. 6, par. 95.] + +=96.= =Being at present arms=: 1. =Port=, 2. =ARMS.= + +Carry the rifle diagonally across the body and take the position of +port arms. + +=97.= =Being at port arms=: 1. =Present=, 2. =ARMS.= + +Carry the rifle to a vertical position in front of the center of the +body and take the position of present arms. + +=98.= =Being at present or port arms=: 1. =Order=, 2. =ARMS.= + +Let go with the right hand; lower and carry the rifle to the right +with the left hand; regrasp it with the right hand just above the +lower band; let go with the left hand, and take the next to the last +position in coming to the order. (=TWO=) Complete the order. + +=99.= =Being at order arms=: 1. =Right shoulder=, 2. =ARMS.= + +With the right hand raise and throw the rifle diagonally across the +body; carry the right hand quickly to the butt, embracing it, the heel +between the first two fingers. (=TWO=) Without changing the grasp of +the right hand, place the rifle on the right shoulder, barrel up and +inclined at an angle of about 45 deg. from the horizontal, trigger guard +in the hollow of the shoulder, right elbow near the side, the rifle in +a vertical plane perpendicular to the front; carry the left hand, +thumb, and fingers extended and joined, to the small of the stock, tip +of the forefinger touching the cocking piece, wrist straight and elbow +down. (=THREE=) Drop the left hand by the side. (Fig. 7.) + +[Illustration: FIG. 7, par. 99.] + +=100.= =Being at right shoulder arms=: 1. =Order=, 2. =ARMS.= + +Press the butt down quickly and throw the rifle diagonally across the +body, the right hand retaining the grasp of the butt. (=TWO=), +(=THREE=) Execute order arms as described from port arms. + +=101.= =Being at port arms=: 1. =Right shoulder=, 2. =ARMS.= + +Change the right hand to the butt. (=TWO=), (=THREE=) As in right +shoulder arms from =order arms=. + +=102.= =Being at right shoulder arms=: 1. =Port=, 2. =ARMS.= + +Press the butt down quickly and throw the rifle diagonally across the +body, the right hand retaining its grasp of the butt. (=TWO=) Change +the right hand to the small of the stock. + +=103.= =Being at right shoulder arms=: 1. =Present=, 2. =ARMS.= + +Execute port arms. (=THREE=) Execute present arms. + +=104.= =Being at present arms=: 1. =Right shoulder=, 2. =ARMS.= + +Execute port arms. (=TWO=), (=THREE=), (=FOUR=). Execute right +shoulder arms as from port arms. + +=105.= =Being at port arms=: 1. =Left shoulder=, 2. =ARMS.= + +Carry the rifle with the right hand and place it on the left shoulder, +barrel up, trigger guard in the hollow of the shoulder; at the same +time grasp the butt with the left hand, heel between first and second +fingers, thumb and fingers closed on the stock. (=TWO=) Drop the right +hand by the side. + +=Left shoulder arms= may be ordered directly from the order, right +shoulder, or present, or the reverse. At the command =Arms= execute +=port arms= and continue in cadence to the position ordered. + +=106.= =Being at left shoulder arms=: 1. =Port=, 2. =ARMS.= + +Grasp the rifle with the right hand at the small of the stock. (=TWO=) +Carry the rifle to the right with the right hand, regrasp it with the +left and take the position of port arms. + +=107.= =Being at order arms=: 1. =Parade=, 2. =REST.= + +Carry the right foot 6 inches straight to the rear, left knee slightly +bent; carry the muzzle In front of the center of the body, barrel to +the left; grasp the rifle with the left hand just below the stacking +swivel and with the right hand below and against the left. (Fig. 8.) + +=Being at parade rest=: 1. =Squad=, 2. =ATTENTION.= + +Resume the order, the left hand quitting the rifle opposite the right +hip. + +[Illustration: FIG. 8, par. 107.] + +=108.= =Being at order arms.= 1. =Trail=, 2. =ARMS.= + +Raise the rifle, right arm slightly bent, and incline the muzzle +forward so that the barrel makes an angle of about 30 deg. with the +vertical. (Fig. 9.) + +When it can be done without danger or inconvenience to others, the +rifle may be grasped at the balance and muzzle lowered until the rifle +is horizontal; a similar position in the left hand may be used. + +[Illustration: FIG. 9, par. 108.] + +=109.= =Being at trail arms=: 1. =Order=, 2. =ARMS.= + +Lower the rifle with the right hand and resume the order. + + +RIFLE SALUTE. + +=110.= =Being at right shoulder arms=: 1. =Rifle=, 2. =SALUTE.= + +Carry the left hand smartly to the small of the stock, forearm +horizontal, palm of the hand down, thumb and fingers extended and +joined, forefinger touching end of cocking piece; look toward the +person saluted. (=TWO=) Drop left hand by the side; turn head and eyes +to the front. (Fig. 10.) + +With the rifle on the left shoulder, the salute is rendered in a +corresponding manner with the right hand. + +[Illustration: FIG. 10, par. 110.] + +=111.= =Being at order or trail arms=: 1. =Rifle=, 2. =SALUTE.= + +Carry the left hand smartly to the right side, palm of the hand down, +thumb and fingers extended and joined, forefinger against the rifle +near the muzzle; look toward the person saluted. (=TWO=) Drop the left +hand by the side; turn the head and eyes to the front. (Fig. 11.) + +[Illustration: FIG. 11, par. 111.] + + +THE INSPECTION. + +=112.= =Being at order arms=: 1. =Inspection=, 2. =ARMS.= + +At the second command, take the position of port arms. (=TWO=) Seize +the bolt handle with the thumb and forefinger of the right hand, turn +the handle up, draw the bolt back and glance at the chamber. Having +found the chamber empty, or having emptied it, raise the head and eyes +to the front. (Fig. 12.) + +[Illustration: FIG. 12, par. 112.] + +=113.= =Being at inspection arms=: 1. =Order (right shoulder, port)=, +2. =ARMS.= + +At the preparatory command, push the bolt forward, turn the handle +down, pull the trigger, and resume port arms. At the command arms +complete the movement ordered. + + +TO DISMISS. + +=114.= =Being at halt=: 1. =Inspection=, 2. =ARMS=, 3. =Port=, 4. +=ARMS=, 5. =DISMISSED.= + + +TO STACK AND TAKE ARMS. + +=115.= Three rifles only are used to make a stack; rifles not so used +are, in this connection, termed loose rifles. + +=Being in line at a halt=: =STACK ARMS.= + +=At the command stack=, No. 3 steps back and covers No. 2, No. 2 +raises his rifle with the right hand, grasps it with the left at the +upper band and rests the butt between his feet, barrel to the front, +muzzle inclined slightly to the front and opposite the center of the +interval on his right, the thumb and forefinger raising the stacking +swivel; No. 3 then passes his rifle, barrel to the rear, to No. 2, who +grasps it between the bands with his right hand and throws the butt +about 2 feet in advance of that of his own rifle and opposite the +right of the interval, the right hand slipping to the upper band, the +thumb and forefinger raising the stacking swivel, which he engages +with that of his own rifle; No. 1 raises his rifle with the right +hand, carries it well forward, barrel to the front, the left hand +guiding the stacking swivel, engages the lower hook of the swivel of +his own rifle with the free hook of that of No. 3; he then turns the +barrel outward into the angle formed by the other two rifles and +lowers the butt to the ground to the right of and against the toe of +his right shoe. No. 2 lays loose rifles on the stack; No. 3 resumes +his place in line. When each man has finished handling rifles, he +takes the position of attention. The instructor may then rest or +dismiss the squad, leaving the arms stacked. + +On re-forming, the men take their places in rear of the stacks. + +=116.= =Being in line, behind the stacks: TAKE ARMS.= + +No. 3 steps back and covers No. 2; No. 2 returns the loose rifles, +then grasps his own rifle with the left hand, the rifle of No. 3 with +his right hand, grasping both between the bands; No. 1 grasps his +rifle in the same way with the right hand. No. 1 disengages his rifle +by raising the butt from the ground and then turning the rifle to the +right, detaches it from the stack; No. 2 disengages and detaches his +rifle by turning it to the left, and then passes the rifle of No. 3 to +him; No. 3 resumes his place in line; all resume the order. + + +KNEELING AND LYING DOWN. + +=117.= If standing: =KNEEL=. + +Half face to the right; carry the right toe about 1 foot to the left +rear of the left heel; kneel on the right knee, sitting as nearly as +possible on the right heel; left forearm across left thigh; rifle +remains in position of order arms, right hand grasping it above the +lower band. This is the position of =order arms=, kneeling. (Fig. 13.) + +[Illustration: FIG. 13, par. 117.] + +=118.= If standing or kneeling: =LIE DOWN=. + +Kneel, but with right knee against left heel; carry back the left foot +and lie flat on the belly, inclining body about 35 deg. to the right; +rifle horizontal, barrel up, muzzle off the ground and pointed to the +front; elbows on the ground; left hand at the balance, right hand +grasping the small of the stock opposite the neck. This is the +position of =order arms=, lying down. (Fig. 14.) + +[Illustration: FIG. 14, par. 118.] + +=119.= If kneeling or lying down: =RISE=. + +If kneeling, stand up, faced to the front, on the ground marked by the +left heel. + +If lying down, raise the body on both knees; stand up, faced to the +front, on the ground marked by the knees. + +=120.= If lying down: =KNEEL=. + +Raise the body on both knees, take the position of kneel. When +deployed as skirmishers, a sitting position may be taken instead of +the position kneeling. + + +II. INSTRUCTION WITH THE RIFLE. + +=23.= The commands for and the execution of the foot movements are the +same as already given for movements without the rifle. + +=24.= The men having taken intervals or distances, the instructor +commands: + +1. =Bayonet exercise=, 2. =GUARD=. + +At the second command take the position of guard (see par. 15); at the +game time throw the rifle smartly to the front, grasp the rifle with +the left hand just below the lower hand, fingers between the stock and +gun sling, barrel turned slightly to the left, the right hand grasping +the small of the stock about 6 inches in front of the right hip, +elbows free from the body, bayonet point at the height of the chin. + +[Illustration: FIG. 15, par. 24.] + +=25.= 1. =Order=, 2. =ARMS=. + +Bring the right foot up to the left and the rifle to the position of +order arms, at the same time resuming the position of attention. + +=26.= During the preliminary instruction, attacks and defenses will be +executed from guard until proficiency is attained, after which they +may be executed from any position in which the rifle is held. + + +ATTACKS. + +=27.= 1. =THRUST=. + +Thrust the rifle quickly forward to the full length of the left arm, +turning the barrel to the left, and direct the point of the bayonet at +the point to be attacked, but covering the right forearm. At the same +time straighten the right leg vigorously and throw the weight of the +body forward and on the left leg, the ball of the right foot always on +the ground. Guard is resumed immediately without command. + +The force of the thrust is delivered principally with the right arm, +the left being used to direct the bayonet. The points at which the +attack should be directed are, in order of their importance, stomach, +chest, head, neck, and limbs. + +[Illustration: FIG. 16, par. 27.] + +=28.= =1. LUNGE.= + +Executed in the same manner as the thrust, except that the left foot +is carried forward about twice its length. The left heel must always +be in rear of the left knee. Guard is resumed immediately without +command. Guard may also be resumed by advancing the right foot if for +any reason it is desired to hold the ground gained in lunging. In the +latter case the preparatory command forward will be given. Each method +should be practiced. + +[Illustration: FIG. 18, par. 28.] + +=29.= 1. =Butt=, 2. =STRIKE.= + +Straighten right arm and right leg vigorously and swing butt of rifle +against point of attack, pivoting the rifle in the left hand at about +the height of the left shoulder, allowing the bayonet to pass to the +rear on the left side of the head. Guard is resumed without command. + +The points of attack in their order of importance are head, neck, +stomach, and crotch. + +[Illustration: FIG. 17, par. 29.] + +=30.= 1. =Cut=, 2. =DOWN.= + +Execute a quick downward stroke, edge of bayonet directed at point of +attack. Guard is resumed without command. + +[Illustration: Par. 19.] + +[Illustration: Par. 20.] + +=31.= 1. =Cut=, 2. =RIGHT (LEFT).= + +With a quick extension of the arms execute a cut to the right (left), +directing the edge toward the point attacked. Guard is resumed without +command. + +The cuts are especially useful against the head, neck, and hands of an +enemy. In executing left cut it should be remembered that the false, +or back, edge is only 5.6 inches long. The cuts can be executed in +continuation of strokes, thrusts, lunges, and parries. + +=32.= To direct an attack to the right, left, or rear the soldier will +change front as quickly as possible in the most convenient manner, for +example: 1. =To the right rear=, 2. =Cut=, 3. =DOWN=; 1. =To the +right=, 2. =LUNGE=; 1. =To the left=, 2. =THRUST=, etc. + +Whenever possible the impetus gained by the turning movement of the +body should be thrown into the attack. In general this will be best +accomplished by turning on the ball of the right foot. + +These movements constitute a change of front in which the position of +guard is resumed at the completion of the movement. + +=33.= Good judgment of distance is essential. Accuracy in thrusting +and lunging is best attained by practicing these attacks against rings +or other convenient openings, about 3 inches in diameter, suitably +suspended at desired heights. + +=34.= The thrust and lunges at rings should first be practiced by +endeavoring to hit the opening looked at. This should be followed by +directing the attack against one opening while looking at another. + +=35.= The soldier should also experience the effect of actual +resistance offered to the bayonet and the butt of the rifle in +attacks. This will be taught by practicing attacks against a dummy. + +=36.= Dummies should be constructed in such a manner as to permit the +execution of attacks without injury to the point or edge of the +bayonet or to the barrel or stock of the rifle. A suitable dummy can +be made from pieces of rope about 5 feet in length plaited closely +together into a cable between 6 and 12 inches in diameter. Old rope is +preferable. Bags weighted and stuffed with hay, straw, shavings, etc., +are also suitable. + + +DEFENSES. + +=37.= In the preliminary drills in the defenses the position of guard +is resumed, by command, after each parry. When the men have become +proficient the instructor will cause them to resume the position of +guard instantly without command after the execution of each parry. + +=38.= 1. =Parry=, 2. =RIGHT.= + +Keeping the right hand in the guard position, move the rifle sharply +to the right with the left arm, so that the bayonet point is about 6 +inches to the right. + +=39.= 1. =Parry=, 2. =LEFT.= + +Move the rifle sharply to the left front with both hands so as to +cover the point attacked. + +=40.= 1. =Parry=, 2. =HIGH.= + +Raise the rifle with both hands high enough to clear the line of +vision, barrel downward, point of the bayonet to the left front. + +When necessary to raise the rifle well above the head, it may be +supported between the thumb and forefinger of the left hand. This +position will be necessary against attacks from higher elevations, +such as men mounted or on top of parapets. + +[Illustration: FIG. 21, par. 40.] + +=41.= 1. =Low parry=, 2. =RIGHT (LEFT).= Carry the point of the +bayonet down until it is at the height of the knee, moving the point +of the bayonet sufficiently to the right (left), to keep the +opponent's attacks clear of the point threatened. + +These parries are rarely used, as an attack below the waist leaves the +head and body exposed. + +[Illustration: FIG. 22, par. 41.] + +[Illustration: FIG. 23, par. 41.] + +=42.= Parries must not be too wide or sweeping, but sharp, short +motions, finished with a jerk or quick catch. The hands should, as far +as possible, be kept in the line of attack. Parries against butt +strike are made by quickly moving the guard so as to cover the point +attacked. + +=43.= To provide against attack from the right, left, or rear the +soldier will change front as quickly as possible in the most +convenient manner; for example: 1. =To the left rear=, 2. =Parry=, 3. +=HIGH=; 1. =To the right=, 2. =Parry=, 3. =RIGHT=, etc. + +These movements constitute a change of front in which the position of +guard is resumed at the completion of the movement. + +In changing front for the purpose of attack or defense, if there is +danger of wounding a comrade, the rifle should first be brought to a +vertical position. + + +III. INSTRUCTION WITHOUT THE BAYONET. + +=44.= 1. =Club rifle=, 2. =SWING.= + +Being at order arms, at the preparatory command quickly raise and turn +the rifle, regrasping it with both hands between the rear sight and +muzzle, barrel down, thumbs around the stock and toward the butt; at +the same time raise the rifle above the shoulder farthest from the +opponent, butt elevated and to the rear, elbows slightly bent and +knees straight. Each individual takes such position of the feet, +shoulders, and hands as best accords with his natural dexterity. +=SWING.= Tighten the grasp Of the hands and swing the rifle to the +front and downward, directing it at the head of the opponent, and +immediately return to the position of club rifle by completing the +swing of the rifle downward and to the rear. Repeat by the command, +=SWING=. + +The rifle should be swung with sufficient force to break through any +guard or parry that may be interposed. + +Being at club rifle, order arms is resumed by command. + +The use of this attack against dummies or in fencing is prohibited. + +[Illustration: FIG. 24, par. 44.] + +[Illustration: FIG. 25, par. 44.] + +=45.= The position of =club rifle= may be taken from any position of +the rifle prescribed in the Manual of Arms. It will not be taken in +personal combat unless the emergency is such as to preclude the use of +the bayonet. + + +IV. COMBINED MOVEMENTS. + +=46.= The purpose of combined movements is to develop more vigorous +attacks and more effective defenses than are obtained, by the single +movements; to develop skill in passing from attack to defense and the +reverse. Every movement to the front should be accompanied by an +attack, which is increased in effectiveness by the forward movement of +the body. Every movement to the rear should ordinarily be accompanied +by a parry and should always be followed by an attack. Movements to +the right or left may be accompanied by attacks or defenses. + +=47.= Not more than three movements will be used in any combination. +The instructor should first indicate the number of movements that are +to be combined as =two movements= or =three movements=. The execution +is, determined by one command of execution, and the position of guard +is taken upon the completion of the last movement only. + + +EXAMPLES. + + =Front pass and LUNGE.= + =Right step and THRUST.= + =Left step and low parry RIGHT.= + =Rear pass, parry left and LUNGE.= + =Lunge and cut RIGHT.= + =Parry right and parry HIGH.= + =Butt strike and cut DOWN.= + =Thrust and parry HIGH.= + =Parry high and LUNGE.= + =Advance, thrust and cut RIGHT.= + =Right step, parry left and cut DOWN.= + =To the left, butt strike and cut DOWN.= + =To the right rear, cut down and butt STRIKE.= + +=48.= Attacks against dummies will be practiced. The approach will be +made against the dummies both in quick time and double time. + + +V. PRACTICAL BAYONET COMBAT. + +=49.= The principles of practical bayonet combat should be taught as +far as possible during the progress of instruction in bayonet +exercises. + +=50.= The soldier must be continually impressed with the extreme +importance of the offensive due to its moral effect. Should an attack +fail, it should be followed immediately by another attack before the +opponent has an opportunity to assume the offensive. Keep the opponent +on the defensive. If, due to circumstances, it is necessary to take +the defensive, constantly watch for an opportunity to assume the +offensive and take immediate advantage of it. + +=51.= Observe the ground with a view to obtaining the best footing. +Time for this will generally be too limited to permit more than a +single hasty glance. + +=52.= In personal combat watch the opponent's eyes if they can be +plainly seen, and do not fix the eyes on his weapon nor upon the point +of your attack. If his eyes can not be plainly seen, as in night +attacks, watch the movements of his weapon and of his body. + +=53.= Keep the body well covered and deliver attacks vigorously. The +point of the bayonet should always be kept as nearly as possible in +the line of attack. The less the rifle is moved upward, downward, to +the right, or to the left, the better prepared the soldier is for +attack or defense. + +=54.= Constantly watch for a chance to attack the opponent's left +hand. His position of guard will not differ materially from that +described in paragraph 24. If his bayonet is without a cutting edge, +he will be at a great disadvantage. + +=55.= The butt is used for close and sudden attacks. It is +particularly useful in riot duty. From the position of port arms a +sentry can strike a severe blow with the butt of the rifle. + +=56.= Against a man on foot, armed with a sword, be careful that the +muzzle of the rifle is not grasped. All the swordsman's energies will +be directed toward getting past the bayonet Attack him with short, +stabbing thrusts and keep him beyond striking distance of his weapon. + +=57.= The adversary may attempt a greater extension in the thrust and +lunge by quitting the grasp of his piece with the left hand and +advancing the right as far as possible. When this is done, a sharp +parry may cause him to lose control of his rifle, leaving him exposed +to a counter attack, which should follow promptly. + +=58.= Against odds a small number of men can fight to best advantage +by grouping themselves so as to prevent their being attacked from +behind. + +=59.= In fighting a mounted man armed with a saber every effort must +be made to get on his near, or left, side, because here his reach is +much shorter and his parries much weaker. If not possible to disable +such an enemy, attack his horse and then renew the attack on the +horseman. + +=60.= In receiving night attacks the assailant's movements can be best +observed from the kneeling or prone position, as his approach +generally brings him against the sky line. When he arrives within +attacking distance rise quickly and lunge well forward at the middle +of his body. + + +VI. FENCING EXERCISES. + +=61.= Fencing exercises in two lines consist of combinations of +thrusts, parries, and foot movements executed at command or at will, +the opponent replying with suitable parries and returns. + +=62.= The instructor will inspect the entire fencing equipment before +the exercise begins and assure himself that everything is in such +condition as will prevent accidents. + +=63.= The men equip themselves and form in two lines at the order, +facing each other, with intervals of about 4 paces between files and a +distance of about 2 paces between lines. One line is designated as +number 1; the other, number 2. Also as attack and defense. + +=64.= The opponents being at the order facing each other, the +instructor commands: =SALUTE.= + +Each man, with eyes on his opponent, carries the left hand smartly to +the right side, palm of the hand down, thumb and fingers extended and +joined, forearm horizontal, forefinger touching the bayonet. (Two.) +Drop the arm smartly by the side. + +This salute is the fencing salute. + +All fencing exercises and all fencing at will between individuals will +begin and terminate with the formal courtesy of the fencing salute. + +=65.= After the fencing salute has been rendered the instructor +commands: 1. =Fencing exercise=, 2. =GUARD.= + +At the command =guard= each man comes to the position of =guard=, +heretofore defined, bayonets crossed, each man's bayonet bearing +lightly to the right against the corresponding portion of the +opponent's bayonet. This position is known as the =engage= or =engage +right=. + +=66.= Being at the engage right: =ENGAGE LEFT.= + +The attack drops the point of his bayonet quickly until clear of his +opponent's rifle and describes a semicircle with it upward and to the +right; bayonets are crossed similarly as in the engaged position, each +man's bayonet bearing lightly to the left against the corresponding +portion of the opponent's bayonet. + +=67.= Being at engage left: =ENGAGE RIGHT.= + +The attack quickly drops the point of his bayonet until clear of his +opponent's rifle and describes a semicircle with it upward and to the +left and engages. + +=68.= Being engaged: =ENGAGE LEFT AND RIGHT=. + +The attack =engages left= and then immediately =engages right=. + +=69.= Being engaged left: =ENGAGE RIGHT AND LEFT=. + +The attack =engages right= and then immediately =engages left=. + +=70.= 1. =Number one, ENGAGE RIGHT (LEFT)=; 2. =Number two, COUNTER.= + +Number one executes the movement ordered, as above; number two quickly +drops the point of his bayonet and circles it upward to the original +position. + +=71.= In all fencing while maintaining the pressure in the engage a +certain freedom of motion of the rifle is allowable, consisting of the +play, or up-and-down motion, of one bayonet against the other. This +is necessary to prevent the opponent from divining the intended +attack. It also prevents his using the point of contact as a pivot for +his assaults. In changing from one engage to the other the movement is +controlled by the left hand, the right remaining stationary. + +=72.= After some exercise in engage, engage left, and counter, +exercises will be given in the assaults. + + +ASSAULTS. + +=73.= The part of the body to be attacked will be designated by name, +as head, neck, chest, stomach, legs. No attacks will be made below the +knees. The commands are given and the movements for each line are +first explained thoroughly by the instructor; the execution begins at +the command assault. Number one executes the attack, and number two +parries; conversely, at command, number two attacks and number one +parries. + +=74.= For convenience in instruction assaults are divided into =simple +attacks=, =counter attacks=, =attacks on the rifle=, and =feints=. + + +SIMPLE ATTACKS. + +=75.= Success in these attacks depends on quickness of movement. There +are three simple attacks--the =straight=, the =disengagement=, and the +=counter disengagement=. They are not preceded by a feint. + +=76.= In the =straight= the bayonet is directed straight at an opening +from the engaged position. Contact with the opponent's rifle may or +may not be abandoned while making it. If the opening be high or low, +contact with the rifle will usually be abandoned on commencing the +attack. If the opening be near his guard, the light pressure used in +the engage may be continued in the attack. + +Example: Being at the =engage right=, 1. =Number one, at neck= (head, +chest, right leg, etc.), =thrust=; 2. =Number two, parry right=; 3. +=ASSAULT.= + +=77.= In the =disengagement= contact with the opponent's rifle is +abandoned and the point of the bayonet is circled under or over his +bayonet or rifle and directed into the opening attacked. This attack +is delivered by one continuous spiral movement of the bayonet from the +moment contact is abandoned. + +Example: Being at the =engage right=, 1. =Number one, at stomach= +(left chest, left leg, etc.), =thrust=; 2. =Number two, parry left= +(etc.); 3. =ASSAULT.= + +=78.= In the =counter disengagement= a swift attack is made into the +opening disclosed while the opponent is attempting to change the +engagement of his rifle. It is delivered by one continuous spiral +movement of the bayonet into the opening. + +Example: Being at the =engage right=, 1. =Number two, engage left=; 2. +=Number one, at chest, thrust=; 3. =Number two, parry left=; 4. +=ASSAULT.= + +Number two initiates the movement, number one thrusts as soon as the +opening is made, and number two then attempts to parry. + +=79.= A =counter attack= or =return= is one made instantly after or in +continuation of a parry. The parry should be as narrow as possible. +This makes it more difficult for the opponent to recover and counter +parry. The counter attack should also be made at or just before the +full extension of the opponent's attack, as when it is so made a +simple extension of the arms will generally be sufficient to reach the +opponent's body. + +Example: Being at =engage=, 1. =Number two, at chest, lunge=; 2. +=Number one, parry right=, and at stomach (chest, head, etc.), +=thrust=; 3. =ASSAULT.= + + +ATTACKS ON THE RIFLE. + +=80.= These movements are made for the purpose of forcing or +disclosing an opening into which an attack can be made. They are the +=press=, the =beat=, and the =twist=. + +=81.= In the =press= the attack quickly presses against the opponent's +bayonet or rifle with his own and continues the pressure as the attack +is delivered. + +Example: Being at the =engage=, 1. =Number one, press=, and at chest, +=thrust=; 2. =Number two, parry right=; 3. =ASSAULT.= + +=82.= The attack by =disengagement= is particularly effective +following the =press=. + +Example: Being at the =engage=, 1. =Number one, press=, and at +stomach, =thrust=; 2. =Number two, low parry left=; 3. =ASSAULT.= + +=83.= The =beat= is an attack in which a sharp blow, is struck against +the opponent's rifle for the purpose of forcing him to expose an +opening into which an attack immediately follows. It is used when +there is but slight opposition or no contact of rifles. + +Example: Being at the =engage=, 1. =Number one, beat=, and at stomach +(chest, etc.), =thrust=; 2. =Number two, parry left=; 3. =ASSAULT.= + +=84.= In the =twist= the rifle is crossed over the opponent's rifle or +bayonet and his bayonet forced downward with a circular motion and a +straight attack made into the opening. It requires superior strength +on the part of the attack. + +Example: Being at the engage, 1. =Number one, twist=, and at stomach, +=thrust=; 2. =Number two, low parry left=; 3. =ASSAULT.= + + +FEINTS. + +=85.= Feints are movements which threaten or simulate attacks and are +made with a view to inducing an opening or parry that exposes the +desired point of attack. They are either single or double, according +to the number of such movements made by the attack. + +=86.= In order that the attack may be changed quickly, as little force +as possible is put into a feint. + +Example: Being at the =engage=, 1. =Number one, feint head thrust=; at +stomach, =lunge=; 2. =Number two, parry right and low parry right=; 3. +=ASSAULT.= + +Number one executes the feint and then the attack. Number two executes +both parries. + +=87.= In double feints first one part of the body and then another is +threatened and a third attacked. + +Example: Being at the =engage=, 1. =Number one, feint straight thrust= +at chest; =disengagement= at chest; at stomach, =lunge=; 2. =Number +two, parry right, parry left=, and =low parry left=; 3. =ASSAULT.= + +=88.= An opening may be offered or procured by opposition, as in the +=press= or =beat=. + +=89.= In fencing exercises every feint should at first be parried. +When the defense is able to judge or divine the character of the +attack the feint is not necessarily parried, but may be nullified by a +counter feint. + +=90.= A =counter feint= is a feint following the opponent's feint or +following a parry of his attack and generally occurs in combined +movements. + + +COMBINED MOVEMENTS. + +=91.= When the men have become thoroughly familiar with the various +foot movements, parries, guards, attacks, feints, etc., the instructor +combines several of them and gives the commands in quick succession, +increasing the rapidity and number of movements as the men become more +skillful. Opponents will be changed frequently. + +1. Example: Being at the =engage=, 1. =Number one, by disengagement= +at chest, =thrust=; 2. =Number two, parry left, right step= (left foot +first), and =lunge=; 3. =ASSAULT.= + +2. Example: Being at =engage left=, 1. =Number one, press and lunge=; +2. =Number two, parry right, left step=, and =thrust=; 3. =ASSAULT.= + +3. Example: Being at the =engage=, 1. =Number one, by disengagement= +at chest, =thrust=; 2. =Number two, parry left, front pass=, and at +head =butt strike=; 3. =Number one, right step=; 4. =ASSAULT.= + +=92.= Examples 1 and 2 are typical of movements known as =cross +counters=, and example No. 3 of movements known as =close counters=. + +=93.= A =chancery= is an attack by means of which the opponent is +disarmed, which causes him to lose control of his rifle, or which +disables his weapon. + +=94.= When the different combinations are executed with sufficient +skill the instructor will devise series of movements to be memorized +and executed at the command =assault=. The accuracy and celerity of +the movements will be carefully watched by the instructor, with a view +to the correction of faulty execution. + +=95.= It is not intended to restrict the number of movements, but to +leave to the discretion of company commanders and the ingenuity of +instructors the selection of such other exercises as accord with the +object of the drill. + + +VII. FENCING AT WILL. + +=96.= As satisfactory progress is made the instructor will proceed to +the exercises at will, by which is meant assaults between two men, +each endeavoring to hit the other and to avoid being hit himself. +Fencing at will should not be allowed to degenerate into random +attacks and defenses. + +=97.= The instructor can supervise but one pair of combatants at a +time. Frequent changes should be made so that the men may learn +different methods of attack and defense from each other. + +=98.= The contest should begin with simple, careful movements, with a +view to forming a correct opinion of the adversary; afterwards +everything will depend on coolness, rapid and correct execution of the +movements, and quick perception of the adversary's intentions. + +=99.= Continual retreat from the adversary's attack and frequent +dodging to escape attacks should be avoided. The offensive should be +continually encouraged. + +=100.= In fencing at will, when no commands are given, opponents +facing each other at the position of order arms, =salute=. They then +immediately and simultaneously assume the position of guard, rifles +engaged. Neither man may take the position of guard before his +opponent has completed his salute. The choice of position is decided +before the salute. + +=101.= The opponents being about two paces apart and the fencing +salute having been rendered, the instructor commands, 1. =At will=, 2. +=ASSAULT=, after which either party has the right to attack. To +interrupt the contest the instructor will command, =HALT=, at which +the combatants will immediately come to the order. To terminate the +contest, the instructor will command, 1. =Halt=, 2. =SALUTE=, at which +the combatants will immediately come to the order, salute, and remove +their masks. + +=102.= When men have acquired confidence in fencing at will, one +opponent should be required to advance upon the other in quick time at +charge bayonet, from a distance not to exceed 10 yards, and deliver an +attack. As soon as a hit is made by either opponent the instructor +commands, =HALT=, and the assault terminates. Opponents alternate in +assaulting. The assailant is likewise required to advance at double +time from a distance not exceeding 20 yards and at a run from a +distance not exceeding 30 yards. + +=103.= The instructor will closely observe the contest and decide +doubtful points. He will at once stop the contest upon the slightest +indication of temper. After conclusion of the combat he will comment +on the action of both parties, point out errors and deficiencies, and +explain how they may be avoided in the future. + +=104.= As additional instruction, the men may be permitted to wield +the rifle left handed--that is, on the left side of the body, left +hand at the small of the stock. Many men will be able to use this +method to advantage. It is also of value in case the left hand is +wounded. + +[Illustration: FIG. 26, par. 104.] + +=105.= After men have fenced in pairs, practice should be given in +fencing between groups, equally and unequally divided. When +practicable, intrenchments will be used in fencing of this character. + +In group fencing it will be necessary to have a sufficient number of +umpires to decide hits. An individual receiving a hit is withdrawn at +once from the bout, which is decided in favor of the group having the +numerical superiority at the end. The fencing salute is not required +in group fencing. + + +RULES FOR FENCING AT WILL. + +=106.= 1. Hits on the legs below the knees will not be counted. No hit +counts unless, in the opinion of the instructor, it has sufficient +force to disable. + +2. Upon receiving a hit, call out "hit." + +3. After receiving a fair hit a counter attack is not permitted. A +position of engage is taken. + +4. A second or third hit in a combined attack will be counted only +when the first hit was not called. + +5. When it is necessary to stop the contest--for example, because of +breaking of weapons or displacement of means of protection--take the +position of the order. + +6. When it is necessary to suspend the assault for any cause, it will +not be resumed until the adversary is ready and in condition to defend +himself. + +7. Attacks directed at the crotch are prohibited in fencing. + +8. Stepping out of bounds, when established, counts as a hit. + + +SUGGESTIONS FOR FENCING AT WILL. + +=107.= When engaging in an assault, first study the adversary's +position and proceed by false attacks, executed with speed, to +discover, if possible, his instinctive parries. In order to draw the +adversary out and induce him to expose that part of the body at which +the attack is to be made, it is advisable to simulate an attack by a +feint and then make the real attack. + +=108.= Return attacks should be frequently practiced, as they are +difficult to parry, and the opponent is within easier reach and more +exposed. The return can be made a continuation of the parry, as there +is no previous warning of its delivery, although it should always be +expected. Returns are made, without lunging if the adversary can be +reached by thrusts or cuts. + +=109.= Endeavor to overcome the tendency to make a return without +knowing where it will hit. Making returns blindly is a bad habit and +leads to instinctive returns--that is, habitual returns with certain +attacks from certain parries--a fault which the skilled opponent will +soon discover. + +=110.= Do not draw the rifle back preparatory to thrusting and +lunging. + +=111.= The purpose of fencing at will is to teach the soldier as many +forms of simple, effective attacks and defenses as possible. +Complicated and intricate movements should not be attempted. + + +HINTS FOR INSTRUCTORS. + +=112.= The influence of the instructor is great. He must be master of +his weapon, not only to show the various movements but also to lead in +the exercises at will. He should stimulate the zeal of the men and +arouse pleasure in the work. Officers should qualify themselves as +instructors by fencing with each other. + +=113.= The character of each man, his bodily conformation, and his +degree of skill must always be taken into account. When the instructor +is demonstrating the combinations, feints returns, and parries the +rapidity of his attack should be regulated by the skill of the pupil, +and no more force than is necessary should be used. If the pupil +exposes himself too much in the feints and parries, the instructor +will, by an attack, convince him of his error; but if these returns be +too swiftly or too strongly made the pupil will become overcautious +and the precision of his attack will be impaired. The object is to +teach the pupil, not to give exhibitions of superior skill. + +=114.= Occasionally the instructor should leave himself uncovered and +fail to parry, in order to teach the pupil to take quick advantage of +such opportunities. + + +SUGGESTIONS. + +Instruction in bayonet exercise and bayonet fencing should be +conducted with a view to teaching the aggressive use of the bayonet. +Unless troops are so thoroughly trained with the bayonet that they +believe that with it they are superior to their opponents it will be +difficult or impossible to develop that morale which is necessary for +a successful assault. Men should be impressed with the importance of +acting always on the offensive in bayonet combat, of pushing their +attack with all their might. Troops which are successful in their +first few bayonet encounters will seldom thereafter be called upon to +use the bayonet--their opponents will not await the assault. + + +LOADINGS AND FIRINGS. + +=121.= The commands for loading and firing are the same whether +standing, kneeling, or lying down. The firings are always executed at +a halt. + +The instruction in firing will be preceded by a command for loading. + +Loadings are executed in line and skirmish line only. + +=122.= Rifles having been ordered loaded are kept loaded without +command until the command =unload= or =inspection arms=, fresh clips +being inserted when the magazine is exhausted. + +=123.= The aiming point or target is carefully pointed out. This may +be done before or after announcing the sight setting. Both are +indicated before giving the command for firing, but may be omitted +when the target appears suddenly and is unmistakable; in such cases +the battle sight is used if no sight setting is announced. The +troopers must be practiced repeatedly in locating targets, making the +appropriate sight settings, and simulating fire on the target +indicated. + +=124.= The target or aiming point having been designated and the sight +setting announced, such designation or announcement need not be +repeated until a change of either or both is necessary. + +Troops are trained to continue their fire upon the aiming point or +target designated and at the sight setting announced until a change +is ordered. + +=125.= If the men are not already in the position of load, that +position is taken at the announcement of the sight setting; if the +announcement is omitted, the position is taken at the first command +for firing. + +=126.= When deployed, the use of the sling as an aid to accurate +firing is discretionary with each man. + +=127.= The correct estimation of distances is of great importance in +connection with all rifle firing except that at short ranges. +Instruction of the recruit in this phase of training must not be +delayed until range firing is taken up, but should be begun in the +early instruction and carried forward progressively, thus gradually +developing the faculties involved. In the same way the occasional +firing of a few shots, first with blank cartridges and later with ball +cartridges at short range and under conditions permitting very careful +detailed supervision of each man's position, will be found of +exceptional value as a preliminary exercise to the course of range +firing prescribed for recruits. Detailed directions for conducting the +instruction of the recruit in estimating distances and in rifle firing +are prescribed in the =Small Arms Firing Manual=. + + +TO LOAD. + +=128.= Being in line or skirmish line at halt: 1. =With dummy (blank +or ball) cartridges=, 2. =LOAD.= + +At the command load each trooper faces half right and carries the +right foot to the right, about 1 foot, to such position as will insure +the greatest firmness and steadiness of the body, raises or lowers the +rifle and drops it into the left hand at the balance, left thumb +extended along the stock, muzzle at the height of the breast, and +turns the cut-off up. With the right hand he turns and draws the bolt +back, takes a loaded clip and inserts the end in the clip slots, +places the thumb on the powder space of the top cartridge, the +fingers extending around the rifle and tips resting on the magazine +floor plate; forces the cartridges into the magazine by pressing down +with the thumb; without removing the clip thrusts the bolt home, +turning down the handle; turns the safety lock to the "safe"; and +carries the hand to the small of the stock. + +A skirmish line may load while moving, the rifles being held as nearly +as practicable in the position of load. + +If kneeling or sitting, the position of the piece is similar; if +kneeling, the left forearm rests on the left thigh; if sitting, the +elbows are supported by the knees; if lying down, the left hand +steadies and supports the piece at the balance, the toe of the butt +resting on the ground, the muzzle off the ground. + +For reference, these positions (standing, kneeling, and lying down) +are designated as that of load. (Figs. 15, 16.) + +[Illustration: FIG. 27, par. 128.] + +[Illustration: FIG. 28, par. 128.] + +=129.= For instruction in loading: 1. =Simulate=, 2. =LOAD.= + +Executed as above described, except that the cut-off remains "off" and +the handling of cartridges is simulated. + +The recruits are first taught to simulate loading and firing; after a +few lessons dummy cartridges may be used. Later, blank cartridges may +be used. + +=130.= The rifle may be used as a single loader by turning the +magazine "off." The magazine may be filled in whole or in part while +"off" or "on" by pressing cartridges singly down and back until they +are in the proper place. The use of the rifle as a single loader is, +however, to be regarded as exceptional. + + +TO UNLOAD. + +=131.= =UNLOAD.= + +Take the position of load, turn the safety lock up and move bolt +alternately back and forward until all the cartridges are ejected. +After the last cartridge is ejected the chamber is closed by first +thrusting the bolt slightly forward to free it from the stud holding +it in place when the chamber is open, pressing the follower down and +back to engage it under the bolt, and then thrusting the bolt home; +the trigger is pulled. The cartridges are then picked up, cleaned, and +returned to the belt, and the rifle is brought to the order. + + +TO SET THE SIGHT. + +=132.= =RANGE, ELEVEN HUNDRED (EIGHT-FIFTY, ETC.), or BATTLE SIGHT.= + +The sight is set at the elevation indicated. The instructor explains +and verifies sight settings. + + +TO FIRE BY VOLLEY. + +=133.= 1. =READY=, 2. =AIM=, 3. =Squad=, 4. =FIRE.= + +At the command ready, turn the safety lock to the "ready;" at the +command aim, raise the rifle with both hands and support the butt +firmly against the hollow of the right shoulder, right thumb clasping +the stock, barrel horizontal, left elbow well under the rifle, right +elbow as high as the shoulder; incline the head slightly forward and a +little to the right, cheek against the stock, left eye closed, right +eye looking through the notch of the rear sight so as to perceive the +object aimed at, second joint of forefinger resting lightly against +the front of the trigger and taking up the slack; top of front sight +is carefully raised into, and held in, the line of sight. + +In aiming kneeling the left elbow rests on the left knee, point of +elbow in front of kneecap. In aiming sitting the elbows are supported +by the knees. + +In aiming lying down raise the rifle with both hands, rest on both +elbows and press the butt firmly against the right shoulder. + +At the command =fire=, press the finger against the trigger; fire +without deranging the aim and without lowering or turning the rifle; +lower the rifle to the position of load and load. (Figs. 17, 18, 19.) + +[Illustration: FIG. 29, par. 133.] + +[Illustration: FIG. 30, par. 133.] + +[Illustration: FIG. 31, par. 133.] + +=134.= To continue the firing: 1. =AIM=, 2. =Squad=, 3. =FIRE.= + +Each command is executed as previously explained. Load (from magazine) +is executed by drawing back and thrusting home the bolt with the right +hand, leaving the safety lock at the "ready." + + +TO FIRE AT WILL. + +=135.= =FIRE AT WILL.= + +Each man, independently of the other, comes to the =ready=, aims +carefully and deliberately at the aiming point or target, fires, +loads, and continues the firing until ordered to =suspend= or =cease +firing=. + +=136.= To increase (decrease) the rate of fire in progress the +Instructor shouts: =FASTER (SLOWER)=. + +Men are trained to fire at the rate of about three shots per minute at +effective ranges and five or six at close ranges, devoting the minimum +of time to loading and the maximum to deliberate aiming. To illustrate +the necessity for deliberation, and to habituate men to battle +conditions, small and comparatively indistinct targets are designated. + + +TO FIRE BY CLIP. + +=137.= =CLIP FIRE.= + +Executed in the same manner as fire at will, except that each man, +after having exhausted the cartridges then in the rifle, _suspends +firing_. + + +TO SUSPEND FIRING. + +=138.= The instructor blows a long blast of the whistle and repeats +same, if necessary, or commands: =SUSPEND FIRING=. + +Firing stops; rifles are held, loaded, and locked in a position of +readiness for instant resumption of firing, sights unchanged. The men +continue to observe the target or aiming point, or the place at which +the target disappeared, or at which it is expected to reappear. + +This whistle signal may be used as a preliminary to cease firing. + + +TO CEASE FIRING. + +=139.= =CEASE FIRING.= + +Firing stops; rifles not already there are brought to the position of +load, the cut-off turned down if firing from magazine, the cartridge +is drawn or the empty shell is ejected, the trigger is pulled, sights +are laid down, and the rifle is brought to the order. + +=Cease firing= is used for long pauses to prepare for changes of +position or to steady the men. + +=140.= Commands for suspending or ceasing fire may be given at any +time after the preparatory command for firing whether the firing has +actually commenced or not. + + +TARGET DESIGNATION. + +=141.= In the training of men in the mechanism of the firing line, +they should be practiced in repeating to one another target and aiming +point designations and in quickly locating and pointing out a +designated target. They should be taught to distinguish, from a prone +position, distant objects, particularly troops, both with the naked +eye and with field glasses. + +Owing to the invariable custom of attempting to conceal fire trenches, +it is necessary to have some ready method of indicating the exact +location of an indistinct pit or trench occupied or supposed to be +occupied by an enemy in order that effective fire may be opened. The +so-called clock system furnishes one of the simplest devices for so +doing. Two methods of applying this system are indicated below. + +=First method=: That in which an imaginary clock dial is assumed to be +horizontal, its center at the _firing point_ and the center-XII line +of the dial perpendicular to the front of the firing line. + +To designate a target the commander announces, for example: =Target at +11 o'clock, range 800 yards, a trench.= Each man looks along the +center-11 o'clock line of his imaginary dial, estimates the distance +(800 yards) along that line, and thereby locates the trench. + +In this method it is necessary that the target be visible to the naked +eye and that each man be able to estimate distances with fair +accuracy. + +=Second method=: That in which an imaginary clock dial is assumed to +be vertical, its center being at a prominent, distant point selected +by the commander and called the =reference point=. + +To designate a target the commander announces, for example: =Reference +point, that clump of trees on hill crest.= When the men have located +the reference point he announces: =Target at 4 o'clock, 2 finger +widths, range 1,000 yards, a gun pit.= By a finger width is meant the +distance on the face of the assumed vertical clock (actually on the +landscape) intercepted by the breadth of a man's finger held +perpendicularly to his hand and arm, the latter being fully extended +in the direction of the reference point. + +Each man looks along the center-4 o'clock line of the imaginary +(vertical) dial, measures, on this line, a point distant 2 +finger-widths from the reference point (the center of the dial), and +thus locates the gun pit. + +A combination of the two methods may be necessary when, in using the +second method, the reference point is not readily identified. Thus, in +the case mentioned, it may, for example, be necessary to say: +=Reference point at 1 o'clock, clump of trees on hill crest.= + +In both methods the sequence of commands laid down should be observed. + +Various devices for pointing out indistinct targets may be improvised +and used. + + +THE USE OF COVER. + +=142.= The recruit should be given careful instruction in the +individual use of cover. + +It should be impressed upon him that, in taking advantage of natural +cover, he must be able to fire easily and effectively upon the enemy; +if advancing on an enemy, he must do so steadily and as rapidly as +practicable, taking advantage of any available cover while setting +the sights, firing, or advancing. + +To teach him to fire easily and effectively, at the same time +concealing himself from the view of the enemy, he is practiced in +simulated firing in the prone, sitting, kneeling, and crouching +positions, from behind hillocks, trees, heaps of earth or rocks, from +depressions, gullies, ditches, doorways, or windows. He is taught to +fire around the right side of his concealment whenever practicable, +or, when this is not practicable, to rise enough to fire over the top +of his concealment. + +When these details are understood, he is required to select cover with +reference to an assumed enemy and to place himself behind it in proper +position for firing. + +=143.= The disadvantage of remaining too long in one place, however +good the concealment, should be explained. He should be taught to +advance from cover to cover, selecting cover in advance before leaving +his concealment. + +It should be impressed upon him that a man running rapidly toward an +enemy furnishes a poor target. He should be trained in springing from +a prone position behind concealment, running at top speed to cover and +throwing himself behind it. He should also be practiced in advancing +from cover to cover by crawling, or by lying on the left side, rifle +grasped in the right hand, and pushing himself forward with the right +leg. + +He should be taught that when fired on while acting independently, he +should drop to the ground, seek cover, and then endeavor to locate his +enemy; also that in the sun he is visible to a much greater degree +than when in the shade. + +The instruction of the recruit in the use of cover is continued in +combat exercises of the squad and platoon, but he must then be taught +that the proper advance of the platoon or troop and the effectiveness +of its fire is of greater importance than the question of cover for +individuals _should the two considerations conflict_. He should also +be taught that he may not move about or shift his position in the +firing line except to get a better view of the target. + + +OBSERVATION. + +=144.= In order to develop the faculty of rapid and accurate +observation, which is of great importance in campaign, the recruit +should be trained in taking notice of his surroundings, at first from +selected positions and later at the various gaits. + +He should be practiced under various conditions of weather in +recognizing colors and forms; in pointing out and naming military +features of the ground; in observing the effect of the direction of +light on distinctness of objects; in recognizing at gradually +increasing distances the animate and inanimate objects ordinarily met +with in the field; in counting distant objects; and in estimating the +size of groups, such as herds of animals and bodies of troops. + + +MANUAL OF THE PISTOL. + +=145.= Instruction under this head is first given on foot, the recruit +having previously been made familiar with the mechanism of the pistol, +the names of the principal parts, and the method of cleaning, +assembling, and operating it. + +When a lanyard is used the snaps are attached to the butt of the +pistol and the magazine, the lanyard is passed over the head, and the +sliding loop drawn snug against the right armpit. The lanyard should +then be of just such length that the arm can be extended without +constraint. + +For dismounted instruction with the pistol the troopers may be formed +with or without intervals. + +During _instruction_ in the manual of the pistol given when dismounted +_with intervals_ each trooper terminates the first execution of =raise +pistol= by carrying his right foot 24 inches to the right and placing +his left hand in the position of his bridle hand. This position is +then retained until =return pistol= is executed, when the position of +=attention= is resumed. + +At _all other times_ when movements in the manual of the pistol are +executed dismounted the left hand is raised to the position of the +bridle hand whenever used to manipulate the mechanism and is then +dropped again to the side. + +=146.= Except in the act of firing, the automatic pistol, when +actually on the person, whether loaded or unloaded, will be carried +cocked and locked. At all other times the hammer will be lowered +_fully down_. + +=147.= The pistol being in the holster, to raise pistol: 1. =Raise=, +2. =PISTOL.= + +Raise: Unbutton the flap of the holster with the right hand and grasp +the stock, back of the hand outward. + +=PISTOL=: Draw the pistol from the holster; reverse it, muzzle up, the +hand holding the stock with the thumb and last three fingers, +forefinger outside the guard, barrel to the rear and inclined to the +front at an angle of 30 deg., hand as high as the neck and 6 inches in +front of the point of the right shoulder. This is the position of +raise pistol. (Fig. 32.) + +[Illustration: FIG. 32, par. 147.] + +=148.= Being at =raise pistol=, to inspect pistol: 1. =Inspection=, 2. +=PISTOL.= + +(_a_) =When a magazine is in the pistol=: Push down the safety lock +and lower the right hand to within easy reach of the left, pistol +pointed upward and to the right front at an angle of about 30 deg.; grasp +the corrugations of the slide with the left thumb and forefinger, +thumb to the right; thrust upward with the right hand, thus drawing +back the slide until the slide stop is engaged (fig. 35); resume +=raise pistol= (fig. 33). + +(_b_) =When no magazine is in the pistol=: Push down the safety lock and +lower the pistol to the left hand, rotating the pistol so that the +sights move to the left, barrel pointing downward and to the left +front, stock pointing upward and to the right front; with the left +thumb and forefinger grasp the corrugations of the slide, back of the +left hand down (fig. 34); change the grasp of the right hand slightly +until the thumb presses against the rounded surface of the slide stop; +thrust downward and to the left front with the right hand, thus +drawing back the slide, and at the same time press the slide stop with +the right thumb against the slide until it engages; resume raise +pistol. + +=Inspection pistol= is never executed with a loaded pistol or with a +loaded magazine in the pistol. + +[Illustration: FIG. 33, par. 148 (_a_).] + +[Illustration: FIG. 34, par. 148 (_b_).] + +=149.= 1. =Return=, 2. =PISTOL.= + +(_a_) Being at =raise pistol=; lock the pistol, if not locked; lower +the pistol to the holster, reversing it, muzzle down, back of the hand +to the right; raise the flap of the holster with the right thumb; +insert the pistol in the holster and thrust it home; button the flap +of the holster with the right hand. + +(_b_) Being at =inspection pistol=; (with a magazine in the pistol) +lower the pistol to the left hand and grasp the slide as prescribed +for inspection pistol without magazine (par. 148-b, fig. 22); thrust +downward and to the left front with the right hand, thus relieving the +pressure on the slide stop, and at the same time disengage the slide +stop with the right thumb; release the slide; reverse and lock the +pistol; place it in holster as prescribed in (_a_). If there is no +magazine in the pistol, lower it to the bridle hand as in =load= (par. +151); draw back the slide and release it; lock the pistol and place it +In the holster. + +When the last shot is fired the slide stop engages automatically. +=Return pistol= is then executed as from inspection pistol (_b_). + +=150.= Being at raise pistol, to insert a magazine in the pistol: 1. +=Insert=, 2. =MAGAZINE=, or 2. =LOADED MAGAZINE.= + +(_a_) When a magazine is in the pistol: Lower the pistol into the left +hand, rotating it so that the sights move to the left; grasp the slide +with the left hand, back of the hand down, barrel pointing downward to +the left front, stock pointing upward to the right front; release the +magazine catch with the middle finger of the left hand; withdraw the +magazine with the right hand; insert the designated magazine and +resume =raise pistol=. If there be no empty space in the magazine +pocket when the magazine is withdrawn from the pistol, the magazine +may be held between the left thumb and the stock of the pistol until +the magazine has been taken from the pocket and inserted; the magazine +withdrawn from the pistol is then inserted in the magazine pocket. + +Whenever the magazine catch is released, the right hand should be so +placed as to limit the motion of the magazine and prevent its falling +out. + +(_b_) =When no magazine is in the pistol=: Lower the pistol into the +left hand and grasp it as before; insert the designated magazine and +resume =raise pistol=. + +A loaded magazine will never be inserted without specific command. + +=151.= Being at =raise pistol= with a loaded magazine in the pistol, +to load: =LOAD=: Push down the safety lock and lower the pistol to the +bridle hand as prescribed for inspection pistol when a magazine is in +the pistol (par. 148 (_a_)); operate the slider, engage the safety +lock with the right thumb, and raise pistol. (Fig. 35.) + +To simulate loading for instruction, first withdraw the empty +magazine. + +The command load may be given in connection with the insertion of the +magazine, for example: 1. =Insert=, 2. =LOADED MAGAZINE=; 3. =LOAD.= + +After inserting magazine, reverse the pistol and load as above +prescribed. + +[Illustration: FIG. 35, par. 151.] + +=152.= Being in any position, to eject the cartridge from the +receiver: =UNLOAD=. + +Pass the pistol into the left hand as in =insert magazine=; release +the magazine catch with the middle finger of the left hand, slightly +disengaging the magazine; push down the safety lock with the right +thumb; operate the slide to eject the cartridge; engage the magazine; +raise and lock the pistol. + +=153.= Being in any position, to withdraw the magazine from the +pistol: =WITHDRAW MAGAZINE=. + +Handle the pistol as in =insert magazine=; release the magazine catch; +withdraw the magazine and execute raise pistol. + +Recruits are taught the motions of loading and firing without +cartridges, and preferably without a magazine in the pistol to avoid +wear on the magazine lips. Loading and pointing practice should be +had at all gaits. + +=154.= The hammer is always lowered preparatory to placing the pistol +in the arm rack or other place of deposit. + +=155.= Being at raise pistol, to lower the hammer: + +(_a_) =Using both hands=: Push down the safety lock; assume the +position of load; seat the right thumb firmly on the hammer and hold +it there; raise the left hand, to the right and press the grip safety +with the left thumb; insert the forefinger inside the trigger guard; +press the trigger and carefully let the hammer down with the right +thumb. Resume =raise pistol=. + +(_b_) =Using but one hand=: Raise the right hand until the muzzle of +the pistol is well above the head; disengage the safety lock; seat the +ball of the right thumb firmly on the hammer; bear down the grip +safety by pressure on the hammer; press the trigger and carefully let +down the hammer with the right thumb. + +=156.= =To charge the magazine=: Hold the magazine in the left hand, +open end up, rounded side to the right. Take the cartridge in the +right hand, thumb on the rim, bullet end pointing to the right; place +the rim on the end of the magazine follower; force down the magazine +spring and slip the cartridge to the left of the magazine. The next +cartridge is similarly slipped in by placing it on the cartridge just +inserted and forcing down the spring. + +The magazine may be charged with any number of cartridges from one to +seven. + +Before dismissing the squad, pistols will be inspected, and if found +loaded, will be unloaded and magazines withdrawn to prevent loaded or +partially loaded magazines being left in the pistol. Except at target +practice, on guard duty, or active service, the pistol is habitually +carried unloaded with empty magazine. + + +EMPLOYMENT OF THE PISTOL. + +=157.= The pistol is primarily a weapon for use at very close range. +Its characteristic employment by cavalry is in mounted firing from a +horse moving at a rapid gait. Under such conditions its effectiveness +is almost negligible at ranges over 25 yards against individuals or +over 50 yards against a line in close order except in the hands of +exceptionally skilled shots, and the effectiveness rapidly decreases +at ranges over 5 to 10 yards. These limitations on the use of the +pistol are due not to its short range as a weapon but to the +difficulties of directing it accurately under the conditions of use. +While the pistol is a weapon employing fire action, its tactical +employment is more nearly analogous to that of either the saber or +bayonet than to that of the rifle. + +=158.= From the preceding paragraph it results that there is no need, +in connection with the employment of the pistol as a weapon of mounted +combat, for commands that purport to designate a target or to indicate +range or other details for the direction of fire. The only commands +ordinarily needed are those required for instruction purposes. (See +Small-Arms Firing Manual.) + +=159.= The effectiveness of the individual trooper in mounted pistol +combat depends upon: + +(_a_) Thorough familiarity with the weapon and facility in +manipulating its mechanism under all conditions. This is acquired by +training in the =Manual of the Pistol=. Constant practice is necessary +in rapidly drawing the pistol from its holster, loading it, +withdrawing magazine, and inserting magazine, at first at a halt, +later in motion, and finally at rapid gaits. + +(_b_) Skill in firing the pistol. This is acquired by actual practice +in the preliminary exercises and range firing as prescribed in the +=Small-Arms Firing Manual=. + +(_c_) Control of the horse. This is acquired in the =School of the +Trooper=. + +(_d_) The thorough inculcation in the trooper of the habit of +_withholding his fire until within close range_. This can well be +accomplished in individual training by exercises in firing or +simulating fire at one or more silhouette targets. The trooper +approaches at a gait graduated in accordance with his state of +training and is required to withhold his fire until he passes a +certain line. + +=160.= The other elements that enter into effective use of the pistol +as a mounted weapon relate to the formations and tactics employed +rather than to individual training. They pertain, therefore, to +collective rather than individual instruction. + +=161.= If any command be required in connection with the +characteristic use of the pistol in mounted combat, it consists simply +of an indication of the moment at which fire may begin. For this +purpose the command =COMMENCE FIRING= may be employed in any case for +which a command may be desirable. + + +MANUAL OF THE SABER, DISMOUNTED. + +=162.= For this instruction, dismounted, the saber in the scabbard is +carried in the left hand. + +In the position of attention the saber will be held upright by the +side, guard to the front, the shoe of the scabbard resting on the +ground close to the left foot and just in front of the heel. The left +arm will be extended, the fingers and thumb grasping the scabbard, +back of the hand outward. + +In the necessary movements on foot with the saber in hand the saber is +carried with the hilt to the front and higher than the shoe of the +scabbard. + +Officers, dismounted, may carry the saber in the hollow of the left +arm, elbow bent, forearm horizontal, guard of the saber to the front, +blade vertical. An officer or noncommissioned officer habitually draws +saber before giving any commands involving the use of that weapon by +those under him. Officers and noncommissioned officers out of ranks +draw saber only on occasions when the men draw saber unless otherwise +prescribed. The saber may be drawn for signaling. + +=163.= The saber is intended for mounted combat. The instructor will +impress upon the recruit from the first that the use of the saber in +war is ordinarily limited to occasions of mounted combat, and that +instruction on foot in its use is merely preliminary to the mounted +training which the recruit will receive later. + +=164.= For dismounted instruction, if the squad is in ranks the +instructor causes intervals or distances (pars. 85-88) to be taken +before drawing saber. + +=165.= 1. =Draw=, 2. =SABER.= + +At the command =draw=, grasp the scabbard with the left hand about 4 +inches from the mouth, place the left hand against the thigh, and +carry the hilt to the front; turn the head slightly to the left +without deranging the position and glance at the saber knot; engage +the right wrist in the saber knot and give it two turns inward to +secure it; grasp the hilt with the right hand and draw the saber about +6 inches from the scabbard and look to the front. + +At the command saber, draw the saber quickly, raising the arm to the +front and upward to its full length, saber in prolongation of the arm. +Make a short pause with the saber raised, then bring it down with the +blade against the hollow of the right shoulder, guard to the front, +right hand at the hip, the third and fourth fingers on the back of the +grip and the elbow back. + +The left hand holds the scabbard as at attention. + +This is the position of =carry saber dismounted=. + +=166.= 1. =Return=, 2. =SABER.= + +At the command return, grasp the scabbard as in draw saber and carry +the opening to the front. Carry the saber to the front with arm half +extended until the thumb is about 6 inches in front of the chin, the +blade vertical, guard to the left, the thumb extended along the side +of the grip, the little finger joined with the others. + +At the command saber, move the wrist to opposite the left shoulder, +lower the blade and pass it across and along the left arm, point to +the rear. Turn the head to the left, fixing the eyes upon the opening +of the scabbard: raise the right hand and insert the blade in the +scabbard and push it home. Disengage the wrist from the saber knot and +resume the position of attention. + +=167.= Being at =carry saber=: 1. =Present=, 2, =SABER.= + +Without changing the position of the left hand, execute at the command +saber what is prescribed in par. 166 at the command =return=, except +that the grip is held in the full grasp. The saber is said to be held +in the full grasp when all four fingers grasp the grip, the thumb +extending along the back in the groove, the fingers pressing the back +of the grip against the heel of the hand. + +Officers at the command: 1. =Present=, execute =present saber= as +described above; at the command: 2. =SABER=, they lower the saber +until the point is 12 inches from the ground and directed to the +front, guard to the left, right arm straight, hand beside the thigh. +=Mounted, the point Is lowered to the level of the stirrup.= + +=168.= Being at =carry saber=: 1. =Port=, 2. =SABER.= + +Carry the right foot about 24 inches to the right, bring the left hand +to the position of the bridle hand and raise the saber to a vertical +position, guard to the front, grip held in the full grasp, right hand +about 12 inches in front of the shoulder. + +To resume the carry: 1. =Carry=, 2. =SABER.= + +=169.= Being at =carry saber=, or in any position: =GUARD=. + +Carry the right foot about 24 inches to the right and bend knees to +simulate the position mounted. Incline the body to the front from the +waist (not the hips). Let the blade fall to the front to a position +nearly horizontal, elbow well away from the body, forearm and saber +forming one straight line, guard to the right, point at the height of +the adversary's breast, the left hand in the position of the bridle +hand. (Fig. 24.) + +[Illustration: FIG. 36, par. 169.] + +=170.= Being at =carry saber=: 1. =Inspection=, 2. =SABER=. + +Carry the right hand upward, arm half extended until the thumb is at +the height of the chin, grip held in the full grasp, blade vertical, +guard to the left. Make a slight pause, then loosen the grasp on the +grip and turn the saber with the guard to the right. Again make a +slight pause, then resume the first position and return to the carry. + +=171.= Saber exercise is conducted, and instruction given, as +prescribed in the =Saber exercise=. For =Manual of the Saber +Mounted=, _see_ par. 245. + + +=Section 4. School of the Trooper, Mounted.= + +GENERAL PROVISIONS. + +=172.= _Object._--The primary object of this school is to train the +trooper in horsemanship and in the ready use of his weapons while +mounted. + +=173.= _The instructor._--It is essential that the instructor (par. +37) be a skilled and experienced horseman, properly mounted. He should +always supplement the original explanation of a movement by executing +it himself, so that the recruits may actually see the result that is +desired and the means by which it is effected. + +=174.= _Cautions to instructors._--The instructor must first develop +the confidence of the recruit, give him a proper seat, and make him +supple on the horse. Progress should be suited to his capacity and +exempt him as far as practicable from falls or other accidents. +Instruction in the use of the aids and in the means employed to train +the horse to obey them will follow. + +When the recruit has acquired confidence in his ability to ride and +control his horse he will be instructed in the use of arms mounted. + +Instruction is given individually; every new movement is made the +object of a particular lesson given to each trooper in turn. + +During the exercise the instructor avoids general remarks and (in so +far as possible) unfamiliar terms; in the correction of faults he +addresses by name those committing them. + +He passes frequently from one trooper to another repeating advice and +endeavoring to impress upon the troopers the principles embodied in +the regulations. In doing this he need not use the language of the +text. + +The instructor may be on foot or mounted. For the first lessons it is +advantageous to remain on foot so as better to explain movements and +correct faults. + +Steady, well-trained horses are selected for the first lessons. The +troopers exchange horses from time to time during the lesson on +indication from the instructor. + +There should be frequent rests, especially with recruits. During these +rests advantage may be taken of the opportunity to question the +troopers respecting the instruction they have received. + +In all exercises the instructor varies the gait so as not to weary the +troopers or the horses. The instruction is conducted without hurry. +The daily work begins and ends at the walk. + +=175.= _The standard required of troopers._--To be a good military +horseman each trooper should-- + +(_a_) Have a strong seat. + +(_b_) Be able to apply correctly the aids by which a horse is +controlled. + +(_c_) Be capable of covering long distances on horseback with the +least possible fatigue to his horse and to himself. + +(_d_) Be able to use his horse to the utmost advantage in a mounted +fight. + +(_e_) Be capable of riding across country. + +(_f_) Under proper directions, be able to train an unbroken horse in +garrison and in the field, understand how to detect and treat the +minor ailments to which the horse is liable, and be a good groom. + +All officers, in addition to being good military horsemen and +instructors in riding, must be able to train remounts and to direct +their training. + +=177.= _General provisions._--For the preparatory exercises the horses +are saddled and equipped with the snaffle bit only, saddles stripped. +Spurs are not worn. + +These exercises are conducted at first in a riding hall or on an +inclosed course out of doors. + +References to the riding hall are to be understood as ordinarily +applying equally to any out-of-doors inclosure or to the space +included in any course marked off for instruction in equitation (pars. +269, 296). + +At first, the troopers, dismounted, lead their horses to the riding +hall and return them to the stable in the same manner. When they have +received sufficient instruction they go and return mounted. + +As soon as the instruction has advanced sufficiently to permit the +use of such commands and methods, the instructor will confine himself +to the commands and means prescribed in the School of the Trooper. + + +TO FOLD THE SADDLE BLANKET. + +=178.= The blanket, after being well shaken, will be folded into six +thicknesses, as follows: Hold it well up by the two corners, the long +way up and down; double it lengthwise (so the fold will come between +the "U" and "S"), the folded corner (middle of blanket) in the left +hand; take the folded corner between the thumb and forefinger of the +right hand, thumb pointing to the left; slip the left hand down the +folded edge two-thirds its length and seize it with the thumb and +second finger; raise the hands to the height of the shoulders, the +blanket between them extended; bring the hands together, the double +fold falling outward; pass the folded corner from the right hand into +the left hand, between the thumb and forefinger, slip the second +finger of the right hand between the folds and seize the double folded +corner; turn the left (disengaged) corner in and seize it with the +thumb and forefinger of the right hand, the second finger of the right +hand stretching and evening the folds; after evening the folds grasp +the corners and shake the blanket well in order to smooth the folds; +raise the blanket and place it between the chin and breast; slip the +hands down half way, the first two fingers outside, the other fingers +and thumb of each hand inside, seize the blanket with the thumbs and +first two fingers and let the part under the chin fall forward; hold +the blanket up, arms extended, even the lower edges, seize the middle +points between the thumbs and forefingers, and flirt the outside part +over the right arm; the blanket is thus held before placing it on the +horse. + +While retaining the general method of folding the blanket as above +indicated, troop commanders will require the blanket to be refolded +frequently with a view to equalizing the wear on the different +sections of the blanket. + + +TO PUT ON THE BLANKET AND SURCINGLE. + +=179.= The instructor commands: =BLANKET=. + +Approach the horse on the near (left) side, with the blanket folded +and held as just described; place it well forward on his back by +tossing the part of the blanket over the right arm to the off (right) +side of the horse, still keeping hold of the middle points; slide the +blanket once or twice from front to rear to smooth the hair. Being +careful to raise the blanket in bringing it forward, place the blanket +with the forefinger of the left hand on the withers and the forefinger +of the right hand on the backbone, the blanket smooth; it should then +be well forward with the edges on the left side; remove the locks of +mane that may be under it, pass the buckle end of the surcingle over +the middle of the blanket and buckle it on the near side a little +below the edge of the blanket. + + +TO PUT ON AND TAKE OFF THE WATERING BRIDLE. + +=180.= The instructor commands: =BRIDLE=. + +Take the reins in the right hand, the bit in the left; approach the +horse on the near side, slip the reins over the horse's head and let +them rest on his neck; reach under and engage the snap in the right +halter ring; insert the left thumb in the side of the horse's mouth +above the tush and press open the lower jaw; insert the bit and engage +the snap in the left halter ring. The bit should hang so as to touch, +but not draw up, the corners of the mouth. At the command =unbridle=, +pass the reins over the horse's head and disengage the snaps. + + +TO SADDLE. + +=181.= (_a_) (McClellan saddle.) For instruction the saddle may be +placed four yards in rear or front of the horse. The stirrups are +crossed over the seat, the right one uppermost; then the cincha and +cincha strap are crossed above the stirrups, the strap uppermost. The +blanket having been placed as previously explained, the instructor +commands: =SADDLE=. + +Seize the pommel of the saddle with the left hand and the cantle with +the right, approach the horse on the near side from the direction of +the croup and _place the center of the saddle on the middle of the +horse's back_, the end of the side bar about three-finger widths +behind the point of the shoulder blade; let down the cincha strap and +cincha, pass to the off side, adjust the cincha and straps, and see +that the blanket is smooth; return to the near side, raise the blanket +slightly under the pommel arch so that the withers may not be +compressed; take the cincha strap in the right hand, reach under the +horse and seize the cincha ring with the left hand, pass the end of +the strap through the ring from underneath (from inside to outside), +then up and through the upper ring from the outside, if necessary, +make another fold in the same manner. + +The strap is fastened as follows: Pass the end through the upper ring +to the front; seize it with the left hand, place the fingers of the +right between the outside folds of the strap, pull from the horse with +the right hand and take up the slack with the left; cross the strap +over the folds, pass the end of it with the right hand underneath and +through the upper ring back of the folds, then down and under the loop +that crosses the folds and draw it tightly; weave the ends of the +strap into the strands of the cincha. + +Another method of fastening the cincha strap is as follows: Pass, the +end through the upper ring to the rear; seize it with the right hand; +place the fingers of the left hand between the outer folds of the +strap; pull from the horse with the left hand and take up the slack +with the right; pass the end of the strap underneath and draw it +through the upper ring until a loop is formed; double the loose end of +the strap and push it through the loop and draw the loop taut. The +free end should be long enough to be seized conveniently with the +hand. + +Having fastened the cincha strap, let down the right stirrup and then +the left. + +The surcingle is then buckled over the saddle, and should be a little +looser than the cincha. + +The cincha when first tied should admit a finger between it and the +belly. After exercising for a while the cincha will be found too loose +and should be tightened. + +(_b_) (Service saddle, model of 1912.) Troops equipped with this model +will saddle as prescribed for the McClellan saddle with the following +modifications; + +Place the saddle on the blanket so that the front edge of the side bar +approaches the shoulder blade without pressing upon it. After the +saddle has been so placed, let down; the girth; pass to the off side, +adjust the girth and saddle skirt, and see that the blanket is smooth, +return to the near side and push the blanket well up into the pommel +arch; reach under the horse, seize the girth with the left hand and +bring up its free end to the near side of the saddle; with the right +hand raise the saddle skirt and buckle the girth straps to the +corresponding buckles of the girth, beginning with the forward strap, +lower the saddle skirt and let down the stirrups, beginning with the +right stirrup. The girth should ordinarily be about 4 inches in rear +of the point of the elbow. + +=182.= To approximate the length of the stirrup straps before +mounting, they are adjusted so that the length of the stirrup strap, +including the stirrup, is about 1 inch less than the length of the +arm, fingers extended. + + +TO UNSADDLE. + +=183.= The instructor commands: =UNSADDLE=. + +(_a_) (McClellan saddle.) Stand on the near side of the horse; +unbuckle and remove the surcingle; cross the left stirrup over the +saddle; loosen the cincha strap and let down the cincha; pass to the +off side, cross the right stirrup, then the cincha; pass to the near +side, cross the cincha strap over the saddle; grasp the pommel with +the left hand, the cantle with the right, and remove the saddle over +the croup and place it in front or rear of the horse as may be +directed, pommel to the front; grasp the blanket at the withers with +the left hand and at the loin with the right, remove it in the +direction of the croup, the edges falling together, wet side in, and +place it on the saddle, folded edge on the pommel. + +If in the stable, place the saddle on its peg when taken off the +horse. + +(_b_) (Service saddle, model of 1912.) Stand on the near side of the +horse; cross the left stirrup over the saddle; raise the saddle skirt +with the left hand, and with the right unbuckle the girth straps, +beginning with the rear strap; let down the girth; pass to the off +side; cross the right stirrup and then the girth over the saddle; pass +to the near side, grasp the pommel with the left hand, the cantle with +the right, and remove and dispose of the saddle as prescribed in +(_a_). + +The service saddle, model 1912, should be hung on a bracket, +sufficiently wide for the saddle to rest on its side bars. If a +narrower support is used, the saddle will rest on the low point; in +the leather seat and become misshapen. + + +TO PUT ON AND TAKE OFF THE BIT AND BRIDOON BRIDLE (MODEL 1909). + +=184.= Before bridling the curb chain is unhooked on the near side The +instructor commands: =BRIDLE=. + +Take the reins in the right, the crownpiece in the left hand; approach +the horse on the near side, passing the right hand along his neck; +slip both reins over his head and let them rest on his neck; take the +crownpiece in the right hand and the lower left branch of the curb bit +in the left hand, the forefinger against the mouthpiece, the snaffle +bit above and resting on the mouthpiece of the curb bit; bring the +crownpiece in front of and slightly below its proper position; insert +the thumb into the side of the mouth above the tush; press open the +lower jaw and insert the bits by raising the crownpiece; with the left +hand draw the ears gently under the crownpiece, beginning with the +left ear; arrange the forelock, secure the throatlatch, and hook up +the curb chain on the near side below the snaffle bit. + +The bridle is adjusted as prescribed in par. 302. + +The throatlatch should admit four fingers between it and the throat. + +=185.= At the discretion of the instructor, the halter may be taken +off before bridling, the reins being first passed over the neck; the +hitching strap, if not left at the manger or picket line, is tied +around the horse's neck; if the horse be saddled, in the near pommel +ring. + +=186.= The instructor commands: =UNBRIDLE=. + +Stand on the near side of the horse; pass the reins over the horse's +head, placing them on the bend of the left arm; unhook the curb chain +on the near side; unbuckle the throatlatch, grasp the crownpiece with +the right hand and, assisting with the left hand, gently disengage the +ears; gently disengage the bits from the horse's mouth with the left +hand by lowering the crownpiece; place the crownpiece in the palm of +the left hand, take the reins in the right hand, pass them together +over the crownpiece, make two or three turns around; the bridle, then +pass the bight between the brow band and crownpiece and draw it snug. + +The bridle is hung up by the reins or placed across the saddle on the +blanket. + +If the horse has no halter on, unbridle and push the bridle back so +that the crownpiece will rest on the neck behind the poll until the +halter is replaced. + +=187.= =Stand to horse=: At this command each trooper places himself, +facing to the front, on the near side of the horse, opposite his head, +and takes the position of _attention_, except that the right hand, +nails down, grasps the reins, the forefinger separating them, about 6 +inches from the bit. The bights of the reins rest on the neck near the +pommel of the saddle. + +=188.= =To lead out=: The troopers being at =stand to horse=, to leave +the stable or picket line, the instructor commands: =LEAD OUT=. + +Each trooper, holding his right hand well up and firm, leads his +horse, without looking at him, to the place designated by the +instructor. + +=189.= Upon entering the riding hall or inclosure the instructor +disposes the troopers upon a line at intervals of 3 yards, the +troopers at =stand to horse=, the horses correctly disposed and +perpendicular to the line of troopers. + +A horse is correctly disposed when he stands squarely on all four +feet, having his head, neck, and body in line. + +=190.= =Stirrups=: The stirrups are properly adjusted when, the +trooper being properly seated with the feet removed from the stirrups +and the legs falling naturally, the tread of the stirrups is about 1 +inch above the top of the heel of the shoe. + +The stirrups should bear only the weight of the lower leg; about +one-third of the foot should be inserted in the stirrup, so that the +ball of the foot rests on the tread, the heel lower than the toe. + +The flat of the stirrup strap should rest against the leg of the +mounted trooper. To accomplish this the trooper's toe should be so +inserted in the stirrup as to place the front branch of the latter on +the outside. By the front branch of the stirrup is meant the forward +branch as the stirrup hangs before the trooper mounts. + +Placing too much weight on the stirrup disturbs the seat and contracts +the leg, hindering it's freedom of action. + +If the toe is not inserted far enough the trooper risks losing his +stirrup; if inserted too far suppleness is diminished. + +The heel is carried naturally lower than the toe if the ankle joint is +not rigid. + +For the extended gallop, in the charge, for the use of weapons, and +for leaping obstacles the foot is inserted fully in the stirrup. + +=191.= =To mount=: Being at =stand to horse=, =MOUNT=. + +(_a_) Face to the right, drop the right rein, grasp the left rein in +the right hand, take two steps to the right, sliding the hand along +the left rein, make a half face to the left When opposite the girth; +with the aid of the left hand take both reins in the right, forefinger +between the reins, the right hand on the pommel, the reins coming into +the hand on the side of the forefinger, and held so as to feel lightly +the horse's mouth, the bight falling on the off side. Place the left +foot in the stirrup, assisted by the left hand if necessary, and bring +the left knee against the saddle; grasp a lock of the mane with the +left hand, lock coming out between the thumb and forefinger. + +(_b_) Spring from the right foot, keeping the hands firmly in place, +the left knee bent and pressed against the saddle, bring the right +foot by the side of the left, body inclining slightly forward; pass +the right leg, knee bent, over the croup without touching it, sit down +lightly-in the saddle; let go of the mane; insert the right foot in +the stirrup, assisted by the right hand if necessary; take a rein in +each hand, the rein coming into the hand under the little finger and +passing out over the second joint of the forefinger, the thumbs closed +on the reins, the bight of the reins falling to the right. + +The reins should be so held that the trooper feels lightly the horse's +mouth, the fingers closed until the nails lightly touch the palms of +the hands; the reins well up in the crotch of the fingers; the backs +of the hands vertical and in prolongation of the forearm; the wrists +flexible; the elbows near the body and low, so that the forearms will +be in prolongation of the reins; the hands about 9 inches apart. + +The instructor takes care that the recruit in adjusting the reins +provokes no movement of the horse and deranges in no manner the +position of the horse's head. + +The instructor cautions the trooper to avoid touching the horse with +the left toe in mounting; this fault begets nearly all the resistance +of horses to standing quietly while being mounted. + +The modifications incident to mounting and dismounting a horse +equipped with the double snaffle or bit and bridoon are indicated in +pars. 271, 303, and 307. The troopers are also trained to mount on the +right side. + +=192.= =To dismount=: Being halted, =DISMOUNT=. + +(_a_) Seize the reins with the right hand in front of and near the +left, forefinger between the reins, the reins entering the hand from +the side of the forefinger; drop the reins with the left hand; place +the right hand on the pommel; grasp a lock of the mane with the left +hand, the lock coming out between the thumb and forefinger; take the +right foot out of the stirrup. + +(_b_) Rise upon the left stirrup, pass the right leg, knee bent, over +the croup without touching the horse, and bring the right foot by the +side of the left, the left knee against the saddle, the upper part of +the body inclined slightly forward; descend lightly to the ground and +take the position of =stand to horse=. + +The troopers are also trained to dismount on the right side. + +=193.= Commanding officers may authorize the following alternative +method of mounting and dismounting by officers and enlisted men on all +occasions except those when it is required that mounting and +dismounting be executed in unison at the corresponding command (par. +354). Instruction, in the methods authorized in this paragraph is +optional. + +Being at =stand= to horse, at the command =MOUNT=, face to the right, +drop the right rein, take a step to the right to be opposite the +shoulder of the horse; at the same time seize the bights of the reins +in the right hand and pull them taut enough to give a gentle, even +bearing on the horse's mouth; grasp the reins with the left hand, with +the little finger between them, and the bight coming out between the +thumb and forefinger, which also hold a lock of the mane. Place the +left foot in the stirrup, assisted by the right hand if necessary, and +bring the left knee against the saddle. + +Place the right hand upon the cantle, rise by an effort of the right +leg, aided by the arms, the left knee bent and pressed against the +saddle, the upper part of the body inclined slightly forward to keep +the saddle from turning; bring the right foot by the side of the left; +change the right hand to the pommel, pass the right leg, knee bent, +over the croup without touching it, and sit down lightly in the +saddle. Put the right foot in the stirrup, assisted by the right hand +if necessary. + +At the command =DISMOUNT=, pass the right rein into the left hand and +grasp with this hand a lock of the mane, place the right hand on the +pommel, and remove the right foot from the stirrup; pass the right +leg, knee bent, over the croup without touching the horse and bring +the right foot by the side of the left, the left knee against the +saddle, the upper part of the body inclined slightly forward, right +hand on the cantle. Descend lightly to the ground and take the +position of stand to horse. + +=194.= =To take the reins in one hand and to separate them=: At the +command =IN LEFT HAND TAKE REINS=, place the left hand opposite the +middle of the body, pass the right rein into the left hand, separating +it from the left rein by the little finger; let the right hand fall by +the side. + +=195.= At the command =IN BOTH HANDS TAKE REINS=, grasp the right rein +with the right hand and replace the hands 9 inches apart. + +The reins are taken in the right hand and again separated in a similar +manner. + +=196.= To adjust the reins the trooper brings the wrists together and +grasps with one hand, above and near the opposite thumb, the rein that +he desires to shorten. + +=197.= The instructor causes the reins to be dropped and retaken by +the commands =DROP REINS= and =REINS=. + +At the first command, the trooper drops the reins behind the pommel +and lets the hands fall by the side. + +The reins are dropped as an exceptional measure, and always with +precaution against accident. + +=198.= =Position of the trooper, or attention (mounted)=: The position +described below should be considered a standard toward which all +troopers should gradually approximate. + +The buttocks bearing equally upon and well forward in the middle of +the saddle. + +The thighs turned without constraint upon their flat side, clasping +the horse evenly and stretched only by their own weight and that of +the lower legs. + +The knees bent and flexible. + +The lower legs falling naturally, the calves in contact with the horse +without pressure, the toes dropping naturally when the trooper is +without stirrups. + +The back supple and never hollowed. + +The upper part of the body easy, free, and erect. + +The shoulders thrown back evenly. + +The arms free, the elbows falling naturally. + +The head erect and turned to the front, but without stiffness. + +Eyes alert, well up, and directed to the trooper's front. + +The reins held as heretofore prescribed. + +This position may be modified by the instructor to suit varying +conditions and unusual conformations. When not at attention, the head +and eyes are directed so as best to favor alertness and observation. +In other respects the position should be practically unchanged. + +=199.= The body and lower legs are movable and should be under the +control of the trooper, either acting intermittently as aids for +guiding the horse or as a means of binding the rider to the horse +while following his movements. + +The thighs, on the other hand, should remain fixed immovably to the +saddle, except while posting at the trot. This fixity should be +obtained not by the pressure of the knees but by the clinging of the +buttocks, which is secured by the suppleness of the loins and the +relaxation of the thighs. It is acquired very rapidly by daily +"_rotation of the thighs_," which gradually presses the large thigh +muscles to the rear and permits the femur to rest solidly against the +saddle. + +The trooper should sit with his buttocks well under the upper part of +his body and especially avoid bowing the back by thrusting the +buttocks to the rear and the lower part of the spine to the front. +Sitting well forward in the middle of the saddle will tend to assist +the trooper in avoiding the defect just referred to. If the buttocks +are thrust back too much the trooper can not conform to the movements +of the horse and carries forward the upper part of his body. + +If the thigh is too nearly horizontal, the trooper is doubled, up and +his power of action diminished; if the thigh is too nearly vertical, +the trooper is on the crotch and lacks ease. + +To sum up: The trooper should take a relaxed sitting position, +squarely on his buttocks, with the thighs inclined downward. + +The various defects of position are overcome by suitable suppling +exercises (pars. 209-220). + +=200.= _The aids._--The legs, the reins, and the weight are the means +of controlling the horse in riding. They are called the aids. + +=201.= =The legs=: The legs serve to urge the horse forward, to +increase his pace or gait, and to engage the hind quarters or move +them laterally. The legs act by the pressure of the calves. If +pressure alone is insufficient the trooper increases the action by +blows with his calves. + +It is essential to obtain from the horse perfect obedience to the +action of the legs. He should respond to the simultaneous and equal +action of both legs by engaging his hindquarters and moving forward; +to the predominant action of one leg by moving his haunches to the +opposite side. + +=202.= =The reins=: The reins serve to prepare the horse to move, to +decrease or increase his pace, to change the gait, or to change +direction. + +=Contact= is a light bearing of the mouth of the horse on the hand of +the rider. It should be constantly maintained. + +The reins are held in the full hand, the thumb pressing them lightly +upon the second joint of the forefinger. By means of closing and +relaxing the fingers and flexing the wrist, arm, and shoulder, the +trooper, while maintaining contact and keeping the reins taut, follows +easily the movements of the head of the horse without anticipating or +interfering with these movements. The hand is then said to be passive. +It is kept so as long as the trooper is not required to change the +pace, gait, or direction. + +=203.= =The direct rein=: When the trooper, with the hands separated +and the reins adjusted, closes his fingers upon the reins without +raising the hands he exercises an action from front to rear, called +the effect of the direct reins. This effect, when on one rein only, is +called that of the =right (or left) direct rein=. + +=204.= =The leading rein=: When the trooper carries the right hand to +the right and forward in a manner to preserve contact but not to +increase pressure on the bit the effect is called that of the =right +leading rein=. + +The back of the hand should remain vertical, the wrist in prolongation +of the forearm, the elbow remaining near the body. + +The horse's head and neck are drawn to the right, the shoulders +follow, and he turns to the right. + +=205.= =The bearing rein=: When the trooper carries the right hand +forward, upward, and to the left in a manner to preserve contact, but +not to increase pressure on the bit, the effect is said to be that of +the =right bearing rein=. + +The back of the hand should remain vertical, the wrist in prolongation +of the forearm. + +The horse's head is =turned slightly to the right=, but the effect is +to the left; the neck bends and is convex to the left and is followed +by the shoulders. The horse turns to the left. + +The action of the bearing rein is much more powerful than that of the +leading rein, and is used to the exclusion of the latter to turn the +horse when riding with the reins in one hand. + +=206.= =The indirect rein of opposition=: When the trooper carries the +right hand to the left in a manner to press the shoulders to the left +and to produce a diagonal traction on the rein in the direction of the +left shoulder or haunch the effect is called that of the =right +indirect rein of opposition=. + +Its effect may be produced =in front of the withers= if the hand be +slightly raised; =in rear pf the withers= if the hand be slightly +lowered. It is frequently used by the trooper when riding with one +hand (as he must do in order to use his weapons), and its effect +should be studied and practiced from, the beginning. + +=207.= Manner of applying the aids: The action of the reins and legs +and weight should not be continuous. The trooper alternately closes +and relaxes the fingers, the hands preserving contact in the intervals +between the actions. In the same manner he uses the legs, neither +gripping nor releasing altogether, but preserving light contact in the +intervals between the blows with the calves. The weight likewise is +used in a similar manner, being quickly applied to the front, to the +rear, or to a side, alternating with returns to the normal position. + +If an action of the aids is prolonged the horse has opportunity to +establish the corresponding resistance, but if produced by =repeated +applications= the effect is very marked. + +All action of the aids should diminish in intensity when obedience +begins and cease entirely as soon as the desired result is secured. + +Troopers must be thoroughly trained in riding with the reins in one +hand. + +=208.= The instructor, in teaching troopers to avail themselves of +their legs and reins, is governed by the preceding considerations, and +from the first watches vigilantly the action of the aids. + +The hand should always be kept low. The most thoughtful care should be +exercised in the combined application of the aids, so that they may +not be opposed to each other in their action; that is, one favoring +the intended movement, the other opposing it. + +The instructor impresses upon the troopers that their hands must be +kept still; that is, free from bobbing up and down, and pulling, and +from giving and taking when there is no reason therefor. + +Likewise their legs should remain in light contact with the horse's +sides and the heels not be used to kick the horse constantly in a +nervous manner. + +Moreover, that the effects of the aids may be perfectly clear, and +that there may be no contradiction between them, =there should never +be simultaneous action of the direct reins demanding slowing up or +halting and of the legs provoking a forward movement=. This condition +is essential for preserving the composure indispensable to the horses +of the troop. + +=242.= =Posting=: Posting is habitually employed when the troopers +have stirrups and understand their use. + +It is executed as follows: The horse moving at a trot, the trooper +inclines the upper part of his body forward, then supporting himself +on the stirrups while maintaining the clinging of his knees he rises +under the impulsion of the horse, maintains his position detached from +the saddle while the succeeding impulse is produced, again sits down +in the saddle, and continues in this way, avoiding alternate impulses. + +At the beginning the mechanism of posting is made easier to the +trooper by causing him to stroke the horse's neck or to grasp a lock +of the mane with either hand, thus determining the forward inclination +of the body. + +Its proper execution requires that the seat be raised moderately, that +contact with the saddle be resumed gently and without shock, that the +full support of the stirrup be obtained while keeping the lower leg +steady, that the ankle joint be supple, and that the heel be kept +lower than the toe. + +=243.= =Care of horses and saddlery=: The recruits will be given talks +and practical illustrations in every phase of the care of horses and +the care of saddlery. This in addition to their daily attention to +those subjects as a matter of routine. + +=244.= _The use of arms, mounted._--During the period in which the +instruction in the school of the trooper is held, there must be +thorough instruction in the use of arms mounted. After the first few +drills there should be daily instruction in some phase of this +important part of the trooper's training. Progress in the more +advanced steps of this instruction must necessarily depend upon the +trooper's progress in horsemanship; but by making the dismounted +instruction thorough and keeping it well in advance of the +corresponding parts of the mounted program, many difficulties will be +obviated and much time saved. Success with the pistol and saber will +be dependent upon that familiarity with their use that can be gained +only by daily practice extending over a considerable period. The +dismounted instruction already prescribed in connection with the use +of the weapons must be supplemented by thorough mounted work at all +gaits, when passing obstacles, etc. The trooper must learn to control +his horse thoroughly with one hand while carrying and using his weapon +in the other; he must learn to handle his weapon mounted with a +minimum of danger to himself, his comrades, or his horse. The +principal drill on at least one day of each week during the entire +period devoted to the school of the trooper should ordinarily be +devoted, to the above instruction, thus supplementing and testing the +results accomplished in the shorter daily drills. At this weekly drill +the troopers should habitually appear fully armed and equipped, the +saddles being packed as for field service. + +The employment of the saber mounted is taught as prescribed in the +=Saber Exercise=; the use of the pistol in firing mounted, as +prescribed in the =Small-Arms Firing Manual=. + +=245.= =Manual of the Saber, Mounted=: The saber suspended from the +_left_ side of the saddle-- + +1. =Draw=, 2. =SABER.= Pass the right hand over the reins and execute +with it rapidly what is prescribed for drawing the saber on foot; +place the pommel near the hip and resting on top of the thigh, flat of +the blade against the point of the shoulder. This is the position of +=carry saber, mounted=. + +=246.= The saber suspended from the _right_ side of the saddle-- + +1. =Draw.= Turn the head to the right without deranging the position +of the body and glance toward the hilt; engage the right wrist in the +saber knot; pull the hilt forward; seize the grip in the full hand, +nails to the right; draw the blade 6 inches from the scabbard, and +look to the front. + +2. =SABER.= Draw the saber as prescribed on foot and take the position +of carry saber. + +=247.= The troopers are also exercised in drawing the saber as quickly +as possible at the single command: =DRAW SABER=. + +=248.= To =return saber=: The scabbard suspended from the _left_ side +of the saddle-- + +1. =Return.= Execute as prescribed on foot. + +2. =SABER.= Execute as prescribed on foot, supporting the back of the +blade against the left forearm until the point is engaged in the +scabbard. + +This command is given only at a halt or when marching at a walk. + +=249.= The scabbard suspended on the right-- + +1. =Return.= Execute as prescribed on foot. + +2. =SABER.= Carry the wrist opposite the right shoulder; lower the +blade to the right of the horse's neck; let the grip turn in the hand +so that the hand grasps the guard at the pommel, back of the hand up; +turn the head to the right and fix the eyes on the opening of the +scabbard; raise the hand; insert the blade and push it home; disengage +the wrist from the saber knot; and turn the head to the front. + +When the saber is carried on the right the return saber is executed, +so far as possible, at the halt. + +=250.= =Inspection saber= and =present saber= are executed as when +dismounted. + +=251.= _Guard._--Thrust the feet home in the stirrups and crouch +slightly in the saddle, bending forward from the waist. Otherwise as +explained dismounted. + +=In the charge= in close order the trooper (in single rank) assumes +the position indicated in par. 297, the body almost in a horizontal +line over the horse's neck, the arm fully extended to the front, the +saber, in the full grasp, in prolongation of the arm, guard up, finger +nails to the right, point at the height of the eye. When difficult +ground is encountered the trooper takes the position of =guard= while +passing it. + +If charging in double rank, the front-rank troopers conform to the +positions indicated for single rank. Those troopers who are in the +rear rank or who are directly in rear of others, take the position of +=port saber=. + +In the melee the troopers take the position of guard toward the +nearest enemy, crouching slightly in the saddle and alive to all +possible attacks. + + +MANUAL OF THE PISTOL, MOUNTED. + +=252.= The modifications of the dismounted manual, incident to, the +employment of the pistol mounted are explained in the corresponding +paragraphs of the =Manual of the Pistol, Dismounted= (pars. 145-156). + + +THE RIFLE. + +(=For troops armed with the Cavalry Equipment, Model of 1912.=) + +=253.= Before standing to horse the trooper attaches his rifle to his +belt by passing the muzzle up through the belt ring and engaging the +snap hook of the belt ring into the trigger guard. + +Being at stand to horse, upon any preparatory command, except for +mounting or securing horses unsling the rifle from the belt ring and +take the position of order arms, removing the snaffle reins from the +horse's neck and passing the right arm through them if necessary. + +If a command to secure horses is given, link or couple first and then +unsling the rifle. + +To mount, proceed as without the rifle. When seated in the saddle, +grasp the rifle at the bolt with the left hand, barrel to the front, +place the butt of the rifle in the bucket, steadying the latter with +the left foot if necessary and take the position of the trooper +mounted. + +To dismount: At the preparatory command, seize the rifle at the bolt +with the left hand, give it a quick, forcible pull, lifting the butt +from the bucket, and let the rifle hang from the belt. + +(=For troops armed with equipment corresponding to the McClellan +saddle.=) + +=254.= At =stand to horse=, the rifle is held on the left side of the +trooper in a position corresponding to =order arms= (par. 93), as +modified by substituting the word =left= for =right= wherever the +latter occurs. + +In leading out, and on all occasions when the trooper leads his horse +for short distances, the rifle is carried at the =left trail= (par. +108) unless otherwise prescribed. + +=255.= In mounting, the rifle is inserted in the scabbard after the +trooper steps back opposite the girth and before he takes the reins in +his right hand (par. 191). + +On dismounting, each trooper, after placing the bights of the reins on +the horse's neck, and before stepping forward to take the position of +stand to horse (par. 192), takes the rifle from the scabbard and +assumes the left trail. A modification of this provision applies when +the trooper dismounts for inspection. The rifle is never carried on +the saddle when the trooper is dismounted, except as specially +authorized at inspections, with the equipment corresponding to the +McClellan saddle (par. 262). + +=256.= _Inspection of arms and equipment, mounted._--It is assumed +that the troopers before being formally inspected mounted and under +arms, will have advanced in elementary collective instruction to a +point when they can be formed and aligned: as a mounted squad (par. +350). Should this not be the case, the instructor will place the +troopers in line with intervals in advance of the inspection. +References to the guide and to alignment will then be disregarded and +the command =front= will be omitted. + +The inspection is described below upon the assumption that all arms +are inspected. The inspection of pistols is explained for both the +mounted and dismounted execution. The necessary modification in case +the inspection of any weapon be omitted is indicated in par. 266. + +=257.= When arms are inspected mounted they are always inspected in +the order: Saber, pistol. When inspected dismounted they are always +inspected in the order: Rifle, pistol. Sabers are not inspected +dismounted, nor are rifles inspected mounted. Pistols may be inspected +either mounted or dismounted. + +=258.= The troopers being mounted and fully armed and in line: 1. +=Prepare for inspection=, 2. =MARCH=, 3. =FRONT.= + +At the second command all align themselves on the guide: The +inspector, having verified the alignment, takes position 3 yards to +the right and front of the right trooper, facing to the left, and +commands: =FRONT=, followed by: 1. =Draw=, 2. =SABER= (par. 165). + +=259.= If it is not intended to inspect the pistols mounted, the +inspector cautions =PISTOLS WILL NOT BE INSPECTED MOUNTED=, and +approaches the right of the rank. + +=260.= As the inspector approaches, the first two troopers execute the +first motion of inspection saber (par. 170), the first trooper, as the +inspector comes in front of him, executes the second and third motions +of inspection saber; the second trooper, as the inspector comes in +front of him, executes the second and third motions of inspection +saber, the first trooper at this instant resuming the carry and the +third trooper executing the first motion of inspection saber. The +first trooper then returns saber. As the inspector comes in front of +the other troopers the movements are executed successively as just +explained. + +=261.= The inspector, having completed the inspection of sabers, +passes in rear from the left to the right of the rank. As he +approaches the right of the rank the first two troopers (=in the +absence of indication to the contrary=) (par. 259) execute =inspection +pistol= (par. 148). Each of the other troopers, in order from right to +left, successively executes =inspection pistol= in time to complete +the execution just before the inspector arrives in front of him. Each +trooper executes =return pistol= as the inspector passes to the +trooper next on his left. + +=262.= To inspect the rifles, to inspect the pistols dismounted, or to +inspect the dress and equipment of the squad more minutely, the +inspector dismounts the squad without forming rank. + +Troopers when dismounted following the command =prepare for +inspection= take a special position; and a special exception is made +in this case to the rule requiring the rifle (if not slung) to be +taken from the scabbard upon dismounting (par. 255). Upon dismounting +while at =prepare for inspection= each trooper takes the snaffle reins +off the horse's neck, passes the right arm through the reins (the +bight of the reins resting on the shoulder) and takes a position +similar to =stand to horse=. The rifle is not unslung (or removed from +the scabbard) unless it has been specially designated for inspection; +it is then reslung or returned to the scabbard as soon as its +inspection is completed. + +A trooper dismounted at =prepare for inspection=, if his right hand be +free, grasps the reins as in =stand to horse=. The snaffle reins once +taken from the neck as above are not replaced until the first command +for mounting. + +The above position is habitually terminated by the first command for +mounting or by =stand to horse=. + +=263.= If the inspector wishes to inspect the arms after dismounting, +he cautions, _immediately following the commands for dismounting_: +=RIFLES AND PISTOLS= (_or_ =RIFLES=, _or_ =PISTOLS=) =WILL BE +INSPECTED.= + +Each trooper at once unslings his rifle (or takes it from the +scabbard) and resumes his position similar to =stand to horse=, his +rifle at the =order=, the reins as described in par. 262. + +=264.= As the inspector approaches the right of the rank the trooper +on the right executes =inspection arms= (par. 112). + +The inspector takes the piece, grasping it with his right hand just +above the rear sight, the man dropping his hands. The inspector +inspects the piece, and, with the hand and piece in the same position +as in receiving it, hands it back to the man, who takes it with the +left hand at the balance, executes =port arms=, and slings the rifle +or places it in the scabbard, according to his equipment. + +As the inspector returns the piece the next man executes =inspection +arms=, and so on through the troop. + +Should the piece be inspected without handling, each man proceeds as +above as soon as the captain passes to the next man. + +=265.= As the inspector approaches the right of the rank of odd +numbers, after completing the inspection of the rifles of the even +numbers, the first two troopers of the rank execute =inspection +pistol=. + +To inspect the pistol closely the inspector grasps it with his left +hand above the trooper's hand, makes such examination as is desired, +and hands the pistol back to the trooper in the same position as that +in which the inspector took the weapon. The trooper takes the pistol +with the right hand as in =inspection pistol= and executes =return +pistol=. Should the pistols be inspected without handling, each man +executes =return pistol= as the inspector passes to the next trooper. + +=266.= If no indication be given for the inspection of rifles they +_remain slung or in the scabbard_, according to the equipment carried. +If only rifles are ordered inspected, pistols are not presented for +inspection and rifles are slung or returned to the scabbard as soon as +inspected. + +If only pistols are ordered inspected, they are presented by the two +troopers on the right when the inspector approaches the rank the first +time after dismounting. + +=267.= During the inspection of arms the inspector, observes the +appearance of the men, horses, equipment, and clothing. + +After the inspection of arms is completed he makes such further +inspection of equipment, clothing, etc., as he may consider desirable. +During this part of the inspection the troopers may be permitted to +stand =at ease=. + +=268.= If an inspection of arms of a detailed character be made in +connection with a _dismounted_ formation it is conducted by the above +commands and in accordance with the above methods in so far as +applicable. Rifles are presented for inspection as described without +special indication when the inspector approaches the rank after +commanding =FRONT= (par. 258). Except when rifles are slung as +provided in the next sentence, each trooper executes =order arms= as +soon as his rifle is returned to him. Should the troopers be armed +with both rifle and pistol, each trooper slings his rifle as soon as +inspected if the equipment in use so permits; otherwise the rifles are +stacked (par. 115) by command after being inspected. The pistols are +then inspected, after which =take arms= (par. 116) is executed before +the troopers are dismissed. + + + + +PART II--ELEMENTARY COLLECTIVE INSTRUCTION. + + +=Section 5. Elementary collective instruction.= + +GENERAL PROVISIONS. + +=321.= The elementary collective instruction of the trooper includes +the instruction in the =School of the Squad= and in the mechanism of +the movements prescribed in the =School of the Platoon=. This latter +instruction is given as prescribed in par. 444. + + +=Section 6. Basic principles of the drill.= + +=322.= The following provisions apply generally to the =School of the +Squad and to all subsequent drill=. Previous provisions of a similar +general character are to be found in pars. 43-49. + +=323.= =Leading=: A commander leading his unit marches in the +direction and at the gait desired. He is followed at a specified +distance by the base (Def.), which conforms to his gait and direction. +The commander thus controls the movements of the base, and may at any +time by his indication conveyed in the most convenient way (as by his +own movements, his commands, or signals) cause the base to change its +direction or to increase or decrease the pace or gait or to halt, +according to the object in view. Elements of the same kind as the base +regulate upon the latter conforming to its gait and direction. + +=324.= =Directing leader=, =directing guide=: A commander who desires +to become temporarily free in his movements may leave his position as +leader, first indicating: =DISREGARD= (_see_ Signals) for the +information of the leader of the base unit, who then becomes the +=directing leader= (Def.). The latter then ceases to follow in the +trace of the commander and temporarily conducts the march. In the +absence of other indication from the leader he maintains the existing +direction and gait. + +=When necessary= the conduct of the march of a group (e.g., a platoon) +having no subordinate leader may similarly be intrusted to the guide. +The latter then becomes the =directing guide= (Def.). + +=325.= Whenever a change of formation involves a break in the +continuity of the leading the leader habitually moves at once to his +new position, so as to resume leadership with the least practicable +delay. He usually starts at the command of execution for the movement. +Should he start for his new position before the command of execution +he first cautions or Signals: =DISREGARD= for the information of the +base. + +=326.= =Change of directing unit (base)=: Whenever a change of +formation results in a change of the base, the base of the formation +from which the movement is executed continues, in the absence of +specific indication to the contrary, to be the base until the new base +is indicated. + +In movements from line by which column is formed directly to a flank, +the element of the column on the flank toward which the column is +formed is the base upon which other similar elements regulate during +the formation of the column as well as after the column is formed. + +=327.= =Changes of direction=: Any movement may be executed either +from the halt or when marching, unless otherwise prescribed. If +executed from the halt the command =forward= need not be prefixed to +any other preparatory command that indicates a direction of march; +thus, being at a halt, 1. =Column right=, 2. =MARCH=; but, 1. =Forward +trot=, 2. =MARCH.= + +=328.= To insure certainty of prompt execution, commands (and signals) +must be so given that their meaning is unmistakable. The preparatory +command must be given at such an interval of time before the command +of execution as will admit of the former being properly understood, +and should be followed by a distinct pause that properly varies in +length with the size of the body of troops that is to execute the +movement. The command of execution should be given the instant the +movement is to begin. + +=329.= All changes of direction are simply applications of the +principle of leading as explained in pars. 323 and 367. + +(_a_) The =turn= (par. 386) and =half turn= (par. 388) are _special_ +cases of the change of direction =in line= in that they involve a +change of direction of _90 deg._ and _45 deg._, respectively; _as executed by +the platoon and squad_, they differ further from the general case of +the change of direction in that the leader follows a _specially +prescribed arc_ during the turn (par. 387); in the troop and larger +units, the leader in each case regulates the arc upon which he moves +during the turn in accordance with the length of the front and the +requirements of the special case. + +(_b_) For a change of direction in any column formation, the elements +of the column successively change direction _on the same ground_, the +change in each successive element being made in accordance with the +principles that regulate the change of direction in line (_a_). In +each successive element the leader (if any) and the guide move over +the _same path that is followed by the leader at the head of the +column_. + +=330.= The principles and methods laid down in the =School of the +Trooper= (dismounted and mounted) are, except as may otherwise be +indicated, or where clearly applicable only to individual instruction, +to be followed in corresponding instruction in the =School of the +Squad= and in all subsequent training. The same commands apply unless +otherwise stated. + +Certain modifications in the execution of some of the movements, +incident to their use in collective instruction, are noted in +appropriate places in the =School of the Squad=. + +=331.= =Column of twos and of troopers=: Movements, involving the use +of column of twos or troopers, although simple in principle, are not +adapted to execution as movements of precision, and the details of +their execution will be regulated accordingly (pars. 393-400). +Familiarity with the practical use of these formations must be +insisted upon, but they will be taken in the simplest manner +consistent with efficiency in their use. + +=382.= To avoid repetition the detailed descriptions and explanations +of collective movements are, as a rule, based only upon the execution +of the mounted movements. + +=383.= _Gaits for mounted movements._--All mounted movements not +specially excepted may be executed at the trot or gallop (par. 239). + +For the execution of a movement at the =trot or gallop= the command +=trot= or =gallop= precedes the command =march= unless marching at the +gait desired or unless it be otherwise prescribed. When the indication +for the =trot= or =gallop= is included in the command for the movement +it precedes the command =march=; thus, 1. =Forward, trot=; 2. =MARCH.= + +=334.= When the troopers of any element (Def.) move at different +gaits, if the gait of such =element= be referred to, the gait of its +=base= is to be understood. + +=335.= A gait is said to be =correspondingly faster or correspondingly +slower= than another gait when there is a difference of one degree +between the two (par. 239). + +=336.= In the rules included in pars. 333 to 337 the expression "other +elements" (Def.) means in each case elements of the _same kind as the +base_. + +=337.= (_a_) In movements from the halt the base moves at the walk +unless another gait be stated in the command or indicated by the +leader's movements. + +(_b_) =In forming line to the front from column= the other elements +(par. 336) take, without command, a correspondingly faster gait than +the base. =If gallop= be _commanded_ at any time, it applies only to +the other elements (_f_). The base (leading element) habitually +preserves the gait of march (_a_). The leader controls the movements +of the base according to the object in view. He may diminish its pace +or gait or halt it to hasten the formation. A command to decrease the +gait or to halt, given during the execution of the movement, applies +only to those elements that have already completed the movement. The +leader habitually so controls the base that elements in rear need not +move faster than a maneuver gallop in order to execute the movement. + +(_c_) =Column to the front is formed from line= on the base at the +gait of march (_a_) or at the gait ordered (_e_). The other elements +(par. 336) take or maintain a correspondingly slower gait (or, if +halted, remain so) until they can move at the gait of the base to take +their places in the column. If an increased gait be _commanded_ at any +time, it is taken at first only by the leader and base or by the +leader and those elements that have already moved to enter the column +(_f_) + +(_d_) In cases not covered by (_b_) or (_c_), if the base and other +elements have equal distances to go they move at the gait of march or +at that indicated in the command (e.g., 1. =Platoons right turn, +trot=; 2. =MARCH=). + +(_e_) In cases not covered by (_b_), (_c_), or (_d_) (e.g., assemble +from =foragers=, par. 414), or by some special provision in the +description of the corresponding movement (e.g., =echelon=, par. 702) +the base maintains the gait of march (_a_) or takes that of the +leader; the other elements move at a correspondingly faster or slower +gait as may be necessary for the execution of the movement and on +arriving at their places take the gait of the base (par. 338). If a +special gait be commanded, it is taken by the base or by the other +elements, in accordance with the principle stated in (_f_). + +(_f_) When the commander indicates a special gait, whether in the +preparatory command or during the execution of the movement, the +effect is always to, _hasten the completion of the movement_. This +principle will assist in applying the rules in (_b_), (_c_), and +(_e_). + +(_g_) Changes of gait made by elements, without command, in accordance +with the above rules, are, except as specially indicated in the +commands, changes of one degree. + +=338.= Any exceptions to the above rules are noted where they occur. + +=339.= _Gaits for movements on foot._--(_a_) The general principles of +gaits for mounted movements apply to movements on foot with the +modifications noted in (_b_) to (_g_), below, and such others as are +to be readily inferred from the application of the principles of the +=School of the Trooper, Dismounted=. + +(_b_) No element moves in =double time= unless the movement be +executed when marching in =double time= or =double time= be commanded +(par. 47) or otherwise indicated by the leader. No trooper increases +the length of the step or the cadence unless specially so prescribed. + +(_c_) The leader so controls the movements of the base as to +facilitate the execution of the movement in accordance with (_b_), +above. This will involve halting the base whenever certain movements +(e.g., those from column into line) are executed in =quick time=. + +(_d_) If =double time= be included in the preparatory command for a +movement, the indication is obeyed in accordance with the principles +of par. 337. + +(_e_) In movements from line into column, and in other similar +movements, if executed at =attention=, the troopers while waiting to +take their places in the column do not =halt= unless halt be commanded +by a platoon (or troop) commander. They =mark time= instead if +necessary for the execution of the movement. + +(_f_) In applying the rules for mounted movements to movements on foot +=quick time= will be understood where =walk= is referred to and +=double time= where any faster gait is referred to. + +(_g_) Any exceptions to the above rules are stated where they occur. + + +=Section 7. The School of the Squad.= + +=340.= As soon as the troopers are sufficiently advanced in their +instruction in the =School of the Trooper= they will be grouped into +temporary squads for elementary collective instruction. This +instruction will be conducted in accordance with the general +principles indicated in par. 42; progress therein should be so +regulated that no collective movement will be taken up until the +trooper, by previous individual instruction, has been properly +prepared for its execution. + +=341.= Instruction in the =School of the Squad= is intended primarily +to teach recruits the elementary movements upon which the entire drill +is based. It may be recurred to whenever necessary in cases where +troopers evidence the need of further elementary work. + +=342.= For elementary collective instruction groups of not to exceed +six or eight men can be used to best advantage. The actual instruction +of each group should be conducted by a noncommissioned officer, but +the instruction must be closely supervised by a commissioned officer +(par. 37). + +=343.= The system of drill contained in these regulations is based +largely upon the actual leading of units by their respective chiefs or +commanders. During the elementary instruction of recruits, both +mounted and dismounted, leading will be emphasized as indicated in +par. 344. Thereafter the application of leading will conform to pars. +448 to 456. + +=344.= The first collective instruction will, therefore, be in +conforming to the march of a leader, thus confirming and extending the +instruction given in the =School of the Trooper= (pars. 295, 298); +_and reasonable proficiency in this instruction must be secured before +any attempt is made to utilize either commands or signals in the +execution of collective movements_, except, as prescribed in par. 363. + +=345.= It is difficult for a leader to lead the squad properly and at +the same time to supervise the march and correct the errors of +individual troopers. For this reason it is desirable, especially in +the earlier collective drills, that the instructor have as an +assistant another noncommissioned officer or a well-instructed +trooper. The instructor then leads the squad and requires his +assistant (who takes the positions best adapted for the purpose in +view) to supervise closely the movements of the troopers and to +correct errors by means of cautions _addressed quietly by name to the +individual man or men concerned_. Later the instructor similarly +supervises the execution of the march while requiring his assistant to +lead the squad. As the troopers advance in the instruction the +instructor should give each of them such practice in leading the squad +as the progress of the individual trooper concerned may appear to +justify. + +=346.= When instruction in leading (par. 367) has advanced to the +point where the guide can preserve his proper distance from the leader +and conform promptly and smoothly to the latter's movements, the other +troopers meantime preserving their interval and alignment without +undue constraint or unnecessarily abrupt changes of gait or pace, the +instruction is extended progressively to include, in accordance with +the methods prescribed in par. 347, the execution of the movements +prescribed for the squad. + +=347.= Throughout the instruction prescribed by par. 346 the squad +will continue as before to be _led_. In teaching each new movement the +example and movements of the instructor as leader will be supplemented +at first by oral commands only, then by oral commands accompanied by +the corresponding arm signals for those movements for which such +signals are provided (_see_ Signals, pars. 988-996), then by signals +alone. _The commands and signals will be given by the actual leader._ +When the instructor is not actually leading (par. 345) he may either +indicate to the leader the movements to be executed or else leave to +him the selection of such movements. + +=348.= After the oral commands and arm signals are thoroughly +understood the instructor will practice the squad in passing from one +formation to another, using oral commands for some movements, signals +for some, and causing some (e.g., changes of direction) to be executed +by conforming to the movements of the leader without the additional +indication of either oral commands or signals. + +=349.= The troopers must be accustomed to conforming, _without the +assistance of any command or signal given to the squad as a whole_, to +simple movements (e.g., movements =front into line=) initiated at the +head of a column formation by a command so given as to be heard by +only the leading troopers. + +With reasonable practice the more essential changes of formation that +are executed toward the direction of march can readily be taken by the +squad by conforming, without other indication, to the movements of the +troopers nearest the leader. As many movements in service must be +executed under conditions of noise, dust, etc., that will render it +difficult for the commands or signals of the leader to be understood +except by those near him, _practice, in conforming promptly and +intelligently to the movements of the elements nearest the leader is +important and must be given careful attention_. + +The object ultimately to be sought in the instruction is the quiet, +rapid, and effective handling of the squad with a _minimum of either +oral commands or signals_. The squad is required to pass rapidly from +one formation to another, a new movement being occasionally initiated +before the execution of the one preceding it has been completed. + + +TO FORM THE SQUAD, MOUNTED. + +=350.= To form the squad =in line= (par. 368-_a_), the leader +(instructor) designates a trooper to act as the base of the formation, +indicates to such trooper the point where the right of the squad is to +rest and the direction in which the line is to face, takes position at +a convenient distance in front of and facing the point where the +center of the squad is to rest, and commands: =LEAD INTO LINE=. The +base trooper =leads out= (par. 188) and takes position as indicated; +the other troopers lead out so as to approach the line _successively +directly from the rear_ and in single rank form on the line +established by the base trooper, in order from right to left. The +troopers form at stand to horse (par. 187) with intervals of 18 inches +between horses. + +The line having thus formed, the leader calls the roll and commands, +=COUNT FOURS= (par. 84). + +Where there is an incomplete four the troopers in it are cautioned as +to the numbers finally assigned them (par. 368-_b_). + +When but a single trooper is available for an incomplete four the four +is habitually broken up and a trooper is placed as an extra file +closer. This rule may, however, be modified in connection with the +instruction of recruits. + +The squad having counted fours, the leader causes the squad to mount +(par. 358). + +=351.= =The formation in column of fours, twos, or troopers= (par. +368-_b_, _c_, _d_) is similarly executed. The leader commands: =LEAD +INTO COLUMN (COLUMN OF TWOS, COLUMN OF TROOPERS)=. The trooper upon +whom the formation is based (par. 350) becomes No. 1 of the leading +four. The elements of the column form, in order from front to rear, +with distances of 4 feet between successive, fours, twos, or troopers. +In column of fours or twos each four or two forms on its right trooper +as in line. + +When the formation is in column of _fours_ the command =COUNT FOURS= +is omitted. The leader cautions: =NOTE YOUR NUMBERS=. + +=352.= =The squad may also form in similar manner after the troopers +mount.= In this case the leader causes the troopers to mount +individually after saddling and commands: =RIDE INTO LINE (COLUMN, +COLUMN OF TWOS, COLUMN OF TROOPERS).= The interval between the mounted +troopers is 6 inches from knee to knee. + + +TO FORM THE SQUAD, DISMOUNTED. + +=353.= For the dismounted formation of the squad, =in line=, when not +armed with the rifle, the leader designates the trooper to act as the +base, indicates the latter's position, and takes his own position as +described in par. 350, above. He then commands: =FALL IN=. The +troopers form as in pars. 57 and 58. The leader then calls the roll +and causes the squad to count fours. + +If armed with the rifle, the troopers fall in with rifles at the +_order_. As soon as the line or column is formed the leader commands: +1. =Inspection=, 2. =ARMS=, 3. =Right shoulder=, 4. =ARMS= (par. +91-_2d_), and calls the roll. Each man, as his name is called, answers +=here= and executes =order arms=. + +The formation in column of fours, twos, or troopers is conducted in +accordance with the modifications indicated. The commands of the +leader are: =FALL IN, IN COLUMN (COLUMN OF TWOS, COLUMN OF TROOPERS)=. +The distance between successive fours is 92 inches; between successive +twos, 40 inches; between successive troopers, 14 inches. + + +TO MOUNT AND DISMOUNT. + +=354.= The squad being =in line=, at stand to horse, the habitual +commands for mounting are: 1. =Prepare to mount=, 2. =MOUNT=; 3. +=Form=, 4. =RANK.= At the first command the odd numbers lead out 4 +yards directly to the front, and all execute the movements and take +the final positions prescribed in par. 191-_a_. At the second command +all the troopers complete, simultaneously, the movements of mounting +as prescribed in par. 191-_b_. At the fourth command the even numbers +move up into their intervals in the line. If the squad has dismounted +from line and has formed rank (par. 356), the odd numbers stand fast +at the command =Prepare to mount= and all mount in place. + +If the squad be mounted in column of fours; the third and fourth +commands are omitted. At the first command the troopers of each four +open out fanwise, Nos. 1 and 2 to the right, Nos. 3 and 4 to the left. +Nos. 1 and 4 open out a little more than Nos. 2 and 3, all opening +only enough to permit the troopers to mount without interfering with +each other. The troopers habitually straighten their horses in the +column as soon as they have mounted, but this requirement may be +relaxed whenever mounting in unison is not required (par. 358). The +squad in =column of twos= is mounted by commands and methods +conforming to those used for mounting from column of fours. + +=355.= The preparatory oral command for mounting may be omitted. The +squad then executes at the command =MOUNT= all the movements +prescribed in par. 354 for the commands, 1. =Prepare to mount=, 2. +=MOUNT.= The troopers mount promptly, but not =in unison=. + +The preparatory _signal_ for mounting, when followed _immediately_ by +the signal of execution, will be understood as equivalent to the oral +command =MOUNT=, and will be executed accordingly. + +=356.= The squad being in line, the habitual commands for dismounting +are: 1. =Prepare to dismount=, 2. =DISMOUNT=; 3. =Form=, 4. =RANK.= At +the first command the odd numbers ride 4 yards directly to the front, +regulating on the right, and all the troopers execute the movements +and take the final position prescribed in par. 192-_a_. At the second +command the troopers execute, simultaneously, the movements prescribed +in par. 192-_b_. At the fourth command the even numbers lead into +their intervals in the rank. The third and fourth commands are given +only in case it is desired to form rank. The squad may be dismounted +and, without forming rank, execute =rest= or =at ease= (par. 359), or +be inspected, mounted, or dismissed. The modifications indicated for +dismounting in column of fours and column of twos correspond to those +prescribed in par. 354 for mounting from the corresponding formation, +except that the horses are not habitually straightened in the column +after dismounting unless the dismounted squad moves forward (the +troopers leading their horses). + +=357.= The preparatory oral command for dismounting, may be omitted. +The squad then executes at the command =DISMOUNT= all the movements +prescribed in par. 356 for the commands: 1. =Prepare to dismount=, 2. +=DISMOUNT.= The troopers dismount promptly but not in unison. + +The preparatory _signal_ for dismounting, when followed _immediately_ +by the signal of execution, will be understood as equivalent to the +oral command =DISMOUNT=, and will be executed accordingly. + +=358.= Until the individual instruction of recruits has advanced to a +point where they have acquired reasonable proficiency in mounting and +dismounting, these movements will be executed at collective as well as +at individual instruction by the commands and methods indicated in +pars. 355 and 357. After such proficiency has been acquired, mounting +and dismounting at close-order drills, at ceremonies, and at all +occasions of a ceremonial nature will habitually be executed in unison +by the commands and methods prescribed in pars. 354 and 356, +respectively. The commands and methods prescribed in pars. 355 and +357, respectively, may, in the discretion of the commander, continue +to be employed on all other duty. + + +THE RESTS AND ROUTE ORDER. + +=359.= The mounted squad executes the =rests= and =route order= as +prescribed in par. 221. After dismounting from line, =rest= or =at +ease= may be given either before or after forming rank. + +The dismounted squad executes the =rests= and =route order= as +prescribed in pars. 60 and 61. + + +TO DISMISS THE SQUAD. + +=360.= The squad, in =column of troopers=, is dismissed as prescribed +for that formation in par. 222. The squad in =column of fours= is +dismissed at the same command. The trooper on the right of the leading +four leads out as indicated in par. 222 and is followed, in turn, by +the other troopers of that four, then by the troopers of the next +four, and so on successively to the rear of the column. In each four +the troopers lead out in order from right to left. The dismissal from +=column of twos= is similarly executed. The squad being =in line= is +dismissed by the commands and methods prescribed in par. 222 for a +line with intervals, except that the troopers, in order to have their +proper distance, move out successively from right to left instead of +simultaneously. At the commands: 1. =By the right and left=, 2. =FALL +OUT=, the movement is executed in a similar manner from both flanks of +the line. After having dismounted from line the squad may be dismissed +without forming rank. + +Dismounted, without horses and not under arms, the command is +=DISMISSED=. + +Dismounted, without horses but armed with the rifle, the squad is +dismissed as in par. 114. + + +ALIGNMENTS. + +=361.= At the preliminary instruction (conducted without formal +command) the instructor has two troopers on the right of the rank move +forward a convenient distance and halt. He then aligns these two +troopers carefully, with the proper interval as =in line= (par. +368-_a_), and causes the other troopers to note the details of the +alignment. The other troopers are then required to move up one at a +time and align themselves, with the correct interval, on the line thus +established. The troopers move forward, in order from right to left, +at successive repetitions by the instructor of the caution =NEXT=. +Each trooper, when on or near the line, executes =eyes right= (par. +64), aligns himself accurately on the line established by the trooper +or troopers on his right, and looks to the front as soon as he thinks +himself correctly aligned. The instructor explains and corrects any +errors. Similar instruction is given the troopers in aligning +themselves to the left. As soon as reasonable proficiency is attained +but a single trooper is moved forward, and the alignment is made in +the same manner upon the single trooper established as the base. + +The instruction is similarly given with the center trooper moved to +the front as a base. Two troopers, one on the right, the other on the +left of the base, then move forward at each repetition of the caution +=NEXT=. + +The instructor observes in the mounted instruction: That each trooper +moves his horse promptly and halts with his horse correctly disposed; +that he sits squarely on his horse without advancing either shoulder +or leaning his body to the front or rear; that he dresses promptly as +he arrives on the line; and that he makes proper use of the aids +(pars. 200 to 208). + +In the first drills the basis of the alignment is established parallel +to the front of the section; afterwards in oblique directions. + +=362.= When the troopers have acquired reasonable proficiency in +aligning themselves, as above, the alignment is executed at the +command =DRESS=, given by the instructor from his position as leader. +The trooper designated as the guide (par. 371) is always the base +trooper of the alignment and places himself accurately 3 yards in rear +of the leader. All the other troopers align themselves promptly on the +base trooper, continuing to look toward him until the command, +=FRONT=. At this last command, given when the alignment is completed, +all turn the head and eyes quickly to the front and take the position +of =attention= (pars. 59, 198). Movements in the rank then cease. The +instructor then habitually faces the squad or goes to either flank to +verify the accuracy of the dressing, first cautioning the guide to +remain in place. + +=363.= The troopers and their mounts must be so trained as to enable +alignment and interval to be kept with sufficient accuracy to maintain +cohesion in the mounted charge and to, present a creditable appearance +at ceremonies and at other occasions of a formal or ceremonial +character. A disproportionate amount of time and energy will not be +devoted to this detail. + +=364.= The use of dressing _by command_ is ordinarily confined to +elementary instruction (as preparation for the march in line) and to +formations of a distinctly ceremonial character. At all other times +the troopers are required habitually to align themselves on the base +trooper without special command and to look to the front as soon as +aligned. + +Formal dressing is employed only when the squad is at a halt. + +=365.= The caution: =DRESS=, may, if necessary, be given to the squad +when marching (par. 367); but it will not be employed when it is +practicable to use instead cautions addressed by name to the +individual trooper or troopers who are at fault. + +=366.= Alignments, dismounted, are executed by the same general +methods as when mounted. At the command: =DRESS=, the hand is placed +upon the hip to verify the interval (par. 57). Each trooper in +dressing so places himself that his right arm rests lightly against +the arm of the man on his right and that his eyes and shoulders are in +line with those of the man on his right. The left hand is dropped to +the side at the command =FRONT=. + + +LEADING THE SQUAD. + +(_See also_ pars. 322-332.) + +=367.= The squad being in line at a halt, the instructor directs the +guide (par. 371) to maintain a position at a distance of 3 yards +(about one horse length) in rear of him and to follow accurately in +his path, whether such path be a straight line or a curve. He explains +to the other troopers that in marching they are so to regulate on the +guide as to preserve as nearly as practicable their alignment and +interval in the rank, individually increasing and decreasing the gait +or pace (Def.) as may be necessary to do this. All are cautioned that +they must learn to keep their proper positions in the rank without +unnecessary rigidity without making sudden changes in gait or pace and +without keeping their eyes constantly fixed on the guide. They are +instructed that while riding with the head and eyes habitually +directed as in par. 198 they will keep an alert lookout over the +ground in front, cast frequent glances toward the leader so as to +observe the latter's movements, and glance occasionally toward the +guide to assure that the alignment is being correctly maintained. +Having given these instructions, the leader places himself, facing to +the front, 3 yards in front of the guide, commands: =FOLLOW ME=, and +moves forward. The leader must be, careful to march steadily, so +regulating his direction and gait at first as to enable the guide to +conform without difficulty. + +Each trooper keeps his horse straight in the rank, maintaining his +alignment with the guide and his proper interval (par. 368-_a_) from +the man next him on the side of the guide. The troopers yield to +pressure from the side of the guide and resist pressure from the +opposite direction. All adjustments are made gradually without +crowding or confusion. + +In the beginning the leader moves at a walk and makes only slight +changes of direction. As the instructor completes each change of +direction he indicates the _new_ direction of march by extending his +arm as in signal =forward= (par. 990), dropping the hand to the side +when the guide's horse is _straightened in the new direction_. When +the troopers have become sufficiently practiced in adjusting +themselves to the movements of the instructor, the latter makes the +changes of direction more marked, and moves, during such changes, on +the arcs of smaller circles. Finally, he requires the squad to apply +the principles of leading in the manner indicated in pars. 346-349. As +each movement is taken up the principles of leading that apply are +explained in detail, so that all may understand clearly the identity +and position of the base. The base trooper (guide) must clearly +understand his duties. (Fig. 31.) + +[Illustration: FIG. 37, par. 367.] + + +SQUAD FORMATIONS. + +The formations of the squad for drill, march, or combat are as +follows: + + +CLOSE ORDER. + +=368.= (_a_) =Line=: The troopers are abreast of each other with +intervals (Def.) of 6 inches (mounted) or 4 inches (dismounted) +between troopers. + +(_b_) =Column of fours=: The troopers of each four are arranged as =in +line=. The fours follow successively one behind another with distances +(Def.) between Successive fours of 4 feet, mounted, or 92 inches, +dismounted. When a four includes less than four troopers it is an +=incomplete four=. Places in an incomplete four are habitually filled +in the following order: No. 2, No. 3, No. 4, No. 1 (par. 374). + +(_c_) =Column of twos=: The troopers of each two are arranged as =in +line=, the twos following successively, one behind another, with +distances between successive twos of 4 feet, mounted, or 40 inches, +dismounted. If any two have but a single trooper the latter takes the +position corresponding to the right trooper of the incomplete two +(par. 374). + +(_d_) =Column of troopers=: The troopers of each four follow +successively, one behind another, with distances between consecutive +troopers of 4 feet when mounted, or 14 inches when dismounted. + + +EXTENDED ORDER. + +(_e_) =Foragers=: The troopers are abreast of each other, with +intervals of 3 yards between troopers, unless some other interval be +specially designated. + +The dismounted formation corresponding to =foragers= is =skirmishers=. +The interval between troopers in line of skirmishers is one-half pace +unless some other interval be designated. + +_In the employment of a squad or other small detachment the +designation of a greater interval than one-half pace is habitual +rather than exceptional (par. 408)._ + +In a line of skirmishers at one-half pace interval each man may be +considered as occupying, including his interval, about 1 yard of +front. + +The squad may also be extended in depth as prescribed in par. 413. + + +ORDER IN THE SQUAD. + +=369.= When it is said that a unit is =in order= in any formation it +is meant that the arrangement and condition of the component elements +is such that the unit is ready to execute, in the accustomed manner, +any movement that is intended to be executed from the formation in +question. The conditions essential to =order= in each formation of the +squad are stated in paragraph 370. The squad, =in line=, for example, +would not be =in order= if the troopers did not know their numbers, +for it could then execute no movement based upon the division into +fours, twos, or troopers. + +=370.= The squad =in line=, =column of fours=, or =foragers= is =in +order= when the troopers of each four are arranged, from right to left +in the four, in the order of their respective numbers, and each knows +his number. + +The squad =in column of twos= is =in order= when the twos of each four +are next to each other in the column, odd numbers on the right, and +each trooper knows his number. + +When the two composed of 1 and 2 is in front, the column is said to be +=right in front=; when the two composed of 3 and 4 is in front, the +column is said to be =left in front=. + +The squad =in column of troopers= is =in order= when the troopers of +each four are next to one another in the column, are arranged from +front to rear in the order 1, 2, 3, 4, or 4, 3, 2, 1, and each trooper +knows his number. When the order is 1, 2, 3, 4, the column is said to +be =right in front=; when the order is 4, 3, 2, 1, =left in front=. + +It is not necessary to order in the squad, in any of the above +formations, that a particular trooper or troopers be in any designated +four, nor that the fours have any special relative order from right to +left or front to rear. + + +GUIDE OF THE SQUAD. + +(_see also_ Def. =Base=, and par. 326.) + +=371.= At the original formation of the squad =in line=, the leader +designates a trooper by name as =guide= of the squad. The guide of the +squad =in line= and =foragers= is habitually a trooper at or near the +center of the squad; any trooper may, however, be designated as guide. + +=372.= A trooper having once been designated as guide of the squad in +line continues to act as such, =in line= or =foragers=, until another +trooper be specifically designated as guide. With a view, however, to +avoiding possible doubt as to the identity of the guide, the leader at +each change of formation that terminates in line or foragers +habitually indicates the guide of the new formation. + +=373.= To designate the guide the leader cautions: (So-and-so) =THE +GUIDE=, and habitually places himself 3 yards in front of the trooper +named if not already in that position. A trooper designated as guide +will, at the time of the designation, raise his hand or weapon to a +position vertically above his head, hold the position for a moment, +and then lower his arm to his side without further command. The leader +or his assistant may at any time cause the guide thus to indicate his +identity to the other troopers by cautioning: =GUIDE=. The leader may +change the guide of the squad in line at any time by indicating +=disregard= (par. 990), placing himself in front of another trooper +and designating the latter as guide in the manner prescribed above. + +=374.= The base of the squad in each of the column formations is the +leading element (four, two, or trooper, respectively). + +The guide of the leading (base) element is also the guide of the +squad. In each four No. 2 is the guide; in each two the right trooper +(No. 1 or No. 3). In an incomplete four or two the position of the +guide is always filled. The guide of each element in rear of the base +follows in the trace of the guide of the base (leading) element at the +prescribed distance. + +=375.= Whenever in the execution of any movement a four or two moves +to its new position by an oblique (or movement approximating an +oblique) the trooper on the side toward which the oblique is made acts +as guide of the element during the oblique. At all other times the +guide in a four or two is as indicated in par. 374 unless specially +otherwise stated. + +=376.= The guide of the squad habitually follows the leader at 3 yards +distance, but the leader may designate a greater distance, in which +case the guide marches accordingly. + +=377.= When a guide temporarily is =directing guide= (par. 324), it is +necessary that he continue accurately in the direction of march or in +the direction indicated for him by the leader. This is an application +of the marching upon fixed points prescribed in the =School of the +Trooper= (par. 232). + + +MOVEMENTS EXECUTED BY THE SQUAD. + +=378.= Any formation (close or extended order) prescribed for the +squad may be taken directly from any other _close-order_ formation. +Being in extended order the squad, to pass directly to close order, +must execute the assembly or rally. + +=379.= Subject to such modifications as are indicated under the +respective paragraphs describing the movements, the =dismounted squad= +executes, at the same commands as prescribed for the mounted squad, +such movements as are not obviously inapplicable to dismounted duty. +The execution of the dismounted movements will, where differences in +the mounted and dismounted methods necessarily exist, be in accord +with the principles explained in the =School of the Trooper, +Dismounted=, corresponding changes in the details of execution being +made. + +=380.= The general principles regulating gait and pace for both +mounted and dismounted movements are stated in pars. 333-339. +Modifications of those principles, if any, are stated under the +corresponding paragraphs in the =School of the Squad=. + + +COMMANDS AND CORRESPONDING ARM SIGNALS. + +=381.= Following is a list of the principal commands employed in the +=School of the Squad=, together with the corresponding arm signals, if +any. The list includes only a few of the commands also found in the +=School of the Trooper= (mounted or dismounted.) The commands are +arranged alphabetically for convenient reference. The description of +the signals will be found in par. 990. + + -------------------------------+-------+--------------------------- + COMMANDS. | PARS. | ARM SIGNALS. + -------------------------------+-------+--------------------------- + =1. Assemble, 2. MARCH= | 414 | =Assemble.=[7] + | | + =1. Backward, 2. MARCH= | 384 | None. + | | + =1. By the right (left) flank, | | + 2. MARCH= | 411 | =March to the flank.=[7] + | | + =CIRCLE HORSES= | 428 | None. + | | + =1. Column, 2. MARCH= | 399 | =Column.=[7] + | | + =1. Column half right (left), | | + 2. MARCH= | 396 | Change direction.[7] + | | (_See_ par. 386.) + | | + =1. Column of twos, 2. MARCH= | 399 | =Column--twos.=[8] + | | + =1. Column right (left), | | + 2. MARCH= | 396 | =Change direction.=[7] + | | (_See_ par. 386.) + | | + =COUPLE HEAD AND TAIL= | 427 | None. + | | + =DISMOUNT= | 357 | =Prepare to dismount.=[7] + | | (Given as explained in par. + | | 357.) + | | + =1. Foragers, 2. MARCH= { 408 } =Foragers.=[7] + { 410 } + | | + =1. Forward, 2. MARCH= { 382 } =Forward.=[7] + { 412 } + | | + =1. Fours right (left), { 391 } =March to the flank.=[7] + 2. MARCH= { 400 } + | | + =1. Fours right (left) about, { 401 } =To the rear[7] (left about + 2. MARCH= { 402 } only).= + | | + =1. Fours right (left), |403-_c_| None. + column left (right)=; | | + =2 MARCH.= | | + | | + =1. Fours (twos or troopers) | 413 | None. + at so many yards distance, | | + 2. MARCH.= | | + | | + =1. Gallop, 2. MARCH= | 382 | From the trot only: + | | =Increase the gait.=[7][9] + | | + =HORSES BACK= | 432 | None + | | + =INCLINE TO THE RIGHT= { 390 } None + { 396 } + | | + =1. Nos. 1, 2, and 4; | 436 | None. + 2. FORM ON FOOT MOUNT= | 355 | =Prepare to mount.= (Given + | | as explained in par. 355.) + | | + =1. Prepare to dismount, { 356 } =Prepare to dismount.=[7] + 2. DISMOUNT= { 358 } + | | + =1. Prepare to mount, { 354 } =Prepare to mount.=[7] + 2. MOUNT= { 358 } + | | + =RALLY= | 416 | =Rally= (no preparatory signal). + | | Oral command habitually + | | accompanies signal. + | | + =1. Right (left) by fours, |403-_a_| None. + 2. MARCH= | | + | | + =1. Right (left) by troopers, {393-_b_} None. + 2. MARCH= {403-_b_} + | | + =1. Right (left) by twos, |393-_a_| None + 2. MARCH= |403-_b_| + | | + =1. Right (left) forward, |403-_d_| None. + fours right (left)=; | | + =2. MARCH.= | | + | | + =1. Right (left) half turn, | 388 | =Change direction.=[7] The + 2. MARCH; 3. Forward, | | signal of execution for the + 4. MARCH=; or 3. =Squad=, | | change of direction is + 4. =HALT.= | | followed by =forward or + | | halt=[7] (par. 386). + | | + =1. Right (left) front into | 409 | None. + foragers= | | + (or =skirmishers=), | | + 2. MARCH.= | | + | | + =1. Right (left) front into | 397 | None. + line, 2. MARCH= | | + | | + =1. Right (left) turn, | 386 | Change direction.[7] The + 2. MARCH; 3. Forward | | signal of execution for the + 4. MARCH; or 3. Squad, | | change of direction is + 4. HALT= | | followed by =forward=[7] or + | | =halt=.[7] + | | + =1. Skirmishers, 2. MARCH= { 408 } =Skirmishers.=[7] + { 410 } + | | + =1. Squad, 2. HALT= | 383 | =Halt.=[7] + | | + =TO FIGHT ON FOOT.= When given | 430 | =To fight on foot.= (No + orally the indication =ACTION| | preparatory signal.) + RIGHT= (=LEFT, FRONT=) is | | + habitually added to the above| | + command. =FIRE AT WILL= may | | + also immediately follow the | | + above command (par. 430). | | + | | + =1. To the rear, 2. MARCH= | 412 | =To the rear.=[7] + | | + =1. Troopers right (left) | 402 | To the rear[7] (left about + about, 2. MARCH.= (Given | | only). + only from column of troopers.) | + | | + =1. Troopers right (left) | 385 | None. + oblique, 2. MARCH.= | | + | | + =1. Trot, 2. MARCH= | 239 | From the =walk=: =Increase + | | the gait.=[7][9] + | | From the =gallop=: =Decrease + | | the gait.=[7][9] + | | + =1. Twos right (left), | 400 | =March to the flank.=[7] + 2. MARCH.= (Given only from | | + column of twos and as an | | + exceptional movement.) | | + | | + =1. Twos right (left) about, | 402 | To the =rear=[7] (left about + 2. MARCH.= (Given only from | | only). + column of twos.) | | + | | + =1. Walk, 2. MARCH= | 239 | From the trot only: =Decrease= + | | =the gait.=[7][9] + -------------------------------+-------+------------------------------- + + [Footnote 7: Signals marked thus are preparatory signals; the + signal of execution in each case is made as prescribed in + par. 990.] + + [Footnote 8: In signals marked thus (combination signals) the + preparatory signal consists of more than one element; the + signal of execution follows the last element of the + preparatory signal.] + + [Footnote 9: See pars. 239, 333. When a gait signal is added + to the preparatory command the resulting signal is given as a + combination signal.] + + +DETAILED DESCRIPTION OF MOVEMENTS, CLOSE ORDER. + +=382.= =Being in line at a halt, to march to the front:= 1. =Forward=, +2. =MARCH.= + +The leader moves forward, followed at a distance of 3 yards by the +guide (par. 371). The other troopers conform to the march of the guide +as explained in par. 367. + +=Being at a halt, to move forward at a trot or gallop=, the commands +are (par. 333): 1. =Forward, trot=, or 1. =Forward, gallop=; 2. +=MARCH.= + +Increases of gait are habitually made progressively (par. 239). + +The march of the squad in line, dismounted, is conducted in accordance +with the provisions of pars. 68-74. + +=383.= =Marching in line, to halt=: 1. =Squad=, 2. =HALT.= + +All halt at the second command. + +The troopers, if not already aligned, align themselves without command +on the guide as they halt (par. 364). Movement in the rank then +ceases. + +If marching at the trot or gallop, the gait is ordinarily decreased +progressively, the halt being executed from the walk (par. 239). + +=384.= =Being in line at a halt, to march backward=: 1. =Backward=, 2. +=MARCH.= + +All the troopers rein back (par. 280), regulating on the guide, who +maintains his distance from the leader. The execution of the march +backward as a _collective movement_ is habitually limited to cases +where the movement may be necessary; it is then executed for short +distances only. It is not executed at an increased gait. + +=385.= =Being in line, to oblique and resume the original direction=: +1. =Troopers right (left) oblique=, 2. =MARCH.= + +Executed by each trooper as in par. 230. During the oblique march the +right knee of each trooper should be just in rear of the left knee of +the trooper on his fight; the trooper on the flank toward which the +oblique is made acts temporarily without special indication as +directing guide (Def.) of the squad. The line during the oblique +march should be parallel to its original direction. The leader does +not take position in front of the flank trooper during the oblique. + +Halting the mounted squad while at the oblique should be avoided. If +the squad has to be halted thus, the troopers upon halting turn their +horses to the original front in so far as practicable. + +To resume the original direction by similar means, the commands are: +1. =Forward=, 2. =MARCH.= + +In executing the oblique by trooper, dismounted, each trooper +preserves his relative position, keeping his shoulders parallel to +those of the directing guide and so regulating his step that the rank +may remain parallel to its original front. In resuming the original +direction, the troopers half face to the left in marching, then move +straight to the front. If at =half step= or =mark time= while +obliquing, the oblique march is resumed by the commands: 1 =Oblique=, +2. =MARCH.= Should the halt be commanded while the squad is obliquing, +the troopers halt faced to the front (fig. 32). + +[Illustration: FIG. 38, par. 385.] + +=386.= =Being in line, to turn to the right or left=: 1. =Right (left) +turn=, 2. =MARCH=; 3. =Forward=, 4. =MARCH=; or 3. =Squad=, 4. =HALT.= + +The principle of the movement is explained in par. 329-a. + +The form of the third and fourth commands is determined by whether the +turn is to terminate with the advance in line or with the halt. + +In the turn the squad is led by its leader (par. 367) through a change +of direction of 90 deg.. The leader (and, therefore, the guide) are +restricted not only to this particular change of direction but also to +a particular arc or path during the turn (par. 387). + +There is no special arm signal for the _turn_ as such; but, as the +turn is a change of direction, the signal for the latter movement is +applicable. The signal for the change of direction does not in itself +indicate the degree of the turn, but the leader's subsequent signal +forward or halt indicates when the change of direction is to cease. + +In the turn, as in any case of the march in line, the leader, subject +to the restrictions just indicated, regulates the direction and gait +of march, the guide conforms to the movements of the leader, and all +the other troopers regulate their alignment and interval on the guide. +The rate of march of the leader and the guide should not be so rapid +as to make it impracticable for the troopers on the marching flank of +the squad to preserve their alignment on the guide during the turn. +The guide moves in the _trace of the leader during the turn_, as well +as before and after the turn. When the turn is executed by the +_marching squad_ the leader gives the command after he has begun to +change direction and at the moment when the guide arrives at the +_point where the leader straightened his horse in the new direction_ +(par. 471). When executed from a _halt_ the second command can not be +given as above indicated. The leader in that case begins to turn at +the command of execution, while the guide, instead of beginning the +actual turn at once, moves forward so as to move, during the turn, _in +the trace of the leader_ (par. 367). + +In executing the turn dismounted the leader so regulates the length of +step of the guide that the _trooper on the marching flank_ can keep +the regular step corresponding to the gait at which the turn is made. +The other troopers lengthen or shorten the step accordingly, +maintaining the cadence and their alignment and interval with respect +to the guide. If the turn be terminated by the commands: 3. =Forward=, +4. =MARCH=, all the troopers resume the regular step at the fourth +command. + +=387.= In executing the turn in a _squad_ or _platoon_, the leader, +followed by the guide, so turns on the arc of a circle that the pivot +trooper, in _conforming to the guide's movements_, marches on the arc +of a circle whose radius varies with the gait of the guide, this +radius being 2 yards at a walk, 4 yards at a trot, and 6 yards at a +gallop. When the turn is executed dismounted the corresponding radius, +in either quick or double time, is 1 yard. + +=388.= At the command: 1. =Right (left) half turn=, 2. =MARCH=; 3. +=Forward=, 4. =MARCH=; or 3. =Squad=, 4. =HALT=, a change of direction +of 45 deg. may be made in accordance with the principles explained in +pars. 386 and 387. The arm signal for the half turn follows the rule +indicated for the full turn (par. 386). + +=389.= In all movements in these regulations in the course of which +=fours=, =twos=, or =troopers= execute a turn or half turn this last +movement is made by each element in accordance with the principles +explained in pars. 386 and 387, except that the commands 3. =Forward=, +4. =MARCH=, are omitted and each element continues the march in the +new direction, upon completion of the turn, unless the commands: 3. +=Squad=, 4. =HALT=, are given. The guide of a four in the turn is +always No. 2; the guide of a two the right trooper. + +=390.= Where only a slight change in the direction of march is +desired; it is habitually accomplished by leading without any special +command or signal therefor. The leader may caution: =INCLINE TO THE +RIGHT (LEFT)=. The execution of this movement, like that of the turn, +is a special case of leading applied to the march in line. The leader +slightly alters the direction of march, the guide conforms to the +leader's movements, and the other troopers conform to the movements of +the guide. + +=391.= =Being in line, to form column of fours to a flank=: 1. =Fours +right (left)=, 2. =MARCH.= + +The fours move simultaneously, each executing right turn and taking up +the march in the new direction (par. 389). No. 2 of the four on the +flank toward which the movement is executed is the guide upon whom the +other Nos. 2 regulate during the movement (par. 326), as well as the +guide of the resulting column (par. 374). The leader promptly takes +position in front of the guide (par. 325). Gaits are regulated as in +par. 337-_d_. + +=The movement dismounted= is executed on the same principles except +that No. 2 of each four regulates his step and path as indicated for +the dismounted turn (pars. 386, 387). (Fig. 33.) + +[Illustration: FIG. 39, par. 391.] + +=392.= =Column of twos= is not formed directly to a flank from line. +Column of twos may be formed to the _front_ as explained in pars. 393 +and 403, and the head of the column be at once marched in any desired +direction. The same principle regulates the formation of =column of +troopers= to a flank. + +=393.= =Being in column of fours, to form column of twos or troopers=: + +(_a_) To form column of twos: 1. =Right (left) by twos=, 2. =MARCH.= + +The right two of the leading four is the base. The other twos enter +the column successively, the right two of each four being followed +immediately by the left two of the same four, the left two obliquing +to enter the column (par. 331). All distances are 4 feet (par. 368). +Gaits are regulated as in movements from line into column (par. 337-a, +c). + +(_b_) =Column of troopers= is formed on the same principles at the +commands: 1. =Right (left) by trooper=, 2. =MARCH.= The right trooper +of the leading four is the base. + +Column of troopers from column of twos is formed by the same commands +as from column of fours and in accordance with the same principles. + +_The movements described in this paragraph are among those referred to +in par. 468-b._ + +=394.= In executing any movement by which a column; of twos or +troopers is formed, a four composed of less than three troopers (par. +368-b) acts temporarily as a two--on the right of the four if the +column of twos is formed =right in front= (par. 370); on the left of +the four if the column of twos is formed =left in front=. When the +column of fours is re-formed the troopers take their proper places in +column as indicated in par. _368-b_. + +=395.= The squad in column of =fours=, =twos=, or =troopers= is +marched to the front, halted, marched backward, marched in an oblique +direction, and marched again to the original front by the same +commands as the squad in line, each element of the column conforming +to the principles indicated for the squad in line (pars. 329, 374). + +=396.= =Being in column of fours, twos, or troopers=, to change +direction. + +The movement is executed as explained in par. 329, the fours (twos, +troopers) successively changing on the same ground, the guide of each +element moving in the trace of the leader. + +In changing direction in column of fours, _mounted_, the guide of +each rear four slightly diminishes the _pace_ when 4 feet from the +turning point, correspondingly increasing the pace during the actual +change of direction so as to have the proper distance of 4 feet from +the four =next= in front when the turn is completed. This provision +does not apply to the corresponding dismounted movement, nor to the +column of twos, or troopers. + +To indicate, for any column, a change of direction of 90 deg. or 45 deg., the +leader may command, respectively: 1. =Column, right (left)=, or 1. +=Column half right (left)=; 2. =MARCH.= + +The leader may indicate a slight change of direction by the caution: +=INCLINE TO THE RIGHT=. + +The dismounted execution of the change of direction conforms in each +element of the column to the modifications noted in pars. 386 and 387 +for the execution of the turn dismounted. The leader regulates the +length of his own step accordingly during his actual change of +direction, and the guide of each successive element does the same when +he reaches the turning point. + +=397.= =Being in column of fours, twos, or troopers, to form line to +the front=: 1. =Right (left) front into line=, 2. =MARCH.= + +The leading element (four, two, or trooper) of the column is the base +of the movement and moves forward. + +Each element in rear of the base, leaves the column by a movement +approximating a right oblique and proceeds (par. 375) to a place +abreast of the leading element, the elements taking successively, from +left to right in the new line, positions in the same order as that in +which they previously appeared from head to rear in the column. + +The guide of the leading element, when the movement begins, acts as +directing guide (Def.) of the squad from the moment the leader starts +to his new position until he indicates the guide of the new line +(pars. 326, 373) when all regulate on the latter guide. + +Gaits are regulated as in pars. 337-_a_, _b_. (Fig. 34.) + +_This is one of the movements referred to in par. 468-b._ + +In the dismounted execution of the movement at quick time the leader +commands: 1. =Squad=, 2. =HALT=, as soon as the leading element has +advanced to the point where it is desired that the line shall form +(par. 339-_a_, _b_, _c_). Only the leading (base) element halts at the +command, each rear element halting as it arrives on the line (par. +337-_f_). If executed while marching in double time, the leader +similarly commands: 1. =Quick time=, 2. =MARCH=, the reduced gait +being taken successively by the elements as they reach their positions +(par. 337-_f_). If marching in quick time, and =double time= be +included in the command, the command for the increased gait applies +only to the rear elements (par. 337-_f_). + +[Illustration: FIG. 40, par. 397.] + +=398.= To prevent the inversion of twos or troopers in their +respective fours the squad in =column of twos or column of troopers= +should form line to the left front when the squad is right in front +(par. 370), and vice versa. + +=399.= =Being in column of twos or troopers, to form column of fours=: +1. =Column=, 2. =MARCH.= (_See_ Def. =Column=.) + +The leading element is the base and follows the leader. + +=If in column of twos= the rear two of the leading four obliques at a +correspondingly faster gait (par. 335) and takes its proper place +abreast of, and to the _right or left_ of, the leading two of that +four, so that the troopers of the four shall appear from right to +left, in the order of their respective numbers. All the other twos +take up a correspondingly faster gait than the leading two, and the +fours form successively from head to rear in the column in the manner +indicated above (par. 331). The leading two of each four, other than +the leading four, takes the gait of the head of the column (or halts) +when at 4 feet from the corresponding two of the four next in front. +In each four the rear two begins to oblique as the leading two of that +four approaches the position where it decreases the gait (or halts). + +The leader takes position in front of the guide of the column (No. 2). + +Gaits are further regulated as in movements from column into line +(par. 337-_a_, _b_). + +=Column of fours, from column of troopers= is formed by the same +commands and in accordance with the same principles. + +=Column of twos from column of troopers= is formed in a similar manner +at the commands: 1. =Column of twos=, 2. =MARCH.= The column of twos +will be right in front or left in front (par. 370), according as the +column of troopers was right in front or left in front prior to the +movement. + +In the dismounted execution of the above movements in quick time the +leader habitually commands: 1. =Squad=, 2. =HALT=, immediately +following the command of execution (par. 339-_b_, _c_). Only the +leading element halts (par. 339-_f_), each of the rear elements +halting when it reaches its prescribed position in the column. If +executed in =double time= the leader similarly follows the command of +execution by the command for =quick time= (par. 339-_b_, _c_), which +is successively taken by the elements, as above. If marching in =quick +time=, and =double time= be commanded, only the rear elements take the +increased gait, each taking =quick time= on arriving in its place. +(Fig. 41.) + +[Illustration: FIG. 41, par. 399.] + +=400.= =Being in column of fours, twos, or troopers, to form line to a +flank=: 1. =Fours right (left)=, 2. =MARCH.= + +Each, four turns to the right (par. 389). Each rear four regulates on +the leading four until the fours unite in line (par. 326), when, +unless the leader halts the squad, all take up the march in the new +direction _without further command_, regulating on the new guide +(pars. 325, 372). If the squad is to form line without advancing in +the new direction, the leader gives the preparatory indication for the +halt immediately following the second command, so as to add the +command halt as the four unite in line. + +=In an emergency= a similar movement may be executed from =columns of +twos= at the commands: 1. =Twos right (left)=, 2. =MARCH.= Loss of +=order= may result. In the absence of other indication, intervals are +closed toward the guide (par. 372). A similar movement executed from +column of troopers results in a line of foragers, which may be +assembled or rallied to form line (pars. 414, 416). + +Gaits are regulated as in par. 337-_d._ (Fig. 36.) + +[Illustration: FIG. 42, par. 400.] + +=401.= =Being in line, to face or march the line to the rear=: 1. +=Fours right (left) about=, 2. =MARCH.= + +When the movement is executed by =signal= the elements of the column +always turn to the _left_ about. The oral command =fours right about= +is not accompanied by an arm signal. + +Each four turns 180 degrees in the direction indicated (par. 389). The +leader, passing around a flank of the squad, promptly takes position +in front of the guide so as to lead the squad in the new direction +(pars. 325, 372). + +To face to the rear, the squad is halted as the fours unite in line. + +The modifications incident to the execution of the dismounted movement +are indicated in par. 391. + +Gaits are regulated as in par. 337-_d_. + +A dismounted squad may also be marched a short distance to the rear by +the _oral_ command and methods indicated in par. 82. + +=402.= =Being in column of fours, twos, or troopers, to face or march +the column to the rear=: 1. =Fours (twos, troopers), right (left) +about=, 2. =MARCH.= + +The provision in the preceding paragraph regarding the execution of +the movement by signal applies equally to this paragraph. Each four +(two, trooper) turns 180 degrees in the direction indicated (par. +389). The leader promptly takes position in front of the guide of the +column (par. 325). (Fig. 37.) + +[Illustration: FIG. 43, par. 402.] + +=403.= =Being in line to form column of fours, twos, or troopers to +the front=: 1. =Right (left) by fours (twos, troopers)=, 2. =MARCH.= + +The formation is a successive one. The right element (four, two, or +trooper, according to the command) is the base; it moves forward and +follows the leader, becoming the leading element of the column. + +(_a_) In forming column of fours each four to the left of the base +successively obliques to the right (par. 385) at the gait of the base +as soon as it has sufficient space, and resumes the direct march so as +to enter the column at 4 feet distance. To avoid losing distance the +oblique must be begun in each four when the heads of its horses are +opposite the croups of the horses of the four on its right. Gaits are +regulated as in pars. 387-_a_, _c_. (Fig. 44.) + +(_b_) In forming column of twos or troopers only the elements of the +right four move in the manner indicated above. Each of the other +elements successively turns to the right (par. 389) and then, after +advancing in the new direction, turns to the left so as to enter the +column at 4 feet distance (par. 331). Gaits are regulated as in pars. +337-_a_, _c_. The movements described in (_a_) and (_b_) are among +those referred to in par. 468-_b_. (Fig. 45.) + +(_c_) =Right (left) by fours= is ordinarily unsuited to execution in +groups of any size. Should it be necessary to break to the front from +the _flank_ of such a unit, column of fours to the front may be formed +by executing =fours right (left)= and then changing the direction of +march of the head of the column. The oral commands: 1. =Fours right +(left), column left (right)=, 2. =MARCH=, and 1. =Fours right (left), +column half left (right)=, 2. =MARCH=, are authorized for this +purpose. Gaits are regulated as in par. 337-_d_. + +(_d_) For cases that are _not suitably met by (a) or (c) of this +paragraph_ the commands: 1. =Right (left) forward, fours right +(left)=, 2. =MARCH=, are authorized. The right four is the base and +moves forward following the leader, who promptly takes position in +front of the guide of the column (pars. 325, 374). The second four +from the right starts to move as in fours right (par. 391), its guide +decreasing the pace until the right four has partly cleared the second +four, when the latter four, by a movement approximating an oblique, +enters the column so as to follow in the trace of the leading +(original right) four at 4 feet distance. The other fours execute +=fours right= (each slightly decreasing the pace during the turn), and +then =column left=, so as to follow the second four at the proper +distance. The fours move simultaneously and, except as noted above, +all at the same gait (par. 337-_d_). + +In the execution of the movement dismounted the right four moves +forward; the remainder of the squad executes =fours right, column +left=, and follows the right (leading) four at 92 inches distance. The +right four takes four short steps just after it, clears the four next +on its left, then resumes the full step. (Fig. 46.) + +[Illustration: FIG. 44, par. 403 (_a_).] + +[Illustration: FIG. 45, par. 403 (_b_).] + +[Illustration: FIG. 46, par. 403 (_d_).] + + +EXTENDED ORDER. + +=404.= In extended-order drills the troopers habitually march =at +ease=, but keep on the alert so as promptly to conform to the +indications of the leader and the movements of the guide. + +The rifles of dismounted troopers in extended order are carried as in +par. 61. + +=405.= Foragers may be formed when the squad is in any authorized +formation (par. 468) or in disorder, when it is moving at any gait or +is halted. The extension is effected toward the direction of march. +When possible the deployment should be made upon ground protected from +hostile view and fire. Whatever the method employed for the extension, +the leader controls the movements of the base (par. 323). The other +troopers, moving at a _gallop_, form =foragers= in accordance with the +methods indicated. + +The squad, deployed as =foragers=, is marched to the front and halted, +obliques, resumes the original direction, executes changes in gait and +changes of direction, by the commands and methods prescribed for the +squad in =line=. + +=406.= The appropriate substitution of =skirmishers= for =foragers=, +is made in the commands for movements in extended order, dismounted +(par. 368-_c_). The skirmishers move at a run to their positions on +the line of foragers. + +=407.= A greater or less interval than 3 yards between foragers may be +ordered, the words =at (so many) yards= being added to the preparatory +command so as immediately to follow the word =foragers= or +=skirmishers=. + +=408.= =Being in line, to form foragers=: 1. =Foragers=, 2. =MARCH.= + +The guide continues to be the base and advances (par. 405) at the +gait of march unless the leader indicates otherwise (pars. 337-_f_, +405). The troopers to the right of the guide move at a gallop +obliquely to the right front; those to the left obliquely to the left +front. The troopers take position abreast of the base in the same +order as in line and at intervals of 3 yards measured from the side of +the base. Should the right trooper be the guide, all oblique to the +left; should the left trooper be the guide, all oblique to the right. + +In the execution of the corresponding dismounted movement (commands: +1. =Skirmishers=, 2. =MARCH=--par. 406) the troopers move to their +places at a run, taking intervals of one-half pace, unless some other +interval be indicated (pars. 368-_e_, 407.) (Fig. 37.) + +=409.= =Being in column of fours, twos, or troopers, to form +foragers=: 1. =Right (left) front into foragers=, 2. =MARCH.= + +The _left trooper_ of the leading element of the column as the base of +the deployment advances at the gait of march (par. 337-_a_) unless the +leader indicates otherwise (pars. 337-_f_, 405), the other troopers of +the leading element deploying as indicated in par. 408. The remaining +troopers move obliquely to the right front at a gallop and extend the +line in similar, manner, the order of the successive elements being +the same, from left to right in line, as it formerly was from head to +rear in the column. + +The possibility of the inversion of troopers in the fours as a result +of forming foragers from column of _twos_ or _troopers_ should be kept +in mind. No such inversion can occur in movements executed from column +of fours. The movement described in this paragraph is one of those +referred to in par. 468-_b_. (Fig. 41.) + +[Illustration: FIG. 47, par. 409.] + +=410.= =Being in disorder, to form foragers=: + +Foragers may be formed from any condition of dispersion or disorder by +methods similar to those indicated in pars. 408 and 409. At the +command: 1. =Foragers=, 2. =MARCH=, the troopers nearest the leader +ride toward him at a gallop. The leader indicates the guide (par. +373), who follows the leader; the other troopers, moving at a gallop, +take position, with the proper interval, on the right and left of the +guide, without regard to order. + +Line of foragers from a condition of disorder may also be formed by +first rallying the squad (par. 416) and then forming foragers. + +Dismounted, skirmishers may similarly be formed. + +=411.= =Being deployed as foragers, to march to a flank=: 1. =By the +right (left) flank=, 2. =MARCH.= + +Each trooper turns 90 deg. to the right and marches in the new direction +(par. 389). A column of troopers at 4 feet distance results. The line +of foragers may be resumed by again marching to the flank by the use +of corresponding commands and methods. + +Gaits are regulated as in par. 337-_d_. + +Dismounted, each trooper moves as in par. 81. If at a halt, the +movement of the foragers by the flank is executed by the same commands +as when marching. + +=412.= =Being deployed as foragers, to march to the rear=: 1. =To the +rear=, 2. =MARCH.= + +Each trooper executes an about to the _left_ (pars. 389, 486). To march +again to the front the commands: 1. =Forward=, 2. =MARCH=, are given. +Each trooper executes another about to the _left_. If a line of +foragers be halted while marching to the rear, each trooper turns to +the left about and halts, faced to the front (par. 474). + +Gaits are regulated as in par. 337-_d_. + +Dismounted, each trooper executes =to the rear= (par. 82). If at a +halt, the movement of the foragers to the rear is executed by the same +commands as when marching. + +=413.= The squad may be extended in depth as well as in front. The +commands are: 1. =Fours (twos, or troopers) at so many yards +distance=, 2. =MARCH.= This movement may be used to cross a fire-swept +area when such a course is necessary. The leader indicates the point +where the squad is to be reassembled. The fours (twos or troopers) +move out successively from head to rear in column or right to left in +line. Each element may extend laterally on its guide. The gait is the +gallop. + +=414.= =Being deployed as foragers and in order (par. 470) to +assemble=: 1. =Assemble=, 2. =MARCH.= The guide advances and follows +the leader. The other troopers close in on the guide and form in +=line= upon him in the same relative order in which they were at the +moment the assembly was commanded. The leader halts the guide at any +time if it is desired to assemble without gaining further ground in +the direction of march. The leader, by moving in any desired +direction, may regulate the direction toward which the assembly is +executed. Gaits are regulated as in par. 337-_e_, the elements other +than the base taking a correspondingly faster =gait=. The assembly in +each unit is explained for that unit (par. 468-_b_). + +The leader may, by prior designation of any trooper (e.g., a flank +trooper) as guide (par. 373), cause the assembly to be executed on +that trooper by the commands and methods just indicated. + +The troopers always start to assemble in line, but when an assembly in +column is desired it may virtually be accomplished, by the leader's +designation of a flank trooper as the guide before ordering the +assembly and cautioning: =COLUMN= as soon as the assembly begins. The +fours, as they successively assemble toward the base, then take their +places in column of fours instead of in line; the leader takes post in +front of No. 2 (par. 325). + +If there be not space to advance in column of fours, the assembly in +=column of twos or troopers= may be accomplished by corresponding +commands and methods. + +The _squad_ executes =assemble= only when deployed as foragers and =in +order=. Under other conditions the rally (par. 416), followed, by +=count fours=, more easily accomplishes the purposes of the =assembly= +(Def.). + +In executing the assembly dismounted the troopers close in on the +guide in double time _without special command_ if the guide and leader +continue to advance (par. 339-_g_); otherwise they close in at quick +time unless double time be commanded (par. 339-_b_). (Fig. 42.) + +[Illustration: FIG. 48, par. 414.] + +=415.= If =to the rear= (par. 412) be executed by the squad, a +temporary loss of =order= occurs. If it be desired to pass to close +order without resuming the march to the front and assembling (par. +414), the squad may rally (par. 416) and count fours. + +=416.= =Being in any formation, or not formed, or in disorder, to +rally=; =RALLY=. _When the rally is ordered the signal is habitually +accompanied by the oral command, both the signal and the oral command, +being repeated until understood and obeyed. The signal is obeyed at +once, there being no preparatory command for this movement._ + +The leader takes position at any point or moves in any desired +direction, and at any gait that will permit the movement to be +executed. The troopers ride toward the leader at an extended gallop +and, in the absence of other indication, form in rear of the leader in +line. The leader promptly designates the guide (pars. 371, 373), who +follows the leader. The other troopers form, as they come up, on the +right and left of the guide extending the line. The leader may +caution: =COLUMN=, as the leading troopers approach. The troopers then +form in =column of fours= instead of in =line=. The leading element +forms first; the other troopers, as they arrive, successively form +fours, extending the column to the rear. The leader designates the +guide (pars. 373, 374) and cautions: =NOTE YOUR NUMBERS=. The rally in +column is exceptional and is intended for use only on occasions when a +narrow road or other circumstances of the terrain prevent the rally in +line. + +Should the route along which the leader is moving when the rally is +ordered be too narrow to permit the formation of column of fours, the +leader may caution: =COLUMN OF TWOS (COLUMN OF TROOPERS)= as the +leading troopers approach. The movement is executed as explained for +the rally in column of fours. =Fours= should be counted at once. The +rally in columns of twos or troopers is to be regarded as very +exceptional. + +The squad being rallied in line, though ordinarily not =in order= +until fours are counted (par. 470), is available at once to charge or +to execute any movement that does not involve a knowledge of their +respective numbers on the part of the individual troopers. Unless the +charge is to be executed at once, fours should be counted without +delay after rallying, so that the squad, may be =in order= and ready +to execute any movements whatever that conditions may demand. + +The rally dismounted, is always executed at a run. (Fig. 49.) + +[Illustration: FIG. 49, par. 416.] + + +THE MOUNTED ATTACK. + +=417.= The mounted attack is made with the pistol or saber in +accordance with the principles indicated in pars. 562-565. The typical +saber charge is executed in =line=. Under some circumstances, as in +the attack of a dispersed enemy, etc., a saber charge may be made by +troopers deployed as =foragers=. The pistol attack is usually made in +foragers. In exceptional circumstances (as in breaking out from an +ambush, attacking in a narrow road, etc.) it may be made =in line= or +=in column of fours, twos, or troopers=. + +=418.= Cohesion in the line and vigor in the shock are essential to +the success of the _saber charge_. High speed is necessary for the +desired shock; and in the saber charge, as executed in combat, the +horses are, at the culmination of the charge, habitually "turned +loose" and urged to the highest speed. This, except with men and +horses that are highly trained, necessarily involves _loss of control_ +over the horse on the part of the trooper. The saber charge, executed +with poorly trained horsemen, especially if on imperfectly trained or +excitable house's, is apt to be futile as regards the instruction of +the trooper and to result in more or less permanent loss of control +over the horses. _Control of the mount_ by the trooper is essential +during the execution of the _pistol attack_ (ordinarily made in line +of foragers), and is, of course, necessary during march and maneuver. +For these reasons it is considered advisable that the first +instruction of the recruit in the actual saber charge be deferred +until after platoon instruction and that it be given then only after +the troop commander is satisfied that the recruit's progress in +horsemanship and in the use of his weapon has advanced to a point when +the exercise will be of value. + +=419.= The work in the squad, with a view to _preparing the recruit +for the mounted attack with the saber and pistol_, will therefore be +limited to those exercises in which the horse is _controlled_. It +should consist, in substance, of an extension to collective work of +the individual instruction described in par. 297, and should include +occasional practice in advancing as rapidly as can be done while +maintaining a close formation and control of the mount. The increase +in speed should be made quietly and progressively, be continued but a +short distance, and _invariably be terminated by the quiet resuming of +a slow gait_. As the recruit gets more skill and confidence the +exercise will be conducted with sabers drawn, the troopers taking the +charging position (par. 251) when the instructor does so and returning +to the _carry_ with him. Similar exercises will be conducted with the +pistol, with especial attention to directing the horses through lines +of silhouette targets and to drawing, returning, and manipulating the +pistol. The exercises with the pistol will usually be conducted in +=foragers= and may be extended to include the actual execution of the +pistol attack as described in the =School of the Platoon=. + +In campaign any small group executes the mounted attack as explained +for the platoon. + +=420.= In combat of every kind skill on the part of the individual +trooper in the use of the weapon or weapons employed is essential. So +important is this part of the training that where time for the +training of the troopers is limited all but the most essential +portions of close-order drill should be deferred or omitted in order +that the training of the trooper in the use of his weapons may be +thorough and efficient. + + +=Section 8. Tent pitching.= + +TO PITCH ALL TYPES OF ARMY TENTS, EXCEPT SHELTER AND CONICAL WALL +TENTS. + +To pitch all types of Army tents, except shelter and conical wall +tents: Mark line of tents by driving, a wall pin on the spot to be +occupied by the right (or left) corner of each tent. For pyramidal +tents the interval between adjacent pins should be about 30 feet, +which will give a passage of 2 feet between tents. Spread tripod on +the ground where the center of tent is to be, if tripod is used. +Spread the tent on the ground to be occupied, door to the front, and +place the right (or left) front wall loop over the pin. The door (or +doors, if more than one) being fastened and held together at the +bottom, the left (or right) corner wall loop is carried to the left +(or right) as far as it will go and a wall pin driven through it, the +pin being placed in line with the right (or left) corner pins already +driven. At the same time the rear corner wall loops are pulled to the +rear and outward so that the rear wall of the tent is stretched to +complete the rectangle. Wall pins are then driven through these loops. +Each corner pin should be directly in rear of the corresponding front +corner pin, making a rectangle. Unless the canvas be wet, a small +amount of slack should be allowed before the corner pins are driven. +According to the size of the tent, one or two men, crawling under the +tent if necessary, fit each pole or ridge or upright into the ring or +ridge-pole holes, and such accessories as hood, fly, and brace ropes +are adjusted. If a tripod be used an additional man will go under the +tent to adjust it. The tent, steadied by the remaining men, one at +each corner guy rope, will then be raised. If the tent is a ward or +storage type, corner poles will now be placed at the four corners. The +four corner guy ropes are then placed over the lower notches of the +large pins driven in prolongation of the diagonals at such distance as +to hold the walls and ends of the tent vertical and smooth when the +guy ropes are drawn taut. A wall pin is then driven through each +remaining wall loop and a large pin for each guy rope is driven in +line with the corner guy pins already driven. The guy ropes of the +tent are placed over the lower notches, while the guy ropes of the fly +are placed over the upper notches, and are then drawn taut. Brace +ropes, when used, are then secured to stakes or pins suitably placed. + + +CONICAL WALL TENT. + +Drive the door pin and center pin 8 feet 3 inches apart. Using the +hood lines, with center pin as center, describe two concentric +circles with radii 8 feet 3 inches and 11 feet 3 inches. In the outer +circle drive two door guy pins 3 feet apart. At intervals of about 3 +feet drive the other guy pins. + +In other respects conical tents are erected practically as in the case +of pyramidal tents. + + +TO STRIKE COMMON, WALL, PYRAMIDAL, AND CONICAL WALL TENTS. + +=STRIKE TENTS.= + +The men first remove all pins except those of the four corner guy +ropes, or the four quadrant guy ropes in the case of the conical wall +tent. The pins are neatly piled or placed in their receptacle. + +One man holds each guy, and when the ground is clear the tent is +lowered, folded, or rolled and tied, the poles or tripod and pole +fastened together, and the remaining pins collected. + + +TO FOLD TENTS. + +For folding common, wall, hospital, and storage tents: Spread the tent +flat on the ground, folded at the ridge so that bottoms of side walls +are even, ends of tent forming triangles to the right and left; fold +the triangular ends of the tent in toward the middle, making it +rectangular in shape; fold the top over about 9 inches; fold the tent +in two by carrying the top fold over clear to the foot; fold again in +two from the top to the foot; throw all guys on tent except the second +from each end; fold the ends in so as to cover about two-thirds of the +second cloths; fold the left end over to meet the turned-in edge of +the right end, then fold the right end over the top, completing the +bundle; tie with the two exposed guys. + + +METHOD OF FOLDING PYRAMIDAL TENT. + +The tent is thrown toward the rear and the back wall and roof canvas +pulled out smooth. This may be most easily accomplished by leaving the +rear-corner wall pins, in the ground with the wall loops attached, one +man at each rear-corner guy, and one holding the square iron in a +perpendicular position and pulling the canvas to its limit away from +the former front of the tent. This leaves the three remaining sides of +the tent on top of the rear side, with the door side in the middle. + +Now carry the right-front corner over and lay it on the left-rear +corner. Pull all canvas smooth, throw guys toward square iron, and +pull bottom edges even. Then take the right-front corner and return to +the right, covering the right-rear corner. This folds the right side +of the tent on itself, with the crease in the middle and under the +front side of tent. + +Next carry the left-front corner to the right and back as described, +above; this when completed will leave the front and rear sides of the +tent lying smooth and flat and the two side walls folded inward, each +on itself. + +Place the hood in the square iron which has been folded downward +toward the bottom of the tent, and continue to fold around the square +iron as a core, pressing all folds down flat and smooth and parallel +with the bottom of the tent. If each fold is compactly made and the +canvas kept smooth, the last fold will exactly cover the lower edge of +the canvas. Lay all exposed guys along the folded canvas except the +two on the center width, which should be pulled out and away from +bottom edge to their extreme length for tying. Now, beginning at one +end, fold toward the center on the first seam (that joining the first +and second widths) and fold again toward the center, so that the +already folded canvas will come to within about 3 inches of the middle +width. Then fold over to the opposite edge of middle width of canvas. +Then begin folding from opposite end, folding the first width in half, +then making a second fold to come within about 4 or 5 inches of that +already folded; turn this fold entirely over that already folded. Take +the exposed guys and draw them taut across each other, turn bundle +over on the under guy, cross guys on top of bundle, drawing tight. +Turn bundle over on the crossed guys and tie lengthwise. + +When properly tied and pressed together this will make a package 11 by +23 by 34 inches, requiring about 8,855 cubic inches to store or pack. + +Stencil the organization designation on the lower half of the middle +width of canvas in the back wall. + + + + +CHAPTER VI. + +FIELD SERVICE. + + +=Section 1. Principles of training.= + +Inaction gives every advantage to the enemy. + +The offensive alone gives decisive results. + +A quick and energetic offensive minimizes losses. + +An advance against the enemy's position once entered upon must be +continued. To go back under fire is to die. + +The best way to hold down the fire of the enemy and to diminish his +power to inflict losses is to bring the position he occupies under +well-conducted and continued fire. + +Present as small a target as possible to the enemy by utilizing every +bit of cover the ground affords. + +Individual skill in marksmanship is an advantage in battle only when +united with fire discipline and control. + +Constant movement to the front lessens the effect of the enemy's fire. +Modern battles fought in the open show that the heaviest losses are in +the mid and long ranges. When close range is reached the losses +diminish rapidly. + +The best protection against artillery fire is a constant but irregular +movement to the front. When close to the enemy's position his fire is +least effective. + +A knowledge of how to use the bayonet and the will to use it must +often be the deciding factors in battle. + +Finally: + +In training we can not go far wrong or fail to accomplish the best +results if we keep before our minds the spirit as well as the wording +of paragraph 352 of the Infantry Drill Regulations: "The duties of +infantry are many and difficult. All infantry must be fit to cope with +all conditions that may arise. Modern war requires but one kind of +infantry--good infantry." Cavalry, dismounted, should be as efficient +as infantry under all conditions of service. + + +=Section 2. Combat.= + +The field of battle is the final test of the instruction, discipline, +and efficiency of the fighting force of any army. + +The squadron is the =attack unit= or the =defense unit=, whether +operating alone or as part of a regiment. The troops constitute the +=firing line= and the =support=. + +An individual soldier is concerned only with the enemy in his +immediate front, in obeying orders, and instinctively doing what he +has been trained to do. + +=The one requisite necessary to win the battle is intelligent team +work.= The army is handled just like a football team. A part is on the +first line facing the enemy. Another part, like the half backs, is +held back as supports. Another part, like the full backs, is held as a +reserve. Each unit, like each player, has a certain duty to perform. +When the signal is given, all work together--all play the game--team +work. The players consist of all branches of the service. + +The same rule holds true down to the smallest unit and even to the +individual enlisted man. Each regiment, is a team composed of three +players--each a squadron. Each squadron is a team of four +players--each a troop. In the same manner each troop is a team of two +or more platoons; each platoon a team of two sections; and last, but +not least, each section is a team of from 6 to 14 players. + +The one question that always presents itself on the battle field every +minute of the time to every person, whether he be a general or a +private, is, "=What play has my team captain ordered, and how best may +I act so as to work in conjunction with the other players to bring +about the desired result?"--team play.= + +To the trooper this means-- + +First. =Prompt and loyal obedience to the section leader.= Every +section always has a team captain. If the section leader and corporal +are killed or disabled, other players previously designated take their +places. If no one was designated, then the private with the longest +service takes command. When the section leader gives the command for a +certain play, don't stop to think if the play is a good one, but do +your very best to carry out the play as ordered. A poor play in which +every player enters with his whole heart (team work) will often win, +while, on the other hand, the best play in which some of the players +are skulkers and shirkers will probably fail. + +Second. =Never lose touch with your section.= Every individual, as +well as every unit, should always be acting under the control of some +higher commander. This is necessary if there is to be any unity of +action. Therefore if you lose your section or it becomes broken up, +join the first section you can find and obey your new section leader +as loyally and as cheerfully as you did your own. + +While yet several miles from the enemy's position the troops may come +under artillery fire. On green men entering upon their fight, the +sound of the projectile whistling through the air, the noise, flash, +and smoke on the burst of the shrapnel, and the hum of the various +pieces thereafter, all produce a very terrifying effect, but old +soldiers soon learn to pay little attention to this, as the danger is +not great. + + +THE MOUNTED ATTACK. + +THE TROOP ACTING ALONE. + +=639.= When the troop acting alone charges it is ordinarily divided +into two parts, viz, the =attacking line= and the =reserve=, but a +platoon is never kept in rear except when the captain so directs. + +If the attacking line, or reserve, consists of only one platoon, it is +led by its chief; if it consists of two or more platoons, it is led by +the senior chief of platoon or by the captain. + +When a chief of platoon takes post as leader of two or more platoons, +his place as platoon leader is taken by the corresponding file closer. +Whenever the =rally= or =assembly= is ordered, the captain may cause +the guidon to be displayed at the rallying or assembly point +indicated. + +=640.= In instruction exercises the enemy must always be outlined or +represented by troopers, who may carry flags, under command of an +officer or noncommissioned officer. In the beginning of this +instruction these men will occupy fixed positions; later they will be +instructed to ride so as to represent the movements of an aggressive +enemy. The captain will explain to the commander the object of the +exercise and tell him what to do. + +=641.= The platoons of the =attacking line= may attack in one line or +successively, as from column of platoons with extended distances. The +captain, in addition to designating a reserve, may direct one or more +platoons to execute any special mission. In the absence of special +instructions from the captain the leader of each platoon, or +combination of platoons, that is acting separately uses his +discretion, endeavoring so to employ his command as best to assist in +carrying out the general plan indicated by the captain's orders. + +=642.= The reserve, in the absence of special instructions, follows +the attacking line at from 100 to 150 yards in readiness to support +the attacking line, meet a counter attack, or press the pursuit, as +occasion may require. + +A platoon designated for a =flank attack= is so conducted by its +leader as to fall opportunely upon the enemy's flank. + +If a flank platoon be so designated, it attacks from that flank unless +otherwise directed. + +To guard against a flank attack or an enveloping attack the captain +may detach a platoon to move to the threatened flank so as to take an +enveloping attack in flank or meet a flank attack. If a flank platoon +be so designated, it acts on the corresponding flank unless otherwise +directed. When no platoon is specially designated for flank guard, the +corresponding duties fall upon the reserve. + +=643.= The captain's commands should include an indication of the +objective, unless the latter is obvious, designate the elements of the +attack, and state any special mission that is assigned to any element. +The captain's orders also usually include an indication of the weapon +to be used by the several elements of the attack and may prescribe the +formations to be employed. All details not prescribed by the captain +are left to the discretion of the commanders of the several elements +into which the attack is divided. + +Where the same weapon is to be used by all it is ordinarily drawn at +the captain's orders before the instructions for the attack are given. +Otherwise, each commander gives the proper orders for drawing saber +or raising pistol. + +=644.= The troop being, for example, =in line=, marching at a gallop +with sabers drawn, the captain may command: =Objective, Cavalry in +front; Second and Third platoons, to the charge; First platoon, flank +attack; Fourth platoon, reserve.= Each element of the attack proceeds +at once to carry out its orders. The leader of the attacking line +(whether the captain or a lieutenant) directs the leader of the base +platoon to close on him before charge is ordered (par. 563). In other +respects, the charge is conducted as explained for the platoon (pars. +562-564). + +The troop being, for example, in column of platoons, marching at a +gallop, no weapon drawn, the captain may command (the objective being +obvious): =First and Second platoons, pistol attack; Third platoon, +reserve; Fourth platoon, left flank guard.= The leader of the +attacking line commands: 1. =As foragers=, 2. =MARCH=, and attacks +with the pistol according to the principles explained for the platoon +(pars. 566-568) as soon as the second platoon completes its deployment +on the left of the first platoon. The commanders of the third and +fourth platoons move to their positions, drawing saber or raising +pistol in their discretion. + +Should the captain command, for example: =First and Second platoons, +pistol attack in two lines; Third platoon, charge enemy's right flank; +Fourth platoon, reserve=, the third platoon may charge with the saber. + +Should the captain cause pistols to be raised before ordering the +attack all use the pistol. + +The above are only examples to indicate the character of the captain's +commands. The actual orders must meet the situation presented. + +=645.= At the first indication for the charge the ground scouts move +out from the flanks of the attacking line (par. 569) unless otherwise +specially directed. The captain usually sends out any necessary combat +patrols; but each leader of a separate group is responsible that any +further steps necessary for the immediate protection of his own flanks +are taken. + + +THE TROOP IN THE SQUADRON. + +=646.= The troop in squadron, in mounted attack, has no reserve, but +may have a support in the discretion of the major. If on the flank of +the squadron, its own flank defense must be provided by the captain in +the absence of instructions. + + +PASSING FROM MOUNTED ACTION TO DISMOUNTED ACTION. + +=647.= The movements are executed by commands and methods +corresponding to those already explained for the squad and platoon, +with the following modifications and additions thereto: + +The horses of the captain and of one bugler who accompanies the +captain are held by the other bugler or by a man specially designated +_in advance_ for that duty. + +The horses of the first sergeant and other men out of ranks, and not +otherwise specially provided for, are secured in the same manner +indicated in the corresponding provisions for the squad and platoon. + +=648.= The guidon, in the absence of instructions to the contrary, +takes general charge of the led horses and performs the duties +prescribed for the trooper in charge of the horse-holders and horses +(par. 431). Should one of the platoon file closers be senior to the +guidon, the first sergeant cautions such file closer and the guidon +_in advance_ that the senior will have general charge of the led +horses of the troop while such senior remains with the horses. In the +absence of other special instructions, the file closer of each platoon +reports the additional troopers of his platoon to the troop commander +after Nos. 2 dismount. The guidon remains in general charge of the +other horse-holders and the horses, a designated trooper having, under +the guidon, immediate charge of the horse-holders and horses of each +platoon. + +=649.= The captain gives any desired special instructions to the +guidon and sees that proper measures for security are taken. On +dismounting, the first sergeant remains near the horses long enough to +see that the designated noncommissioned officer is in charge and is +making proper provision as regards the horses; he then joins the +captain. Any sergeants who may be extra file closers without special +assignment of duties join the captain; other extra file closers not +specially assigned join the platoons with which they were riding. The +captain, on dismounting, takes position at the point where he desires +the base platoon to form or otherwise indicates that position to the +leader of the base platoon. The platoon that was the base when the +troop dismounted remains the base of the dismounted formation in the +absence of other indication. Its leader takes position at once in rear +of the captain, or as indicated by the latter, and the dismounted +platoon forms in =double column= or as directed. The other platoons +form so as to extend the formation =in line of double columns=, or as +the captain orders, in accordance with the principles governing the +assembly of the troop. The captain may direct the platoon leaders to +proceed at once to designated positions without forming the troop as a +unit. _In all cases the measures taken must be such as to prevent +unnecessary exposure of men or horses to hostile view or fire._ + + +DISMOUNTED COMBAT (THE TROOP). + +GENERAL CONSIDERATIONS. + +=650.= When the troop, acting alone, dismounts to engage in deliberate +fire action the captain makes provisions for the led horses (par. 649) +and at once sends out scouts (usually two experienced men detailed and +trained as such) to the front to reconnoiter. The captain reconnoiters +usually in rear of, but in touch with the scouts, and accompanied by +platoon commanders and the first sergeant; he explains to them the +purpose of the attack, gives them all the information he has about the +enemy and about our own troops in the vicinity, points out to them the +objective of each platoon if they are to advance, or indicates the +part of the line to be held by each if to take the defensive. + +=651.= The advance of a troop after dismounting, in anticipation of +fire action either in attack or defense is made in close order, +preferably in columns of fours or twos, until the probability or the +actual encountering of hostile fire makes it advisable to deploy. +After such deployment the advance (now designated =the approach=) may +be continued in line of skirmishers or other suitable formation before +opening fire. The approach dismounted may often be facilitated, better +advantage taken of cover, and losses minimized by using formations +such as line of platoons each in column of twos or troopers, or a +succession of thin lines at varying distances, one directly behind the +other or echeloned. The choice of a formation would depend upon +conditions, such as the effectiveness of the enemy's fire, cover +afforded by folds of the ground, or by natural obstacles. If the +deployment is found to be premature, it will generally be better to +assemble the troop and resume the advance in close order. + +The formations mentioned as facilitating the advance, viz, line of +platoons in column of twos or troopers, or a succession of thin lines +find application most frequently in the approach when the ground is so +difficult or the cover so limited as to make it desirable to take +advantage of the few favorable routes on which to move forward. + +=652.= The approach in a succession of thin lines is, if possible, +made by sections under the immediate direction of platoon commanders +with wide intervals between skirmishers. By so advancing continuous +control of the line is assured. If that method is not practicable, +then the successive lines are made up of one or more men from each +four of a platoon on the skirmish line, the command being: 1. =Numbers +1 (or such number or numbers), first (or such) platoon, forward=; 2. +=MARCH.= + +The captain having pointed out in advance the selected position in +front of the lines which are to be occupied, the designated numbers +move to the front. The line thus formed preserves the original +intervals as nearly as practicable; when this line has advanced to the +indicated position, a second line is sent forward by similar commands, +and so on at irregular distances until the whole line has advanced. +Upon arriving at the indicated position the first line is halted. +Successive lines upon arriving halt on line with the first, and the +men take their proper places in the skirmish line. + +Ordinarily each line is made up of one man or more from each four of a +platoon, and the men of a four are sent forward in order from right to +left. The first line is led by the platoon leader of that platoon, the +second by its file closer, and so on. Under favorable conditions the +successive lines may be made up from all of the platoons which are +deployed as skirmishers. + +The movement is conducted in quick time unless conditions make double +time necessary. + +After the entire troop has reached the line a further advance in the +same manner may be found advisable. + +The movement in a succession of thin lines is used to cross a wide +stretch swept or likely to be swept by artillery fire or heavy +long-range rifle fire which can not profitably be returned. Its +purpose is the building up of a strong skirmish line preparatory to +engaging in a fire fight. This method of advancing by thin lines +results in serious, though temporary, loss of control over the +successive platoons of the troop. Its advantages lie in the fact that +it offers a less definite target, hence is less likely to draw fire. + +=653.= These are merely suggested methods of advancing preliminary to +opening the fire attack; other formations better adapted to particular +occasions or terrain may be devised. The best formation is that which +advances the line the farthest without drawing the enemy's fire, or, +if he does open fire, then with the least loss of men, time, and +control. + + +THE FIRE ATTACK. + +=654.= The principles involved in the fire attack are discussed under +=Dismounted Fire Action, the Squadron= (par. 716), and necessary +modifications as to details made under =Dismounted Action, the +Regiment= (par. 760). + +When the enemy's fire makes it impracticable for the troop to move +forward in one of the above-mentioned formations, it may advance by +rushes. + +Being in skirmish line: 1. =By platoon (section) from the right +(left)=, 2. =RUSH.= + +The platoon leader on the indicated flank arranges the details for a +prompt and vigorous execution of the rush and puts it into effect as +soon as practicable. If necessary he designates the leader for the +indicated unit. When about to rush he causes the men of the indicated +unit to suspend firing and to hold themselves flat on the ground but +in readiness to spring forward instantly. The leader of the rush (at +the signal of the platoon leader if the latter is not the leader of +the rush) commands, =Follow me=, and, running at top speed, leads the +fraction to the new line, where he halts it and causes it to open +fire. The leader of the rush selects the new line if it has not been +previously designated. + +The first fraction having established itself on the new line, the next +like fraction is sent forward by its platoon leader without further +command from the captain, and so on, successively, until the entire +troop is on the line established by the first rush. + +The men must be trained to lie perfectly still until the command +(since any movement might warn the enemy of the rush to follow), then +at command to spring instantly and together to their feet, run at top +speed, and drop together at command. + +=655.= In an advance by rushes, leaders of platoons in firing +positions are responsible for the delivery of an effective fire to +cover the advance of each rushing fraction. Troops are cautioned so to +fire as not to endanger the flanks of advanced portions of the firing +line. The husbanding of ammunition for the final stages of the fire +attack must be constantly impressed on the men. + +The rush of a troop as a whole is conducted by the captain on the same +principle as described for the platoon. The captain leads the rush, +platoon leaders lead their respective platoons, and file closers +follow the line to insure prompt and orderly execution of the advance. + +When the foregoing method of rushing, by running, becomes +impracticable, any method of advance that carries the attack closer to +the enemy, such as =crawling=, should be employed. + +The charge corresponds to that described =in the squadron=. + +When a leader in command of a platoon or section receives an order or +signal to rush, he should cause his men to suspend firing and to hold +themselves flat but ready for a sprinter's start. He selects the +point, as far as possible with reference to cover, to which he intends +to carry his unit forward. He then gives the command "=RUSH=," springs +forward, and running at full speed about three paces ahead of his men, +leads them in the rush. Arriving at the position he has selected, he +throws himself prone, and the men drop on either side of him. All +crawl forward to good firing positions, considering the cover also, +and the leader gives the necessary orders for resuming the fire. The +latter will include giving the range again, the length of the rush +being subtracted from the sight setting ordered at the last position. + +The original platoon and section divisions of the troop in the firing +line should be maintained, if possible, and should only be broken up +if the mingling of reinforcements renders it unavoidable. + +Upon joining the firing line, officers and noncommissioned officers +accompanying a reinforcement take over the duties of others of like +grade who have been disabled, or they distribute themselves so as best +to exercise their normal functions. Conditions vary and no exact rules +can be prescribed. It is essential that all assist in mastering the +increased difficulties of control. + + +FIRE. + +=657.= Ordinarily rifles are loaded and extra ammunition in bandoliers +is distributed before the troop deploys for combat. In close order the +troop executes the firings at the command of the captain, who posts +himself in rear of the center. + +Firings in close order are exceptional. + +=658.= =Signals during fire action=: The voice is generally inadequate +for giving commands during firing, and must be replaced by signals of +such character that proper fire direction and control are assured +(par. 989). To attract attention signals must usually be preceded by +the whistle signal (short blast). A fraction of the firing line about +to rush should avoid using the long blast signal as an indication to +=suspend firing=. Officers and men behind the firing line can not +ordinarily move freely along the line, but each must depend on the +other's watchfulness, in addition to his own, and make use of +prescribed signals (par. 997, Cav. Drill Reg., 1916). All should place +themselves so as to see their immediate superiors and subordinates. + +The bugler with the captain assists by observing the enemy, the +target, and the fire effect, and by watching for and transmitting +commands. + +The effect of fire and the influence of the ground in relation +thereto, and the individual and collective instruction in marksmanship +are treated in the =Small-Arms Firing Manual=. + +=659.= =Volley fire= has limited application. It has a moral effect +both on the troops employing it and on those subjected to it. It may +be employed to restore control. In defense it may be used in the early +stages of the action if the enemy presents a large compact target. It +may be used by troops especially posted on the flank or in a dominant +position in rear of an attacking force for the purpose of aiding the +advance by so-called _fire of position_. When the ground near the +target is such that the strike of bullets can be seen from the firing +line, ranging volleys may be used to correct the sight setting. + +In combat, volley firing, if used, is executed habitually by platoon. + +=660.= =Fire at will= is the class of fire normally employed in attack +or defense. + +=661.= =Clip fire= has limited application. It is principally used +(_a_) in the early stages of combat to steady the men by habituating +them to brief pauses in firing; (_b_) to produce a short burst of +fire. + + +FIRE DIRECTION. + +=662.= When the troop is large enough to be divided into platoons, it +is impracticable for the captain to command it in combat. His +efficiency in managing the firing line is measured by his ability to +enforce his will through the platoon leaders. Having indicated clearly +what he desires them to do, he avoids interfering except to correct +serious errors or omissions. + +The captain directs the fire of his troop or of designated platoons. +He designates the target and, when practicable, allots a part of the +target to each platoon. Before beginning the fire action he determines +the range, announces the sight setting, and indicates the class of +fire to be employed and the time to open fire. Thereafter he observes +the fire effect, corrects material errors in sight setting, prevents +exhaustion of the ammunition supply, and causes the distribution of +such extra ammunition as may be received. + + +FIRE CONTROL. + +=663.= In combat the platoon is the _fire unit_. From 20 to 35 rifles +are as many as one leader can control effectively. + +Each platoon leader puts into execution the commands or directions of +the captain, having first taken such precautions to insure correct +sight setting and clear description of the target or aiming point as +the situation permits or requires (par. 141); thereafter he gives such +additional commands or directions as are necessary to exact compliance +with the captain's will. He corrects the sight setting when necessary. +When the target can not be seen with the naked eye, he designates an +aiming point (by one of the methods described in par. 141 if +necessary) and orders fire upon it, first announcing the proper sight +setting to correct the error of aim. + +In general, =platoon leaders= observe the target and the effect of the +fire and are on the alert for the captain's commands; they observe and +regulate the rate of fire. The =file closers= watch the firing line +and check every breach of fire discipline. =Chiefs of section= +transmit commands when necessary, observe the conduct of their +sections and abate excitement, assist in enforcing fire discipline, +and participate in the firing unless otherwise directed by the +=platoon commanders=. + +The best troops are those that submit longest to fire control. To +avoid or delay such loss of control should be the constant aim of all. + +Fire control implies the ability of the commander to stop the firing, +change the sight setting and target, and resume a well-directed fire. + + +FIRE DISCIPLINE. + +=664.= Fire discipline implies, besides an unquestioning habit of +obedience to commands, a control of the rifle by the soldier (the +result of training), which will enable him in action to make hits +instead of misses. It embraces taking advantage of the ground; proper +understanding of orders as to target designation; care in setting the +sight and delivery of fire; constant attention to the orders of the +leaders, and careful observation of the enemy; an increase of fire +when the target is favorable, and a cessation of fire when the enemy +disappears; economy of ammunition. Orderly and regular methods on the +part of leaders aid fire discipline. Self possession and a confident +tone in giving commands and instructions are indispensable. + +In combat, shots which graze the enemy's trench or position, and thus +reduce the effectiveness of his fire, have the approximate value of +hits; such shots only, or actual hits, contribute toward fire +superiority. + +Fire discipline implies that, in a firing line without leaders, each +man retains his presence of mind and directs effective fire upon the +proper target. + +=665.= To create a correct appreciation of the requirements of fire +discipline, men are taught that the rate of fire, having constantly in +view the available ammunition supply, should be as rapid as is +consistent with accurate aiming; that the rate will depend upon the +visibility, proximity, and size of the target; and that the proper +rate will ordinarily suggest itself to each trained man usually +rendering cautions or commands unnecessary. + +=666.= In attack, ammunition must be used with extreme caution in +order that the highest rate of fire may be employed at the halt +preceding the assault and in pursuing fire. + +=667.= In defense, when the target disappears behind cover, platoon +leaders suspend fire, prepare their platoons to fire upon the point +where it is expected to reappear, and greet its reappearance instantly +with a vigorous burst of fire. In defense the available ammunition +supply is not ordinarily so limited as in the attack. + +=668.= For communication between the firing line and the reserve or +commander in rear certain signals are prescribed (par. 997). In +transmission their concealment from the enemy's view should be +insured. In the absence of signal flags the headdress or other +substitute may be used. + + +RANGES. + +=669.= For convenience of reference, ranges are classified as follows: + + 0 to 600 yards, close range. + 600 to 1,200 yards, effective range. + 1,200 to 2,000 yards, long range. + Over 2,000 yards, distant range. + +The distance to the target must be determined as accurately as +possible and the sights set accordingly. + +Aside from training and morale, this is the most important single +factor in securing effective fire at the longer ranges. + +Except in a deliberately prepared defensive position, the most +accurate and only practicable method of determining the range, in +absence of a suitable mechanical range finder, will generally be to +take the mean of several estimates made independently. + +_Estimation of ranges._--Five or six officers and men, selected from +the most accurate estimators in the troop and designated as _range +estimators_, should be specially trained in estimating distances. + +Whenever necessary and practicable, the captain assembles the range +estimators, points out the target to them, and adopts the mean of +their estimates. The range estimators then take their customary posts. + +When a range is announced, the men at once set their sights to +correspond, and whenever practicable an examination of the pieces is +made in order to verify the sight setting. + +(_C. C. D. R., No. 1, Apr. 26, 1917._) + +Firing is delayed as long as possible for three reasons, viz: (_a_) At +the extreme ranges little damage can be done on the enemy, and +ineffective firing always encourages him; (_b_) halting to fire delays +the advance, and the great object to be accomplished is to close in on +the enemy where you can meet him on better terms; (_c_) plenty of +ammunition will be required at the decisive stage of the fight, and it +is very difficult to send extra ammunition up to the firing line. +=Therefore never fire until ordered to do so, and then never fire more +than the number of rounds designated. Never fire after the command +"cease firing" is given.= + +Ammunition in the bandoleers will ordinarily be expended first. Thirty +rounds in the right pocket section of the belt will be held as a +reserve, to be expended only when ordered by an officer. + +Soon, however, it will be necessary to halt and open fire on the enemy +in order to cause him some loss, to make his riflemen keep down in +their trenches, and to make them fire wildly. It is probable that at +this time and until you arrive much closer you will not see any of the +enemy to fire at. You may not even see any trenches nor know just +where the enemy is. Your higher officers, however, with their field +glasses and the messages they receive, will know. Each troop will be +assigned a certain front to cover with its fire. =Therefore be careful +to fix your sights at the designated range and fire only at the +designated target.= This means team work in firing, which is one of +the most important elements of success. + +The firing line advances from position to position by means of rushes. +At long range the entire line may rush forward at the same time, but +as the range decreases one part of the line rushes forward while the +remainder keeps up a hot fire on the enemy. The number taking part in +each rush decreases as the fire of the enemy becomes warmer, until +perhaps only one squad, or even less, rushes or crawls forward at a +time, protected by the fire of the rest of the company. The distance +covered by each rush also becomes less and less. After any rush no +part of the line again advances until the rest of the line is up. =In +making a rush, the leader of the unit gives the signal and leads the +way. The rest follow. No attempt is made to keep a line, but each man +rushes forward at a run, seeking only to reach the new halting +position as quickly and with as little exposure as possible.= When +halted, the skirmishers need not be in a perfect line, but every +advantage should be taken of the ground for concealment and +protection. It is necessary only that no man or group of men should +interfere with the fire of other parts of the firing line. + +The noise on the firing line will be great. Leaders will be disabled +and new men will take their places. Reinforcements coming up will +cause units to become mixed. To the green man everything may appear to +be in confusion, but this is not so. This is war as it really is. =If +you have lost your section or your section leader, join the leader +nearest to you.= This is the way the game is played. + +As long as the fight lasts every available rifleman must be kept in +the firing line. The first and last consideration is to win the +battle. =Therefore, under no circumstances will any soldier be +permitted to go to the rear, either for ammunition or to assist the +wounded.= + +If the attacking force can no longer advance, it is much safer to +throw up hasty intrenchments and await the arrival of reinforcements +or darkness than it is to retreat. Retreating troops are the ones that +suffer the greatest. This lesson is taught by every great war. +=Therefore, always remember that the safest thing to do is to stick to +the firing line.= + +Troops on the firing line, when not actually engaged in firing at the +enemy, busy themselves throwing up shelter trenches. It only requires +a few minutes to construct a trench that gives great protection. +=Therefore, never get separated from your intrenching tool.= + +Concealment is no less important than protection. Therefore, when +conditions permit, as is generally the case when on the defensive, +every effort should be made to hide intrenchments by the use of sod, +grass, weeds, bushes, etc. + +In making an attack the infantry is always supported when possible by +its own artillery, which continues to fire over its head until the +infantry arrives very close to the enemy's trenches. This fire is +helping you a great deal by keeping down the fire of the enemy's +infantry and artillery. Therefore, don't think you are being fired +into by your own artillery because you hear their shells and shrapnel +singing through the air or bursting a short distance in your front, +but rather be thankful you are receiving their help up to the very +last minute. + +In the last rush which carries the enemy's position there is always +much mixing of units. The firing line does not continue rushing madly +as individuals after the enemy, but halts and fires on him until he +gets out of good range. The pursuit is taken up by formed troops held +in reserve or by the firing line only after its units are again gotten +together. + +As the fighting often lasts all day, and great suffering is caused +from thirst, =don't throw away your canteen when the fight commences=. +It may also be impossible to get rations up to the line during the +night. =Therefore, it is advisable to hold onto at least one ration.= + +As the recent war has shown the possibility of hand-to-hand fighting, +especially at night, each soldier should be schooled in the use of the +bayonet. + +The following has particular reference to the duties of platoon and +section leaders and to the teamwork of the platoon in combat: + +Attacking troops must first gain =fire superiority= in order to reach +the hostile position. By gaining fire superiority is meant making +one's fire superior to that of the enemy in volume and accuracy, and +it depends upon the number of rifles employed, the rate of fire, the +character of the target, training and discipline, and fire direction +and control. When the fire of the attackers becomes effective and +superior to that of the defenders the latter are no longer able to +effectively and coolly aim and fire at the former, and, as a +consequence, the attackers are able to inaugurate a successful rush or +advance which carries them nearer to the enemy's position. + +When a trained organization has been committed to the attack, the +gaining of fire superiority depends upon the way in which =fire +direction= and =fire control= are exercised. + +The captain =directs= the fire of the troop. He indicates to the +platoon commanders the target (enemy) which the troop is to fire and +advance upon, and tells each upon which part of this target he is to +direct the fire of his platoon. When he desires the fire to be opened, +he gives the necessary commands or signals, including the range at +which the sights are to be set. + +When the fire fight has once started, it becomes to a great extent a +fight of a number of platoons. The platoon is the largest organization +which can be controlled by a single leader in action. The platoon +commander (lieutenant or sergeant) =controls= its fire in order to +gain the maximum fire effect and to avoid wasting ammunition. He must +try his best to make the fire of his platoon effective, to get it +forward, and to support neighboring platoons in their effort to +advance. At the same time he must hold himself subject to his +captain's directions. He should take advantage of every chance to +carry his platoon forward unless otherwise ordered. In all this he is +assisted by his section chiefs (sergeants) and by his corporals. + +At the commencement of an engagement the platoon commander will give +the objective (part of the enemy's line or aiming target) at which his +platoon is to direct its fire. Noncommissioned officers must be sure +that they see and understand the objective, and that all the men in +their squads do likewise. Fire is then directed at this objective +without further command until the platoon commander gives a new +objective. + +Men should be instructed to aim at that part of the target assigned to +their platoon which corresponds with their own position in their own +platoon, so that there will be no portion of the target which is not +covered by fire. A portion of the enemy's line not covered by fire +means that that portion is able to coolly aim and fire at their +opponents. + +In an engagement the voice can seldom be heard over a few feet, and +the platoon commander will generally have to convey his orders by +signals. A sergeant may be able to shout orders to his section, and +orders may be repeated along a skirmish line by shouting. Care should +be taken that orders intended for one platoon only are not thus +conveyed to another platoon. + +A short blast on the whistle, given by the platoon commander, means +"Attention to Orders." All noncommissioned officers at once suspend +firing and glance toward the platoon commander to see if the latter +has any signals or orders for them. If not, they resume firing. A long +blast on the whistle means "Suspend Firing." When a noncommissioned +officer hears this signal from his platoon commander, he should at +once shout "Suspend Firing." Upon receiving a signal, the +noncommissioned officer for whom it is intended should at once repeat +it back, to be sure that it is correctly understood. + +As a rule, rushes should be started by a unit on one flank and should +be followed in succession by the other units to the opposite flank. +Each succeeding unit should halt on the line established by the unit +which first rushed. When a unit is about to rush, leaders in charge of +adjacent units should caution their men to be careful not to fire into +the rushing unit as it bounds forward. + +When one unit suspends fire for the purpose of rushing, adjacent +leaders should arrange to have a portion of their men turn their fire +on the target of the rushing unit, to the end that there may be no +portion of the enemy's line not under fire and able to fire coolly on +the rushing unit. + +Rushes should be made for as long a distance as possible, due regard +being had for the wind of the men and not to get beyond supporting +distance of the other units. Long rushes facilitate an advance, and +quickly place a skirmish line close to the enemy's position, where +its fire will have more effect. An attacking line suffers less from +casualties at short ranges than it does at mid range. + +Every advantage should be taken to utilize the cover available. The +best kind of cover is that which, while it masks the skirmishers from +the sight and fire of the enemy, affords favorable conditions for +firing and for readily advancing. In order to allow men to regain +their wind, or should the fire of the enemy be so effective as to +prevent a further advance without reinforcement, advantage may be +taken to lie close in cover, or hasty fire trenches may be thrown up +in order to allow the line to maintain its position. "=To go back +under fire is to die.=" + +When a platoon is firing, all noncommissioned officers watch every +opportunity to make the fire more effective. The section chiefs and +corporals should constantly watch the men to see that they do not +become excited, fire too hastily or without aim, that their sights are +set at the correct range, that they are obviously firing at the +designated target, and that they assume steady firing positions and +take advantage of cover. In performing these duties it may be +necessary for the section chiefs to be constantly crawling along the +line. A substitute chief assists the chief of his section by +supervising the fire of the men near him, firing when not actively +engaged in that duty. + +Bayonets are fixed preparatory to a charge when armed with that +weapon. This command is usually given by the bugle. Only two or three +men in each section should fix their bayonets at the same time, in +order that there may be no marked pause or diminution in the fire at +this critical stage of the engagement. + +In order to be effective in combat, the platoon must be thoroughly +trained to work as a team. Each noncommissioned officer must be +conversant with the signals and commands and the proper methods for +instantly putting into effect the orders of his platoon commander. +Each private must be trained until he instinctively does the right +thing in each phase of the action. + + +=Section 3. Patrolling.= + +The designation of a patrol indicates the nature of the duty for which +it is detailed, as, for example, visiting, reconnoitering, exploring, +flanking, combat, harassing, pursuing, etc. An Infantry patrol +consists, as a rule, of from 3 to 16 men, a Cavalry patrol generally +of from 4 to 10 men. + +Reconnoitering patrols are habitually small and seek safety in +concealment or flight, fighting only when their mission demands it. +The most skillful reconnoissance is where patrols accomplish their +mission and return without being discovered by the enemy. When +resistance is expected stronger detachments are required. These cover +themselves with small patrols of two to four men, the remainder acting +as support. + +The commander determines the number and strength of patrols and when +they are to be sent out. It is a cardinal principle to send out +patrols of such strength only as will accomplish the object. + +The officer sending out the patrol verifies the details, designates a +second in command, and gives the necessary instruction. The orders or +instructions for a patrol, or for any detachment going on +reconnoissance, must state clearly where the enemy is or is supposed +to be, what information is desired, what features are of special +importance, the general direction to be followed, whether friendly +patrols are liable to be encountered, and where messages are to be +sent or the patrol is to report. Important and comprehensive +instructions should be in writing, but precautions against capture of +papers must be taken. An officer sending out a patrol must be certain +that his orders are understood. Detailed instructions are, as a rule, +avoided. When necessary the time of return is stated. + +The patrol leader should be selected with care. He should be an +excellent horseman, have good judgment, courage, be able to read maps, +make sketches, and send clear and concise messages. In addition to his +ordinary equipment, he should have a map of the country, a watch, +field glass, compass, whistle, message blanks, and pencils. + +The leader of a patrol should carefully inspect the men and horses +before starting out. He should see that the horses are well shod and +in good working condition. Nervous horses or those that neigh when +left alone should not be taken. The equipment of each man should be +complete and so arranged as to prevent rattling. Articles that are +liable to glitter in the sunlight should be covered. Nothing should be +taken along that would be of information to the enemy if any members +of the patrol were captured, for example, copies of orders, maps with +positions of troops marked thereon, letters, newspapers, or collar +ornaments. + +The leader then gives his patrol information and instructions. These +embrace instructions from higher authority; his detailed plans; +information of the country and enemy; the countersign, if any; the +point where the patrol will assemble if scattered. He will see that +the men understand the prescribed signals. + +=It must always be remembered that it makes no difference, how +valuable may be the information that the patrol gets, it is worthless +if not sent back in time to be of service.= Herein is where most +patrols fail. This applies particularly to the information obtained by +patrols acting as a point or flankers of advance, rear, and flank +guards. Whenever the patrol gets any information, the leader must +think whether the commanding officer would change his plans or issue +new orders if he had the information. If he would, the information +should be sent back at once. If the distance is great or the +inhabitants are hostile, it is well to send two men with the message. +These men should not travel side by side, but as a patrol of two men. +If the information is very important, and the danger of capture is +considerable, the message should be sent by two parties, each +traveling by a different route. The gaits should be specified. + +A message from a patrol should always show (_a_) the place from which +it is sent; (_b_) the time it is sent (date, hour, and minute); (_c_) +to whom it is sent; (_d_) the message itself; (_e_) what the patrol +intends doing after sending the message; (_f_) the name of the sender. +Under (_d_) care must be taken to separate what has actually been seen +by the patrol from information received from other sources. Care must +also be taken not to exaggerate what is seen, but to report only the +exact facts. + +Whether moving or halted, patrols exercise the greatest vigilance to +prevent discovery. No formal formation is or should be prescribed. +Under the leader's guidance it moves so as to guard against surprise, +usually with point and flankers. To extend the sphere of its +observation, still smaller patrols (one or two men) may be sent out +for short distances, communication with the leader being maintained by +signals. Whatever the formation adopted, it should favor the escape of +at least one man in case of surprise. + +In patrols of two to five men the commander generally leads. In this +formation few signals are necessary, the men simply regulating their +movements by his. + +In questioning civilians caution is observed not to disclose +information that may be of value to the enemy. Strangers are not +allowed to precede the patrol. Patrol leaders are authorized to seize +telegrams and mail matter, and to arrest individuals, reporting the +facts as soon as possible. + +Patrols should observe everything for signs of the enemy. Even +apparent trifles may be of great value. The finding of a collar +ornament showing a man's regiment may enable the chief of staff to +determine that the enemy has been reenforced. + +Patrols should not travel on the main roads if they can observe them +and at the same time make the necessary progress by moving some +distance to the side of the roads. + +Except in case of attack or of great personal danger, no member of the +patrol should fire on hostile troops without orders from the patrol +leader. When sent out to gain information, patrols should avoid +fighting unless it is absolutely necessary in order to carry out their +orders. If the leader determines to fight, he should quickly decide +whether he will attack mounted with the saber and thus dispose pf the +enemy without the noise of fire action. Cases will arise where a quick +mounted pistol attack will obtain the best results. If discovered, the +patrol would dismount only as a last resort. The leader should always +have in mind, as he rides long, what he will do if he meets the enemy. + +Villages and inclosures involving danger of surprise are entered with +precaution, and for brief periods only. Halts are made at points +affording good view, and the country is studied in all directions, +landmarks to the rear being impressed on the minds of the men so that +the way back can be readily found; the leader consults his map and +locates himself thereon. + +When a patrol is scattered it reassembles at some place previously +selected; if checked in one direction, it takes another; if cut off it +returns by a detour or forces its way through. As a last resort it +scatters so that at least one man may return with information. Patrols +nearing their own lines should march at a walk unless pressed by the +enemy. + +Occasionally it is advisable for the leader to conceal his patrol and +continue the reconnaissance with one or two companions. + +Patrols far from their commands or in contact with the enemy often +remain out overnight. In such cases they seek a place of concealment, +proceeding thereto after nightfall or under cover. + +When the enemy is encountered it is very necessary to locate his main +force. Information is particularly desired of his strength, whether he +has infantry, cavalry, and artillery, the route and direction of his +march, or the location of his camp and line of outposts. + +Dust clouds indicate moving bodies. Infantry raises a low, thick +cloud; cavalry a high, thin cloud; artillery and wagons a broken +cloud. The kind of troops, direction of march, and approximate +strength may thus sometimes be roughly estimated. If from some +position a body of troops can be seen marching along in column, the +exact time in minutes and seconds it requires for them to pass a +certain point should be noted, together with the formation they are +in, thus: Infantry, column of squads, three minutes and twelve +seconds; cavalry, columns of twos at a trot, one minute and twenty +seconds; wagons, four-mule, five minutes. From this information the +strength can be determined by the following rule: + +Assuming that infantry in column of squads occupy half a yard per man, +cavalry in column of fours 1 yard per man, and artillery and wagons in +single column 20 yards per gun, caisson, or wagon, a given point would +be passed in one minute by about-- + + 175 infantry. + 110 cavalry at a walk. + 200 cavalry at a trot. + 5 guns, caissons, or wagons. + +For troops in column of twos, take one-half of the above estimate. + +Patrols should always observe the country marched over, with a view to +making a report on the same. The following information is always of +value: + +=Roads.=--Direction; kind, whether dirt, gravel, macadam, etc.; +width, whether suitable for column of squads, etc.; border, whether +fenced with stone, barbed wire, rails, etc.; steepness in crossing +hills and valleys; where they pass through defiles and along +commanding heights, etc.; crossroads. + +=Surrounding country.=--Whether generally open and passable for +infantry, cavalry, and artillery, or whether broken and impassable, +due to fences, woods, crops, ravines; whether good grazing is +available, etc. + +=Railroads.=--Single or double track, narrow or broad gauge, tunnels, +bridges, cuts, direction, stations, etc. + +=Bridges.=--Material, wood, stone, steel, etc.; length and breadth; +number and kind of piers or supports. + +=Rivers.=--Direction; width, depth; kind of bottom, such as mud, sand, +rocky, etc.; banks, steep or gentle, open or wooded; rapidity of +current; variations in depth at different times as indicated by +driftwood and high-water marks; islands; heights in vicinity +commanding streams. + +=Woods.=--Extent and shape; kind of trees; free from underbrush or +not; clearings, roads, swamps, ravines, etc. + +=Telegraph lines.=--Number of wires, along roads or railroads, +stations, etc. + +=Villages.=--Size, kind of houses, nature of streets, means of +defense, etc. + +=Hills and ridges.=--Whether scopes are gentle or steep; whether top +is narrow or wide; whether ground is broken or smooth, wooded or +clear; whether difficult or easy to cross, etc.; whether commanded by +other hills. + +=Defiles.=--Their direction, length, and width; whether surrounding +heights are passable for infantry and artillery: kind of country at +each opening of the defile, etc. + +=Ravines, ditches, etc.=--Width and depth; banks, whether passable for +infantry, cavalry, and wagons; whether suitable for trenches, or for +movement of troops therein, etc. + +In general, every soldier should be constantly on the lookout to +obtain information that might be of some military value. Remember that +information of the enemy and of the country is worthless unless made +known to the proper officials in time to be of use. + +Every soldier should be able to find his way in a strange country; +should know how to use a compass; should know how to locate the North +Star; should be able to travel across country, keeping a given +direction, both by day and by night, and by observing landmarks he +should be able to return to the starting point either over the same +route or by a more circuitous one. This can easily be learned =by a +little practice=. + +It adds a great deal to the value of a soldier if he knows how to use +a map to find his way. If he knows how to =make= a rough sketch of the +country showing the position of roads, streams, woods, railroads, +bridges, houses, villages, fields, fences, hills, etc., he has added +to his value as a soldier very much, indeed, because a rough sketch of +a country will give more and better information at a glance than can +be obtained by reading many pages of written description. + +=Patrolling= is one of the most important duties a soldier can learn. +Any enlisted man who understands thoroughly his duties as a member of +a patrol will understand also most of his duties when with advance or +rear guards or when on outpost duty. Patrolling can not be learned +merely by reading books nor by work indoors. Thoroughness comes only +by actually going out in the country and acting as a patrol. + +In carrying out this idea the following scheme is recommended: + +Let four or more men and a noncommissioned officer act as a patrol. +They assemble at a certain time, at a convenient point on some country +road. An officer, whom we will call Captain A, acts as the director; +the noncommissioned officer, whom we will call Sergeant B, acts as +patrol leader; and the others (Privates C, D, E, etc.) act as members +of Sergeant B's patrol. + +Assume that the troop (squadron, etc.) has just made camp in this +vicinity and that the inhabitants are friendly (or hostile). + +Captain A indicates to the rest of the men where the camp is situated +and points out where the various sentinels are posted. (This in itself +affords an opportunity for much discussion and for teaching many +valuable lessons.) + +Captain A then calls up Sergeant B and tells him-- + +(_a_) Just what information Captain A has of the enemy, and also any +information of the country or of friendly troops in the vicinity that +might be of service to Sergeant B. + +(_b_) How many men he shall take for the patrol (this is another +problem for Captain A to solve). Any men present not used as part of +the patrol ride along with Captain A as observers. + +(_c_) How far he shall go and what country he shall cover with the +patrol. + +(_d_) Just what information it is particularly desired he shall +obtain. + +(_e_) Where he shall send his messages and when he shall return. + +=Example 1=: + +"Sergeant B, it has just been reported to me that a company of hostile +infantry was in camp last night at X, about 5 miles from here on this +road. Take 5 men and proceed toward X and find out whether the enemy +is still there, and if not, when he left and where he went. Send +messages to me here, and return by 8 o'clock this evening." + +=Example 2=: + +"Sergeant B, I think I heard the firing of field guns over in that +direction a short while ago. Take 6 men and proceed to that high hill +you see over there about 4 miles away. Send a message to me here when +you reach there. You may go farther if you then think it advisable, +but return before daylight. I desire particularly to know if there are +any hostile troops in this vicinity, especially artillery. I shall +send Sergeant X with 3 men to observe the country from that hill you +see over there farther to the south. He will remain there till dark. +Send messages to me here. If the troop is not here on your return you +will find a note for you underneath this rail." + +=Example 3=: + +"Sergeant B, this friendly country boy has just reported that four +hostile cavalrymen stopped about half an hour ago at his father's +house, which he says is about 2 miles up this road. One of the men +seemed to be very sick. You will select eight men from your section +and endeavor to capture these men. If they have disappeared you will +reconnoiter in that vicinity until dark. This boy will accompany you +as a guide. He will ride Private X's horse. I desire particularly to +learn the position, strength, and composition of any hostile troops in +this vicinity. Send reports to me here. Return before daylight." + +=Example 4=: + +"Sergeant B, here is a map of the country in this vicinity on a scale +of 1 inch to the mile. Here is where we are camped [indicating +position on the map]. I have just learned that foraging parties of the +enemy are collecting supplies over here at X [indicating point on +map], which is 10 miles off in that direction [pointing across country +toward X]. It is reported that this bridge over this stream +[indicating same on the map], which is about 3 miles down this road +[indicating road and direction on the ground], has been destroyed. You +will take three men from your platoon and verify this report. You will +also reconnoiter the stream for a distance of 3 miles both above and +below the bridge for fords suitable for infantry. Messages will reach +me here. Return by 8 o'clock to-night." + +Sergeant B then inspects his horses and men and gives them their +instructions. The patrol is then formed and moves out exactly as it +would under actual war conditions. + +Captain A may halt (and assemble if desirable) the patrol at intervals +in order to discuss the formation used and the movement of any members +of the patrol, their route, use of cover, etc., with the reasons +therefor, and compare the same with suggested modifications of the +formations, etc. After the discussion, the patrol is again set in +motion. Captain A may accompany any part of the patrol. From time to +time he presents certain situations to some member of the patrol, +being very careful to assume only such situations as might naturally +occur. + +Thus, take Example 1: + +Captain A is with Sergeant B, who, with Private C, is marching along +the road as the point of the patrol. The other members of the patrol +are distributed to suit the nature of the country over which the +patrol is marching. The point has just reached a ridge beyond which +the country is open and cultivated for about half a mile. Beyond this +the road enters a woods. Captain A now says: "Sergeant B, from this +point you see two soldiers in khaki on the road there at the beginning +of that cornfield about 200 yards from the woods [points out same]. +They are moving in this direction. About 200 yards to the right of +these and somewhat farther to their rear you see two more men moving +along that rail fence." + +Sergeant B now does exactly as he would do in actual war. How does he +signal to his patrol? Does he assemble his men? If so, how and where? +Does he send a message back to camp; and if so, by whom, and is it +written or verbal? (If written, Sergeant B actually writes it and +delivers it to Private ----, with the necessary instructions. If +verbal, it is actually given to Private ---- with instructions.) +Captain A must in this case make notes of what the message was. In +either case, Private ---- ceases to be a member of the patrol and +joins Captain A as an observer. He should, however, at some later time +be required to repeat his message to Captain A, on the assumption that +he had reached camp with the same. The message, whether oral or +written, should be thoroughly analyzed and discussed. Was it proper to +send a message at this time? Does Sergeant B intend to remain in +observation; if so, how long? (Captain A can give such information +from time to time concerning the hostile patrol as Sergeant B might +reasonably be supposed to learn in view of his dispositions. In order +that Captain A may present natural assumptions, it is very essential +that in his own mind he should, at the outset, assume a situation for +the hostile forces and that he should consider himself as in command +of all hostile troops. In this particular case he should assume +himself to be in command of the hostile patrol, acting under certain +specified orders similar to examples given, and he should conduct this +patrol in his own mind in accordance with these orders, giving +Sergeant B only such information as he might reasonably be expected to +obtain in view of whatever action Sergeant B takes.) Will Sergeant B +attempt to capture this patrol? If so, how? Will he avoid fighting and +attempt to pass it unobserved; and if so, how and why? + +In this manner the exercise is continued. Care must be taken not to +have the patrol leader or members state what they would do, but they +must actually do it. Explanations and discussions may take place +later. + +In a similar manner the director may inform Sergeant B (or any member +of the patrol) that this hostile patrol is followed by a squad (on the +assumption that it is the leading unit of an advance guard), and the +exercise is then continued along these lines. + +The following are examples of assumption that might be made and +carried out: + +(_a_) That the patrol is unexpectedly fired upon. + +(_b_) That one or more of the patrol is wounded. + +(_c_) That a prisoner is captured (let an observer act as prisoner). + +(_d_) That a friendly inhabitant gives certain information. + +(_e_) That a dust cloud is seen in the distance over the trees. + +(_f_) That a column of troops can be seen marching along a distant +road. + +(_g_) That an abandoned camp is discovered and certain signs noted. + +(_h_) That the patrol is attacked by a superior force and compelled to +scatter. + +There is practically no end to the number of reasonable assumptions +that may be made. + +Troop officers may use this method of instructing noncommissioned +officers in patrolling, advance and rear guard duty, outposts, and in +squad leading, in writing messages, in selecting positions for +trenches, and in constructing and concealing same. This form of +instruction is called "a tactical ride or, if dismounted, a tactical +walk." It is very greatly used by all foreign armies. Exercises along +the same general lines are conducted for field and staff officers and +even general officers, and are called "tactical rides" and +"strategical rides," depending upon their object. + +After some proficiency has been attained as a result of these tactical +rides, the greatest interest and enthusiasm can be awakened in this +work by sending out two patrols the same day, one to operate against +the other. Each should wear a distinctive uniform. The strength of +each patrol, its starting point, route to be followed, and its orders +should all be unknown to the other patrol. If blank ammunition is +used, an officer should supervise its issue and carefully inspect to +see that no man carries any ball cartridges. One umpire should +accompany the commander of each party. Each umpire should be fully +informed of the strength, orders, and route of both patrols. He must, +however, carefully avoid giving suggestions or offering any +information to the commander. Observers in these small maneuver +problems are generally in the way and none should be permitted to be +along. + +These small maneuvers may be gradually developed by having one side +establish an outpost or fight a delaying action, etc. + +It should always be remembered that there is no hard and fast rule +prescribing how a patrol of three, five, or any number of men should +march. The same is equally true of advance guards, and applies also to +the establishment of outposts. It is simply a question of common sense +based on military knowledge. Don't try to remember any diagrams in a +book. Think only of what you have been ordered to do and how best you +can handle your men to accomplish your mission, and at the same time +save the men and horses from any unnecessary hardships. Never use two +or more men to do what one can do just as well, and don't let your men +get beyond your control. + +In addition to the signals prescribed in the Cavalry Drill +Regulations, the following should be clearly understood by the members +of a patrol: + +Enemy in sight in small numbers, hold rifle above the head +horizontally; enemy in force, same proceeding, raising and lowering +the rifle several times; take cover, a downward motion of the hand. + +Other signals may be agreed upon, but they must be familiar to the +men; complicated signals are avoided. Signals must be used cautiously +so as not to convey information to the enemy. + + +=Section 4. Advance guards.= + +The advance guard is a detachment of the main body which precedes and +covers it on the march. The primary duty of an advance guard is to +insure the safe and uninterrupted march of the main body. Specifically +its duties are: + +1. To guard against surprise and furnish information by +reconnoitering. + +2. To push back small parties of the enemy and prevent their +observing, firing upon, or delaying the main body. + +3. To check the enemy's advance in force long enough to permit the +main body to prepare for action. + +4. When the enemy is encountered on the defensive, to seize a good +position and locate his lines, care being taken not to bring on a +general engagement unless the advance guard commander is empowered to +do so. + +5. To remove obstacles, repair the road, and favor in every way the +steady, march of the column. + +The strength of the advance guard will vary with the proximity of the +enemy and character of the country; for a regiment it will generally +consist of from two troops to a squadron, for a squadron of one troop; +for a troop of from a section to a platoon. The advance guard +commander is responsible for the proper performance of the duties with +which it is charged and for its conduct and formation. + +The advance guard provides for its security and gains information by +throwing out to the front and flanks smaller bodies: Each part must +keep in touch with the unit from which it is sent out. An advance +guard is generally divided into a reserve and a support; where it +consists of less than a squadron, the reserve is generally omitted. + +The support sends forward an advance party, which, in turn, sends +forward a point. In small advance guards the point precedes the +advance party about 350 yards, the advance party the support about 500 +yards, and the support the main body about 600 yards. Where advance +guards are large enough to require a reserve these distances are +increased about one-fourth, the reserve following the support, the +main body following the reserve at a distance varying from 500 to 800 +yards. + +Unless the country to the flanks is distinctly visible from the roads +for a distance of what may be said to be effective rifle fire, +approximately 1,000 yards, flanking patrols of two or three men each +should be sent out from the advance party, and, when in proximity of +the enemy, in addition from the support. When the nature of the +country is such that patrols may move across country, without unduly +delaying the march these patrols should march at a distance of from +500 to 600 yards from the flank of the body from which detached. For +the examination of any object, such as a wood, buildings, etc., +examining patrols should be sent out from the main body. The usual +method of protecting the flanks, particularly when the country is at +all cut up or difficult, is to send out patrols from time to time to +some point from which a good outlook can be obtained, or which will +afford protection to the enemy. These patrols remain in observation, +observer being dismounted, his horse held by another trooper until the +advance guard has passed, when they rejoin the nearest subdivision, as +quickly as possible working their way to that to which they belong +during the halts or by riding up the side of the road. By sending out +a succession of small patrols in this manner the flanks are protected. +Should the advance party become depleted, it must be reenforced from +the support. + +A squadron acting as advance guard would have two or three troops in +reserve and one or two in support. The support would send forward as +advance party two platoons, the advance party in turn sending forward +as point one section. A troop acting as advance guard would have no +reserve and would send forward as advance party one platoon. All Of +the above may be changed as circumstances warrant. + +Cases may arise when the best means of covering the head and flanks of +the column will be by a line of skirmishers extended at intervals of +from 5 to 50 yards, as, for instance, when passing through high corn, +underbrush, etc. + +It must always be remembered that the principal duty of the advance +guard is to secure the uninterrupted march of the main body. If the +point is fired upon, it should at once deploy and endeavor to advance +fighting. The flankers should assist in this and endeavor to locate +the enemy's flank should there be such resistance that advance was +impossible. Each succeeding body should march promptly forward, and in +turn be placed in action, with the idea of clearing the way for the +advance of the main body. Should this be impossible, the commander of +the entire body must determine what measures he will take. + + +=Section 5. Rear guards.= + +A rear guard is a detachment detailed to protect the main body from +attack in rear. Cavalry is an excellent arm for rear guard duty on +account of its mobility. While part of the cavalry is using dismounted +fire action, the other part may gallop back and take up a new +position. In a retreat it checks pursuit and enables the main body to +increase the distance between it and the enemy and to re-form if +disorganized. The general formation is that of an advance guard +reversed. + +Its commander should take advantage of every favorable opportunity to +delay the pursuers by obstructing the road, or by taking up specially +favorable positions from which to force the enemy to deploy. In this +latter case care must be taken not to become so closely engaged as to +render withdrawal unnecessarily difficult. The position taken should +be selected with reference to ease of withdrawal and ability to bring +the enemy under fire at long range. + + +=Section 6. Flank guards.= + +A flank guard is a detachment detailed to cover the flank of a column +marching past, or across the front of, an enemy. It may be placed in +position to protect the passage, or it may be so marched as to cover +the passage. The object of the flank guard is to hold the enemy in +check long enough to enable the main body to pass, or, like the +advance guard, to enable the main body to deploy. Like all other +detachments, it should be no larger than is necessary, and should not +be detailed except when its protection is required. + +When a flank guard consists of a regiment or less, its distance from +the main body should not be much over 5 miles. Practicable +communication must exist between it and the main body. The flank guard +is marched as a separate command; that is, with advance or rear +guards, or both, as circumstances demand, and with patrolling on the +exposed flank. + + +=Section 7. Outposts.= + +Troops not on the march provide for their security by outposts. The +general duties of an outpost are reconnoissance, observation, and +resistance. + +The specific duties are: + +1. To protect the main body, so that the troops may rest undisturbed. + +2. In case of attack, to check the enemy long enough to enable the +main body to make the necessary dispositions. + +During an advance the outposts are usually detailed from the advance +guard. During the retreat the outposts for the night usually forms +the rear guard the next day. If the command remains in bivouac, the +new outpost generally goes on duty at daybreak. + +The vigilance of outpost troops must be unceasing, but they should +avoid bringing on combats or unnecessarily alarming the command. +Firing disturbs the rest of troops and, if frequently indulged in, +ceases to be a warning. + +No trumpet signals except "to arms" or "to horse" are sounded, and all +unnecessary noises must be avoided. + +As a rule an outpost will not exceed one-sixth the strength Of a +command. For a single troop a few sentinels and patrols will suffice; +for a larger command a more elaborate system must be devised. The +troops composing the outpost are generally divided into a reserve and +several supports. + +At a proper distance in front of the camp of the main body a line +which offers a good defensive position is selected. This is called +=the line of resistance=, and should be so located that an advancing +enemy will be held in check beyond effective rifle range in case of a +small force, artillery range in case of a large force, of the main +body until the latter can deploy. The reserve is stationed at some +point in rear of this line, where it can be moved quickly to reinforce +any point as needed. The line of resistance is divided into sections, +the limits of each of which are clearly defined. A support is assigned +to each section, which are numbered from right to left, and occupies a +position on or near the line, having special regard to covering +avenues of approach. The position occupied should always be +intrenched. The reserve and supports proceed to their respective +positions by the shortest routes, providing for their own protection +by sending out covering detachments. + +Generally speaking, about one-half the Infantry of the advance guard +should be in the supports. As each support arrives at its position it +sends out observation groups, varying in size from four men to a +platoon, to watch the country in the direction of the enemy. These +groups are called outguards. For convenience they are classified as +pickets, sentry squads, and cossack posts, and should be sufficient in +number to cover the front of the section occupied by the support and +connect with the neighboring supports. The horses of the outguards +may be left at the position of the support. + +A picket is a group consisting of one or two sections, ordinarily not +exceeding half a company, posted in the line of outposts to cover a +given sector. It furnishes patrols and one or more sentinels, sentry +squads, or cossack posts for observation. Pickets are placed at the +more important points in the line of outguards, such as road forks. +The strength of each depends upon the number of small groups required +to observe properly its sector. + +A sentry squad is a squad (eight men) posted in observation at an +indicated point. It posts a double sentinel in observation, the +remaining men resting near by and furnishing the reliefs of sentinels. +In some cases it may be required to furnish a patrol. + +A cossack post consists of four men. It is an observation group +similar to a sentry squad, but employs a single sentinel. + +As a rule not more than one-third of the support should be on outguard +duty. As soon as they are sent out to their positions the support +commander selects a defensive position on the line of resistance; +gives instruction for intrenching same; establishes a sentinel to +watch for and transmit signals from outguards; sends out patrols to +reconnoiter the country to the front of his section and, if on the +flank of the line, the flank; and then proceeds to make a careful +reconnoissance of the section assigned him, rectifying the position of +outguards if necessary, seeing that they understand their instructions +in case of attack or when strangers approach their posts, and pointing +out their lines of retreat in case they are compelled to fall back on +the support. + +When the outguards are established, the members of the support may +stack arms and remove equipment except cartridge belts. Part of the +horses may be unsaddled and groomed and fed at one time. All girths +should be loosened. No fires will be built or smoking permitted unless +specially authorized, or no loud talking or other noise. All +patrolling to the front will be done, as a rule, from the support. The +support commander should locate the position of the adjacent supports +and make arrangements with the commanders for the joint defense of the +line of resistance. At nights all roads and trails should be carefully +covered and the country to the front and between adjacent outguards +well patrolled. Horses should, as far as possible, be permitted to +rest, unsaddled, at night. + +The line occupied by the outguards is called the line of observation. +Outguards move to their positions providing for their own protection +and so as to conceal the movement from the enemy. These positions are +intrenched and are numbered from right to left in each support. + +The duties of the outguard are to observe the enemy, to guard the +outpost from surprise, and to make a preliminary resistance to the +enemy's advance. The strength of the outguard will vary according to +its object. When an important road, which at night will afford a line +of advance, or a bridge is to be covered, or when several posts are +established from an outguard it should be of considerable strength, a +section or a platoon. When mere observation and alarm are all that is +required four men will suffice. One corporal and seven privates are a +good number to use as an outguard; this will allow one double sentry +post of three reliefs and one man in addition to the commander, who +may be used for messenger service. The outguard should be carefully +concealed. + +The utmost quiet should be observed, and there should be no cooking or +smoking. The intervals between outguards will depend upon the +situation and the terrain. The line of observation is not necessarily +continuous, but all avenues of approach must be carefully guarded. The +distance of the outguard from the support likewise is governed by the +terrain, but in general may be said to be from 300 to 400 yards. In +thick country or at night outguards patrol along the line of +observation between posts. Communication between outguards and the +support is by signal and messenger, in special cases by wire. Members +of the outguard retain possession of their weapons and do not remove +their equipment. + +Sentinels from the outguard are posted so as to avoid observation, but +so that they may have a clear lookout and be able to see, if possible, +by day, the sentinels of the adjacent outguards. Double sentinels are +always posted near enough to each other to communicate easily in +ordinary voice. Sentinels are generally on post two hours out of six. +For every sentinel and every patrol there should be three reliefs, and +outguards should be of a strength sufficient to allow this. The +position of a sentinel should be selected with reference to +observation. It may be advantageous to place a sentinel in a tree. +Sentinels furnished by cossack posts or sentry squads are kept near +their group. Those furnished by their pickets may be kept as far as +100 yards away. + +Reliefs, visiting patrols, and inspecting officers approach sentinels +from the rear. + +A sentinel on the line of observation should always have the following +instructions: The names of villages, streams, and prominent features +in sight and where the roads lead. The number (if any) of his post, +and the number of his and of the adjoining outguards; the position of +the support; the line of retreat to be followed if the outguard is +compelled to fall back; the position of advance detachments and +whether friendly patrols are operating in front; to watch to the front +and flanks without intermission and devote special attention to +unusual or suspicious occurrences; if he sees indications of the +enemy, to at once notify his immediate superior; in case of imminent +danger, or when an attack is made, to give the alarm by firing +rapidly; by day to pass in or out officers, noncommissioned officers, +and detachments recognized as part of the outposts, and officers known +to have authority to do so; to detain all others and notify the +outguard commander; at night, when persons approach his post, to come +to a ready, halt them, and notify the outguard commander; the latter +challenges, ascertains their identity, and acts accordingly. When +individuals fail to halt, or otherwise disobey, to fire upon them +after a second warning, or sooner if they attempt to attack or escape; +to require deserters to lay down their arms, and remain until a patrol +is sent out to bring them in; to order deserters pursued by the enemy +to drop their arms and to give an alarm; if they fail to obey they are +fired upon; to require bearers of flags of truce and their escorts to +halt and to face outward; to permit them to hold no conversation and +to see that they are then blindfolded and disposed of in accordance +with instructions from the support commander; if they fail to obey to +fire upon them; at night, to remain practically stationary, moving +about for purposes of observation only; not to sit or lie down unless +authorized to do so; in the daytime, to make use of natural or +artificial cover and assume such positions as to give him the best +field of view; to inform passing patrols of what he has seen; to carry +his weapon habitually loaded and locked and at will. + +Outpost patrols are divided into those which operate beyond the lines +and those whose duty lies principally within the lines. The former, +called reconnoitering patrols, scout in the direction of the enemy; +the latter, called visiting patrols, maintain communication between +the parts of the outpost and supervise the performance of duty on the +line of observation. Reconnoissance should be continuous. Though +scouts and detachments of cavalry remain in contact with the enemy, or +at least push forward to a considerable distance, more detailed +reconnoissance by infantry patrols in the foreground must not be +neglected. Reconnoitering patrols are composed of at least two men and +a skillful leader, who, in important cases, would be an officer. They +obtain information, ascertain the presence of the enemy, or discover +his approach. All patrols, when they cross the line of observation, +inform the nearest sentinel of the direction in which they are to +advance; on their return they similarly report what they have seen of +the enemy; signals are agreed upon so that they can be recognized when +returning. Any ground near the line of observation which might afford +cover for troops, or for scouts or spies, and the approach to which +can not be observed by sentinels, is searched frequently by patrols. +Definite information concerning the enemy is reported at once. Patrols +fire only in self-defense or to give the alarm. Supports on the flank +of an outpost position patrol the country on the exposed flank. +Visiting patrols and reliefs should not march in the open and thereby +expose the position of sentinels. + +During a march in the vicinity of the enemy when halts are made, +special measures for protection are taken. When the halt is for a +short period, less than half an hour, the advance party and support +remain at ease, the point and flankers move to positions from which +they can obtain a good lookout, and additional patrols may be sent out +from advance parties and supports. Where the halt is for a period +exceeding half an hour a =march outpost= should be formed. + +With an advance guard consisting of a squadron, one troop as support +and three as reserve, a suggested form of march outpost might be +formed as follows: The leading platoon moving to the front at a trot +for 400 yards would be outguard No. 2; the next platoon in rear, +moving to the right at a trot for about 600 to 800 yards would be +outguard No. 1; the next platoon, moving to the left in the same +manner would be outguard No. 3; and the 4th platoon would be the +support of the march outpost. The reserve (3 troops) would be the +reserve of the march outpost. On signal being given to resume the +march, the various units would close in at a trot or gallop, and as +soon as the support had assembled the march would be resumed. + + +=Section 8. Rifle trenches.= + +Soldiers should remember that only by acting vigorously on the +offensive can an army hope to gain the victory. The defensive may +delay or stop the enemy, but it can never destroy him. "Troops dig +because they are forced to halt; they do not halt to dig." + +Trenches will frequently be constructed, without being used, and +soldiers must expect this as a feature of campaigning and accept +cheerfully what at times may appear as unnecessary labor. + +When intrenching under fire cover is first secured in the lying +position, each man scooping but a depression for his body and throwing +the earth to the front. In this position no excavation can be +conveniently made for the legs, but if time permits the original +excavation is enlarged and deepened until it is possible to assume a +sitting position, with the legs crossed and the shoulder to the +parapet. In such apposition a man presents a smaller target to +shrapnel bullets than in the lying trench and can fire more +comfortably and with less exposure than in the kneeling trench. From +the sitting position the excavation may be continued until a standing +trench is secured. + +The accompanying plate shows some of the more common forms of trenches +in profile. Figure 1 is the simplest form of standing trench. Figure 2 +shows the same trench deepened in rear, so as to allow men to walk +along in the rear (deeper) portion of the trench without exposing +their heads above the parapet. Figure 3 shows a cover and firing +trench, with a chamber in which men can find shelter when under heavy +artillery fire. When the excavated earth is easily removed figure 4 +shows a good profile. The enemy's infantry, as well as his artillery, +will generally have great difficulty in seeing this type of trench. + +The mound or bank of earth thrown up for shelter in front of a trench +is called the =parapet=. It should be at least 30 inches thick on top, +and the front should slope gradually, as shown in the plate, so that +shells will tend to glance from it, rather than penetrate and explode. +The top should be covered with sod, grass, or leaves, so as to hide +the newly turned earth, which could be easily seen and aimed at by the +enemy. There should be no rocks, loose stones, or pebbles on top, +which might be struck by the bullets, splintering and flying, thus +adding greatly to the number of dangerous projectiles, and often +deflecting bullets downward into the trench. A stone wall is a very +dangerous thing to be behind in a fight. + +The portion of the ground in rear of the parapet and between the +parapet and the trench not covered by the parapet is to rest the +elbows on when firing, the rifle being rested on top of the parapet. + +To obtain head cover in a trench fill a gunny sack or other bag with +sand or soil and place it on top of the parapet, aiming around the +right-hand side of it, or dig a small lateral trench in the parapet, +large enough to hold the rifle. Roof it over with boards, small logs, +or brush, and heap dirt on top, aiming through the small trench or +resulting loophole. + +Figure 5 shows the plan of a section of a rifle trench.[10] Between +the portions occupied by each squad there is often placed a mound of +earth as high as the top of the parapet and projecting back into the +trench. This is called a =traverse= and protects the occupants of the +trench from fire from a flank. Bullets from this direction hit a +traverse, instead of flying down into the trench and wounding several +men. + + [Footnote 10: The traverse should be at least 6 feet wide + instead of 3 feet, as shown in figure 5.] + +Trenches are seldom continuous, but are made in sections placed at the +most advantageous points, as shown in figure 6. A company or battalion +may occupy a single section. The firing trenches have cover trenches +in rear of them, where the supports can rest undisturbed by the +hostile fire until they are needed in the firing trench to repel a +serious assault or to take part in a counter attack. Passages +consisting of deep communicating trenches facilitate passage from the +cover trenches to the firing trenches when under fire. These +communicating trenches are usually zigzag or traversed to prevent +their being swept by hostile fire. + +When troops are likely to remain in trenches for a considerable time +drainage should be arranged for, and latrines and dressing stations +should be constructed in trenches. Water should be brought into the +trenches and holes excavated in the front wall of the trench for extra +ammunition. + +In digging trenches men usually work in reliefs, one relief digging +while the others rest, the proportion of shovelers to pickmen being +about 3 to 1. If a plow can be obtained to turn the sod, it will +greatly facilitate the initial work of digging. + +[Illustration: Fig. 1, Fig. 2, Fig. 3, Fig. 4, Fig. 5, Fig. 6, Plate +V.] + + + + +CHAPTER VII. + +MARCHING AND CAMPING. + + +=Section 1. Breaking camp and preparation for a march.= + +THE EVENING BEFORE THE MARCH. + +When a command learns that it is to make a march on the following day, +presumably starting early in the morning, certain details should be +attended to the evening before. + +All men should fill their canteens, as there will probably be no time +for this in the morning. + +The mess sergeant should find out whether lunch or the reserve ration +will be carried on the march, and should attend to these details in +the evening in order that the issue can be made promptly in the +morning. + +The stable sergeant will have the stable detail fill all of the feed +bags for the morning's feed, and the section leaders will see that +each of their men has filled his grain bag with the noon feed for the +following day. + +The commander of the guard should be given a memorandum as to what +time to awaken the cooks and where their tent is. The member of the +guard who does this should awaken them without noise, so as not to +disturb the rest of the remainder of the command. + +The cooks should be instructed as to what time breakfast is to be +served and what time to awaken the first sergeant. + +The cooks or cooks' police must cut and split all firewood for the +morning before 9 p. m. There must be no chopping, talking, or rattling +of pans before reveille which will disturb the rest of the command. +This applies to every morning in camp. + + +THE MORNING OF THE MARCH. + +Cooks arise when called by the guard and start the preparation of +breakfast without noise. The first sergeant and stable sergeant are +usually awakened by one of the cooks about half an hour before +reveille in order that they may complete their toilets and breakfast +early and be able to devote all their time to supervising the details +of the morning's work. If the officers desire to be awakened before +reveille they will notify the first sergeant accordingly. + +At first call the men turn out, perform their toilets, strike their +shelter tents (unless it has been directed to await the sounding of +the general for this), and make up their packs. The stable detail +feeds the horses. + +At the sounding of assembly immediately after reveille each man must +be in his proper place in ranks, except the kitchen and stable details +who are actually at work. This assembly is under arms. The first +sergeant starts to call the roll or commands "Report" at the last note +of assembly. Arms are stacked before the troop is dismissed. + +Breakfast is served to the troop immediately after roll call. +Immediately after breakfast each man will wash his mess kit in the hot +water provided for that purpose at the kitchen and will at once pack +the mess kit in his saddlebags. + +The cooks will provide hot water for washing mess kits at the same +time that breakfast is served. + +Immediately after breakfast the troop proceeds to the work of breaking +camp and packing in accordance with a prearranged system similar to +the following: + +One section assists the cooks in packing the kitchen. + +One section strikes and folds the officers' tents and brings them to +the kitchen. + +One section fills in the sink. The sink should not be filled in +earlier than is absolutely necessary. + +The stable detail police the picket line and vicinity. + +One section polices the camp within the company police limits. + +One section is available for possible details from regimental +headquarters. + +Officers and first sergeant supervise the work. + +A permanent assignment of squads to these duties lightens the labor +and decreases the time necessary for breaking camp. + +=Boots and saddles= should not be sounded before all of the above work +has been completed, and without confusion. Don't begin the day by +nagging your men, thereby making them "grouchy" during the march. + +Always be most careful to groom all parts of your horse that will be +touched by the equipment before you begin to saddle up. + +Men should not start from camp thirsty, but should drink all the water +they want immediately after breakfast. All canteens should be filled +before marching. + + +=Section 2. Marches, camps.= + +GENERAL PROVISIONS. + +=977.= The successful conduct of a march is one of the surest tests of +the ability and good judgment, not only of the commander, but of all +subordinate officers as well. Certain general principles and some +exact rules are laid down to fit the case of a normal march, but +tactical considerations as well as the condition of roads and weather, +the necessary forage, water and shelter, sanitation, and other +circumstances render a march of any considerable body of mounted +troops one requiring the most unremitting attention to details on the +part of the commander and his subordinates. A successful Cavalry march +whether in peace or war is one that places the men and horses at the +time and place needed in the best possible condition for the service +required. Failure of mounted troops to successfully carry out a +mission is due as a rule to exhaustion or injuries to the horses +rather than to the men. + +The training of officers of all grades must be such that solicitude +for the condition of horses on the march is second nature; constant +effort should be made, however severe the work, to stimulate the pride +of the trooper in having and in keeping his mount in fit condition; if +such stimulus is ineffective then the remedy, if the trooper is at +fault, lies in other directions. Under favorable conditions field +service offers the best opportunity for conditioning the horses and +hardening the men. + +=978.= =Preparation=: Responsibility for the timely ordering of +necessary preparations preliminary to leaving a permanent camp or +station rests with the commander. All probable needs of the command +for the service on which ordered should be anticipated, instructions +prepared, verified, and issued once in complete form, and no departure +therefrom permitted. The =march order= proper for the actual movement +of the command conforms to the requirements of Field Service +Regulations. =An order or memorandum of service calls= will be issued +and distributed in ample time the night before beginning a march +stating the hour for reville, stables, and breakfast and such other +duties as can reasonably be anticipated. + +Except on account of imperative military reasons, Cavalry should not +leave camp for an hour or more after daylight. If grazing is depended +upon, this is especially necessary, since horses as a rule graze more +freely in the early morning when rested. Ample time should be allowed +after reville for grooming and feeding and thereafter for the men to +breakfast. All stable duties should be done quietly and without hurry +or confusion under the immediate supervision of troop and squadron +commanders. In each troop a man is detailed to walk the picket line +while grain is being fed, to look out for the horses generally and to +take off the feed or the nose bag of a horse as soon as he has +finished feeding. + +The signals for striking tents (=the general=), for policing, +saddling, and beginning the march should be ordered personally by the +commanding officer and only when the duties pertaining to the previous +signal are completed. + +=979.= =The march, its length and rate=: The average daily march of a +Cavalry column of the size of a squadron, or larger, is about 25 miles +when horses are in condition; when starting on long-distance marches +the rate per day for the first few days should be less than 20 miles +and gradually increased. These rules may necessarily be modified, even +when horses are not in fit condition, by reason of emergencies, +character of roads or weather, proximity of water, grazing, etc., but, +with these exceptions, the question of the =length= of the daily march +is one of good judgment and experience on the part of the commander. +The =gait= and =pace= of the daily march are influenced by both the +time the horse is to carry the load and the distance to be covered. +The quicker a march can be completed without forcing the less the +fatigue to both horse and man. Where the footing is good, the road +level, and other considerations do not hamper the column, after the +first or a subsequent halt, may advance first by leading dismounted, +then mount and walk, then trot, a short gallop (exceptional), then the +trot, followed by the walk to the next halt. No gait is to be +maintained continuously long enough to weary either horse or man, +neither must it be changed too frequently in long columns; but +whatever pace or gait is taken it should conform to the standards +(par. 279). The officer setting the pace should occasionally drop back +to observe its effect on the column, and veterinarians, if present, +should be habitually utilized for this purpose. + +The walk, if the footing is good, should be at the rate of 4 miles per +hour, exclusive of halts; the trot at 8 miles per hour, so as to +facilitate posting; the gallop, a very exceptional gait even for small +commands, should be not faster than the maneuvering gallop (par. 236), +and its practicability will depend upon the training and condition of +the horses, since on long marches, unless accustomed to this gait with +packed saddles, the horses will soon break down. + +Very rarely, however, will the conditions allow the regular +arrangement of gaits indicated above. Rolling country, with ascents +and descents, stretches of hard or stony road or of mud, dust, or +sand, crossings of streams, etc., will ordinarily impose corresponding +changes of gait or pace on each of the small elements of the column as +it reaches them. To provide for this the troops in route column, when +so directed, take greater distances than prescribed in order to allow +for closing up at checks. + +The commander must give this matter unremitting attention, since +normal route-order distances in column frequently entail discomfort to +the men and sometimes injuries to the horses which might have been +avoided. + +Unless under exceptional circumstances, the commander of a marching +column will authorize each troop commander to so regulate the gait and +pace of his troop as to conform to that next in front, the gait and +pace of the leading troop being regulated by the commander himself. +This results in each troop changing to the trot, walk, leading +dismounted, etc., at the same place at which the leading troop did, +and although regulation distances, are frequently exceeded, the +tendency on all stretches of good road is to close on the leading +troop of the column. With care this method of marching should result +in enabling each troop in the column to move with almost the same +regularity and freedom from checks as though it were in the lead. + +The fast rate of march that can be expected of small detachments and +of single riders can not be demanded of a long Cavalry column, and as +the command increases in size the rate of march will decrease. The +regulation gaits being, at the walk, 4 miles, the trot, 8 miles, +Cavalry should be able to make, including halts, 5 miles per hour or +better. This rate can be maintained for daily marches of 25 miles +under ordinary conditions for a week at a time, after which a day of +rest should be allowed before continuing the march. + +=980.= =Formations=: The habitual formation for marches is route order +in column of fours (par. 754). When the roads are unsuitable or the +command is small, column of twos or troopers is permissible. To +economize road space in large commands =double column= or parallel +columns should be used if practicable. Squadrons in regiment and +troops in squadrons alternate in leading, the rule being that the one +in front one day automatically follows in rear the next day. + +=981.= =Halts=: The first half hour of a march should be made at a +walk and the first halt of 10 or 15 minutes toward the end of the +first hour after starting; it should, if possible, be preceded by a +short trot in order to make apparent any faulty adjustment of +equipment. This halt gives an opportunity for the horses to stale and +for the troopers to attend to the calls of nature, to tighten girths, +and to adjust saddles, equipment, and clothing. + +Other halts of 5 to 10 minutes should be made at hourly intervals, +and, if the march is to be prolonged into the afternoon, a longer halt +should be made at noon, when girths are loosened, bridles removed, +horses fed, and the men eat their lunches. + +=An invariable rule on the march and in camp is to have all troopers +dismount promptly on halting; in other words, never to permit a man +to sit a moment in the saddle while his horse is standing still, and +under no circumstances to lounge in the saddle.= + +=982.= =Watering=: On the march horses should be watered whenever +opportunity occurs, conforming as far as practicable to the rule of +watering before feeding and of removing the bit when by so doing the +horse can drink more freely, as when the stream or watering place is +shallow. Public watering troughs should ordinarily be avoided on +account of danger from infection. The use of buckets or of portable, +collapsible canvas watering troughs (articles of issue) will often +make watering places otherwise insufficient thoroughly satisfactory. +On the march and in camp watering is always done under supervision of +an officer. + +=983.= =Feeding=: In time of peace when a regular supply of grain and +long forage can be counted on, effort should be made to follow, as far +as practicable, the routine to which horses have been accustomed in +garrison. In time of war regularity of supply of forage, and +especially of the long forage, can not be expected, and officers must +neglect no opportunity of anticipating the needs of their animals when +passing grain fields, pastures, or stacks of hay and other fodder. A +supply for the night can often be gathered and carried along on the +wagons or it may be tied up compactly with the lariat and carried on +the horse. + +The trooper with habitual solicitude for his mount will, if permitted, +be prompt to remove the bits to let his horse graze (facing the wind +in hot weather) at every delay or check, and he will miss no chance to +pick up an extra feed of grain. + +=984.= =Camps= (_see also_ =Care of Troops=, F. S. R.): The ground +being suitable, a troop encamps in line, with first sergeant's cook +and officers' tents on one flank, the men's sink on the other, and +with picket line 15 yards in front of and parallel to the men's tents, +the open ends of the tents toward the picket line. A squadron or +regiment encamps in column of troops as above, but with picket lines +on the flank of the column on the side opposite the cook and officers' +tents, each in prolongation of its own company street. Intervals and +distances should approximate those of the normal semipermanent camps +(F. S. R.), if space is available. For a shelter-tent camp in column +of troops with picket lines stretched between the rows of tents the +guidons which mark first sergeants' tents should not be less than 15 +yards apart. The squadron or regiment may encamp in line similarly to +the troop if the ground is more favorable for such form of camp, but +ordinarily they encamp in column of troops with picket lines between +the rows of tents. + +=985.= =On nearing the end of a day's march, the regimental commander +will send his adjutant and supply officer ahead to locate the camp and +provide for the arrival of the column=: On approaching the camping +place, squadron adjutants and the guidon of each troop will be +summoned by the colonel's bugler sounding =adjutant's call= followed +by guidons (or otherwise according to circumstances). At these calls +each squadron adjutant followed by the guidons of his squadron will +move rapidly to the front and will join the regimental adjutant, who +indicates to each the ground which his squadron is to occupy. If the +available ground is sufficient to encamp the entire regiment as +prescribed in the Field Service Regulations, the regimental adjutant +causes the guidons to be aligned and planted at the prescribed +intervals, thereby marking the first sergeant's tent on the flank of +each troop, otherwise each squadron adjutant has the guidons of his +squadron so placed on the ground allotted to his squadron as to +conform, as nearly as conditions will permit, to the normal camp, +having in view the comfort of horses and men and convenience to +supplies. The object in marking off the camp as prescribed, by +establishing the guidons before the arrival of the column, is to +relieve the horse of his rider and pack as soon as possible. To +further minimize delay, commanding officers, =unless under exceptional +circumstances=, will, immediately on reaching the ground, direct +majors to dismiss their squadrons and have their troop commanders +proceed directly to their guidons, dismount at once, and pitch camp. + +The foregoing principles will also, in so far as applicable, be +enforced by commanders of all units smaller than the regiment. + +The regimental supply officer has the drivers of the baggage section +of the regimental train go direct to their proper troops and unhitch. +Ordinarily, for convenience in a one-night camp or bivouac the wagons +of the baggage section are left between the cook tents and the troop +officers' tents, the supply section being parked outside by itself. +After arrival at the camping place a guard is at once placed over the +source of supply of drinking water. + +Before pitching tents the rifles are stacked, sabers, rolls, saddle +bags, and lariats removed from the saddles, girths loosened (the +saddles being left on until backs are cooled), and the horses either +linked by section, in circle (par. 428), or coupled head and tail +(par. 427), and a man detailed to watch them until tents are pitched. + +After pitching tents, stacks are broken, rifles placed in the tents, +horses unsaddled, unbridled, and tied on the line or herded, saddles +placed in a row in front of the tents and saddle blankets spread on +them to dry, fuel secured, sinks dug, and other necessary preparations +made for the night. The use of saddle blankets as bedding by the men +will be permitted only under very exceptional conditions, and special +care must be exercised to keep them free from dirt and burs. During +evening stables, troop commanders, accompanied, if practicable, by a +veterinarian, inspect the backs and feet of their horses, and in the +morning they permit no trooper who is not specially authorized, to +saddle his horse before the call =boots and saddles=, or to mount +before the command for so doing. + +=986.= =Herding=: In a hostile country camps should be selected, if +possible, where grazing is good and beyond rifle range of cover for an +enemy. Orders are issued as to places of assembly, and in each troop +men are detailed beforehand to go among the horses and quiet them in +case of a night alarm. In the event of a stampede, men should mount +the fastest animals within reach, ride ahead of the herd, and lead it +back to camp. Sometimes the sounding of stable and water call will +prevent or check a stampede. + +In case it is necessary to graze the horses in an enemy's country, +they are sent out to herd under charge of an officer as soon as +possible after making camp, they being taken during daylight as far +away as is safe so as to keep the grass nearer camp for the night. + +=987.= =Forced and night marches=: To conduct a rapid march of a +command of any magnitude successfully, horses must be =in condition= +(pars. 950, 959) and men must have been trained (par. 175); if either +is lacking, the daily marches at first must be short. + +A night march, being slow and fatiguing to horses and men, is seldom +undertaken unless as a forced march to seize a position or to surprise +an enemy by attacking him at dawn. In a forced march frequently the +gait, if the footing is favorable, and always the number of hours in +the saddle, are increased. Under favorable conditions a rate of 50 +miles in 24 hours for three or four days can be maintained. During +such a march, in addition to the usual hourly halts, a halt of 2 hours +is made toward the end of the first half of each day's march, during +which bits are removed, horses unsaddled, watered, fed, and their legs +hand rubbed; the rate should be about 5 miles an hour, exclusive of +halts. + +Under very favorable conditions a single march of 100 miles can be +made in from 24 to 30 hours. During a march of this character, in +addition to the usual hourly halts, halts of 2 hours are made toward +the end of the first and second thirds of the march, during which bits +are removed, the horses unsaddled, watered, fed, and their legs hand +rubbed; the rate of march should be from 5 to 6 miles an hour, +exclusive of halts. + + + + +CHAPTER VIII. + +TARGET PRACTICE. + + +=Section 1. Preliminary training in marksmanship.= + +Effective rifle fire is generally what counts most in battle. To have +effective rifle fire, the men on the firing line must be able to HIT +what they are ordered to shoot at. There is no man who can not be +taught how to shoot. It is not necessary or even desirable to begin +instruction by firing on a rifle range. A perfectly green recruit who +has never fired a rifle may be made into a good shot by a little +instruction and some preliminary drills and exercises. + +Before a man goes on the range to fire it is absolutely necessary that +he should know-- + + 1. How to set the rear sight. + 2. How to sight or aim. + 3. How to squeeze the trigger. + 4. How to hold the rifle in all positions. + +If he does not know these things it is worse than useless for him to +fire. He will not improve; the more he shoots the worse he will shoot, +and it will become more difficult to teach him. + + +=Section 2. Sight adjustment.= + +Men must be able to adjust their sights correctly and quickly. An +error in adjustment so small that one can scarcely see it on the sight +leaf is sufficient to cause a miss at an enemy at 500 yards and over. + +Notice your rear sight. When the leaf is laid down the =battle sight= +appears on top. This sight is set for 547 yards and is not adjustable. +When the leaf is raised four sights come into view. The extreme range +sight for 2,850 yards at the top of the leaf is seldom used. The open +sight at the upper edge of the drift slide is adjustable from 1,400 to +2,750 yards. To set it the upper edge of the slide is made to +correspond with the range reading on the leaf, and the slide is then +clamped with the slide screw. This sight also is seldom used. The open +sight at the bottom of the triangular opening in the drift slide is +adjustable from 100 to 2,450 yards. To set it the index line at the +lower corners of the triangle is set opposite the range graduation on +the leaf and the slide clamped. This and the peep sight just below it +are the sights most commonly used. To set the peep sight, the index +lines on either side of the peephole are set opposite the range +desired and the slide clamped. + +Notice the scales for the various ranges on either side of the face of +the leaf. The odd-numbered hundreds of yards are on the right and the +even on the left. =The line below the number is the index line for +that range.= Thus to set the sight for 500 yards the index line of the +slide is brought in exact line with the line on the leaf below the +figure 5 and the slide clamped. To set for 550 yards the index lines +of the slide are set halfway between the index lines on the leaf below +the figure 5 on the right side and the figure 6 on the left side. Look +at your sight carefully when setting it and take great pains to get it +exact. An error in setting the width of one of the lines on the leaf +will cause an error of about 8 inches in where your bullet will strike +at 500 yards. + +The =wind gauge= is adjusted by means of the windage screw at the +right front end of the base of the sight. Each graduation on the +wind-gauge scale is called a "point." For convenience in adjusting the +line of each third point on the scale is longer than the others. If +you turn the windage screw so that the movable base moves to the +right, you are taking right windage, which will cause your rifle to +shoot more to the right. + +It is seldom that a rifle will shoot correctly to the point aimed at +at a given range with the sights adjusted exactly to the scale +graduations for that range. If your sight is not correctly adjusted +for your shooting and you wish to move it slightly to make it correct, +remember to =move it in the direction you wish your shot to hit=. If +you wish to shoot higher raise your sight. If to the right, move the +wind gauge to the right. Always move your sight the correct amount in +accordance with the following table: + + +=Section 3. Table of sight corrections.= + +_Showing to what extent the point of impact is moved by a change of 25 +yards in elevation or 1 point in windage._ + + +--------+--------------+-------------+ + | | Correction | Correction | + | Range. | by a change | by a change | + | | in elevation | in windage | + | | of 25 yards. | of 1 point. | + +--------+--------------+-------------+ + | | | | + |_Yards._| _Inches._ | _Inches._ | + | 100 | 0.72 | 4 | + | 200 | 1.62 | 8 | + | 300 | 2.79 | 12 | + | 400 | 4.29 | 16 | + | 500 | 6.22 | 20 | + | 600 | 8.59 | 24 | + | 800 | 15.43 | 32 | + | 1,000 | 25.08 | 40 | + +--------+--------------+-------------+ + +An easy rule to remember the windage correction by is: "A change of 1 +point of wind changes the point of impact 4 inches for every 100 yards +of range." + +Copy this table and take it to the range with you. + +Example of sight adjustment: Suppose you are firing at 500 yards. The +first two or three shots show you that your shots are hitting about a +foot below and a foot to the right of the center of the bull's-eye. +From the above table you will see that if you will raise your sight 50 +yards and move the wind gauge half a point to the left the rifle will +be sighted so that if you aim correctly the bullets will hit well +inside the bull's-eye. + + +=Section 4. Aiming.= + +=Open sight=: Always align your sights with the front sight squarely +in the middle of the "U" or notch of the rear sight, and the top of +the front sight even with the upper corners of the "U." (See fig. 1.) +All the sights on the rifle except the peep sight are open sights. + +[Illustration: FIGURE 1.] + +=Peep sight=: Always center the tip of the front sight in the center +of the peephole when aiming with this sight. (See fig. 2.) + +[Illustration: FIGURE 2.] + +Always aim below the bull's-eye. Never let your front sight appear to +touch the bull's eye in aiming. Try to see the same amount of white +target between the top of the front sight and the bottom of the +bull's-eye each time. The eye must be focused on the bull's-eye or +mark and not on the front or rear sight. + +Look at figures 1 and 2 until your eye retains the memory of them, +then try to duplicate the picture every time you aim. Aim +consistently, always the same. Never change your aim; change your +sight adjustment if your shots are not hitting in the right place. +Many shots have been wasted when the point of aim has been moved to +what the firer thought was the necessary change on the target, instead +of changing the sights according to the table on page 191. + + +=Section 5. Battle sight.= + +The battle sight is the open sight seen when the leaf is laid flat. It +is adjusted for a range of 547 yards. It is intended to be used in +battle when you get nearer to the enemy than 600 yards. Always aim at +the belt of a standing enemy, or just below him if he is kneeling, +sitting, or lying. On the target range this sight is used for rapid +fire. With it the rifle shoots about 2 feet high at ranges between 200 +and 400 yards, so you must aim below the figure on the target "D." +Find out in your instruction practice just how much you must aim below +to hit the figure. + + +=Section 6. Trigger squeeze.= + +Use the first joint of the forefinger to squeeze the trigger. It is +the most sensitive and best controlled portion of the body. As you +place the rifle to your shoulder, squeeze the trigger so as to pull it +back about one-eighth of an inch, thus taking up the safety portion or +slack of the pull. Then contract the trigger finger gradually, slowly +and steadily increasing the pressure on the trigger while the aim is +being perfected. Continue the gradual increase of pressure so that +when the aim has become exact the additional pressure required to +release the point of the sear can be given almost insensibly and +without causing any deflection of the rifle. Put absolutely all your +mind and will power into holding the rifle steady and squeezing the +trigger off without disturbing the aim. Practice squeezing the trigger +in this way every time you have your rifle in your hand until you can +surely and quickly do it without a suspicion of a jerk. + +By practice the soldier becomes familiar with the trigger squeeze of +his rifle, and knowing this he is able to judge at any time, within +limits, what additional pressure is required for its discharge. By +constant repetition of this exercise he should be able finally to +squeeze the trigger to a certain point beyond which the slightest +movement will release the sear. Having squeezed the trigger to this +point the aim is corrected, and when true the additional pressure is +applied and the discharge follows and the bullet flies true to the +mark. + + +=Section 7. Firing positions.= + +When in ranks at close order the positions are those described in the +Cavalry Drill Regulations. When in extended order or when firing alone +these positions may be modified somewhat to better suit the +individual. The following remarks on the various positions are offered +as suggestions whereby steady positions may be learned by the soldier. + +=Standing position=: Face the target, then execute right half face. +Plant the feet about 12 inches apart. As you raise the rifle to the +shoulder lean very slightly backward just enough to preserve the +perfect balance on both feet which the raising of the rifle has +somewhat disturbed. Do not lean far back and do not lean forward at +all. If your body is out of balance, it will be under strain and you +will tremble. The right elbow should be at about the height of the +shoulder. The left hand should grasp well around the stock and +handguard in front of the rear sight, and the left elbow should be +almost directly under the rifle. The right hand should do more than +half the work of holding the rifle up and against the shoulder, the +left hand only steadying and guiding the piece. Do not try to meet the +recoil; let the whole body move back with it. Do not be afraid to +press the jaw hard against the stock; this steadies the position, and +the head goes back with the recoil and insures that your face is not +hurt. + +=Kneeling position=: Assume the position very much as described in the +Cavalry Drill Regulations. Sit on the right heel. The right knee +should point directly to the right; that is, along the firing line. +The point of the left elbow should rest over the left knee. There is a +flat place under the elbow which fits a flat place on the knee and +makes a solid rest. Lean the body well forward. This position is +uncomfortable until practiced, when it quickly ceases to be +uncomfortable. + +=Sitting position=: Sit down half faced to the right, feet from 6 to 8 +inches apart, knees bent, right knee slightly higher than the left, +left leg pointed toward the target. Rest both elbows on the knees, +hands grasping the piece the same as in the prone position. This is a +very steady position, particularly if holes can be found or made in +the ground for the heels. + +=Prone position and use of the gun sling=: To adjust the sling for +firing, unhook the straight strap of the sling and let it out as far +as it will go. Adjust the loop so that when stretched along the bottom +of the stock its rear end (bight) comes about opposite the comb of the +stock. A small man needs a longer loop than a tall man. Lie down +facing at an angle of about 60 deg. to the right of the direction of the +target. Spread the legs as wide apart as they will go with comfort. +Thrust the left arm through between the rifle and the sling, and then +back through the loop of the sling, securing the loop, by means of the +keeper, around the upper left arm as high up as it will go. Pass the +hand under and then over the sling from the left side, and grasp the +stock and handguard just in rear of the lower band. Raise the right +elbow off the ground, rolling slightly over on the left side. Place +the butt to the shoulder and roll back into position, clamping the +rifle hard and steady in the firing position. The rifle should rest +deep down in the palm of the left hand with fingers almost around the +handguard. Shift the left palm a little to the right or left until the +rifle stands perfectly upright (no cant) without effort. The left +elbow should rest on the ground directly under the rifle, and right +elbow on the ground about 5 inches to the right of a point directly +under the stock. In this position the loop of the sling, starting at +the lower band, passes to the right of the left wrist, and thence +around the left upper arm. The loop should be so tight that about 50 +pounds tension is placed on it when the position is assumed. This +position is uncomfortable until practiced, when it quickly ceases to +be uncomfortable. It will be steadier if small holes can be found or +dug in the ground for the elbows. In this position the sling binds the +left forearm to the rifle and to the ground so that it forms a dead +rest for the rifle, with a universal joint, the wrist, at its upper +end. Also the rifle is so bound to the shoulder that the recoil is not +felt at all. This is the steadiest of all firing positions. + +The gun sling can also be used in this manner with advantage in the +other positions. + + +=Section 8. Calling the shot.= + +It is evident that the sights should be so adjusted at each range that +the rifle will hit where you aim. In order to determine that the +sights are so adjusted, it is necessary that you shall know each time +just where you were aiming on the target at the instant your rifle was +discharged. If you know this and your rifle hits this point, your +rifle is correctly sighted. If your shot does not hit near this point, +you should change your sight adjustment in accordance with the table +of sight corrections on page 191. + +No man can hold absolutely steady. The rifle trembles slightly, and +the sights seem to wabble and move over the target. You try to squeeze +off the last ounce of the trigger squeeze just as the sights move to +the desired alignment under the bull's-eye. At this instant, just +before the recoil blots out a view of the sights and target, you +should catch with your eye a picture, as it were, of just where on the +target your sights were aligned, and call to yourself or to the coach +this point. This point is where your shot should strike if your sights +are correctly adjusted and if you have squeezed the trigger without +disturbing your aim. Until a man can call his shots he is not a good +shot, for he can never tell if his rifle is sighted right or not, or +if a certain shot is a good one or only the result of luck. + + +=Section 9. Coordination.= + +Good marksmanship consists in learning thoroughly the details of-- + + Holding the rifle in the various positions. + Aiming. + Squeezing the trigger. + Calling the shot. + Adjusting the sights. + +And when these have been mastered in detail then the coordination of +them in the act of firing. This coordination consists in putting +absolutely all of one's will power into an effort to hold the rifle +steadily, especially in getting it to steady down when the aim is +perfected; in getting the trigger squeezed off easily at the instant +the rifle is steadiest and the aim perfected; in calling the shot at +this instant; and if the shot does not hit near the point called, then +in adjusting the sights the correct amount so that the rifle will be +sighted to hit where you aim. + + +=Section 10. Advice to riflemen.= + +Before going to the range clean the rifle carefully, removing every +trace of oil from the bore. This can best be done with a rag saturated +with gasoline. Put a light coat of oil on the bolt and cams. Blacken +the front and rear sights with smoke from a burning candle or camphor +or with liquid sight black. + +Look through the bore and see that there is no obstruction in it. + +Keep the rifle off the ground; the stock may absorb dampness, the +sights may be injured, or the muzzle filled with dirt. + +Watch your hold carefully and be sure to know where the line of sight +is at discharge. It is only in this way that the habit of calling +shots, which is essential to good shooting, can be acquired. + +Study the conditions, adjust the sling, and set the sight before going +to the firing point. + +Look at the sight adjustment before each shot and see that it has not +changed. + +If sure of your hold and if the hit is not as called, determine and +make FULL correction in elevation and windage to put the next shot in +the bull's-eye. + +Keep a written record of the weather conditions and the corresponding +elevation and windage for each day's firing. + +Less elevation will generally be required on hot days; on wet days; in +a bright sunlight; with a 6 o'clock wind; or with a cold barrel. + +More elevation will generally be required on cold days; on very dry +days; with a 12 o'clock wind; with a hot barrel; in a dull or cloudy +light. + +The upper band should not be tight enough to bind the barrel. + +Do not put a cartridge into the chamber until ready to fire. Do not +place cartridges in the sun. They will get hot and shoot high. + +Do not rub the eyes--especially the sighting eye. + +In cold weather warm the trigger hand before shooting. + +After shooting, clean the rifle carefully and then oil it to prevent +rust. + +Have a strong, clean cloth that will not tear and jam, properly cut to +size, for use in cleaning. + +Always clean the rifle from the breech, using a brass cleaning rod +when available. An injury to the rifling at the muzzle causes the +piece to shoot very irregularly. + +Regular physical exercise, taken systematically, will cause a marked +improvement in shooting. + +Frequent practice of the "Position and aiming drills" and gallery +practice are of the greatest help in preparing for shooting on the +range. + +=Rapid firing=: Success in rapid firing depends upon catching a quick +and accurate aim, holding the piece firmly and evenly, and in +squeezing the trigger without a jerk. + +In order to give as much time as possible for aiming accurately, the +soldier must practice taking position, loading with the clip, and +working the bolt, so that no time will be lost in these operations. +With constant practice all these movements may be made quickly and +without false motions. + +When the bolt handle is raised, it must be done with enough force to +start the shell from the chamber; and when the bolt is pulled back it +must be with sufficient force to throw the empty shell well away from +the chamber and far enough to engage the next cartridge. + +In loading, use force enough to load each cartridge with one motion. + +The aim must be caught quickly, and, once caught, must be held and the +trigger squeezed steadily. Rapid firing, as far as holding, aim, and +squeezing the trigger are concerned, should be done with all the +precision of slow fire. The gain in time should be in getting ready to +fire, loading, and working the bolt. + +=Firing with rests=: In order that the shooting may be uniform the +piece should always be rested at the same point. + + +=Section 11. The course in small-arms firing.= + +The course in small-arms firing consists of-- + + (_a_) Nomenclature and care of rifle. + (_b_) Sighting drills. + (_c_) Position and aiming drills. + (_d_) Deflection and elevation correction drills. + (_e_) Gallery practice. + (_f_) Estimating distance drill. + (_g_) Individual known-distance firing, instruction practice. + (_h_) Individual known-distance firing, record practice. + (_i_) Long-distance practice. + (_j_) Practice with telescopic sights. + (_k_) Instruction combat practice. + (_l_) Combat practice. + (_m_) Proficiency test. + +The regulations governing these are found in Small Arms Firing Manual, +1913. There should be several copies of this manual in every troop. + + +=Section 12. Targets.= + +The accompanying plates show the details and size of the targets: + +[Illustration: TARGET A, TARGET B, TARGET C, TARGET D.] + + +=Section 13. Pistol and revolver practice.[11]= + + [Footnote 11: Whenever in these regulations the word "pistol" + appears the regulation applies with equal force to the + revolver, if applicable to that weapon.] + +=135.=[12] =Nomenclature and care of the weapon; handling and +precautions against accidents.=--The soldier will first be taught the +nomenclature of those parts of the weapon necessary to an +understanding of its action and use and the proper measures for its +care and preservation. Ordnance pamphlets Nos. 1866 (description of +the Colt's automatic pistol), 1919, and 1927 (descriptions of the +Colt's revolver, calibers .38 and .45, respectively), contain full +information on this subject, and are furnished to organizations armed +with these weapons. + + [Footnote 12: The numbers refer to paragraphs in the Small + Arms Firing Manual, 1913.] + +Careless handling of the pistol or revolver is the cause of many +accidents and results in broken parts of the mechanism. The following +rules will, if followed, prevent much trouble of this character: + +(_a_) On taking the =pistol= from the armrack or holster, take out the +magazine and see that it is empty before replacing it; then draw back +the slide and make sure that the piece is unloaded. Observe the same +precaution after practice on the target range, and again before +replacing the pistol in the holster or in the armrack. When taking the +=revolver= from the armrack or holster and before returning it to the +same, open the cylinder and eject empty shells and cartridges. Before +beginning a drill and upon arriving on the range observe the same +precaution. + +(_b_) Neither load nor unlock the weapon until the moment of firing, +nor until a run in the mounted course is started. + +(_c_) Always keep the pistol or revolver in the position of "Raise +pistol" (par. 147, Cavalry Drill Regulations, 1916), except when it is +pointed at the target. (The position of "Lower pistol" is authorized +for mounted firing only.) + +(_d_) Do not place the weapon on the ground where sand or earth can +enter the bore or mechanism. + +(_e_) Before loading the =pistol=, draw back the slide and look +through the bore to see that it is free from obstruction. Before +loading the =revolver=, open the cylinder and look through the bore to +see that it is free from obstruction. When loading the =pistol= for +target practice place five cartridges in the magazine and insert the +magazine in the handle; draw back the slide and insert the first +cartridge in the chamber and carefully lock the hammer. + +In loading the =revolver= place five cartridges in the cylinder and +let the hammer down on the =empty chamber=. + +(_f_) Whenever the pistol is being =loaded= or =unloaded=, the muzzle +=must be kept up=. + +(_g_) Do not point the weapon in any direction where an accidental +discharge might do harm. + +(_h_) After loading do not cock the revolver or unlock the pistol +until ready to fire. + +(_i_) Keep the working parts properly lubricated. + +=136.= =Position, dismounted=: Stand firmly on both feet, body +perfectly balanced and erect and turned at such an angle as is most +comfortable when the arm is extended toward the target; the feet far +enough apart to insure firmness and steadiness of position (about 8 to +10 inches); weight of body borne equally upon both feet; right arm +fully extended, left arm hanging naturally. + +REMARKS.--The right arm may be slightly bent, although the difficulty +of holding the pistol uniformly and of keeping it as well as the +forearm in the same vertical plane makes this objectionable. + +=137.= =The grip=: Grasp the stock as high as possible with the thumb +and last three fingers, the forefinger alongside the trigger guard, +the thumb extended along the stock. The barrel, hand, and forearm +should be as nearly in one line as possible when the weapon is pointed +toward the target. The grasp should not be so tight as to cause +tremors of the hand or arm to be communicated to the weapon, but +should be firm enough to avoid losing the grip when the recoil takes +place. + +REMARKS.--The force of recoil of the pistol or revolver is exerted in +a line above the hand which grasps the stock. The lower the stock is +grasped the greater will be the movement or "jump" of the muzzle +caused by the recoil. This not only results in a severe strain upon +the wrist but in loss of accuracy. + +If the hand be placed so that the grasp is on one side of the stock, +the recoil will cause a rotary movement of the weapon toward the +opposite side. + +The releasing of the sear causes a slight movement of the muzzle, +generally to the left. The position of the thumb along the stock +overcomes much of this movement. The soldier should be encouraged to +practice this method of holding until it becomes natural. + +To do uniform shooting the weapon must be held with exactly the same +grip for each shot. Not only must the hand grasp the stock at the same +point for each shot, but the tension of the grip must be uniform. + +=138.= (_a_) =The trigger squeeze=: The trigger must be squeezed in +the same manner as in rifle firing. (See p. 193.) The pressure of the +forefinger on the trigger should be steadily increased and should be +straight back, not sideways. The pressure should continue to that +point beyond which the slightest movement will release the sear. Then, +when the aim is true, the additional pressure is applied and the +pistol fired. + +Only by much practice can the soldier become familiar with the trigger +squeeze. This is essential to accurate shooting. It is the most +important detail to master in pistol or revolver shooting. + +(_b_) =Self-cocking action.=--The force required to squeeze the +trigger of the revolver when the self-cocking device is used is +considerably greater than with the single action. To accustom a +soldier to the use of the self-cocking mechanism, and also to +strengthen and develop the muscles of the hand, a few minutes' +practice daily in holding the unloaded revolver on a mark and snapping +it, using the self-cocking mechanism, is recommended. The use of the +self-cocking device in firing is not recommended except in emergency. +By practice in cocking the revolver the soldier can become +sufficiently expert to fire very rapidly, using single action, while +his accuracy will be greater than when using double action. + +=139.= =Aiming.=--Except when delivering rapid or quick fire, the rear +and front sights of the pistol are used in the same manner as the +rifle sights. The normal sight is habitually used (see Pl. VI), and +the line of sight is directed upon a point just under the bull's-eye +at "6 o'clock." The front sight must be seen through the middle of the +rear-sight notch, the top being on a line with the top of the notch. +Care must be taken not to cant the pistol to either side.[13] + + [Footnote 13: The instructor should take cognizance of the + fact that the proper aiming point is often affected by the + personal and fixed peculiarities of the firer, and if unable + to correct such abnormalities permit firer to direct sight at + such point as promises effective results.] + +If the principles of aiming have not been taught, the soldier's +instruction will begin with sighting drills as prescribed for the +rifle so far as they may be applicable. The sighting bar with open +sight will be used to teach the normal sight and to demonstrate errors +likely to be committed. + +To construct a sighting rest for the pistol (see Pl. VI) take a piece +of wood about 10 inches long, 1-1/4 inches wide, and 9/16 inch thick. +Shape one end so that it will fit snugly in the handle of the pistol +when the magazine has been removed. Screw or nail this stick to the +top of a post or other object at such an angle that the pistol when +placed on the stick will be approximately horizontal. A suitable +sighting rest for the revolver may be easily improvised. + +=140.= (_a_) =How to cock the pistol.=--The pistol should be cocked by +the thumb of the right hand and with the least possible derangement of +the grip. The forefinger should be clear of the trigger when cocking +the pistol. Some men have difficulty at first in cocking the pistol +with the right thumb. This can be overcome by a little practice. +Jerking the pistol forward while holding the thumb on the hammer will +not be permitted. + +(_b_) =How to cock the revolver=: The revolver should be cocked by +putting the thumb on the hammer at as nearly a right angle to the +hammer as possible, and by the action of the thumb muscles alone +bringing the hammer back to the position of full cock. Some men with +large hands are able to cock the revolver with the thumb while holding +it in the position of aim or raise pistol. Where the soldier's hand is +small this can not be done, and in this case it assists the operation +to give the revolver a slight tilt to the right and upward (to the +right). Particular care should be taken that the forefinger is clear +of the trigger or the cylinder will not revolve. Jerking the revolver +forward while holding the thumb on the hammer will not be permitted. + +=141.= =Position, and aiming drills, dismounted=: For this instruction +the squad will be formed with an interval of 1 pace between files. +Black pasters to simulate bull's-eyes will be pasted opposite each man +on the barrack or other wall, from which the squad is 10 paces +distant. + +The squad being formed as described above, the instructor gives the +command: 1. =Raise=, 2. =Pistol= (par. 147, Cavalry Drill +Regulations), and cautions, "=Position and aiming drill, dismounted.=" +The men take the positions described in paragraph 136, except that +the pistol is held at "Raise pistol." + +[Illustration: PLATE VI.] + +The instructor cautions, "Trigger squeeze exercise." At the command +=READY=, cock the weapon as described in paragraph 140. At the +command, 1. =Squad=, 2. =FIRE=, slowly extend the arm till it is +nearly horizontal, the pistol directed at a point about 6 inches below +the bull's-eye. At the same time put the forefinger inside the trigger +guard and gradually "feel" the trigger. Inhale enough air to +comfortably fill the lungs and gradually raise the piece until the +line of sight is directed at the point of aim, i. e., just below the +bull's-eye at 6 o'clock. While the sights are directed upon the mark, +gradually increase the pressure on the trigger until it reaches that +point where the slightest additional pressure will release the sear. +Then, when the aim is true, the additional pressure necessary to fire +the piece is given so smoothly as not to derange the alignment of the +sights. The weapon will be held on the mark for an instant after the +hammer falls and the soldier will observe what effect, if any, the +squeezing of the trigger has had on his aim. + +It is impossible to hold the arm perfectly still, but each time the +line of sight is directed on the point of aim a slight additional +pressure is applied to the trigger until the piece is finally +discharged at one of the moments when the sights are correctly aligned +upon the mark. + +When the soldier has become proficient in taking the proper position, +the trigger squeeze should be executed at will. The instructor +prefaces the preparatory command by "At will" and give the command +=HALT= at the conclusion of the exercise, when the soldier will return +to the position of "Raise pistol." + +At first this exercise should be executed with deliberation, but +gradually the soldier will be taught to catch the aim quickly and to +lose no time in beginning the trigger squeeze and bringing it to the +point where the slightest additional pressure will release the sear. + +REMARKS.--In service few opportunities will be offered for slow aimed +fire with the pistol or revolver, although use will be made of the +weapon under circumstances when accurate pointing and rapid +manipulation are of vital importance. + +In delivering a rapid fire, the soldier must keep his eyes fixed upon +the mark and, after each shot, begin a steadily increasing pressure on +the trigger, trying at the same time to get the sights as nearly on +the mark as possible before the hammer again falls. The great +difficulty in quick firing with the pistol lies in the fact that when +the front sight is brought upon the mark the rear sight is often found +to be outside the line joining the eye with the mark. This tendency to +hold the pistol obliquely can be overcome only by a uniform manner of +holding and pointing. This uniformity is to be attained only by +acquiring a grip which can be taken with certainty each time the +weapon is fired. It is this circumstance which makes the position and +aiming drills so important. The soldier should constantly practice +pointing the pistol until he acquires the ability to direct it on the +mark in the briefest interval of time and practically without the aid +of sights. + +The soldier then repeats the exercises with the pistol in the left +hand, the left side being turned toward the target. + +=142.= =To draw and fire quickly--Snap shooting.=--With the squad +formed as described in paragraph 141 except that the pistol is in the +holster and the flap, if any, buttoned, the instructor cautions +"Quick-fire exercise." And gives the command, 1. =SQUAD=, 2. =FIRE.= +At this command each soldier, keeping his eye on the target, quickly +draws his pistol, unlocks it, thrusts it toward the target, squeezes +the trigger, and at the instant the weapon is brought in line with the +eye and the objective increases the pressure, releasing the sear. To +enable the soldier to note errors in pointing, the weapon will be +momentarily held in position after the fall of the hammer. Efforts at +deliberate aiming in this exercise must be discouraged. + +Remarks under paragraph 141 are specially applicable also to this type +of fire. When the soldier has become proficient in the details of this +exercise, it should be repeated at will; the instructor cautions, "At +will; quick-fire exercise." The exercise should be practiced until the +mind, the eye, and trigger finger act in unison. + +To simulate this type of fire mounted, the instructor places the squad +so that the simulated bull's-eyes are in turn, to the =RIGHT=, to the +=LEFT=, to the =RIGHT FRONT=, to the =LEFT FRONT=, to the =RIGHT +REAR=. With the squad in one of these positions, the instructor +cautions, "Position and aiming drill, mounted." At this caution the +right foot is carried 20 inches to the right and the left hand to the +position of the bridle hand (par. 145, Cavalry Drill Regulations). +The exercise is carried out as described for the exercise dismounted, +using the commands and means laid down in paragraph 141 for firing in +the several directions. The exercise is to be executed at will when +the squad has been sufficiently well instructed in detail. + +When firing to the left the pistol hand will be about opposite the +left shoulder and the shoulders turned about 45 deg. to the left; when +firing to the right rear the shoulders are turned about 45 deg. to the +right. + +When the soldier is proficient in these exercises with the pistol in +the right hand, they are repeated with the pistol in the left hand. + +=Revolver or pistol range practice.=--The courses in range practice +are given in paragraphs 147 to 199, Small Arms Firing Manual, 1913. + + + + +CHAPTER IX. + +EXTRACTS FROM MANUAL OF INTERIOR GUARD DUTY. + +UNITED STATES ARMY, 1914. + +[The numbers refer to paragraphs in the Manual.] + + +=Section 1. Introduction.= + +=1.= Guards may be divided into four classes: Exterior guards, +interior guards, military police, and provost guards. + +=2.= Exterior guards are used only in time of war. They belong to the +domain of tactics and are treated of in the Field Service Regulations +and in the drill regulations of the different arms of the service. + +The purpose of exterior guards is to prevent surprise, to delay +attack, and otherwise to provide for the security of the main body. + +On the march they take the form of advance guards, rear guards, and +flank guards. At a halt they consist of outposts. + +=3.= Interior guards are used in camp or garrison to preserve order, +protect property, and to enforce police regulations. In time of war +such sentinels of an interior guard as may be necessary are placed +close in or about a camp, and normally there is an exterior guard +further out consisting of outposts. In time of peace the interior +guard is the only guard in a camp or garrison. + +=4.= Military police differ somewhat from either of these classes. +(See Field Service Regulations.) They are used in time of war to guard +prisoners, to arrest stragglers and deserters, and to maintain order +and enforce police regulations in the rear of armies, along lines of +communication, and in the vicinity of large camps. + +=5.= Provost guards are used in the absence of military police, +generally in conjunction with the civil authorities at or near large +posts or encampments, to preserve order among soldiers beyond the +interior guard. + + +=Section 2. Classification of interior guards.= + +=6.= The various elements of an interior guard classified according to +their particular purposes and the manner in which they perform their +duties are as follows: + +(_a_) The main guard. + +(_b_) Special guards: Stable guards, park guards, prisoner guards, +herd guards, train guards, boat guards, watchmen, etc. + + +=Section 3. Details and rosters.= + +=7.= At every military post, and in every regiment or separate command +in the field, an interior guard will be detailed and duly mounted. + +It will consist of such number of officers and enlisted men as the +commanding officer may deem necessary, and will be commanded by the +senior officer or noncommissioned officer therewith, under the +supervision of the officer of the day or other officer detailed by the +commanding officer. + +=8.= The system of sentinels on fixed posts is of value in discipline +and training because of the direct individual responsibility which is +imposed and required to be discharged in a definite and precise +manner. While the desirability of this type of duty is recognized, it +should only be put in practice to an extent sufficient to insure +thorough instruction in this method of performing guard duty, and +should not be the routine method of its performance. The usual guard +duty will be performed by watchmen, patrols, or such method as in the +opinion of the commanding officer may best secure results under the +particular local conditions. + +=9.= At posts where there are less than three companies the main guard +and special guards may all be furnished by one company or by details +from each company. It is directed that whenever possible such guards +shall be furnished by a single company, for the reason that if guard +details are taken from each organization at a post of two companies, +troops, or batteries it will result in both being so reduced as to +seriously interfere with drill and instruction, whereas if details are +taken from only one the other is available for instruction at full +strength. + +Where there are three or more companies, the main guard will, if +practicable, be furnished by a single company, and, as far as +practicable, the same organization will supply all details for that +day for special guard, overseer, and fatigue duty. In this case the +officer of the day and the officers of the guard, if there are any, +will, if practicable, be from the company furnishing the guard. + +=10.= At a post or camp where the headquarters of more than one +regiment are stationed, or in the case of a small brigade in the +field, if but one guard be necessary for the whole command, the +details will be made from the headquarters of the command. + +If formal guard mounting is to be held, the adjutant, sergeant major, +and band to attend guard mounting will be designated by the commanding +officer. + +=11.= When a single organization furnishes the guard, a roster of +organizations will be kept by the sergeant major under the supervision +of the adjutant. (See Appendix B.) + +=12.= When the guard is detailed from several organizations, rosters +will be kept by the adjutant, of officers of the day and officers of +the guard by name; by the sergeant major under the supervision of the +adjutant, of sergeants, corporals, musicians, and privates of the +guard by number per organization; and by first sergeants, of +sergeants, corporals, musicians, and privates by name. (See Appendix +A.) + +=13.= When organizations furnish their own stable, or stable and park +guards, credit will be given each for the number of enlisted men so +furnished as though they had been detailed for main guard. + +=14.= Special guards, other than stable or park guards, will be +credited the same as for main guard, credited with fatigue duty, +carried on special duty, or credited as the commanding officer may +direct. (Pars. 6, 221, 247, and 300.) + +=15.= Captains will supervise the keeping of company rosters and see +that all duties performed are duly credited. (See pars. 355-364, A. +R., for rules governing rosters, and Form 342, A. G. O., for +instructions as to how rosters should be kept.) + +=16.= There will be an officer of the day with each guard, unless in +the opinion of the commanding officer the guard is so small that his +services are not needed. In this case an officer will be detailed to +supervise the command and instruction of the guard for such period as +the commanding officer may direct. + +=17.= When more than one guard is required for a command, a field +officer of the day will be detailed, who will receive his orders from +the brigade or division commander, as the latter may direct. When +necessary captains may be placed on the roster for field officer of +the day. + +=18.= The detail of officers of the guard will be limited to the +necessities of the service and efficient instruction; inexperienced +officers may be detailed as supernumerary officers of the guard for +purposes of instruction. + +=19.= Officers serving on staff departments are, in the discretion of +the commanding officer, exempt from guard duty. + +=20.= Guard details will, if practicable, be posted or published the +day preceding the beginning of the tour and officers notified +personally by a written order at the same time. + +=21.= The strength of guards and the number of consecutive days for +which an organization furnishes the guard will be so regulated as to +insure privates of the main guard an interval of not less than five +days between tours. + +When this is not otherwise practicable, extra and special duty men +will be detailed for night guard duty, still performing their daily +duties. When so detailed a roster will be kept by the adjutant showing +the duty performed by them. + +=22.= The members of main guards and stable and park guards will +habitually be relieved every 24 hours. The length of the tour of +enlisted men detailed as special guards, other than stable or park +guards, will be so regulated as to permit of these men being held +accountable for a strict performance of their duty. + +=23.= Should the officer of the day be notified that men are required +to fill vacancies in the guard, he will cause them to be supplied from +the organization to which the guard belongs. If none are available in +that organization, the adjutant will be notified and will cause them +to be supplied from the organization that is next for guard. (Par. +63.) + +=24.= The adjutant will have posted on the bulletin board at his +office all data needed by company commanders in making details from +their companies. + +At first sergeant's call first sergeants will go to headquarters and +take from the bulletin board all data necessary for making the details +required from their companies; these details will be made from their +company rosters. + +=25.= In order to give ample notice, first sergeants will, when +practicable, publish at retreat and post on the company bulletin board +all details made from the company for duties to be performed. + +=26.= Where rosters are required to be kept by this manual, all +details will be made by roster. + + +=Section 4. Commander of the guard.= + +=41.= The commander of the guard is responsible for the instruction +and discipline of the guard. He will see that all of its members are +correctly instructed in their orders and duties and that they +understand and properly perform them. He will visit each relief at +least once while it is on post, and at least one of these visits will +be made between 12 o'clock midnight and daylight. + +=42.= He receives and obeys the orders of the commanding officer and +the officer of the day, and reports to the latter without delay all +orders to the guard not received from the officer of the day; he +transmits to his successor all material instructions and information +relating to his duties. + +=43.= He is responsible under the officer of the day for the general +safety of the post or camp as soon as the old guard marches away from +the guardhouse. In case of emergency, while both guards are at the +guardhouse, the senior commander of the two guards will be responsible +that the proper action is taken. + +=44.= Officers of the guard will remain constantly with their guards, +except while visiting patrols or necessarily engaged elsewhere in the +performance of their duties. The commanding officer will allow a +reasonable time for meals. + +=45.= A commander of a guard leaving his post for any purpose will +inform the next in command of his destination and probable time of +return. + +=46.= Except in emergencies, the commander of the guard may divide the +night with the next in command, but retains his responsibility; the +one on watch must be constantly on the alert. + +=47.= When any alarm is raised in camp or garrison, the guard will be +informed immediately. (Par. 234.) If the case be serious, the proper +call will be sounded, and the commander of the guard will cause the +commanding officer and the officer of the day to be at once notified. + +=48.= If a sentinel calls: "The guard," the commander of the guard +will at once send a patrol to the sentinel's post. If the danger be +great, in which case the sentinel will discharge his piece, the patrol +will be as strong as possible. + +=49.= When practicable, there should always be an officer or +noncommissioned officer and two privates of the guard at the +guardhouse in addition to the sentinels there on post. + +=50.= Between reveille and retreat, when the guard has been turned out +for any person entitled to the compliment (see pars. 222 and 224), the +commander of the guard, if an officer, will receive the report of the +sergeant, returning the salute of the latter with the right hand. He +will then draw his saber and place himself two paces in front of the +center of the guard. When the person for whom the guard has been +turned out approaches he faces his guard and commands: 1. =Present=, +2. =ARMS=; faces to the front and salutes. When his salute is +acknowledged he resumes the carry, faces about, and commands: 1. +=Order=, 2. =ARMS=; and faces to the front. + +If it be an officer entitled to inspect the guard, after saluting and +before bringing his guard to an order, the officer of the guard +reports: "=Sir, all present or accounted for="; or "=Sir, (so-and-so) +is absent="; or, if the roll call has been omitted: "=Sir, the guard +is formed=," except that at guard mounting the commanders of the +guards present their guards and salute without making any report. + +Between retreat and reveille the commander of the guard salutes and +reports, but does not bring the guard to a present. + +=51.= To those entitled to have the guard turned out but not entitled +to inspect it no report will be made; nor will a report be made to any +officer unless he halts in front of the guard. + +=52.= When a guard commanded by a noncommissioned officer is turned +out as a compliment or for inspection the noncommissioned officer, +standing at a right shoulder on the right of the right guide, +commands: 1. =Present=, 2. =ARMS.= He then executes the rifle salute. +If a report be also required, he will, after saluting and before +bringing his guard to an order, report as prescribed for the officer +of the guard. (Par. 50.) + +=53.= When a guard is in line, not under inspection, and commanded by +an officer; the commander of the guard salutes his regimental, +battalion, and company commander by bringing the guard to attention +and saluting in person. + +For all other officers, excepting those entitled to the compliment +from a guard (par. 224), the commander of the guard salutes in person, +but does not bring the guard to attention. + +When commanded by a noncommissioned officer, the guard is brought to +attention in either case, and the noncommissioned officer salutes. + +The commander of a guard exchanges salutes with the commanders of all +other bodies of troops; the guard is brought to attention during the +exchange. + +"Present arms" is executed by a guard only when it has turned out for +inspection or as a compliment, and at the ceremonies of guard mounting +and relieving the old guard. + +=54.= In marching a guard or a detachment of a guard the principles of +paragraph 53 apply. "Eyes right" is executed only in the ceremonies of +guard mounting and relieving the old guard. + +=55.= If a person entitled to the compliment, or the regimental, +battalion, or company commander, passes in rear of a guard, neither +the compliment nor the salute is given, but the guard is brought to +attention while such person is opposite the post of the commander. + +After any person has received or declined the compliment, or received +the salute from the commander of the guard, official recognition of +his presence thereafter while he remains in the vicinity will be taken +by bringing the guard to attention. + +=56.= The commander of the guard will inspect the guard at reveille +and retreat, and at such other times as may be necessary, to assure +himself that the men are in proper condition to perform their duties +and that their arms and equipments are in proper condition. For +inspection by other officers, he prepares the guard in each case as +directed by the inspecting officer. + +=57.= The guard will not be paraded during ceremonies unless directed +by the commanding officer. + +=58.= At all formations members of the guard or reliefs will execute +inspection arms as prescribed in the drill regulations of their arm. + +=59.= The commander of the guard will see that all sentinels are +habitually relieved every two hours, unless the weather or other +causes makes it necessary that it be done at shorter or longer +intervals, as directed by the commanding officer. + +=60.= He will question his noncommissioned officers and sentinels +relative to the instructions they may have received from the old +guard; he will see that patrols and visits of inspection are made as +directed by the officer of the day. + +=61.= He will see that the special orders for each post and member of +the guard, either written or printed, are posted in the guardhouse +and, if practicable, in the sentry box or other sheltered place to +which the member of the guard has constant access. + +=62.= He will see that the proper calls are sounded at the hours +appointed by the commanding officer. + +=63.= Should a member of the guard be taken sick, or be arrested, or +desert, or leave his guard, he will at once notify the officer of the +day. (Par. 23.) + +=64.= He will, when the countersign is used (pars. 210 to 216), +communicate it to the noncommissioned officers of the guard and see +that it is duly communicated to the sentinels before the hour of +challenging; the countersign will not be given to sentinels posted at +the guardhouse. + +=65.= He will have the details for hoisting the flag at reveille and +lowering it at retreat, and for firing the reveille and retreat gun, +made in time for the proper performance of these duties. (See pars. +338, 344, 345, and 346.) He will see that the flags are kept in the +best condition possible, and that they are never handled except in the +proper performance of duty. + +=66.= He may permit members of the guard while at the guardhouse to +remove their headdress, overcoats, and gloves; if they leave the +guardhouse for any purpose whatever, he will require that they be +properly equipped and armed according to the character of the service +in which engaged, or as directed by the commanding officer. + +=67.= He will enter in the guard report a report of his tour of duty +and, on the completion of his tour, will present it to the officer of +the day. He will transmit with his report all passes turned in at the +post of the guard. + +=68.= Whenever a prisoner is sent to the guardhouse or guard tent for +confinement he will cause him to be searched, and will, without +unnecessary delay, report the case to the officer of the day. + +=69.= Under war conditions, if anyone is to be passed out of camp at +night, he will be sent to the commander of the guard, who will have +him passed beyond the sentinels. + +=70.= The commander of the guard will detain at the guardhouse all +suspicious characters or parties attempting to pass a sentinel's post +without authority, reporting his action to the officer of the day, to +whom persons so arrested will be sent, if necessary. + +=71.= He will inspect the guardrooms and cells, and the irons of such +prisoners as may be ironed, at least once during his tour, and at such +other times as he may deem necessary. + +=72.= He will cause the corporals of the old and new reliefs to verify +together, immediately before each relief goes on post, the number of +prisoners who should then properly be at the guardhouse. + +=73.= He will see that the sentences of prisoners under his charge are +executed strictly in accordance with the action of the reviewing +authority. + +=74.= When no special prisoner guard has been detailed (par. 300), he +will, as far as practicable, assign as guards over working parties of +prisoners sentinels from posts guarded at night only. + +=75.= The commander of the guard will inspect all meals sent to the +guardhouse and see that the quantity and quality of food are in +accordance with regulations. + +=76.= At guard mounting he will report to the old officer of the day +all cases of prisoners whose terms of sentence expire on that day, and +also all cases of prisoners concerning whom no statement of charges +has been received. (See par. 241.) + +=77.= The commander of the guard is responsible for the security of +the prisoners under the charge of his guard; he becomes responsible +for them after their number has been verified and they have been +turned over to the custody of his guard by the old guard or by the +prisoner guard or overseers. + +=78.= The prisoners will be verified and turned over to the new guard +without parading them, unless the commanding officer or the officer of +the day shall direct otherwise. + +=79.= To receive the prisoners at the guardhouse when they have been +paraded and after they have been verified by the officers of the day, +the commander of the new guard directs his sergeant to form his guard +with an interval, and commands: 1. =Prisoners=, 2. =Right=, 3. =FACE=, +4. =Forward=, 5. =MARCH=. The prisoners having arrived opposite the +interval in the new guard, he commands: 1. =Prisoners=, 2. =HALT=, 3. +=Left=, 4. =FACE=, 5. =Right= (or =left=), 6. =DRESS=, 7. =FRONT=. + +The prisoners dress on the line of the new guard. + + +=Section 5. Sergeant of the guard.= + +=80.= The senior noncommissioned officer of the guard always acts as +sergeant of the guard and if there be no officer of the guard will +perform the duties prescribed for the commander of the guard. + +=81.= The sergeant of the guard has general supervision over the other +noncommissioned officers and the musicians and privates of the guard, +and must be thoroughly familiar with all of their orders and duties. + +=82.= He is directly responsible for the property under charge of the +guard and will see that it is properly cared for. He will make lists +of articles taken out by working parties and see that all such +articles are duly returned. If they are not, he will immediately +report the fact to the commander of the guard. + +=83.= Immediately after guard mounting he will prepare duplicate lists +of the names of all noncommissioned officers, musicians, and privates +of the guard, showing the relief and post or duties of each. One list +will be handed as soon as possible to the commander of the guard; the +other will be retained by the sergeant. + +=84.= He will see that all reliefs are turned out at the proper time, +and that the corporals thoroughly understand, and are prompt and +efficient in the discharge of their duties. + +=85.= During the temporary absence from the guardhouse of the sergeant +of the guard, the next in rank of the noncommissioned officers will +perform his duties. + +=86.= Should the corporal whose relief is on post be called away from +the guardhouse, the sergeant of the guard will designate a +noncommissioned officer to take the corporal's place until his return. + +=87.= The sergeant of the guard is responsible at all times for the +proper police of the guardhouse or guard tent, including the ground +about them and the prison cells. + +=88.= At =first sergeant's call= he will proceed to the adjutant's +office and obtain the guard report book. + +=89.= When the national or regimental colors are taken from the stacks +of the color line, the color bearer and guard, or the sergeant of the +guard, unarmed, and two armed privates as a guard, will escort the +colors to the colonel's quarters, as prescribed for the color guard in +the drill regulations of the arm of the service to which the guard +belongs. + +=90.= He will report to the commander of the guard any suspicious or +unusual occurrence that comes under his notice, will warn him of the +approach of any armed body, and will send to him all persons arrested +by the guard. + +=91.= When the guard is turned out its formation will be as follows: +The senior noncommissioned officer, if commander of the guard, is on +the right of the right guide; if not commander of the guard, he is in +the line of file closers, in rear of the right four of the guard; the +next in rank is right guide; the next left guide; the others in the +line of file closers, usually each in rear of his relief; the field +music, with its left three paces to the right of the right guide. The +reliefs form in the same order as when the guard was first divided, +except that if the guard consists of dismounted Cavalry and Infantry, +the Cavalry forms on the left. + +=92.= The sergeant forms the guard, calls the roll, and, if not in +command of the guard, reports to the commander of the guard as +prescribed in drill regulations for a first sergeant forming a troop +or company; the guard is not divided into platoons or sections, and, +except when the whole guard is formed prior to marching off, fours are +not counted. + +=93.= The sergeant reports as follows: "=Sir, all present or +accounted for=," or "=Sir, (so-and-so) is absent="; or if the roll +call has been omitted, "=Sir, the guard is formed.=" Only men absent +without proper authority are reported absent. He then takes his place +without command. + +=94.= At night the roll may be called by reliefs and numbers instead +of names; thus, the first relief being on post: =Second relief; No. 1; +No. 2; etc.; Third relief, Corporal; No. 1, etc.= + +=95.= Calling the roll will be dispensed with in forming the guard +when it is turned out as a compliment, on the approach of an armed +body, or in any sudden emergency; but in such cases the roll may be +called before dismissing the guard. If the guard be turned out for an +officer entitled to inspect it, the roll will, unless he directs +otherwise, always be called before a report is made. + +=96.= The sergeant of the guard has direct charge of the prisoners, +except during such time as they may be under the charge of the +prisoner guard or overseers, and is responsible to the commander of +the guard for their security. + +=97.= He will carry the keys of the guardroom and cells, and will not +suffer them to leave his personal possession while he is at the +guardhouse, except as hereinafter provided. (Par. 99.) Should he leave +the guardhouse for any purpose he will turn the keys over to the +noncommissioned officer who takes his place. (Par. 85.) + +=98.= He will count the knives, forks, etc., given to the prisoners +with their food, and see that none of these articles remain in their +possession. He will see that no forbidden articles of any kind are +conveyed to the prisoners. + +=99.= Prisoners when paraded with the guard are placed in line, in its +center. The sergeant, immediately before forming the guard, will turn +over his keys to the noncommissioned officer at the guardhouse. Having +formed the guard he will divide it into two nearly equal parts. +Indicating the point of division with his hand, he commands: 1. =Right +(or left)=, 2. =FACE=, 3. =Forward=, 4. =MARCH=, 5. =Guard=, 6. +=HALT=, 7. =Left (or right)=, 8. =FACE=. + +If the first command be =right face=, the right half of the guard only +will execute the movements; if =left face=, the left half only will +execute them. The command =halt= is given when sufficient interval is +obtained to admit the prisoners. The doors of the guardroom and cells +are then opened by the noncommissioned officer having the keys. The +prisoners will file out under the supervision of the sergeant, the +noncommissioned officer, and sentinel on duty at the guardhouse, and +such other sentinels as may be necessary; they will form in line in +the interval between the two parts of the guard. + +=100.= To return the prisoners to the guardroom and cells, the +sergeant commands: 1. =Prisoners=, 2. =Right (or left)=, 3. =FACE=, 4. +=Column right (or left)=, 5. =MARCH.= + +The prisoners, under the same supervision as before, return to their +proper rooms or cells. + +=101.= To close the guard, the sergeant commands: 1. =Left (or +right)=, 2. =FACE=, 3. =Forward=, 4. =MARCH=, 5. =Guard=, 6. =HALT=, +7. =Right= (or =left=), 8. =FACE.= + +The left or right half only of the guard, as indicated, executes the +movement. + +=102.= If there be but few prisoners, the sergeant may indicate the +point of division as above, and form the necessary interval by the +commands: 1. =Right= (or =left=) =step=, 2. =MARCH=, 3. =Guard=, 4. +=HALT=, and close the intervals by the commands: 1. =Left= (or +=right=) =step=, 2. =MARCH=, 3. =Guard=, 4. =HALT.= + +=103.= If sentinels are numerous, reliefs may, at the discretion of +the commanding officer, be posted in detachments, and sergeants as +well as corporals required to relieve and post them. + + +=Section 6. Corporal of the Guard.= + +=104.= A corporal of the guard receives and obeys orders from none but +noncommissioned officers of the guard senior to himself, the officers +of the guard, the officer of the day, and the commanding officer. + +=105.= It is the duty of the corporal of the guard to post and relieve +sentinels and to instruct the members of his relief in their orders +and duties. + +=106.= Immediately after the division of the guard into reliefs the +corporals will assign the members of their respective reliefs to posts +by number, and a soldier so assigned to his post will not be changed +to another during the same tour of guard duty unless by direction of +the commander of the guard or higher authority. Usually experienced +soldiers are placed over the arms of the guard and at remote and +responsible posts. + +=107.= Each corporal will then make a list of the members of his +relief, including himself. This list will contain the number of the +relief, the name, the company, and the regiment of every member +thereof and the post to which each is assigned. The list will be made +in duplicate, one copy to be given to the sergeant of the guard as +soon as completed, the other to be retained by the corporal. + +=108.= When directed by the commander of the guard, the corporal of +the first relief forms his relief, and then commands: =CALL OFF=. + +Commencing on the right, the men call off alternately =rear= and +=front rank=, "one," "two," "three," "four," and so on; if in single +rank, they call off from right to left. The corporal then commands: 1. +=Right=, 2. =FACE=, 3. =Forward=, 4. =MARCH.= + +The corporal marches on the left and near the rear file in order to +observe the march. The corporal of the old guard marches on the right +of the leading file, and takes command when the last one of the old +sentinels is relieved, changing places with the corporal of the new +guard. + +=109.= When the relief arrives at six paces from a sentinel (see par. +168), the corporal halts it and commands, according to the number of +the post: =No. (----)=. + +Both sentinels execute port arms or saber; the new sentinel approaches +the old, halting about one pace from him. (See par. 172.) + +=110.= The corporals advance and place themselves, facing each other, +a little in advance of the new sentinel, the old corporal on his +right, the new corporal on his left, both at a right shoulder, and +observe that the old sentinel transmits correctly his instructions. + +The following diagram will illustrate the positions taken: + +[Illustration: + + A + R - + | | | | | C| |D + | | | | - + B] + +R is the relief; A, the new corporal; B, the old; C, the new sentinel; +D, the old. + +=111.= The instructions relative to the post having been communicated, +the new corporal commands, =Post=; both sentinels then resume the +right shoulder, face toward the new corporal, and step back so as to +allow the relief to pass in front of them. The new corporal then +commands: "1. =Forward=, 2. =MARCH="; the old sentinel takes his place +in rear of the relief as it passes him, his piece in the same position +an those of the relief. The new sentinel stands fast at a right +shoulder until the relief has passed six paces beyond him, when he +walks his post. The corporals take their places as the relief passes +them. + +=112.= Mounted sentinels are posted and relieved in accordance with +the same principles. + +=113.= On the return of the old relief, the corporal of the new guard +falls out when the relief halts; the corporal of the old guard forms +his relief on the left of the old guard, salutes, and reports to the +commander of his guard: "=Sir, the relief is present="; or "=Sir, +(so-and-so) is absent=," and takes his place in the guard. + +=114.= To post a relief other than that which is posted when the old +guard is relieved, its corporal commands: + +1. =(Such) relief=, 2. =FALL IN=; and if arms are stacked, they are +taken at the proper commands. + +The relief is formed facing to the front, with arms at an order, the +men place themselves according to the numbers of their respective +posts, viz, =two=, =four=, =six=, and so on, in the =front rank=, and +=one=, =three=, =five=, and so on, in the =rear rank=. The corporal, +standing about two paces in front of the center of his relief, then +commands: CALL OFF. + +The men call off as prescribed. The corporal then commands: 1. +=Inspection=, 2. =ARMS=, 3. =Order=, 4. =ARMS=; faces the commander of +the guard, executes the rifle salute, reports: "=Sir, the relief is +present="; or "=Sir, (so-and-so) is absent="; he then takes his place +on the right at order arms. + +=115.= When the commander of the guard directs the corporal, =Post +your relief=, the corporal salutes and posts his relief as prescribed +(Pars. 108 to 111); the corporal of the relief on post does not go +with the new relief, except when necessary to show the way. + +=116.= To dismiss the old relief, it is halted and faced to the front +at the guardhouse by the corporal of the new relief, who then falls +out; the corporal of the old relief then steps in front of the relief +and dismisses it by the proper commands. + +=117.= Should the pieces have been loaded before the relief was +posted, the corporal will, before dismissing the relief, see that no +cartridges are left in the chambers or magazines. The same rule +applies to sentinels over prisoners. + +=118.= Each corporal will thoroughly acquaint himself with all the +special orders of every sentinel on his relief, and see that each +understands and correctly transmits such orders =in detail= to his +successor. + +=119.= There should be at least one noncommissioned officer constantly +on the alert at the guardhouse, usually the corporal whose relief is +on post. This noncommissioned officer takes post near the entrance of +the guardhouse, and does not fall in with the guard when it is formed. +He will have his rifle constantly with him. + +=120.= Whenever it becomes necessary for the corporal to leave his +post near the entrance of the guardhouse, he will notify the sergeant +of the guard, who will at once take his place, or designate another +noncommissioned officer to do so. + +=121.= He will see that no person enters the guardhouse or guard tent, +or crosses the posts of the sentinels there posted without proper +authority. + +=122.= Should any sentinel call for the corporal of the guard, the +corporal will, in every case, at once and quickly proceed to such +sentinel. He will notify the sergeant of the guard before leaving the +guardhouse. + +=123.= He will at once report to the commander of the guard any +violation of regulations or any unusual occurrence which is reported +to him by a sentinel, or which comes to his notice in any other way. + +=124.= Should a sentinel call "=The Guard=," the corporal will +promptly notify the commander of the guard. + +=125.= Should a sentinel call "=Relief=," the corporal will at once +proceed to the post of such sentinel, taking with him the man next for +duty on that post. If the sentinel is relieved for a short time only, +the corporal will again post him as soon as the necessity for his +relief ceases. + +=126.= When the countersign is used, the corporal at the posting of +the relief during whose tour challenging is to begin gives the +countersign to the members of the relief, excepting those posted at +the guardhouse. + +=127.= He will wake the corporal whose relief is next on post in time +for the latter to verify the prisoners, form his relief, and post it +at the proper hour. + +=128.= Should the guard be turned out, each corporal will call his own +relief, and cause its members to fall in promptly. + +=129.= Tents or bunks in the same vicinity will be designated for the +reliefs so that all the members of each relief may, if necessary, be +found and turned out by the corporal in the least time and with the +least confusion. + +=130.= When challenged by a sentinel while posting his relief, the +corporal commands: 1. =Relief=, 2. =HALT=; to the sentinel's challenge +he answers "=Relief=," and at the order of the sentinel he advances +alone to give the countersign, or to be recognized. When the sentinel +says, "=Advance relief=," the corporal commands: 1. =Forward=, 2. +=MARCH.= + +If to be relieved, the sentinel is then relieved as prescribed. + +=131.= Between retreat and reveille, the corporal of the guard will +challenge all suspicious looking persons or parties he may observe, +first halting his patrol or relief, if either be with him. He will +advance them in the same manner that sentinels on post advance like +parties (Pars. 191 to 197), but if the route of a patrol is on a +continuous chain of sentinels, he should not challenge persons coming +near him unless he has reason to believe that they have eluded the +vigilance of sentinels. + +=132.= Between retreat and reveille, whenever so ordered by an officer +entitled to inspect the guard, the corporal will call: "=Turn out the +guard=," announcing the title of the officer, and then, if not +otherwise ordered, he will salute and return to his post. + +=133.= As a general rule he will advance parties approaching the guard +at night in the same manner that sentinels on post advance like +parties. Thus, the sentinel at the guardhouse challenges and repeats +the answer to the corporal, as prescribed hereafter (Par. 200); the +corporal, advancing at port arms, says: "=Advance (so-and-so) with the +countersign=," or "=to be recognized=," if there be no countersign +used; the countersign being correctly given, or the party being duly +recognized, the corporal says: "=Advance (so-and-so)=," repeating the +answer to the challenge of the sentinel. + +=134.= When officers of different rank approach the guardhouse from +different directions at the same time, the senior will be advanced +first, and will not be made to wait for his junior. + +=135.= Out of ranks and under arms, the corporal salutes with the +rifle salute. He will salute all officers, whether by day or night. + +=136.= The corporal will examine parties halted and detained by +sentinels, and, if he have reason to believe the parties have no +authority to cross sentinel's posts, will conduct them to the +commander of the guard. + +=137.= The corporal of the guard will arrest all suspicious looking +characters prowling about the post or camp, all persons of a +disorderly character disturbing the peace, and all persons taken in +the act of committing crime against the Government on a military +reservation or post. All persons arrested by corporals of the guard or +by sentinels will at once be conducted to the commander of the guard +by the corporal. + + +=Section 7. Musicians of the guard.= + +=138.= The musicians of the guard will sound calls as prescribed by +the commanding officer. + +=139.= Should the guard be turned out for national or regimental +colors or standards, uncased, the field music of the guard will, when +the guard present arms, sound, "=To the color=" or "=To the +standard="; or, if for any person entitled thereto, the march, +flourishes, or ruffles, prescribed in paragraphs 375, 376, and 377, A. +R. + + +=Section 8. Orderlies and color sentinels.= + +=140.= When so directed by the commanding officer, the officer who +inspects the guard at guard mounting will select from the members of +the new guard an orderly for the commanding officer and such number of +other orderlies and color sentinels as may be required. + +=141.= For these positions the soldiers will be chosen who are most +correct in the performance of duty and in military bearing, neatest in +person and clothing, and whose arms and accouterments are in the best +condition. Clothing, arms, and equipments must conform to regulations. +If there is any doubt as to the relative qualifications of two or +more soldiers, the inspecting officer will cause them to fall out at +the guardhouse and to form in line in single rank. He will then, by +testing them in drill regulations, select the most proficient. The +commander of the guard will be notified of the selection. + +=142.= When directed by the commander of the guard to fall out and +report an orderly will give his name, company, and regiment to the +sergeant of the guard, and, leaving his rifle in the arm rack in his +company quarters, will proceed at once to the officer to whom he is +assigned, reporting: "=Sir, Private ----, Company ----, reports as +orderly.=" + +=143.= If the orderly selected be a cavalryman, he will leave his +rifle in the arm rack of his troop quarters and report with his belt +on, but without side arms unless specially otherwise ordered. + +=144.= Orderlies, while on duty as such, are subject only to the +orders of the commanding officer and of the officers to whom they are +ordered to report. + +=145.= When an orderly is ordered to carry a message, he will be +careful to deliver it exactly as it was given to him. + +=146.= His tour of duty ends when he is relieved by the orderly +selected from the guard relieving his own. + +=147.= Orderlies are members of the guard, and their name, company, +and regiment are entered on the guard report and lists of the guard. + +=148.= If a color line is established, sufficient sentinels are placed +on the color line to guard the colors and stacks. + +=149.= Color sentinels are posted only so long as the stacks are +formed. The commander of the guard will divide the time equally among +them. + +=150.= When stacks are broken, the color sentinels may be permitted to +return to their respective companies. They are required to report in +person to the commander of the guard at reveille and retreat. They +will fall in with the guard, under arms, at guard mounting. + +=151.= Color sentinels are not placed on the regular reliefs, nor are +their posts numbered. In calling for the corporal of the guard, they +call: "=Corporal of the guard. Color line.=" + +=152.= Officers or enlisted men passing the uncased colors will render +the prescribed salute. If the colors are on the stacks, the salute +will be made on crossing the color line or on passing the colors. + +=153.= A sentinel placed over the colors will not permit them to be +moved except in the presence of an armed escort. Unless otherwise +ordered by the commanding officer, he will allow no one to touch them +but the color bearer. + +He will not permit any soldier to take arms from the stacks or to +touch them except by order of an officer or noncommissioned officer of +the guard. + +If any person passing the colors or crossing the color line fails to +salute the colors, the sentinel will caution him to do so, and if the +caution be not heeded he will call the corporal of the guard and +report the facts. + + +=Section 9. Privates of the Guard.= + +=154.= Privates are assigned to reliefs by the commander of the guard, +and to posts usually by the corporal of their relief. They will not +change from one relief or post to another during the same tour of +guard duty unless by proper authority. + + +=Section 10. Orders for Sentinels.= + +=155.= Orders for sentinels are of two classes: General orders and +special orders. General orders apply to all sentinels. Special orders +relate to particular posts and duties. + +=156.= Sentinels will be required to memorize the following: + +My general orders are: + +=1. To take charge of this post and all Government property in view.= + +=2. To walk my post in a military manner keeping always on the alert +and observing everything that takes place within sight or hearing.= + +=3. To report all violations of orders I am instructed to enforce.= + +=4. To repeat all calls from posts more distant from the guardhouse +than my own.= + +=5. To quit my post only when properly relieved.= + +=6. To receive, obey, and pass on to the sentinel who relieves me all +orders from the commanding officer, officer of the day, and officers +and noncommissioned officers of the guard only.= + +=7. To talk to no one except in line of duty.= + +=8. In case of fire or disorder to give the alarm.= + +=9. To allow no one to commit a nuisance on or near my post.= + +=10. In any case not covered by instructions to call the corporal of +the guard.= + +=11. To salute all officers, and all colors and standards not cased.= + +=12. To be especially watchful at night, and, during the time for +challenging, to challenge all persons on or near my port and to allow +no one to pass without proper authority.= + + +REGULATIONS RELATING TO THE GENERAL ORDERS FOR SENTINELS. + +No. 1: =To take charge of this post and all Government property in +view.= + +=157.= All persons, of whatever rank in the service, are required to +observe respect toward sentinels and members of the guard when such +are in the performance of their duties. + +=158.= A sentinel will at once report to the corporal of the guard +every unusual or suspicious occurrence noted. + +=159.= He will arrest suspicious persons prowling about the post or +camp at any time, all parties to a disorder occurring on or near his +post, and all, except authorized persons, who attempt to enter the +camp at night, and will turn over to the corporal of the guard all +persons arrested. + +=160.= The number, limits, and extent of his post will invariably +constitute part of the special orders of a sentinel on post. The +limits of his post should be so defined as to include every place to +which he is required to go in the performance of his duties. + + +No. 2: =To walk my post in a military manner, keeping always on the +alert and observing everything that takes place within sight or +hearing.= + +=161.= A sentinel is not required to halt and change the position of +his rifle on arriving at the end of his post, nor to execute =to the +rear, march=, precisely as prescribed in the drill regulations, but +faces about while walking in the manner most convenient to him and at +any part of his post as may be best suited to the proper performance +of his duties. He carries his rifle on either shoulder, and in wet or +severe weather, when not in a sentry box, may carry it at a secure. + +=162.= Sentinels when in sentry boxes stand at ease. Sentry boxes will +be used in wet weather only, or at other times when specially +authorized by the commanding officer. + +=163.= In very hot weather, sentinels may be authorized to stand at +ease on their posts, provided they can effectively discharge their +duties in this position; but they will take advantage of this +privilege only on the express authority of the officer of the day or +the commander of the guard. + +164. A mounted sentinel may dismount occasionally and lead the horse, +but will not relax his vigilance. + + +No. 3: =To report all violations of orders I am instructed to +enforce.= + +=165.= A sentinel will ordinarily report a violation of orders when he +is inspected or relieved, but if the case be urgent, he will call the +corporal of the guard, and also, if necessary, will arrest the +offender. + + +No. 4: =To repeat all calls from posts more distant from the +guardhouse than my own.= + +=166.= To call the corporal of the guard for any purpose other than +relief, fire, or disorder (pars. 167 and 178), a sentinel will call, +"=Corporal of the guard, No. (--)=," adding the number of his post. In +no case will any sentinel call, "=Never mind the corporal="; nor will +the corporal heed such call if given. + + +No. 5: =To quit my post only when properly relieved.= + +=167.= If relief becomes necessary, by reason of sickness or other +cause, a sentinel will call, "=Corporal of the guard, No. (----), +Relief=," giving the number of his post. + +=168.= Whenever a sentinel is to be relieved, he will halt, and with +arms at a right shoulder, will face toward the relief, when it is 30 +paces from him. He will come to a port arms with the new sentinel, and +in a low tone will transmit to him all the special orders relating to +the post and any other information which will assist him to better +perform his duties. + + +No. 6: =To receive, obey, and pass on to the sentinel who relieves me, +all orders from the commanding officer, officer of the day, and +officers and noncommissioned officers of the guard only.= + +=169.= During his tour of duty a soldier is subject to the orders of +the commanding officer, officer of the day, and officers and +noncommissioned officers of the guard only; but any officer is +competent to investigate apparent violations of regulations by members +of the guard. + +=170.= A sentinel will quit his piece on an explicit order from any +person from whom he lawfully receives orders while on post; under no +circumstances will he yield it to any other person. Unless necessity +therefor exists, no person will require a sentinel to quit his piece, +even to allow it to be inspected. + +=171.= A sentinel will not divulge the countersign (Pars. 209 to 217) +to anyone except the sentinel who relieves him, or to a person from +whom he properly receives orders, on such person's verbal order given +personally. Privates of the guard will not use the countersign except +in the performance of their duties while posted as sentinels. + + +No. 7: =To talk to no one except in line of duty.= + +=172.= When calling for any purpose, challenging, or holding +communication with any person a dismounted sentinel armed with a rifle +or saber will take the position of port arms or saber. At night a +dismounted sentinel armed with a pistol takes the position of raised +pistol in challenging or holding communication. A mounted sentinel +does not ordinarily draw his weapon in the daytime when challenging or +holding conversation; but if drawn he holds it at advance rifle, raise +pistol, or port saber, according as he is armed with a rifle, pistol, +or saber. At night in challenging and holding conversation his weapon +is drawn and held as just prescribed, depending on whether he is armed +with a rifle, pistol, or saber. + + +No. 8: =In case of fire or disorder to give the alarm.= + +=173.= In case of fire, a sentinel will call, "=Fire, No. (----)=," +adding the number of his post; if possible, he will extinguish the +fire himself. In case of disorder he will call, "=The Guard, No. +(----)=," adding the number of his post. If the danger be great, he +will in either case discharge his piece before calling. + + +No. 11: =To salute all officers and all colors and standards not +cased.= + +=174.= When not engaged in the performance of a specific duty, the +proper execution of which would prevent it, a member of the guard will +salute all officers who pass him. This rule applies at all hours of +the day or night, except in the case of mounted sentinels armed with a +rifle or pistol, or dismounted sentinels armed with a pistol, after +challenging. (See par. 181.) + +=175.= Sentinels will salute as follows: A dismounted sentinel armed +with a rifle or saber salutes by presenting arms; if otherwise armed, +he salutes with the right hand. + +A mounted sentinel, if armed with a saber and the saber be drawn, +salutes by presenting saber; otherwise he salutes in all cases with +the right hand. + +=176.= To salute, a dismounted sentinel, with piece at a right +shoulder or saber at a carry, halts and faces toward the person to be +saluted when the latter arrives within 30 paces. + +The limit within which individuals and insignia of rank can be readily +recognized is assumed to be about 30 paces, and therefore at this +distance cognizance is taken of the person or party to be saluted. + +=177.= The salute is rendered at six paces; if the person to be +saluted does not arrive within that distance, then when he is nearest. + +=178.= A sentinel in a sentry box, armed with a rifle, stands at +attention in the doorway on the approach of a person or party entitled +to salute, and salutes by presenting arms according to the foregoing +rules. + +If armed with a saber, he stands at a carry and salutes as before. + +=179.= A mounted sentinel on a regular post, halts, faces, and salutes +in accordance with the foregoing rules. If doing patrol duty, he +salutes, but does not halt unless spoken to. + +=180.= Sentinels salute, in accordance with the foregoing rules, all +persons and parties entitled to compliments from the guards (Pars. +224, 227, and 228); officers of the Army, Navy, and Marine Corps; +military and naval officers of foreign powers; officers of volunteers +and militia officers when in uniform. + +=181.= A sentinel salutes as just prescribed when an officer comes on +his post; if the officer holds communication with the sentinel, the +sentinel again salutes when the officer leaves him. + +During the hours when challenging is prescribed, the first salute is +given as soon as the officer has been duly recognized and advanced. A +mounted sentinel armed with a rifle or pistol, or a dismounted +sentinel armed with a pistol, does not salute after challenging. + +He stands at advance rifle or raise pistol until the officer passes. + +=182.= In case of the approach of an armed party of the guard, the +sentinel will halt when it is about 30 paces from him, facing toward +the party with his piece at the right shoulder. If not himself +relieved, he will, as the party passes, place himself so that the +party will pass in front of him; he resumes walking his post when the +party has reached six paces beyond him. + +=183.= An officer is entitled to the compliments prescribed, whether +in uniform or not. + +=184.= A sentinel in communication with an officer will not interrupt +the conversation to salute. In the case of seniors the officer will +salute, whereupon the sentinel will salute. + +=185.= When the flag is being lowered at retreat, a sentinel on post +and in view of the flag will face the flag, and, at the first note of +the Star-Spangled Banner or =to the color= will come to a present +arms. At the sounding of the last note he will resume walking his +post. + + +No. 12: =To be especially watchful at night and during the time for +challenging, to challenge all persons on or near my post, and to allow +no one to pass without proper authority.= + +=186.= During challenging hours, if a sentinel sees any person or +party on or near his post, he will advance rapidly along his post +toward such person or party and when within about 30 yards will +challenge sharply, "=Halt, who is there?=" He will place himself in +the best possible position to receive or, if necessary, to arrest the +person or party. + +=187.= In case a mounted party be challenged, the sentinel will call, +"=Halt, Dismount. Who is there?=" + +=188.= The sentinel will permit only one of any party to approach him +for the purpose of giving the countersign (Pars. 200 to 217), or, if +no countersign be used, of being duly recognized. When this is done +the whole party is advanced, i. e., allowed to pass. + +=189.= In all cases the sentinel must satisfy himself beyond a +reasonable doubt that the parties are what they represent themselves +to be and have a right to pass. If he is not satisfied, he must cause +them to stand and call the corporal of the guard. So, likewise, if he +have no authority to pass persons with the countersign, or when the +party has not the countersign, or gives an incorrect one. + +=190.= A sentinel will not permit any person to approach so close as +to prevent the proper use of his own weapon before recognizing the +person or receiving the countersign. + +=191.= When two or more persons approach in one party, the sentinel, +on receiving an answer that indicates that some one in the party has +the countersign, will say, "=Advance one with the countersign=," and +if the countersign is given correctly, will then say, "=Advance +(so-and-so)=," repeating the answer to his challenge. Thus if the +answer be "=Relief (friend with the countersign, patrol, etc.)=," the +sentinel will say, "=Advance one with the countersign="; then +"=Advance, relief (friends, patrol, etc.).=" + +=192.= If a person having the countersign approach alone, he is +advanced to give the countersign. Thus if the answer be "=Friend with +the countersign (or officer of the day, or etc.)=," the sentinel will +say, "=Advance, friend (or officer of the day, or etc.) with the +countersign="; then "=Advance, friend (or officer of the day, or +etc.).=" + +=193.= If two or more persons approach a sentinel's post from +different directions at the same time, all such persons are challenged +in turn and required to halt and to remain halted until advanced. + +The senior is first advanced, in accordance with the foregoing rules. + +=194.= If a party is already advanced and in communication with a +sentinel, the latter will challenge any other party that may approach; +if the party challenged be senior to the one already on his post, the +sentinel will advance the new party at once. The senior may allow him +to advance any or all of the other parties; otherwise the sentinel +will not advance any of them until the senior leaves him. He will then +advance the senior only of the remaining parties, and so on. + +=195.= The following order of rank will govern a sentinel in advancing +different persons or parties approaching his post: Commanding +officers, officer of the day, officer of the guard, officers, patrols, +reliefs, noncommissioned officers of the guard in order of rank, +friends. + +=196.= A sentinel will never allow himself to be surprised, nor permit +two parties to advance upon him at the same time. + +=197.= If no countersign be used, the rules for challenging are the +same. The rules for advancing parties are modified only as follows: +Instead of saying "=Advance (so-and-so) with the countersign=," the +sentinel will say "=Advance (so-and-so) to be recognized.=" Upon +recognition he will say, "=Advance (so-and-so.)=" + +=198.= Answers to a sentinel's challenge intended to confuse or +mislead him are prohibited, but the use of such an answer as "=Friends +with the countersign=," is not to be understood as misleading, but as +the usual answer made by officers, patrols, etc., when the purpose of +their visit makes it desirable that their official capacity should not +be announced. + + +SPECIAL ORDERS FOR SENTINELS AT THE POST OF THE GUARD. + +=199.= Sentinels posted at the guard will be required to memorize the +following: + +=Between reveille and retreat to turn out the guard for all persons +designated by the commanding officer, for all colors or standards not +cased, and in time of war for all armed parties approaching my post, +except troops at drill and reliefs and detachments of the guard.= + +=At night, after challenging any person or party, to advance no one +but call the corporal of the guard, repeating the answer to the +challenge.= + +=200.= After receiving an answer to his challenge, the sentinel calls, +"=Corporal of the guard (so-and-so)=," repeating the answer to the +challenge. + +He does not in such cases repeat the number of his post. + +=201.= He remains in the position assumed in challenging until the +corporal has recognized or advanced the person or party challenged, +when he resumes walking his post, or, if the person or party be +entitled thereto, he salutes and, as soon as the salute has been +acknowledged, resumes walking his post. + +=202.= The sentinel at the post of the guard will be notified by +direction of the commanding officer of the presence in camp or +garrison of persons entitled to the compliment. (Par. 224.) + +=203.= The following examples illustrate the manner in which the +sentinel at the post of the guard will turn out the guard upon the +approach of persons or parties entitled to the compliment (Pars. 224, +227, and 228), "=Turn out the guard, commanding officer="; "=Turn out +the guard, governor of a Territory="; "=Turn out the guard, national +colors="; "=Turn out the guard, armed party="; etc. + +At the approach of the new guard at guard mounting the sentinel will +call, "=Turn out the guard, armed party.=" + +=204.= Should the person named by the sentinel not desire the guard +formed, he will salute, whereupon the sentinel will call "=Never mind +the guard.=" + +=205.= After having called "=Turn out the guard=," the sentinel will +never call "=Never mind the guard=," on the approach of an armed +party. + +=206.= Though the guard be already formed he will not fail to call, +"=Turn out the guard=," as required in his special orders, except that +the guard will not be turned out for any person while his senior is at +or coming to the post of the guard. + +=207.= The sentinels at the post of the guard will warn the commander +of the approach of any armed body and of the presence in the vicinity +of all suspicious or disorderly persons. + +=208.= In case of fire or disorder in sight or hearing, the sentinel +at the guardhouse will call the corporal of the guard and report the +facts to him. + + +=Section 11. Countersigns and Paroles.= + +=209.= _Seventy-seventh article of war._--Any person subject to +military law who makes known the parole or countersign to any person +not entitled to receive it according to the rules and discipline of +war, or gives a parole or countersign different from that which he +received, shall, if the offense be committed in time of war, suffer +death or such other punishment as a court-martial may direct. (See +Par. 171.) + +=210.= The =countersign= is a word given daily from the principal +headquarters of a command to aid guards and sentinels in identifying +persons who may be authorized to pass at night. + +It is given to such persons as may be authorized to pass and repass +sentinels' posts during the night, and to officers, noncommissioned +officers, and sentinels of the guard. + +=211.= The =parole= is a word used as a check on the countersign in +order to obtain more accurate identification of persons. It is +imparted only to those who are entitled to inspect guards and to +commanders of guards. + +The parole or countersign, or both, are sent sealed in the form of an +order to those entitled to them. + +=212.= When the commander of the guard demands the parole, he will +advance and receive it as the corporal receives the countersign. (See +Par. 133.) + +=213.= As the communications containing the parole and countersign +must at times be distributed by many orderlies, the parole intrusted +to many officers, and the countersign and parole to many officers and +sentinels, and as both the countersign and parole must, for large +commands, be prepared several days in advance, there is always danger +of their being lost or becoming known to persons who would make +improper use of them; moreover, a sentinel is too apt to take it for +granted that any person who gives the right countersign is what he +represents himself to be; hence for outpost duty there is greater +security in omitting the use of the countersign and parole, or in +using them with great caution. The chief reliance should be upon +personal recognition or identification of all persons claiming +authority to pass. + +Persons whose sole means of identification is the countersign, or +concerning whose authority to pass there is a reasonable doubt, should +not be allowed to pass without the authority of the corporal of the +guard after proper investigation; the corporal will take to his next +superior any person about whom he is not competent to decide. + +=214.= The =countersign= is usually the name of a battle; the parole, +that of a general or other distinguished person. + +=215.= When they can not be communicated daily, a series of words for +some days in advance may be sent to posts or detachments that are to +use the same parole or countersign as the main body. + +=216.= If the countersign be lost, or if a member of the guard deserts +with it, the commander on the spot will substitute another for it and +report the case at once to headquarters. + +=217.= In addition to the countersign, use may be made of preconcerted +signals, such as striking the rifle with the hand or striking the +hands together a certain number of times as agreed upon. Such signals +may be used only by guards that occupy exposed points. + +They are used before the countersign is given and must not be +communicated to anyone not entitled to know the countersign. Their use +is intended to prevent the surprise of a sentinel. + +In the daytime signals such as raising a cap or a handkerchief in a +prearranged manner may be used by sentinels to communicate with the +guard or with each other. + + +=Section 12. Guard Patrols.= + +=218.= A guard patrol consists of one or more men detailed for the +performance of some special service connected with guard duty. + +=219.= If the patrol be required to go beyond the chain of sentinels, +the officer or noncommissioned officer in charge will be furnished +with the countersign and the outposts and sentinels warned. + +=220.= If challenged by a sentinel, the patrol is halted by its +commander, and the noncommissioned officer accompanying it advances +alone and gives the countersign. + + +=Section 13. Watchmen.= + +=221.= Enlisted men may be detailed as watchmen or as overseers over +prisoners, and as such will receive their orders and perform their +duties as the commanding officer may direct. + + +=Section 14. Compliments from Guards.= + +=222.= The compliment from a guard consists in the guard turning out +and presenting arms. (See Par. 50.) No compliments will be paid +between retreat and reveille except as provided in paragraphs 361 and +362, nor will any person other than those named in paragraph 224 +receive the compliment. + +=223.= Though a guard does not turn out between retreat and reveille +as a matter of compliment, it may be turned out for inspection at any +time by a person entitled to inspect it. + +=224.= Between reveille and retreat, the following persons are +entitled to the compliment: The President; sovereign or chief +magistrate of a foreign country and members of a royal family; Vice +President; President and President pro tempore of the Senate; American +and foreign ambassadors; members of the Cabinet; Chief Justice; +Speaker of the House of Representatives; committees of Congress +officially visiting a military post; governors within their respective +States and Territories; governors general; Assistant Secretary of War +officially visiting a military post; all general officers of the Army; +general officers of foreign services visiting a post; naval, marine, +volunteer, and militia officers in the service of the United States +and holding the rank of general officer; American or foreign envoys or +ministers; ministers accredited to the United States; charges +d'affaires accredited to the United States; consuls general accredited +to the United States; commanding officer of the post or camp; officer +of the day. + +=225.= The relative rank between officers of the Army and Navy is as +follows: General with admiral, lieutenant general with vice admiral, +major general with rear admiral, brigadier general with commodore,[14] +colonel with captain, lieutenant colonel with commander, major with +lieutenant commander, captain with lieutenant, first lieutenant with +lieutenant (junior grade), second lieutenant with ensign. (A. R. 12.) + + [Footnote 14: The grade of commodore ceased to exist as a + grade on the active list of the Navy of the United States on + Mar. 3, 1899. By section 7 of the act of Mar. 3, 1899, the + nine junior rear admirals are authorized to receive the pay + and allowances of a brigadier general of the Army.] + +=226.= Sentinels will not be required to memorize paragraph 224, and, +except in the cases of general officers of the Army, the commanding +officer and the officer of the day will be advised in each case of the +presence in camp or garrison of persons entitled to the compliment. + +=227.= Guards will turn out and present arms when the national or +regimental colors or standards, not cased, are carried past by a guard +or an armed party. This rule also applies when the party carrying the +colors is at drill. If the drill is conducted in the vicinity of the +guardhouse, the guard will be turned out when the colors first pass, +and not thereafter. + +=228.= In case the remains of a deceased officer or soldier are +carried past, the guard will turn out and present arms. + +=229.= In time of war all guards will turn out under arms when armed +parties, except troops at drill and reliefs or detachments of the +guard, approach their post. (See Par. 53.) + +=230.= The commander of the guard will be notified of the presence in +camp or garrison of all persons entitled to the compliment except +general officers of the Army, the commanding officer, and the officer +of the day. Members of the guard will salute all persons entitled to +the compliment and all officers in the military or naval service of +foreign powers, officers of the Army, Navy, and Marine Corps, officers +of volunteers, and officers of militia when in uniform. + + +GENERAL RULES CONCERNING GUARD DUTY. + +=232.= _Eighty-fifth article of war._--* * * Any person subject to +military law, except an officer, who is found drunk on duty shall be +punished as a court-martial may direct. + +=233.= All material instructions given to a member of the guard by an +officer having authority will be promptly communicated to the +commander of the guard by the officer giving them. + +=234.= Should the guard be formed, soldiers will fall in ranks under +arms. At roll call each man, as his name or number and relief are +called, will answer "Here," and come to an order arms. + +=235.= Whenever the guard or a relief is dismissed, each member not +at once required for duty will place his rifle in the arm racks, if +they be provided, and will not remove it therefrom unless he requires +it in the performance of some duty. + +=236.= Without permission from the commander of the guard, members of +the main guard, except orderlies, will not leave the immediate +vicinity of the guardhouse. Permission to leave will not be granted +except in cases of necessity. + +=237.= Members of the main guard, except orderlies, will not remove +their accouterments or clothing without permission from the commander +of the guard. (Par. 66.) + + +=Section 15. Prisoners.= + +=238.= Articles of war 69, 70, 71, 72, and 73 have special reference +to the confinement of prisoners and should be carefully borne in mind. + +=239.= The commander of the guard will place a civilian in confinement +on an order from higher authority only, unless such civilian is +arrested while in the act of committing some crime within the limits +of the military jurisdiction, in which case the commanding officer +will be immediately notified. + +=240.= Except as provided in the sixty-eighth article of war, or when +restraint is necessary, no soldier will be confined without the order +of an officer, who shall previously inquire into his offense. (=A. R. +930.=) + +=241.= An officer ordering a soldier into confinement will send, as +soon as practicable, a written statement, signed by himself, to the +commander of the guard, setting forth the name, company, and regiment +of such soldier, and a brief statement of the alleged offense. It is a +sufficient statement of the offense to give the number and article of +war under which the soldier is charged. + +=242.= A prisoner, after his first day of confinement, and until his +sentence has been duly promulgated, is considered as held in +confinement by the commanding officer. After due promulgation of his +sentence, the prisoner is held in confinement by authority of the +officer who reviews the proceedings of the court awarding sentence. +The commander of the guard will state in his report, in the proper +place, the name of the officer by whom the prisoner was originally +confined. + +=243.= Enlisted men against whom charges have been preferred will be +designated as "awaiting trial"; enlisted men who have been tried will, +prior to the promulgation of the result be designated as "awaiting +result of trial"; enlisted men serving sentences of confinement not +involving dishonorable discharge will be designated as "garrison +prisoners." Persons sentenced to dismissal or dishonorable discharge +and to terms of confinement at military posts or elsewhere will be +designated as "general prisoners." (=A. R. 928.=) + +=244.= The sentences of prisoners will be read to them when the order +promulgating the same is received. The officer of the guard, or the +officer of the day if there be no officer of the guard, will read them +unless the commanding officer shall direct otherwise. + +=245.= When the date for the commencement of a term of confinement +imposed by sentence of a court-martial is not expressly fixed by +sentence, the term of confinement begins on the date of the order +promulgating it. The sentence is continuous until the term expires, +except when the person sentenced is absent without authority. (=A. R. +969.=) + +=246.= When soldiers awaiting trial or the result of trial, or +undergoing sentence commit offenses for which they are tried, the +second sentence will be executed upon the expiration of the first. + +=247.= Prisoners awaiting trial by, or undergoing sentence of, a +general court-martial and those confined for serious offenses will be +kept apart, when practicable, from those confined by sentence of an +inferior court or for minor offenses. Enlisted men in confinement for +minor offenses, or awaiting trial or the result of trial for the same, +will ordinarily be sent to work under charge of unarmed overseers +instead of armed sentinels and will be required to attend drills +unless the commanding officer shall direct otherwise. + +=248.= Prisoners, other than general prisoners, will be furnished with +food from their respective companies or from the organizations to +which they may be temporarily attached. + +The food of prisoners will, when practicable, be sent to their places +of confinement, but post commanders may arrange to send the prisoners, +under proper guard, to their messes for meals. + +When there is no special mess for general prisoners, they will be +attached for rations to companies. + +Enlisted men bringing meals for the prisoners will not be allowed to +enter the prison room. (See Par. 289.) + +=249.= With the exception of those specially designated by the +commanding officer, no prisoners will be allowed to leave the +guardhouse unless under charge of a sentinel and passed by an officer +or noncommissioned officer of the guard. The commanding officer may +authorize certain garrison prisoners and paroled general prisoners to +leave the guardhouse, not under the charge of a sentinel, for the +purpose of working outside under such surveillance and restrictions as +he may impose. + +=250.= Prisoners reporting themselves sick at sick call, or at the +time designated by the commanding officer, will be sent to the +hospital under charge of proper guard, with a sick report kept for the +purpose. The recommendation of the surgeon will be entered in the +guard report. + +=251.= The security of sick prisoners in the hospital devolves upon +the post surgeon, who will, if necessary, apply to the post commander +for a guard. + +=252.= Prisoners will be paraded with the guard only when directed by +the commanding officer or the officer of the day. + +=253.= A prisoner under charge of a sentinel will not salute an +officer. + +=254.= All serviceable clothing which belongs to a prisoner, and his +blankets, will accompany him to the post designated for his +confinement, and will be fully itemized on the clothing list sent to +that post. The guard in charge of the prisoner during transfer will be +furnished with a duplicate of this list, and will be held responsible +for the delivery of all articles itemized therein with the prisoner. +At least one serviceable woolen blanket will be sent with every such +prisoner so transferred. (=A. R. 939.=) + +=255.= When mattresses are not supplied, each prisoner in the +guardhouse will be allowed a bed sack and 30 pounds of straw per month +for bedding. So far as practicable iron bunks will be furnished to all +prisoners in post guardhouses and prison rooms. (=A. R. 1084.=) + +If the number of prisoners, including general prisoners, confined at a +post justifies it, the commanding officer will detail a commissioned +officer as "officer in charge of prisoners". At posts where the +average number of prisoners continually in confinement is less than +12, the detail of an officer in charge of prisoners will not be made. + + +=Section 16. Guarding Prisoners.= + +=299.= The sentinel at the post of the guard has charge of the +prisoners except when they have been turned over to the prisoner guard +or overseers. (Pars. 247 and 300 to 304.) + +=(a) He will allow none to escape.= + +=(b) He will allow none to cross his post leaving the guardhouse +except when passed by an officer or noncommissioned officer of the +guard.= + +=(c) He will allow no one to communicate with prisoners without +permission from proper authority.= + +=(d) He will promptly report to the corporal of the guard any +suspicious noise made by the prisoners.= + +=(e) He will be prepared to tell, whenever asked, how many prisoners +are in the guardhouse and how many are out at work or elsewhere.= + +Whenever prisoners are brought to his post returning from work or +elsewhere, he will halt them and call the corporal of the guard, +notifying him of the number of prisoners returning. Thus: "=Corporal +of the guard, (so many) prisoners.=" + +He will not allow prisoners to pass into the guardhouse until the +corporal of the guard has responded to the call and ordered him to do +so. + +=300.= Whenever practicable, special guards will be detailed for the +particular duty of guarding working parties composed of such prisoners +as can not be placed under overseers. (Par. 247.) + +=301.= The prisoner guard and overseers will be commanded by the +police officer; if there be no police officer, then by the officer of +the day. + +=302.= The provost sergeant is sergeant of the prisoner guard and +overseers, and as such receives orders from the commanding officer and +the commander of the prisoner guard only. + +=303.= Details for prisoner guard are marched to the guardhouse and +mounted by being inspected by the commander of the main guard, who +determines whether all of the men are in proper condition to perform +their duties and whether their arms and equipments are in proper +condition, and rejects any men found unfit. + +=304.= When prisoners have been turned over to the prisoner guard or +overseers, such guards or overseers are responsible for them under +their commander, and all responsibility and control of the main guard +ceases until they are returned to the main guard. (Par. 306.) + +=305.= If a prisoner attempts to escape, the sentinel will call +"=Halt.=" If he fails to halt when the sentinel has once repeated his +call, and if there be no other possible means of preventing his +escape, the sentinel will fire upon him. + +The following will more fully explain the important duties of a +sentinel in this connection: + + (Circular.) WAR DEPARTMENT, + ADJUTANT GENERAL'S OFFICE, + _Washington, November 1, 1887_. + + By direction of the Secretary of War, the following is published + for the information of the Army: + + UNITED STATES CIRCUIT COURT, EASTERN DISTRICT OF MICHIGAN, + AUGUST 1, 1887. + + THE UNITED STATES V. JAMES CLARK. + + The circuit court has jurisdiction of a homicide committed by one + soldier upon another within a military reservation of the United + States. + + If a homicide be committed by a military guard without malice and + in the performance of his supposed duty as a soldier, such + homicide is excusable, unless it was manifestly beyond the scope + of his authority or was such that a man of ordinary sense and + understanding would know that it was illegal. + + It seems that the sergeant of the guard has a right to shoot a + military convict if there be no other possible means of + preventing his escape. + + The common-law distinction between felonies and misdemeanors has + no application to military offenses. + + While the finding of a court of inquiry acquitting the prisoner + of all blame is not a legal bar to a prosecution, it is entitled + to weight as an expression of the views of the military court of + the necessity of using a musket to prevent the escape of the + deceased. + + * * * * * + + By order of the Secretary of War: + R. C. DRUM, _Adjutant General_. + + The following is taken from Circular No. 3, of 1883, from Headquarters + Department of the Columbia: + + VANCOUVER BARRACKS, W. T., _April 20, 1883_. + To the ASSISTANT ADJUTANT GENERAL, + _Department of the Columbia_. + + Sir: + + * * * * * + + A sentinel is placed as guard over prisoners to prevent their + escape, and, for this purpose, he is furnished a musket, with + ammunition. To prevent escape is his first and most important + duty. + + * * * * * + + I suppose the law to be this: That a sentinel shall not use more + force or violence to prevent the escape of a prisoner than is + necessary to effect that object, but if the prisoner, after being + ordered to halt, continues his flight the sentinel may maim or + even kill him, and it is his duty to do so. + + A sentinel who allows a prisoner to escape without firing upon + him, and firing to hit him, is, in my judgment, guilty of a most + serious military offense, for which he should and would be + severely punished by a general court-martial. + + * * * * * + + (Signed) HENRY A. MORROW, + _Colonel Twenty-first Infantry, Commanding Post_. + + + [Third indorsement.] + + OFFICE JUDGE ADVOCATE, + MILITARY DIVISION OF THE PACIFIC, + _May 11, 1883_. + + Respectfully returned to the assistant adjutant general, Military + Division of the Pacific, concurring fully in the views expressed + by Col. Morrow. I was not aware that such a view had ever been + questioned. That the period is a time of peace does not affect + the authority and duty of the sentinel or guard to fire upon the + escaping prisoner, if this escape can not otherwise be + prevented. He should, of course, attempt to stop the prisoner + before firing by ordering him to halt, and will properly warn him + by the words "Halt, or I fire," or words to such effect. + + W. WINTHROP, _Judge Advocate_. + + + [Fourth indorsement.] + + HEADQUARTERS MILITARY DIVISION OF THE PACIFIC, + _May 11, 1883_, + + Respectfully returned to the commanding general, Department of + the Columbia, approving the opinion of the commanding officer, + Twenty-first Infantry, and of the judge advocate of the division, + in respect to the duty of and method to be adopted by sentinels + in preventing prisoners from escaping. + + * * * * * + + By command of Maj. Gen. Schofield: + J. C. KELTON, + _Assistant Adjutant General_. + +See also Circular No. 53, A. G. O., December 22, 1900. + +=306.= On approaching the post of the sentinel at the guardhouse, a +sentinel of the prisoner guard or an overseer in charge of prisoners +will halt them and call, "=No. 1, (so many) prisoners.=" He will not +allow them to cross the post of the sentinel until so directed by the +corporal of the guard. + +=307.= Members of the prisoner guard and overseers placed over +prisoners for work will receive specific and explicit instructions +covering the required work; they will be held strictly responsible +that the prisoners under their charge properly and satisfactorily +perform the designated work. + + +=Section 17. Stable guards.= + +STABLE GUARDS. + +=308.= Under the head of stable guards will be included guards for +cavalry stables, artillery stables and parks, mounted infantry +stables, machine-gun organization stables and parks, and +quartermaster stables and parks. Where the words "troop" and "cavalry" +are used, they will be held to include all of these organizations. + +=309.= When troop stable guards are mounted they will guard the +stables of the cavalry (see Par. 13). When no stable guards are +mounted the stables will be guarded by sentinels posted from the main +guard under the control of the officer of the day. + +The instructions given for troop stable guard will be observed as far +as applicable by the noncommissioned officers and sentinels of the +main guard when in charge of the stables. + + +TROOP STABLE GUARDS. + +=310.= Troop stable guards will not be used except in the field, or +when it is impracticable to guard the stables by sentinels from the +main guard. + +=311.= Troop stable guards will be under the immediate control of +their respective troop commanders; they will be posted in each cavalry +stable or near the picket line, and will consist of not less than one +noncommissioned officer and three privates. + +Stable guards are for the protection of the horses, stables, forage, +equipments, and public property generally. They will, in addition, +enforce the special regulations in regard to stables, horses, and +parks. + +=312.= Sentinels of stable guards will be posted at the stables or at +the picket lines when the horses are kept outside. The troop stable +guard may be used as a herd guard during the day time or when grazing +is practicable. + +=313.= The troop stable guard, when authorized by the post commander, +will be mounted under the supervision of the troop commander. It will +be armed, at the discretion of the troop commander, with either rifle +or pistol. + +=314.= The tour continues for 24 hours, or until the guard is relieved +by a new guard. + +=315.= The employment of stable guards for police and fatigue duties +at the stables is forbidden; but this will not prohibit them from +being required to assist in feeding grain before reveille. + +=316.= The troop stable guard will attend stables with the rest of the +troop and groom their own horses, the sentinels being taken off post +for the purpose. + +=317.= Neither the noncommissioned officer nor the members of the +stable guard will absent themselves from the immediate vicinity of the +stables except in case of urgent necessity, and then for no longer +time than is absolutely necessary. No member of the guard will leave +for any purpose without the authority of the noncommissioned officer +of the guard. + +=318.= The noncommissioned officer and one member of the stable guard +will go for meals at the proper hour; upon their return the other +members of the guard will be directed to go by the noncommissioned +officer. + +=319.= When the horses are herded each troop will furnish its own herd +guard. (Par. 14.) + +=320.= Smoking in the stables or their immediate vicinity is +prohibited. No fire or light, other than electric light or stable +lanterns, will be permitted in the stables. A special place will be +designated for trimming, filling, and lighting lanterns. + + +NONCOMMISSIONED OFFICER OF THE TROOP STABLE GUARD. + +=321.= The noncommissioned officer receives his orders from his troop +commander, to whom he will report immediately after posting his first +relief, and when relieved will turn over all his orders to his +successor. He instructs his sentinels in their general and special +duties; exercises general supervision over his entire guard; exacts +order and cleanliness about the guardroom; prevents the introduction +of intoxicants into the guardhouse and stables; receives, by count, +from his predecessor, the animals, horse equipments, and all property +(both private and public) pertaining thereto; examines, before +relieving his predecessor, all locks, windows, and doors, and should +any be found insecure he will report the fact to his troop commander +when he reports for orders. He will personally post and relieve each +sentinel, taking care to verify the property responsibility of the +sentinel who comes off post, and see that the sentinel who goes on +post is aware of the property responsibility that he assumes. + +=322.= That the noncommissioned officer may be more thoroughly +informed of his responsibility, all horses returning, except those +from a regular formation, will be reported to him. He will then notify +the sentinel on post, and, in the absence of the stable sergeant, will +see that the horses are promptly cared for. + +In case of abuse, he will promptly report to the troop commander. +Should the horse be the private property of an officer, he will report +such abuse to the owner. + +=323.= The noncommissioned officer will report any unusual occurrence +during his tour direct to his troop commander. + +=324.= Horses and other property for which the noncommissioned officer +is responsible will not be taken from the stables without the +authority of the post or troop commander. + +=325.= The noncommissioned officer must answer the sentinel's calls +promptly. + +=326.= In case of fire, the noncommissioned officer will see that the +requirements of paragraph 334 are promptly carried out. + +=327.= Whenever it becomes necessary for the noncommissioned officer +to leave his guard, he will designate a member of it to take charge +and assume his responsibility during his absence. + + +SENTINELS OF THE TROOP STABLE GUARD. + +=328.= The sentinel in the discharge of his duties will be governed by +the regulations for sentinels of the main guard whenever they are +applicable--such as courtesies to officers, walking post in a +soldierly manner, challenging, etc.; he will not turn out the guard +except when ordered by proper authority. + +=329.= The sentinel will receive orders from the commanding officer, +the troop commander, and the noncommissioned officers of the stable +guard only, except when the commanding officer directs the officer of +the day to inspect the stable guard. + +=330.= In the field and elsewhere when directed by the commanding +officer the sentinel when posted will verify the number of horses for +which he is responsible, and when relieved will give the number to +his successor. + +=331.= The sentinel will not permit any horse or equipments to be +taken from the stables, except in the presence of the noncommissioned +officer. + +=332.= Should a horse get loose, the sentinel will catch him and tie +him up. If he be unable to catch the horse, the noncommissioned +officer will at once be notified. In case a horse be cast, or in any +way entangled, he will relieve him, if possible; if unable to relieve +him, he will call the noncommissioned officer. Sentinels are forbidden +to punish or maltreat a horse. + +=333.= When a horse is taken sick, the sentinel will notify the +noncommissioned officer, who in turn will call the farrier and see +that the horse is properly attended to. + +=334.= In case of fire the sentinel will give the alarm by stepping +outside the stable and firing his pistol or piece repeatedly, and +calling out at the same time, "=Fire, stables, Troop (----).=" + +As soon as the guard is alarmed, he will take the necessary +precautions in opening or closing the doors so as to prevent the +spreading of the fire and make it possible to remove the horses; he +will drop the chains and bars, and, with the other members of the +guard, proceed to lead out the horses and secure them at the picket +line or such other place as may have been previously designated. + +=335.= Sentinels over horses, or in charge of prisoners, receive +orders from the stable sergeant, so far as the care of the horses and +the labor of prisoners are concerned. + +=336.= In field artillery and machine-gun organizations, the guard for +the stables has charge of the guns, caissons, etc., with their +ammunition and stores, as well as the horses, harness, and forage. + + +=Section 18. Flags.= + +=337.= The garrison, post, and storm flags are national flags and +shall be of bunting. The union of each is as described in paragraph +216, Army Regulations, and shall be of the following proportions: +Width, seven-thirteenths of the hoist of the flag; length, seventy-six +one-hundredths of the hoist of the flag. + +The garrison flag will have 38 feet fly and 20 feet hoist. It will be +furnished only to posts designated in orders from time to time from +the War Department, and will be hoisted only on holidays and important +occasions. + +The post flag will have 19 feet fly and 10 feet hoist. It will be +furnished for all garrison posts and will be hoisted in pleasant +weather. + +The storm flag will have 9 feet 6 inches fly and 5 feet hoist. It will +be furnished for all occupied posts for use in stormy and windy +weather. It will also be furnished to national cemeteries. (A. R. +223.) + +=338.= At every military post or station the flag will be hoisted at +the sounding of the first note of the reveille, or of the first note +of the march, if a march be played before the reveille. The flag will +be lowered at the sounding of the last note of the retreat, while the +flag is being lowered the band will play "The Star-Spangled Banner," +or, if there be no band present, the field music will sound "to the +color." When "to the color" is sounded by the field music while the +flag is being lowered the same respect will be observed as when "The +Star-Spangled Banner" is played by the band, and in either case +officers and enlisted men out of ranks will face toward the flag, +stand at attention, and render the prescribed salute at the last note +of the music. (A. R. 437.) + +The lowering of the flag will be so regulated as to be completed at +the last note of "The Star-Spangled Banner" or "to the color." + +=339.= The national flag will be displayed at a seacoast or lake fort +at the beginning of and during an action in which a fort may be +engaged, whether by day or by night. (A. R. 437.) + +=340.= The national flag will always be displayed at the time of +firing a salute. (A. R. 397.) + +=341.= The flag of a military post will not be dipped by way of salute +or compliment. (A. R. 405.) + +=342.= On the death of an officer at a military post the flag is +displayed at halfstaff and so remains between reveille and retreat +until the last salvo or volley is fired over the grave; or if the +remains are not interred at the post until they are removed therefrom. +(A. R. 422.) + +=343.= During the funeral of an enlisted man at a military post the +flag is displayed at halfstaff. It is hoisted to the top after the +final volley or gun is fired or after the remains are taken from the +post. The same honors are paid on the occasion of the funeral of a +retired enlisted man. (A. R. 423.) + +=344.= When practicable, a detail consisting of a noncommissioned +officer and two privates of the guard will raise or lower the flag. +This detail wears side arms or if the special equipments do not +include side arms then belts only. + +The noncommissioned officer, carrying the flag, forms the detail in +line, takes his post in the center and marches it to the staff. The +flag is then securely attached to the halyards and rapidly hoisted. +The halyards are then securely fastened to the cleat on the staff and +the detail marched to the guardhouse. + +=345.= When the flag is to be lowered, the halyards are loosened from +the staff and made perfectly free. At retreat the flag is lowered at +the last note of retreat. It is then neatly folded and the halyards +made fast. The detail is then re-formed and marched to the guardhouse, +where the flag is turned over to the commander of the guard. + +The flag should never be allowed to touch the ground and should always +be hoisted or lowered from the leeward side of the staff, the halyards +being held by two persons. + + +=Section 19. Reveille and Retreat Gun.= + +=346.= The morning and evening gun will be fired by a detachment of +the guard, consisting, when practicable, of a corporal and two +privates. The morning gun is fired at the first note of reveille, or, +if marches be played before the reveille, it is fired at the beginning +of the first march. The retreat gun is fired at the last note of +retreat. + +The corporal marches the detachment to and from the piece, which is +fired, sponged out, and secured under his direction. + + +=Section 20. Guard Mounting.= + +=347.= Guard mounting will be formal or informal as the commanding +officer may direct. It will be held as prescribed in the drill +regulations of the arm of the service to which the guard belongs. If +none is prescribed, then as for infantry. In case the guard is +composed wholly of mounted organizations, guard mounting may be held +mounted. + +=348.= When Infantry and mounted troops dismounted are united for +guard mounting, all details form as prescribed for Infantry. + + +FORMAL GUARD MOUNTING--MOUNTED. + +(Extract Cavalry Drill Regulations, 1916.) + +=857.= Formal guard mounting will ordinarily be held only in posts or +camps where a band is present. At the _assembly_ the men of each troop +designated for guard form at stand to horse on their troop parade +grounds, the noncommissioned officers falling in as file closers; the +supernumeraries do not fall in; each first sergeant verifies his +detail and inspects the dress and general appearance, replaces any man +unfit to go on guard, turns the detail over to the senior +noncommissioned officer, and retires. The senior noncommissioned +officer then mounts, draws saber, and causes the detail to mount. The +band, accompanied by the buglers, takes its place on the parade ground +so that the left of its front rank shall be 12 yards to the right of +the rank when the guard is formed. + +=858.= At _adjutant's call_ the adjutant takes post so as to be 12 +yards in front of and facing the center of the guard when formed; the +sergeant major takes post facing to the left 12 yards to the left of +the front rank of the band; the band plays in appropriate time, the +details are marched to the parade ground by their senior +noncommissioned officers; the detail that arrives first is marched to +the line so that upon halting the head of the horse of the man on the +right shall be on line with and near to the sergeant major's horse, +the noncommissioned officer, having halted his detail, places himself +facing the sergeant major at a distance from him a little greater than +the front of his detail, and commands: =DRESS.= The detail dresses on +its right trooper; the noncommissioned officers of the detail in the +line of file closers rein back so as to be 6 yards in rear of the +rank; the noncommissioned officer in command of the detail then +commands, =Front=, salutes, and reports, _The detail is correct_, or +_(so many) sergeants, corporals, or privates are absent_; the sergeant +major returns the salute; the noncommissioned officer in charge of the +detail then passes by the right of the guard and takes post on the +line of noncommissioned officers in rear of the right trooper of his +detail. Should there be more than one detail, it is formed in like +manner on the left of the one preceding; the privates, noncommissioned +officers, and commander of each detail dress on those of the preceding +details in the same rank or line. + +Should the detail from a troop not include a noncommissioned officer, +one will be detailed to perform the duties of commander of the detail. +In this case such noncommissioned officer, after reporting to the +sergeant major, passes around the right flank between the guard and +the band and retires. + +The troops detailed alternate in taking the right of the line. + +=859.= When the last detail has formed the sergeant major draws saber, +verifies the details, causes the guard to count fours, and, if there +be more than five fours, divides the guard into two or more platoons; +he designates the center guide or guides and then commands, =DRESS= +(Par. 362), verifies the alignment of rank and the line of +noncommissioned officers, and then returns to the right of the rank, +turns to the left, commands, =FRONT=, passes to a point midway between +the adjutant and center of the guard, halts facing the adjutant, +salutes, and reports: _Sir, the details are correct_; or, _Sir, (so +many) sergeants, corporals, or privates are absent_; the adjutant +returns the salute, directs the sergeant major: _Take your post_, and +then draws saber; the sergeant major turns to the left about and takes +post 3 yards to the left of and on a line with the rank. When the +sergeant major has completed his report the officer of the guard takes +post facing to the front 8 yards in front of the center of the guard +and draws saber. The adjutant then directs, _Inspect your guard, Sir_, +at which the commander of the guard turns about, commands: 1. =Draw=, +2. =SABER=, 3. =Prepare for inspection=, 4. =MARCH=, moves toward and +inspects the guard, as in troop inspection. During the inspection the +band plays. + +The adjutant returns saber, observes the general condition of the +guard, and falls out any man who is unfit for guard duty or does not +present a creditable appearance. Substitutes will report to the +commander of the guard at the guard house. + +The adjutant, when so directed, selects orderlies and color sentinels +as prescribed in the Manual of Interior Guard Duty and notifies the +commander of the guard of his selection. He may require a trooper to +move out of the rank and to dismount for a more minute inspection. He +also notifies the two senior noncommissioned officers to act as +platoon leaders if there has been a division into platoons. If there +be a junior officer of the guard, he takes post at the same time as +the senior, facing to the front 3 yards in front of the guide of the +first platoon, and the senior of the two noncommissioned officers acts +and takes post as chief of the second platoon. The junior officer of +the guard may be directed by the commander of the guard to assist in +inspecting the guard. + +=860.= If there be no officer of the guard the adjutant inspects the +guard and during the inspection notifies the senior noncommissioned +officer to command the guard and the next two senior noncommissioned +officers to serve as platoon leaders. A noncommissioned officer +commanding the guard takes the post of the officer of the guard, the +next senior noncommissioned officer the post of the junior officer of +the guard. + +The inspection ended, the adjutant places himself about 30 yards in +front of and facing the center of the guard and draws saber. The new +officer of the day takes post in front of and facing the guard about +30 yards from the adjutant. The old officer of the day takes post 3 +yards to the right of and 1 yard less advanced than the new officer of +the day. The commander of the guard takes post 8 yards in front of the +right trooper, facing to the front, and draws saber. + +The adjutant then commands: 1. =Draw=, 2. =SABER=, 3. =SOUND OFF.= + +The band, playing, passes in front of the commander of the guard to +the left of the line and back to its post on the right, when it ceases +playing. + +The adjutant then commands =POSTS=, at which platoon leaders take +their posts 3 yards in front of the guides of their platoons, facing +to the front, and the commander of the guard takes post 6 yards in +front of the leader of the center (right) platoon, facing to the +front, and the file closers resume their places 3 yards in rear of the +rank. If there be no junior officer of the guard, the commander of the +guard takes post 3 yards in front of the center guide. + +The commander of the guard and the chiefs of platoon and file closers +having taken their posts, the adjutant commands: 1. =Present=, 2. +=SABER=, faces toward the officer of the day, salutes, and then +reports, _Sir, the guard is formed_. + +The new officer of the day, after the adjutant has reported, salutes +with the hand and directs the adjutant, _March the guard in review, +Sir._ + +=861.= The adjutant turns about, brings the guard to a carry, and +commands: 1. =Platoons right turn=, 2. =MARCH=; 3. =Guard=, 4. =HALT.= +The platoons execute the movement as in the troop, the band takes post +in front of the column (Par 806). The adjutant places himself abreast +of the first platoon and 6 yards from its left flank; the sergeant +major abreast of the second platoon and 6 yards from its left flank. +The adjutant then commands: 1. =Pass in review=, 2. =FORWARD=, 3. +=MARCH.= + +The guard marches at the walk past the officer of the day, according +to the principles of squadron review, the adjutant, commander of the +guard, chiefs of platoon, sergeant major, and drum major saluting. The +new officer of the day returns the salute of the commander of the +guard and the adjutant only, making one salute with the hand. + +=862.= The band, having passed the officer of the day, turns to the +left out of the column, places itself opposite to and facing him, and +continues to play until the guard leaves the parade ground. The +buglers detach themselves from the band when the latter turns out of +the column and remain in front of the guard, commencing to play when +the band ceases. In the absence of the band the buglers do not turn +out of the column, but continue to play in front of the guard. + +=863.= The guard having passed 12 yards beyond the officer of the day, +the adjutant halts; the sergeant major halts alongside of the adjutant +and 1 yard to his left; they then return saber, salute, and retire. +The commander of the guard then, without halting, breaks the guard +into column of fours and marches it to its post. + +=864.= The officers of the day turn toward each other and salute, the +old officer of the day turning over the orders to the new officer of +the day. + +While the band is sounding off and while the guard is passing in +review the officers of the day remain at attention. + +=865.= If the guard be not divided into platoons the adjutant +commands: 1. =Guard right turn=, 2. =MARCH=; 3. =Guard=, 4: =HALT=, +and it passes in review as explained; the commander of the guard is 3 +yards in front of its center guide, the adjutant is 6 yards from the +rank and abreast of the commander, the sergeant major covers the +adjutant and marches abreast of the rank. + + +RELIEVING THE OLD GUARD--(FORMAL GUARD MOUNTING, MOUNTED.) + +=866.= As the new guard approaches the guardhouse the old guard is +formed in line at the carry saber, its buglers 3 yards to its right; +when the buglers at the head of the new guard arrive opposite the left +of the old guard its commander commands: 1. =Present=, 2. =SABER=; +both commanders salute and, when the new guard has passed the +commander of the old guard, the latter commands: 1. =Carry=, 2. +=SABER.= The buglers and guard continue marching without changing +direction until the rear of the column has passed 9 yards beyond the +buglers of the old guard, when the commander of the new guard +commands: 1. =Fours right=, 2. =MARCH.= + +=867.= The buglers and guard are marched 3 yards in rear of the line +of the old guard, when the commander of the new guard commands: 1. +=Fours right about=, 2. =MARCH=; 3. =Guard=, 4. =HALT=; 5. =DRESS=; he +then, facing to the front, aligns his guard so as to be on a line with +the old guard and commands, =Front=; the buglers of the new guard are +3 yards to the right of the rank. + +=868.= The new guard being dressed, the commander of each guard, in +front of and facing its center, commands: 1. =Present=, 2. =SABER=, +resumes his front, salutes, resumes the carry, faces his guard, and +commands: 1. =Carry=, 2. =SABER.= + +Each guard is then presented by its commander to its officer of the +day; if there be but one officer of the day present, or if an officer +acts in the capacity of old and new officer of the day, each guard is +presented to him by its commander. + +=869.= If another person entitled to a salute approaches, each +commander of the guard brings his own guard to attention if not +already at attention. The senior commander of the two guards then +commands: 1. =Old and new guards=, 2. =Present=, 3. =SABER.= The +junior will salute at the command "Present, Saber," given by the +senior. After the salute has been acknowledged the senior brings both +guards to the "Carry, Saber." + +=870.= After the salutes have been acknowledged by the officers of the +day, each guard returns saber by command of its own officer of the +guard; the commander of the new guard then directs the orderly or +orderlies to fall out and report. + +=871.= The commander of the new guard then falls out members of the +guard for detached posts, placing them under charge of the proper +noncommissioned officer, divides the guard into three reliefs, +_first_, _second_, and _third_, from right to left, and directs a list +of the guard to be made by reliefs. The sentinels and detachments of +the old guard are at once relieved by members of the new guard, the +two guards standing at ease or dismounted while these changes are +being made. The commander of the old transmits to the commander of the +new guard all his orders, instructions, and information concerning the +guard and its duties. + +=872.= The commander of the new guard then has his own guard fall out, +takes possession of the guardhouse and verifies the articles in charge +of the guard. + +=873.= If considerable time is required to bring in that portion of +the old guard still on post, the commanding officer may direct that as +soon as the orders and property are turned over to the new guard the +portion of the old guard at the guardhouse may be marched off and +dismissed. In such case the remaining detachments of the old guard +will be inspected by the commander of the new guard when they reach +the guardhouse. He will direct the senior noncommissioned officer +present to march these detachments off and dismiss them in the +prescribed manner. + +=874.= In bad weather, at night, or after long marches the music may +be omitted, or the buglers may take the place of the band and sound +off standing on the right of the guard and the march in review be +omitted. + +In cases in which an organization, entire or in part, is detailed for +guard, it is marched to the parade ground as a single detail (Par. +858.) + +=875.= For detailed instructions for guards and sentinels see Manual +of Interior Guard Duty. + + +FORMAL GUARD MOUNTING, DISMOUNTED. + +=876.= Guard mounting, dismounted, and relieving the old guard are +conducted on the same principles as when mounted, with the following +modifications: + +(_a_) The men designated for guard fall in, dismounted, on their troop +parade grounds; noncommissioned officers not commanding detail, 2 +paces in rear of rank. + +(_b_) The detail that is to be on the right is marched to the line so +that upon halting the breast of the man on the right shall be near to +and opposite the left arm of the sergeant major. At the command +=DRESS=, the detail dresses up to the line of the sergeant major and +its commander, the man on the right placing his breast against the +left arm of the sergeant major. + +(_c_) When the last detail has formed, the sergeant major takes a side +step to the right, draws saber if armed with one, verifies the detail, +takes post 2 paces to the right and 2 paces to the front of the guard, +facing to the left and causes the guard to count fours. + +(_d_) When the sergeant major has reported, the officer of the guard +takes post 3 paces in front of the center of the guard, _draws saber_ +and _orders saber_, the guard being at order arms. + +The inspection which corresponds to that of par. 882 being ended, and +the officers of the day, the adjutant, and the commander of the guard +having taken their posts, the commander of the guard draws saber with +the adjutant and comes to the order. + +The adjutant then commands: 1. =Parade=, 2. =Rest=, 3. =SOUND OFF=, +and comes to the _order_ and _parade rest_. + +(_e_) After the band has sounded off, the adjutant, commander of the +guard, and platoon leaders come to attention, and the adjutant +commands: 1. =Present=, 2. =ARMS=, faces toward the officer of the day +and reports: _Sir, the guard is formed._ The new officer of the day, +after the adjutant has reported, returns the salute with the hand and +directs the adjutant: _March the guard in review, Sir._ The adjutant +carries saber, faces about, brings the guard to an order and +commands: 1. =At trail, platoons (or guard) right turn=, 2. =MARCH=; +3. =Guard=, 4. =HALT.= + +The guard marches in quick time past the officer of the day, according +to the principles as when mounted. + +While the band is sounding off and while the guard is marching in +review, the officers of the day stand at parade rest with arms folded. +They take this position when the adjutant comes to parade rest, resume +the attention with him, again take the parade rest at the first note +of the march in review, and resume attention as the head of the column +approaches. + +(_f_) If the guard be not divided into platoons, the adjutant +commands: 1. =At trail, guard right turn=, 2. =MARCH=, 3. =Guard=, 4. +=HALT=, and it passes in review as explained; the commander of the +guard is 3 paces in front of its center guide. + + +=Section 21. Relieving the Old Guard.= + +=360.= As the new guard approaches the guardhouse, the old guard is +formed in line, with its field music three paces to its right; and, +when the field music at the head of the new guard arrives opposite its +left, the commander of the new guard commands: 1. =Eyes, RIGHT=; the +commander of the old guard commands: 1. =Present=, 2. =ARMS=; +commanders of both guards salute. The new guard marches in quick time +past the old guard. + +When the commander of the new guard is opposite the field music of the +old guard, he commands: =FRONT=; the commander of the old guard +commands: 1. =Order=, 2. =ARMS=, as soon as the new guard shall have +cleared the old guard. + +The field music having marched three paces beyond the field music of +the old guard, changes direction to the right, and, followed by the +guard, changes direction to the left when on a line with the old +guard; the changes of direction are without command. The commander of +the guard halts on the line of the front rank of the old guard, allows +his guard to march past him, and, when its rear approaches, forms it +in line to the left, establishes the left guide three paces to the +right of the field music of the old guard, and on a line with the +front rank, and then dresses his guard to the left; the field music of +the new guard is three paces to the right of its front rank. + +=361.= The new guard being dressed the commander of each guard, in +front of and facing its center, commands: 1. =Present=, 2. =ARMS=, +resumes his front, salutes, carries saber, faces his guard, and +commands: 1. =Order=, 2. =ARMS=. + +Should a guard be commanded by a noncommissioned officer, he stands on +the right or left of the front rank, according as he commands the old +or new guard, and executes the rifle salute. + +=362.= After the new guard arrives at its post and has saluted the old +guard, each guard is presented by its commander to its officer of the +day; if there be but one officer of the day present, or if one officer +acts in the capacity of old and new officer of the day, each guard is +presented to him by its commander. + +=363.= If other persons entitled to a salute approach, each commander +of the guard will bring his own guard to attention if not already at +attention. The senior commander of the two guards will then command: +"1. =Old and new guards=, 2. =Present=, 3. =Arms=." + +The junior will salute at the command "=Present Arms=" given by the +senior. After the salute has been acknowledged, the senior brings both +guards to the order. + +=364.= After the salutes have been acknowledged by the officers of the +day, each guard is brought to an order by its commander; the commander +of the new guard then directs the orderly or orderlies to fall out and +report and causes bayonets to be fixed if so ordered by the commanding +officer; bayonets will not then be unfixed during the tour except in +route marches while the guard is actually marching or when specially +directed by the commanding officer. + +The commander of the new guard then falls out members of the guard for +detached posts, placing them under charge of the proper +noncommissioned officers, divides the guard into three reliefs, +=first=, =second=, and =third=, from right, to left, and directs a +list of the guard to be made by reliefs. When the guard consists of +troops of different arms combined, the men are assigned to reliefs so +as to insure a fair division of duty under rules prescribed by the +commanding officer. + +=365.= The sentinels and detachments of the old guard are at once +relieved by members of the new guard, the two guards standing at ease +or at rest while these changes are being made. The commander of the +old transmits to the commander of the new guard all his orders, +instructions, and information concerning the guard and its duties. The +commander of the new guard then takes possession of the guardhouse and +verifies the articles in charge of the guard. + +=366.= If considerable time is required to bring in that portion of +the old guard still on post, the commanding officer may direct that as +soon as the orders and property are turned over to the new guard the +portion of the old guard at the guardhouse may be marched off and +dismissed. In such a case the remaining detachment or detachments of +the old guard will be inspected by the commander of the new guard when +they reach the guardhouse. He will direct the senior noncommissioned +officer present to march these detachments off and dismiss them in the +prescribed manner. + +=367.= In bad weather, at night, after long marches, or when the +guard is very small, the field music may be dispensed with. + + + + +CHAPTER X. + +MAP READING AND SKETCHING. + + +=Section 1. Military map reading.= + +When you pick up a map, the first question is, Where is the north? +This can usually be told by an arrow (see fig. 1, p. 259) which will +be found in one of the corners of the map, and which points to the +true north--the north of the north star. + +On some maps no arrow is to be found. The chances are a hundred to one +that the north is at the top of the map, as it is on almost all +printed maps. But you can only assure yourself of that fact by +checking the map with the ground it represents. For instance, if you +ascertain that the city of Philadelphia is due east of the city of +Columbus, then the Philadelphia-Columbus line on the map is a due +east-and-west line, and establishes at once all the other map +directions. + +Now, the map represents the ground as nearly as it can be represented +on a flat piece of paper. If you are standing up, facing the north, +your right hand will be in the east, your left in the west, and your +back to the south. It is the same with a map; if you look across it in +the direction of the arrow--that is, toward its north--your right hand +will be toward what is east on the map; your left hand to the west; +the south will be at the bottom of the map. + +[Illustration: Fig. 1, 2, 3, 4, 5 and scale.] + +There is another kind of an arrow that sometimes appears on a map. It +is like the one in figure 2, page 259, and points not to the true +north but to the magnetic north, which is the north of the compass. +Though the compass needle, and therefore the arrow that represents it +on the map, does not point exactly north, the deviation is, from a +military point of view, slight, and appreciable error will rarely +result through the use of the magnetic instead of the true north in +the solution of any military problems. + +Should you be curious to know the exact deviation, consult your local +surveyor or any civil engineer. + +Both arrows may appear on your map. In that case disregard the +magnetic arrow unless you are using the map in connection with a +compass. + +If a map is being used on the ground, the first thing to be done is to +put the lines of the map parallel to the real outlines of the ground +forms, and roads, fences, railroads, etc., that the map shows; for the +making of a map is no more than the drawing on paper of lines parallel +to and proportional in length to real directions and distances on the +ground. + +For instance, the road between two places runs due north and south. +Then on the map a line representing the road will be parallel to the +arrow showing the north and will be proportional in length to the real +road. In this way a map is a picture, or better, a bare outline +sketch; and, as we can make out a picture, though it be upside down, +or crooked on the wall, so we can use a map that is upside down or not +parallel to the real ground forms. But it is easier to make out both +the picture and the map if their lines are parallel to what they +represent. So in using a map on the ground we always put the lines +parallel to the actual features they show. This is easy if the map has +an arrow. + +If the map has no arrow, you must locate objects or features on the +ground, and on the map, their representations. Draw on the map a line +connecting any two of the features; place this line parallel to an +imaginary line through the two actual features located, and your map +will be correctly placed. Look to it that you do not reverse on the +map the positions of the two objects or features, or your map will be +exactly upside down. + +When the map has been turned into the proper position--that is to say, +"oriented"--the next thing is to locate on the map your position. If +you are in the village of Easton and there is a place on the map +labeled Easton, the answer is apparent. But if you are out in the +country, at an unlabeled point that looks like any one of a dozen +other similar points, the task is more complicated. In this latter +case you must locate and identify, both on the map and on the ground, +other points--hills, villages, peculiar bends in rivers, forests--any +ground features that have some easily recognizable peculiarity and +that you can see from your position. + +Suppose, for instance, you were near Leavenworth and wanted to locate +your exact position, of which you are uncertain. You have the map +shown in this manual, and, looking about, you see southwest from where +you stand the United States Penitentiary; also, halfway between the +south and the southeast--south-southeast a sailor would say--the +reservoir (rectangle west of "O" in "Missouri"). Having oriented your +map, draw on it a line from the map position of the reservoir toward +its actual position on the ground. Similarly draw a line from the map +position of penitentiary toward its actual position. Prolong the two +lines until they intersect. The intersection of the lines will mark +the place where you stand--south Merritt Hill. + +This method consists merely in drawing on the map lines that represent +the lines of sight to known and visible places. The lines pass through +the map position of the places you see and are parallel to the actual +lines of sight; therefore they are the map representations of the +lines of sight, and their intersection is the map position of the eye +of the observer. + +After this orientation and location of position, one can deduce from +the map everything there is to know in regard to directions. In this +respect, study of the ground itself will show no more than will study +of the map. + +After "What direction?" comes "How far?" To answer this, one must +understand that the map distance between any two points shown bears a +fixed and definite relation or proportion to the real distance between +the two points. + +For instance: We measure on a map and find the distance between two +points to be 1 inch. Then we measure the real distance on the ground +and find it to be 10,000 inches; hence the relation between the map +distance and the real distance is 1 to 10,000, or 1/10000. Now, if the +map is properly drawn, the same relation will hold good for all +distances, and we can obtain any ground distance by multiplying by +10,000 the corresponding map distance. + +This relation need not be 1/10000, but may be anything from 1/100 that +an architect might use in making a map or plan of a house up to one +over a billion and a half, which is about the proportion between map +and real distances in a pocket-atlas representation of the whole world +on a 6-inch page. Map makers call this relation the "scale" of the map +and put it down in a corner in one of three ways. + +For the sake of an illustration, say the relation between map and +ground distances is 1 to 100; that is, 1 inch on the map is equal to +100 on the ground. The scale may be written: + +First. 1 inch equals 100. + +Second. 1/100. + +Third. As shown by figure 3 (p. 259). + +These expressions mean one and the same thing. A variation of the +first method on a map of different scale might be: 1 inch equals 1 +mile. Since a mile contains 63,360 inches, then the real distance +between any two points shown on the map is 63,360 times the map +distance. + +To find the ground distance by the third kind of scale, copy it on the +edge of a slip of paper, apply the slip directly to the map, and read +off the distance; and so we answer the question, "How far?" + +After direction and distance comes the interpretation of the signs, +symbols, and abbreviations on the map. Those authorized are given on +pages 272 and 273 (a reprint of Appendix 4, Field Service Regulations, +1914); but there are a good many other conventional signs in common +use. A key to them is published by the War Department and is called +"Conventional Signs, United States Army." From these you read at once +the natural and artificial features of the country shown on your map. +It should be borne in mind that these conventional signs are not +necessarily drawn to scale, as are the distances. They show the +position and outline of the features rather than the size. This for +the reason that many of the features shown, if drawn to scale, would +be so small that one could not make them out except with a magnifying +glass. If the exact dimensions are of any importance, they will be +written in figures on the map. For instance, bridges. + +In addition to the above conventional signs, we have contours to show +the elevations, depressions, slope, and shape of the ground. Abroad, +hachures are much used, but they serve only to indicate elevation, +and, as compared to contours, are of little value. Contours resemble +the lines shown in figure 4 (p. 259). + +Hachures are shown in figure 5 (p. 259), and may be found on any +European map. They simply show slopes, and, when carefully drawn, show +steeper slopes by heavier shading and gentler slopes by the fainter +hachures. The crest of the mountain is within the hachures. (See fig. +5, p. 259.) + +_Contours._--A certain student, when asked by his instructor to define +"space," said: "I have it, sir, in my head, but can not put it into +words." The instructor replied: "I suppose that under those +circumstances, Mr. ----, the definition really would not help much." +And so it is with contours--the definition does not help much if you +know a contour when you meet it on a map. For examples of contours, +turn to the map facing page 274, and, starting at the United States +penitentiary, note the smooth, flowing, irregular curved lines marked +880, 860, 840, 840, 860, etc. + +The only other lines on the map that at all resemble contours are +stream lines, like "Corral Creek," but the stream lines are readily +distinguished from contours by the fact that they cross the contours +squarely, while the contours run approximately parallel to each other. +Note the stream line just to the west of South Merritt Hill. + +The contours represent lines on the ground that are horizontal and +whose meanderings follow the surface, just as the edge of a flood +would follow the irregularities of the hills about it. Those lines +that contours stand for are just as level as the water's edge of a +lake, but horizontally they wander back and forth to just as great a +degree. + +The line marked 880, at the penitentiary, passes through on that +particular piece of ground every point that is 880 feet above sea +level. Should the Missouri River rise in flood to 880 feet, the +penitentiary would be on an island, the edge of which is marked by the +880 contour. + +Contours show several things; among them the height of the ground they +cross. Usually the contour has labeled on it in figures the height +above some starting point, called the =datum plane=--generally sea +level. If, with a surveying instrument, you put in on a piece of +ground a lot of stakes, each one of which is exactly the same height +above sea level--that is, run a line of levels--then make a map +showing the location of the stakes, a line drawn on the map through +all the stake positions is a contour, and shows the position of all +points of that particular height. + +On any given map all contours are equally spaced in a vertical +direction, and the map shows the location of a great number of points +at certain fixed levels. If you know the vertical interval between any +two adjacent contours, you know the vertical interval for all the +contours on that map, for these intervals on a given map are all the +same. + +With reference to a point through which no contour passes, we can only +say that the point in question is not higher than the next contour up +the hill, nor lower than the next one down the hill. For the purposes +of any problem, it is usual to assume that the ground slopes evenly +between the two adjacent contours and that the vertical height of the +point above the lower contour is proportional to its horizontal +distance from the contour, as compared to the whole distance between +the two contours. For instance, on the map, find the height of point +A. The horizontal measurements are as shown on the map. The vertical +distance between the contours is 20 feet. A is about one-quarter of +the distance between the 800 and the 820 contours, and we assume its +height to be one-quarter of 20 feet (5 feet) higher than 800 feet. So +the height of A is 805 feet. + +The vertical interval is usually indicated in the corner of the map by +the letters "V. I." For instance: V. I.=20 feet. + +On maps of very small pieces of ground, the V. I. is usually +small--perhaps as small as 1 foot; on maps of large areas on a small +scale it may be very great--even 1,000 feet. + +Contours also show =slopes=. It has already been explained that from +any contour to the next one above it the ground rises a fixed number +of feet, according to the vertical interval of that map. From the +scale of distances on the map the horizontal distance between any two +contours can be found. For example: On the map the horizontal distance +between D and E is 90 yards, or 270 feet. The vertical distance is 20 +feet, the V. I. of the map. The slope then is 20/270 = 1/13.5 = 7-1/2% += 4-1/2 deg., in all of which different ways the slope can be expressed. + +[Illustration: Slope.] + +On a good many contoured maps a figure like this will be found in one +of the corners: + +[Illustration: Scale.] + +On that particular map contours separated by the distance + +[Illustration: Scale.] + +on the vertical scale show a slope of 1 deg.; if separated by the distance +[Illustration: |__2 deg.__| ] they show a 2 deg. slope, etc. A slope of 1 deg. is +a rise of 1 foot in 57. To use this scale of slopes, copy it on the +edge of a piece of paper just as you did the scale of distances and +apply it directly to the map. + +You will notice that where the contours lie closest the slope is +steepest; where they are farthest apart, the ground is most nearly +flat. + +It has already been set forth how contours show height and slope; in +addition to this they show the shape of the ground, or GROUND FORMS. +Each single contour shows the shape at its particular level of the +hill or valley it outlines; for instance, the 880 contour about the +penitentiary shows that the hill at that level has a shape somewhat +like a horse's head. Similarly, every contour on the map gives us the +form of the ground at its particular level, and knowing these ground +forms for many levels we can form a fair conception of what the whole +surface is like. + +A round contour like the letter O outlines a round ground feature; a +long, narrow one indicates a long, narrow ground feature. + +Different hills and depressions have different shapes. A good many of +them have one shape at one level and another shape at another level, +all of which information will be given you by the contours on the map. + +One of the ways to see how contours show the shape of the ground is to +pour half a bucket of water into a small depression in the ground. The +water's edge will be exactly level, and if the depression is +approximately round the water's edge will also be approximately round. +The outline will look something like figure 6. + +Draw roughly on a piece of paper a figure of the same shape and you +will have a contour showing the shape of the bit of ground where you +poured your water. + +Next, with your heel gouge out on one edge of your little pond a +small, round bay. The water will rush in and the watermark on the soil +will now be shaped something like figure 7. + +Alter your drawing accordingly, and the new contour will show the new +ground shape. + +Again do violence to the face of nature by digging with a stick a +narrow inlet opening out of your miniature ocean, and the watermark +will now look something like figure 8. + +Alter your drawing once more and your contour shows again the hew +ground form. Drop into your main pond a round clod and you will have a +new watermark, like figure 9, to add to your drawing. This new +contour, of the same level with the one showing the limit of the +depression, shows on the drawing the round island. + +Drop in a second clod, this time long and narrow, the watermark will +be like figure 10, and the drawing of it, properly placed, will show +another island of another shape. Your drawing now will look like +figure 11. + +It shows a depression approximately round, off which open a round bay +and a long, narrow bay. There is also a round elevation and a long, +narrow one; a long, narrow ridge, jutting out between the two bays, +and a short, broad one across the neck of the round bay. + +[Illustration: Fig. 6 to 11.] + +Now flood your lake deeply enough to cover up the features you have +introduced. The new water line, about as shown by the dotted line in +figure 11, shows the oblong shape of the depression at a higher level; +the solid lines show the shape farther down; the horizontal distance +between the two contours at different points shows where the bank is +steep and where the slope is gentler. + +Put together the information each of these contours gives you, and you +will see how contours show the shape of the ground. On the little map +you have drawn you have introduced all the varieties of ground forms +there are; therefore all contour forms. + +The contours on an ordinary map seem much more complicated, but this +is due only to the number of them, their length, and many turns before +they finally close on themselves. Or they may close off the paper. But +trace each one out, and it will resolve itself into one of the forms +shown in figure 11. + +Just as the high-tide line around the continents of North and South +America runs a long and tortuous course, but finally closes back on +itself, so will every contour do likewise. And just as truly as every +bend in that high-tide mark turns out around a promontory, or in +around a bay, so will every bend in a contour stand for a hill or a +valley, pointing to the lowlands if it be a hill, and to the height if +it mark a valley. + +If the map embrace a whole continent or an island, all the contours +will be of closed form, as in figure 11, but if it embrace only a part +of the continent or island, some of the contours will be chopped off +at the edge of the map, and we have the open form of contours, as we +would have if figure 11 were cut into two parts. + +The closed form may indicate a hill or a basin; the open form, a ridge +or a valley; sometimes a casual glance does not indicate which. + +Take up, first, the contour of the open type. If the map shows a +stream running down the inside of the contour, there is no difficulty +in saying at once that the ground feature is a valley; for instance, +V, V, V, and the valley of Corral Creek on the map. But if there is no +stream line, does the contour bend show a valley or a ridge? + +First of all, there is a radical difference between the bend of a +contour round the head of a valley and its bend round the nose of a +ridge. + +Compare on the map the valleys V and the ridges R. The bend of the +contour round the head of the valley is much sharper than the bend of +the contour round the nose of the ridge. This is a general truth, not +only in regard to maps, but also in regard to ground forms. Study any +piece of open ground and note how much wider are the ridges than the +valleys. Where you find a "hog back" or "devil's backbone," you have +an exception to the rule, but the exceptions are not frequent enough +to worry over. + +To tell whether a given point is on a ridge or in a valley, start from +the nearest stream shown on the map and work across the map to the +undetermined point, keeping in mind that in a real trip across the +country you start from the stream, go up the hill to the top of a +ridge, down the other side of the hill to a watercourse, then up a +hill to the top of a ridge, down again, up again, etc. That is all +traveling is--valley, hill, valley, hill, valley, etc., though you +wander till the crack o' doom. And so your map travels must +go--valley, hill, valley, hill--till you run off the map or come back +to the starting point. + +On the map, follow the R-V line, V indicating valley and R ridge or +hill. Note first the difference in sharpness in the contour bends; +also how the valley contours point to the highland and the ridge +contours to the lowland. + +The contours go thus: + +[Illustration: Sketch Low / High land.] + +The streams flow down the valleys, and the sharp angle of the contour +points always _up_ stream. Note also how the junction of a stream and +its tributary usually makes an angle that points _down_ stream. + +"Which way does this stream run?" + +Water flows down hill. If you are in the bed of a stream, contours +representing higher ground must be to your right and to your left. Get +the elevations of these contours. Generally the nearest contour to the +bank of the stream will cross the stream, and there will be an angle +or sharp turn in the contour at this crossing. If the point of the +angle or sharp turn is toward you, you are going downstream; if away +from you, you are going upstream. + +If the contours are numbered, you have only to look at the numbers to +say where the low and where the high places are; but to read a map +with any speed one must be quite independent of these numbers. In +ordinary map reading look, first of all, for the stream lines. The +streams are the skeleton upon which the whole map is hung. Then pick +out the hilltops and ridges, and you have a body to clothe with all +the details that will be revealed by a close and careful study of what +the map maker has recorded. + +As to closed contours, they may outline a depression or a hill On the +map "881" or "885" might be hills or ponds, as far as their shape is +concerned. But, clearly, they are hills, for on either side are small +streams running _away_ from them. If they were ponds, the stream lines +would run _toward_ the closed contours. The test of "hill, valley, +hill," will always solve the problem when there are not enough stream +lines shown to make evident at once whether a closed contour marks a +pond or a hill. Look in the beginning for the stream lines and +valleys, and, by contrast, if for no other reason, the hills and +ridges at once loom up. + +To illustrate the subject of contours to aid those who have difficulty +in reading contoured maps the following is suggested: + +1. Secure modeling clay and build a mound. + +2. Use wire and slice this mound horizontally at equal vertical +intervals into zones; then insert vertical dowels through the mound of +clay. + +3. Remove the top zone, place on paper, and draw outline of the bottom +edge. Trim your paper roughly to the outline drawn. Indicate where the +holes made by the dowels pierce the paper. + +4. Do the above with each zone of your mound. + +5. Place these papers in proper order on dowels similarly placed to +ones in original mound at, say, 1 inch vertical interval apart. A +skeleton mound results. + +6. Replace the zones of the clay mound and form the original clay +mound along the side of skeleton mound. + +7. Now force all the paper sheets down the dowels onto the bottom +sheet, and we have a map of clay mound with contours. + +NOTE.--One-inch or 2-inch planks can be made into any desired form by +the use of dowels and similar procedure followed. + +People frequently ask, "What should I see when I read a map?" and the +answer is given, "The ground as it is." This is not true any more than +it is true that the words "The valley of the Meuse," bring to your +mind vine-clad hills, a noble river, and green fields where cattle +graze. Nor can any picture ever put into your thought what the Grand +Canyon really is. What printed word or painted picture can not do, a +map will not. A map says to you, "Here stands a hill," "Here is a +valley," "This stream runs so," and gives you a good many facts in +regard to them. But you do not have to "see" anything, any more than +you have to visualize Liege in order to learn the facts of its +geography. A map sets forth cold facts in an alphabet all its own, but +an easy alphabet, and one that tells with a few curving lines more +than many thousand words could tell. + + +=Section 2. Sketching.= + +Noncommissioned officers and selected privates should be able to make +simple route sketches. This is particularly useful in patrolling, as +thereby a patrol leader is able to give his commander a good idea of +the country his patrol has traversed. Sketches should be made on a +certain scale, which should be indicated on the sketch, such as 3 +inches on the sketch equals 1 mile on the ground. The north should be +indicated on the sketch by means of an arrow pointing in that +direction. Any piece of paper may be used to make the sketch on. The +back of the field-message blank is ruled and prepared for this +purpose. The abbreviations and conventional signs shown on the +following pages should be used in making such simple sketches. + + +Field Maps and Sketches. + +The following abbreviations and signs are authorized for use on field +maps and sketches. For more elaborate map work the authorized +conventional signs as given in the manual of "Conventional Signs, +United States Army Maps,"; are used. + +Abbreviations other than those given should not be used. + +ABBREVIATIONS. + + A. Arroyo. + abut. Abutment. + Ar. Arch. + b. Brick. + B.S. Blacksmith Shop. + bot. Bottom. + Br. Branch. + br. Bridge. + C. Cape. + cem. Cemetery. + con. Concrete. + cov. Covered. + Cr. Creek. + d. Deep. + cul. Culvert. + D.S. Drug Store. + E. East. + Est. Estuary. + f. Fordable. + Ft. Fort. + G.S. General Store. + gir. Girder. + G.M. Gristmill. + I. Iron. + I. Island. + Jc. Junction. + k.p. King-post. + L. Lake. + Lat. Latitude. + Ldg. Landing. + L.S.S. Life-Saving Station. + L.H. Lighthouse + Long. Longitude. + Mt. Mountain. + Mts. Mountains. + N. North. + n.f. Not fordable. + P. Pier. + pk. Plank. + P.O. Post Office + Pt. Point. + q.p. Queen-post. + R. River. + R.H. Roundhouse. + R.R. Railroad. + S. South. + s. Steel. + S.H. Schoolhouse. + S.M. Sawmill. + Sta. Station. + st. Stone. + str. Stream. + T.G. Tollgate. + Tres. Trestle. + tr. Truss. + W.T. Water Tank. + W.W. Water Works. + W. West. + w. Wood. + wd. Wide. + + +SIGNS--FIELD MAPS AND SKETCHES. + + Telegraph Line {Symbol (modified below) + {Along improved road + {Along unimproved road + {Along trail + + Railroads {Single track + {Double track + {Trolley + + Roads {Improved + {Unimproved + {Trail + + Fences {barbed wire + {smooth wire + {wood + {stone + {hedge + +[Page with sketch examples of bridge, streams, house, church, school +house, woods, orchards, cultivated land, brush, crops or grass, +cemetery, trees, cut and fill.] + +[Illustration: Map.] + + + + +CHAPTER XI. + +MESSAGE BLANKS. + + + ------------------------+-----+------+-------+-------+-------+-------- + | No. | Sent | Time. | Rec'd | Time. | Check. + U. S. ARMY FIELD | | by. | | by. | | + MESSAGE. | (These spaces for Signal Operators only.) + ------------------------+--------------------------------------------- + Communicated by | [Name of sending detachment.] + Buzzer, Phone, | + Telegraph, Wireless, |_From_ ______________________________________ + Lantern, Helio, Flag, | + Cyclist, Foot Messenger,|_At_ ________________________________________ + Mounted Messenger, Motor| + Car, Flying Machine. | + Underscore means used. |_Date_ _________ _Hour_ _______ _No_ ________ + ------------------------+ + _To_ _________________________________________________________________ + ______________________________________________________________________ + ______________________________________________________________________ + ______________________________________________________________________ + + _Received_ ___________________________________________________________ + + ---------------------------------------------------------------------- + +The heading "From" is filled in with the _name_ of the detachment +sending the information: as "Officer's Patrol, 7th Cav." Messages sent +on the same day from the same source to the same person are numbered +consecutively. The address is written briefly, thus: "Commanding +officer, Outpost, 1st Brigade." In the signature the writer's surname +only and rank are given. + +This blank is four and a half by six and three-quarters inches, +including the margin on the left for binding. The back is ruled in +squares, the side of each square representing 100 yards on a scale of +3 inches to one mile, for use in making simple sketches explanatory, +of the message. It is issued by the Signal Corps in blocks of forty +with duplicating sheets. The regulation envelope is three by five and +one-fourth inches and is printed as follows: + +UNITED STATES ARMY FIELD MESSAGE. + + _To_ ___________________________________________ _No_ ________________ + (For signal operator only.) + ---------------------------------------------------------------------- + _When sent_ __________________________________________ _No_ __________ + _Rate of speed_ ______________________________________________________ + _Name of messenger_ __________________________________________________ + _When and by whom rec'd_ _____________________________________________ + =This Envelope will be Returned to Bearer.= + + + + +CHAPTER XII. + +SIGNALS AND CODES. + +(Extracts from Signal Book, United States Army, 1916.) + + +=General Instructions for Army Signaling.= + +=1.= Each signal station will have its call, consisting of one or two +letters, as Washington, "W"; and each operator or signalist will also +have his personal signal of one or two letters, as Jones, "Jo." These +being once adopted will not be changed without due authority. + +=2.= To lessen liability of error, numerals which occur in the body of +a message should be spelled out. + +=3.= In receiving a message the man at the telescope should call out +each letter as received, and not wait for the completion of a word. + +=4.= A record of the date and time of the receipt or transmission of +every message must be kept. + +=5.= The duplicate manuscript of messages received at, or the original +sent from, a station should be carefully filed. + +=6.= In receiving messages nothing should be taken for granted, and +nothing considered as seen until it has been positively and clearly in +view. Do not anticipate what will follow from signals already given. +Watch the communicating station until the last signals are made, and +be very certain that the signal for the end of the message has been +given. + +=7.= Every address must contain at least two words and should be +sufficient to secure delivery. + +=8.= All that the sender writes for transmission after the word "To" +is counted. + +=9.= Whenever more than one signature is attached to a message count +all initials and names as a part of the message. + +=10.= Dictionary words, initial letters, surnames of persons, names of +cities, towns, villages, States, and Territories, or names of the +Canadian Provinces will be counted each as one word; e.g., New York, +District of Columbia, East St. Louis should each be counted as one +word. The abbreviation of the names of cities, towns, villages, +States, Territories, and provinces will be counted the same as if +written in full. + +=11.= Abbreviations of weights and measures in common use, figures, +decimal points, bars of division, and in ordinal numbers the affixes +"st," "d," "nd," "rd," and "th" will be each counted as one word. +Letters and groups of letters, when such groups do not form dictionary +words and are not combinations of dictionary words, will be counted at +the rate of five letters or fraction of five letters to a word. When +such groups are made up of combinations of dictionary words, each +dictionary word so used will be counted. + +=12.= The following are exceptions to paragraph 55, and are counted as +shown: + + A. M 1 word + P. M 1 word + O. K 1 word + Per cent 1 word + +=13.= No message will be considered sent until its receipt has been +acknowledged by the receiving station. + + +=The International Morse or General Service Code.= + +=18.= The International Morse Code is the General Service Code and is +prescribed for use by the Army of the United States and between the +Army and the Navy of the United States. It will be used on radio +systems, submarine cables using siphon recorders, and with the +heliograph, flash-lanterns, and all visual signaling apparatus using +the wigwag. + + _Alphabet._ + A . -- + B -- . . . + C -- . -- . + D -- . . + E . + F . . -- . + G -- -- . + H . . . . + I . . + J . -- -- -- + K -- . -- + L . -- . . + M -- -- + N -- . + O -- -- -- + P . -- -- . + Q -- -- . -- + R . -- . + S . . . + T -- + U . . -- + V . . . -- + W . -- -- + X -- . . -- + Y -- . -- -- + Z -- -- . . + + + _Numerals._ + 1 . -- -- -- -- + 2 . . -- -- -- + 3 . . . -- -- + 4 . . . . -- + 5 . . . . . + 6 -- . . . . + 7 -- -- . . . + 8 -- -- -- . . + 9 -- -- -- -- . + 0 -- -- -- -- -- + + + _Punctuation._ + + Period . . . . . . + Comma . -- . -- . -- + Interrogation . . -- -- . . + Hyphen or dash -- . . . . -- + Parenthesis (before and after the words) -- . -- -- . -- + Quotation mark (beginning and ending) . -- . . -- . + Exclamation -- -- . . -- -- + Apostrophe . -- -- -- . + Semicolon -- . -- . -- . + Colon -- -- -- . . . + Bar indicating fraction -- . . -- . + Underline (before and after the word or words it is + wished to underline) . . -- -- . -- + Double dash (between preamble and address, between + address and body of message, between body of message + and signature, and immediately before a fraction) -- . . . -- + Cross . -- . -- . + + +=Visual Signaling: in General.= + +=21.= Methods of visual signaling are divided as follows: + +(_a_) By flag, torch, hand lantern, or beam of searchlight (without +shutter.) (General Service Code.) + +(_b_) By heliograph, flash lantern, or searchlight (with shutter.) +(General Service Code.) + +(_c_) By Ardois. (General Service Code.) + +(_d_) By hand flags or by stationary semaphore. (Two-arm semaphore +Code.) + +(_e_) By preconcerted signals with Coston lights, rockets, bombs, Very +pistols, small arms, guns, etc. + +(_f_) By flag signals by permanent hoists. (International Code.) + +=22.= The following conventional signals, with exceptions noted, will +be used in the first four classes. + + _Exceptions._ + Ardois and semaphore. + + End of word. Interval. + End of sentence. Double interval. + End of message. Triple interval. + Signal separating preamble + from address; address + from text; + text from signature. -- . . . -- Double interval, + signature preceded + also by "Sig" interval. + Acknowledgement. R. + Error. . . . . . . . . A. + Negative. K. + Preparatory. L. + Annulling. N. + Affirmative. P. + Interrogatory. . . -- -- . . O. + Repeat after word. Interrogatory. A (word). + Repeat last message. Interrogatory three times. + Send faster. QRQ + Send slower. QRS + Cease sending. QRT + Wait a moment. . -- . . . None. + Execute. IX, IX + Move to your right. MR + Move to your left. ML + Move up. MU + Move down. MD + Finished (end of work). . . . -- . -- None. + + +=Visual Signaling: By Flag (Wig-Wag), Torch, Hand Lantern, or Beam or +Searchlight (Without Shutter).= + +GENERAL SERVICE CODE. + +=23.= For the flag used with the General Service Code there are three +motions and one position. The position is with the flag held +vertically, the signalman facing directly toward the station with +which it is desired to communicate. The first motion (the dot) is to +the right of the sender, and will embrace an arc of 90 deg., starting with +the vertical and returning to it, and will be made in a plane at +right-angles to the line connecting the two stations. The second +motion (the dash) is a similar motion to the left of the sender. The +third motion (front) is downward directly in front of the sender and +instantly returned upward to the first position. Front is used to +indicate an interval. + +=24.= The beam of the searchlight, though ordinarily used with the +shutter like the heliograph, may be used for long-distance signaling, +when no shutter is suitable or available, in a similar manner to the +flag or torch, the first position being a vertical one. A movement of +the beam 90 deg. to the right of the sender indicates a dot, a similar +movement to the left indicates a dash; the beam is lowered vertically +for front. + +=25.= To use the torch or hand lantern, a footlight must be employed +as a point of reference to the motion. The lantern is most +conveniently swung out upward to the right of the footlight for a dot, +to the left for a dash, and raised vertically for front. + +NOTE.--To call a station, make the call letter until acknowledged, at +intervals giving the call or signal of the calling station. If the +call letter of a station is unknown, wave flag until acknowledged. In +using the searchlight without shutter throw the beam in a vertical +position and move it through an arc of 180 deg. in a plane at right angles +to the line connecting the two stations until acknowledged. To +acknowledge a call, signal "Acknowledgment" followed by the call +letter of the acknowledging station. + + +=Signaling with Heliograph, Flash lantern, and Searchlight (With +Shutter.)= + +GENERAL SERVICE CODE. + +=26.= The first position is to turn a steady flash on the receiving +station. The signals are made by short and long flashes. Use a short +flash for dot and a long steady flash for dash. The elements of a +letter should be slightly longer than in sound signals. + +=27.= To call a station, make its call letter until acknowledged. + +=28.= If the call letter of a station be unknown, signal A until +acknowledged. Each station will then turn on a steady flash and +adjust. When adjustment is satisfactory to the called station, it will +cut off its flash and the calling station will proceed with its +message. + +=29.= If the receiver sees that the sender's mirror or light needs +adjustment, he will turn on a steady flash until answered by a steady +flash. When the adjustment is satisfactory the receiver will cut off +his flash and the sender will resume his message. + +=30.= To break the sending station for other purposes, turn on a +steady flash. + +SOUND SIGNALS. + +=56.= Sound signals made by the whistle, foghorn, bugle, trumpet, and +drum may well be used in a fog, mist, falling snow, or at night. They +may be used with the dot and dash code. + +In applying the General Service Code to whistle, foghorn, bugle, or +trumpet, one short blast indicates a dot and one long blast a dash. +With the drum, one tap indicates a dot and two taps in rapid +succession a dash. Although these signals can be used with a dot and +dash code, they should be so used in connection with a preconcerted or +conventional code. + + +=Signaling by Two-Arm Semaphore.= + +HAND FLAGS. + +=43.= Signaling by the two-arm semaphore is the most rapid method of +sending spelled-out messages. It is, however, very liable to error if +the motions are slurred over or run together in an attempt to make +speed. Both arms should move rapidly and simultaneously, but there +should be a perceptible pause at the end of each letter before making +the movements for the next letter. Rapidity is secondary to accuracy. +For alphabet see pages following. + +[Illustration: Hand-signal.] + +[Illustration: Hand-signal.] + +NOTE.--In making the interval the flags are crossed downward in front +of the body (just above the knees); the double interval is the +"chop-chop" signal made twice; the triple interval is "chop-chop" +signal made three times. In calling a station face it squarely and +make its call. If there is no immediate reply wave the flags over the +head to attract attention, making the call at frequent intervals. When +the sender makes "end of message" the receiver, if message is +understood, extends the flags horizontally and waves them until the +sender does the same, when both leave their stations. Care must be +taken with hand flags to hold the staffs so as to form a prolongation +of the arms. + + +LETTER CODES. + +INFANTRY. + +=47.= For use with General Service Code or semaphore hand flags. + + -----------------+---------------------------+----------------------------- + Letter of | If signaled from the | If signaled from the + alphabet. | rear to the firing | firing line to the rear. + | line. | + -----------------+---------------------------+----------------------------- + AM | Ammunition going forward. | Ammunition required. + CCC | Charge (mandatory at all | Am about to charge if no + | times). | instructions to the contrary. + CF | Cease firing. | Cease firing. + DT | Double time or "rush." | Double time or "rush." + F | Commence firing | + FB | Fix bayonets. | + FL | Artillery fire is causing | + | us losses. | + G | Move forward. | Preparing to move forward. + HHH | Halt. | + K | Negative. | Negative. + LT | Left. | Left. + O | What is the (R. N., etc.)?| What is the (R. N., etc.)? + (Ardois and | | + semaphore only.) | Interrogatory. | Interrogatory. + . . -- -- . . | What is the (R. N., etc.)?| What is the (R. N.. etc.)? + (All methods but | Interrogatory. | Interrogatory. + ardois and | | + semaphore.) | | + P | Affirmative. | Affirmative. + RN | Range. | Range. + RT | Right. | Right. + SSS | Support going forward. | Support needed. + SUF | Suspend firing. | Suspend firing. + T | Target. | Target. + -----------------+---------------------------+----------------------------- + + +CAVALRY. + +=48.= For use with General Service Code or semaphore hand flags. + + AM--Ammunition going forward (if signaled from the rear to the + front). + Ammunition required (if signaled from the front). + + CCC--Charge (if signaled from the rear to the front). + About to charge if no instructions to the contrary.(if signaled + from the front). + + CF--Cease firing. + + DT--Double time, rush, or hurry. + + F--Commence firing. + + FL--Artillery fire is causing us losses. + + G--Move forward (if signaled from the rear to the front). + Preparing to move forward (if signaled from the front). + + HHH--Halt. + + K--Negative. + + LT--Left. + + M--Bring up the horses (if signaled from front to rear). + Horses going forward (if signaled from rear to front). + + O--What is the (R. N., etc.) Interrogatory. (Ardois and semaphore + only.) + ..--..--What is the (R, N., etc.)? Interrogatory. (All methods but + Ardois and semaphore). + P--Affirmative. + R--Acknowledgment. + RN--Range. + RT--Right. + SSS--Support going forward (if signaled from the rear to the front). + Support needed (if signaled from the front.) + + SUF--Suspend firing. + + T--Target. + + +FIELD ARTILLERY. + +=49.= For use with General Service Code or semaphore hand flags. + + ........--Error. (All methods but Ardois and semaphore.) + A--Error. (Ardois and semaphore only.) + AD--Additional. + AKT--Draw ammunition from combat train. + AL--Draw ammunition from limbers. + AM--Ammunition going forward. + AMC--At my command. + AP--Aiming point. + B (numerals)--Battery (so many) rounds. + BS (numerals)--(Such.) Battalion station. + BL--Battery from the left. + BR--Battery from the right. + CCC--Charge (mandatory at all times). Am about to charge + if not instructed to contrary. + CF--Cease firing. + CS--Close station. + CT--Change target. + D--Down. + DF--Deflection. + DT--Double time. Rush. Hurry. + F--Commence firing. + FCL (numerals)--On 1st piece close by (so much). + FL--Artillery fire is causing us losses. + FOP (numerals)--On 1st piece open by (so much). + G--Move forward. Preparing to move forward. + HHH--Halt. Action suspended. + IX--Execute. Go ahead. Transmit. + JI--Report firing data. + K--Negative. No. + KR--Corrector. + L--Preparatory. Attention. + LCL (numerals)--On 4th piece close by (so much). + LOP (numerals)--On 4th piece open by (so much). + LT--Left. + LL--Left from the left. + LR--Left from the right. + LE (numerals)--Less (so much). + MD--Move down. + ML--Move deg. to your left. + MR--Move deg. to your right. + MU--Move up. + MO (numerals)--Move (so much). + N--Annul, cancel. + O--What is the (R. N., etc.)? Interrogatory. (Ardois and + semaphore only.) + . . -- -- . . -- What is the (R. N., etc.)? Interrogatory. (All + methods but Ardois and semaphore.) + P--Affirmative. Yes. + PS--Percussion. Shrapnel. + QRQ--Send faster. + QRS--Send slower. + QRT--Cease sending. + R--Acknowledgment. Received. + RS--Regimental station. + RL--Right from the left. + RR--Right from the right. + RN--Range. + RT--Right. + S--Subtract. + SCL (numerals)--On 2d piece close by (so much). + SOP (numerals)--On 2d piece open by (so much). + SH--Shell. + SI--Site. + SSS--Support needed. + T--Target. + TCL (numericals)--On 3d piece close by (so much). + TOP (numerals)--On 3d piece open by (so much). + U--Up. + Y (letter)--Such battery station. + + + + +CHAPTER XIII. + +FIRST-AID RULES. + + +The bandages and dressings contained in the first-aid packet have been +so treated as to destroy any germs thereon. Therefore, when dressing a +wound, be careful not to touch or handle that part of the dressing +which is to be applied to the wound. + +A sick or injured person should always be made to lie down on his +back, if practicable, as this is the most comfortable position, and +all muscles may be relaxed. + +All tight articles of clothing and equipment should be loosened, so as +not to interfere with breathing or the circulation of the blood. +Belts, collars, and the trousers at the waist should be opened. + +Don't let mere onlookers crowd about the patient. They prevent him +from getting fresh air and also make him nervous and excited. + +In case of injury the heart action is generally weak from shock, and +the body, therefore, grows somewhat cold. So don't remove any more +clothing than is necessary to expose the injury. + +Cut or rip the clothing, but don't pull it. Try to disturb the patient +as little as possible. + +Don't touch a wound with your fingers or a handkerchief, or with +anything else but the first-aid dressing. Don't wash the wound with +water, as you may infect it. + +Don't administer stimulants (whisky, brandy, wine, etc.) unless +ordered to do so by a doctor. While in a few cases stimulants are of +benefit, in a great many cases they do positive harm, especially where +there has been any bleeding. + +The heart may be considered as a pump and the arteries as a rubber +hose, which carry the blood from the heart to every part of the body. +The veins are the hose which carry the blood back to the heart. Every +wound bleeds some, but, unless a large artery or a large vein is cut, +the bleeding will stop after a short while if the patient is kept +quiet and the first-aid dressing is bound over the wound so as to make +pressure on it. + +When a large artery is cut the blood gushes out in spurts every time +the heart beats. In this case it is necessary to stop the flow of +blood by pressing upon the hose somewhere between the heart and the +leak. + +If the leak is in the arm or hand, apply pressure as in figure 1. + +[Illustration: FIG. 1.] + +If the leak is in the leg, apply pressure as in figure 2. + +[Illustration: FIG. 2.] + +If the leak is in the shoulder or armpit, apply pressure as in figure +3. + +[Illustration: FIG. 3.] + +The reason for this is that at the places indicated the arteries may +be pressed against a bone more easily than at any other places. + +Another way of applying pressure (by means of a tourniquet) is shown +in figure 4. Place a pad of tightly rolled cloth or paper, or any +suitable object, over the artery. Tie a bandage loosely about the +limb and then insert your bayonet, or a stick, and twist up the +bandage until the pressure of the pad on the artery stops the leak. +Twist the bandage slowly and stop as soon as the blood ceases to flow, +in order not to bruise the flesh or muscles unnecessarily. + +[Illustration: FIG. 4.--Improvised tourniquet.] + +A tourniquet may cause pain and swelling of the limb, and if left on +too long may cause the limb to die. Therefore, about every half hour +or so loosen the bandage very carefully, but if the bleeding continues +pressure must be applied again. In this case apply the pressure with +the thumb for five or ten minutes, as this cuts off only the main +artery and leaves some of the smaller arteries and the veins free to +restore some of the circulation. When a tourniquet is painful it is +too tight and should be carefully loosened a little. + +If the leg or arm is held upright, this also helps to reduce the +bleeding in these parts, because the heart then has to pump the blood +uphill. + +A broken bone is called a fracture. The great danger in the case of a +fracture is that the sharp, jagged edges of the bones may stick +through the flesh and skin, or tear and bruise the arteries, veins, +and muscles. If the skin is not broken, a fracture is not so serious, +as no germs can get in. =Therefore never move a person with a broken +bone until the fracture has been so fixed that the broken ends of the +bone can not move.= + +If the leg or arm is broken, straighten the limb gently and if +necessary pull upon the end firmly to get the bones in place. Then +bind the limb firmly to a splint to hold it in place. A splint may be +made of any straight, stiff material--a shingle or piece of board, a +bayonet, a rifle, a straight branch of a tree, etc. Whatever material +you use must be well padded on the side next to the limb. Be careful +never to place the bandages over the fracture, but always above and +below. (Figs. 5, 6, 7, 8.) + +[Illustration: FIG. 5.] + +[Illustration: FIG. 6.] + +[Illustration: FIG. 7.] + +[Illustration: FIG. 8.] + +Many surgeons think that the method of binding a broken leg to the +well one, and of binding the arm to the body, is the best plan in the +field as being the quickest and one that serves the immediate purpose. + +With wounds about the body, the chest, and abdomen you must not meddle +except to protect them when possible, without much handling, with the +materials of the packet. + + +FAINTING, SHOCK, HEAT EXHAUSTION. + +The symptoms of fainting, shock, and heat exhaustion are very +similar. The face is pale, the skin cool and moist, the pulse is weak, +and generally the patient is unconscious. Keep the patient quiet, +resting on his back, with his head low. Loosen the clothing, but keep +the patient warm, and give stimulants (whisky, hot coffee, tea, etc.). + + +SUNSTROKE. + +In the case of sunstroke the face is flushed, the skin is dry and very +hot, and the pulse is full and strong. In this case place the patient +in a cool spot, remove the clothing, and make every effort to lessen +the heat in the body by cold applications to the head and surface +generally. Do not, under any circumstances, give any stimulants or hot +drinks. + + +FREEZING AND FROSTBITE. + +The part frozen, which looks white or bluish white, and is cold, +should be very slowly raised in temperature by brisk but careful +rubbing in a cool place, and never near a fire. Stimulants are to be +given cautiously when the patient can swallow, and followed by small +amounts of warm liquid nourishment. The object is to restore the +circulation of the blood and the natural warmth gradually and not +violently. Care and patience are necessary to do this. + + +RESUSCITATION OF THE APPARENTLY DROWNED. + +In the instruction of the Army in First Aid the method of +resuscitation of the apparently drowned, as described by "Schaefer," +will be taught instead of the "Sylvester Method," heretofore used. The +Schaefer method of artificial respiration is also applicable in cases +of electric shock, asphyxiation by gas, and of the failure of +respiration following concussion of the brain. + +Being under water for four or five minutes is generally fatal, but an +effort to revive the apparently drowned should always be made, unless +it is known that the body has been under water for a very long time. +The attempt to revive the patient should not be delayed for the +purpose of removing his clothes or placing him in the ambulance. Begin +the procedure as soon as he is out of the water, on the shore or in +the boat. The first and most important thing is to start artificial +respiration without delay. + +The Schaefer method is preferred because it can be carried out by one +person without assistance, and because its procedure is not exhausting +to the operator, thus permitting him, if required, to continue it for +one or two hours. When it is known that a person has been under water +for but a few minutes continue the artificial respiration for at least +one and a half to two hours before considering the case hopeless. Once +the patient has begun to breathe watch carefully to see that he does +not stop again. Should the breathing be very faint, or should he stop +breathing, assist him again with artificial respiration. After he +starts breathing do not lift him nor permit him to stand until the +breathing has become full and regular. + + +SCHAEFER METHOD. + +As soon as the patient is removed from the water, turn him face to the +ground, clasp your hands under his waist, and raise the body so any +water may drain out of the air passages while the head remains low. +(Figure 9.) + +[Illustration: FIG. 9.--Schaefer method of artificial respiration. +Inspiration.] + +The patient is laid on his stomach, arms extended from his body beyond +his head, face turned to one side so that the mouth and nose do not +touch the ground. This position causes the tongue to fall forward of +its own weight and so prevents its falling back into the air passages. +Turning the head to one side prevents the face coming into contact +with mud or water during the operation. This position also +facilitates the removal from the mouth of foreign bodies, such as +tobacco, chewing gum, false teeth, etc., and favors the expulsion of +mucus, blood, vomitus, serum, or any liquid that may be in the air +passages. + +[Illustration: FIG. 10--Schaefer method of artificial respiration. +Expiration.] + +The operator kneels, straddles one or both of the patient's thighs, +and faces his head. Locating the lowest rib, the operator, with his +thumbs nearly parallel to his fingers, places his hands so that the +little finger curls over the twelfth rib. If the hands are on the +pelvic bones, the object of the work is defeated; hence the bones of +the pelvis are first located in order to avoid them. The hands must be +free from the pelvis and resting on the lowest rib. By operating on +the bare back it is easier to locate the lower ribs and avoid the +pelvis. The nearer the ends of the ribs the hands are placed without +sliding off the better. The hands are thus removed from the spine, the +fingers being nearly out of sight. + +The fingers help some, but the chief pressure is exerted by the heels +(thenar and hypothenar eminences) of the hands, with the weight coming +straight from the shoulders. It is a waste of energy to bend the arms +at the elbows and shove in from the sides, because the muscles of the +back are stronger than the muscles of the arms. + +The operator's arms are held straight, and his weight is brought from +his shoulders by bringing his body and shoulders forward. This weight +is gradually increased until at the end of the three seconds of +vertical pressure upon the lower ribs of the patient the force is felt +to be heavy enough to compress the parts; then the weight is suddenly +removed. If there is danger of not returning the hands to the right +position again, they can remain lightly in place; but it is usually +better to remove the hands entirely. If the operator is light and the +patient an overweight adult, he can utilize over 80 per cent of his +weight by raising his knees from the ground and supporting himself +entirely on his toes and the heels of his hands, the latter properly +placed on the ends of the floating ribs of the patient. In this manner +he can work as effectively as a heavy man. + +A light feather or a piece of absorbent cotton drawn out thin and held +near the nose by some one will indicate by its movements whether or +not there is a current of air going and coming with each forced +expiration and spontaneous inspiration. + +The natural rate of breathing is 12 to 15 times per minute. The rate +of operation should not exceed this. The lungs must be thoroughly +emptied by three seconds of pressure, then refilling takes care of +itself. Pressure and release of pressure--one complete +respiration--occupies about five seconds. If the operator is alone, he +can be guided in each act by his own deep, regular respiration or by +counting or by his watch lying by his side. If comrades are present, +he can be advised by them. + +The duration of the efforts as artificial respiration should +ordinarily exceed an hour; indefinitely longer if there are any +evidences of returning animation, by way of breathing, speaking, or +movements. There are liable to be evidences of life within 25 minutes +in patients who will recover from electric shock, but where there is +doubt the patient should be given the benefit of the doubt. In +drowning, especially, recoveries are on record after two hours or more +of unconsciousness; hence, the Schaefer method, being easy of +operation, is more likely to be persisted in. + +Aromatic spirits of ammonia may be poured on a handkerchief and held +continuously within 3 inches of the face and nose. If other ammonia +preparations are used, they should be diluted or held farther away. +Try it on your own nose first. + +When the operator is a heavy man it is necessary to caution him not to +bring force too violently upon the ribs, as one of them might be +broken. + +Do not attempt to give liquids of any kind to the patient while +unconscious. Apply warm blankets and hot-water bottles as soon as +they can be obtained. + + + + +CHAPTER XIV. + +LAWS AND REGULATIONS. + + +=Section 1. General provisions.= + +The Army of the United States is governed by certain laws called "The +Articles of War" and certain regulations called "Army Regulations." + +The following list includes the offenses most often committed by +soldiers, generally through ignorance or carelessness rather than +viciousness. Violations of any rule or regulation should be carefully +guarded against, since they not only subject the offender to +punishment, but also bring discredit on his comrades, his +organization, and on the military profession: + +1. Selling, pawning, or, through neglect, losing or spoiling any +Government property, such as uniforms, blankets, equipment, +ammunition, etc. + +2. Disobedience of the orders of any officer or noncommissioned +officer. + +3. Disrespect to an officer or noncommissioned officer. + +4. Absence from camp without leave. + +5. Absence from any drill, formation, or other duty without authority. + +6. Drunkenness on duty or off duty, whether in camp or when absent +either with or without leave. + +7. Bringing liquor into camp. + +8. Noisy or disorderly conduct in camp or when absent either with or +without leave. + +9. Entering on private property, generally for the purpose of +stealing fruit, etc. + +10. Negligence or carelessness at drill or on other duty, particularly +while on guard or as a sentinel over prisoners. + +11. Wearing an unauthorized uniform or wearing the uniform in an +improper manner. + +12. Urinating in or around camp. + +13. Failing to salute properly. + +14. Disrespect or affront to a sentinel. + +15. Abuse or neglect of his horse. + +"The basic principles of the combat tactics of the different arms are +set forth in the Drill Regulations of those arms for units as high as +brigades." (_Preface, Field Service Regulations._) + +"The Drill Regulations are furnished as a guide. They provide the +principles for training and for increasing the probability of success +in battle. In the interpretation of the regulations the spirit must be +sought. Quibbling over the minutiae of form is indicative of failure to +grasp the spirit." (_Paragraph 4, Infantry Drill Regulations._) + +Field Service Regulations govern all arms of the Army of the United +States. + + +=Section 2. The Army of the United States.= + +The Army of the United States shall consist of the Regular Army, the +Volunteer Army, the Officers' Reserve Corps, the Enlisted Reserve +Corps, the National Guard while in the service of the United States, +and such other land forces as are now or may hereafter be authorized +by law. (Sec. 1, act of June 3, 1916.) + + +=Section 3. Rank and precedence of officers and noncommissioned +officers.= + +The following are the grades of rank of officers and noncommissioned +officers: + +1. Lieutenant general. + +2. Major general. + +3. Brigadier general. + +4. Colonel. + +5. Lieutenant colonel. + +6. Major. + +7. Captain. + +8. First Lieutenant. + +9. Second lieutenant. + +10. Aviator, Signal Corps. + +11. Cadet. + +12. (_a_) Sergeant major, regimental; sergeant major, senior grade, +Coast Artillery Corps; (_b_) quartermaster sergeant, senior grade, +Quartermaster Corps; master hospital sergeant, Medical Department; +master engineer, senior grade, Corps of Engineers; master electrician, +Coast Artillery Corps; master signal electrician; band leader; (_c_) +hospital sergeant, Medical Department; master engineer, junior grade, +Corps of Engineers; engineer, Coast Artillery Corps. + +13. Ordnance sergeant; quartermaster sergeant, Quartermaster Corps; +supply sergeant, regimental. + +14. Sergeant major, squadron and battalion; sergeant major, junior +grade, Coast Artillery Corps; supply sergeant, battalion, Corps of +Engineers. + +15. (_a_) First sergeant; (_b_) sergeant, first class, Medical +Department; sergeant, first class, Quartermaster Corps; sergeant, +first class, Corps of Engineers; sergeant, first class, Signal Corps; +electrician sergeant, first class, Coast Artillery Corps; electrician +sergeant, Artillery Detachment, United States Military Academy; +assistant engineer, Coast Artillery Corps; (_c_) master gunner, Coast +Artillery Corps; master gunner, Artillery Detachment, United States +Military Academy; band sergeant and assistant leader, United States +Military Academy band; assistant band leader; sergeant bugler; +electrician sergeant, second class, Coast Artillery Corps; electrician +sergeant, second class, Artillery Detachment, United States Military +Academy; radio sergeant. + +16. Color sergeant. + +17. Sergeant; supply sergeant, company; mess sergeant; stable +sergeant; fireman, Coast Artillery Corps. + +18. Corporal. + +In each grade and subgrade date of commission, appointment, or warrant +determines the order of precedence. (Paragraph 9, Army Regulations, +1913.) + + +=Section 4. Insignia of officers and noncommissioned officers.= + +The insignia of rank appearing on the shoulder straps, shoulder loops, +or collar of shirt (when shirt is worn without coat) of officers are +as follows: + + General: Coat of arms and two stars. + Lieutenant general: One large star and two smaller ones. + Major general: Two silver stars. + Brigadier general: One silver star. + Colonel: One silver spread eagle. + Lieutenant colonel: One silver leaf. + Major: One gold leaf. + Captain: Two silver bars. + First lieutenant: One silver bar. + +The grade of noncommissioned officers is indicated by chevrons worn on +the sleeve. + + +=Section 5. Extracts from the Articles of War.= + +(Relating to enlisted men.) + +CERTAIN ARTICLES TO BE READ AND EXPLAINED. + +ART. 110. Articles 1, 2, and 29, 54 to 96, inclusive, and 104 to 109, +inclusive, shall be read and explained to every soldier at the time of +his enlistment or muster in, or within six days thereafter, and shall +be read and explained once every six months to the soldiers of every +garrison, regiment, or company in the service of the United States. + + +DEFINITIONS. + +ARTICLE 1. The following words when used in these articles shall be +construed in the sense indicated in this article, unless the context +shows that a different sense is intended, namely: + +(_a_) The word "officer" shall be construed to refer to a commissioned +officer; + +(_b_) The word "soldier" shall be construed as including a +noncommissioned officer, a private, or any other enlisted man; + +(_c_) The word "company" shall be understood as including a troop or +battery; and + +(_d_) The word "battalion" shall be understood as including a +squadron. + + +PERSONS SUBJECT TO MILITARY LAW. + +ART. 2. The following persons are subject to these articles and shall +be understood as included in the term "any person subject to military +law" or "persons subject to military law" whenever used in these +articles: _Provided_, That nothing contained in this act, except as +specifically provided in article 2, subparagraph (_c_), shall be +construed to apply to any person under the United States naval +jurisdiction, unless otherwise specifically provided by law; + +(_a_) All officers and soldiers belonging to the Regular Army of the +United States; all volunteers, from the dates of their muster or +acceptance into the military service of the United States; and all +other persons lawfully called, drafted, or ordered into or to duty or +for training in the said service, from the dates they are required by +the terms of the call, draft, or order to obey the same. + +(_b_) Cadets. + +(_c_) Officers and soldiers of the Marine Corps when detached for +service with the armies of the United States by order of the +President: _Provided_, That an officer or soldier of the Marine Corps +when so detached may be tried by military court-martial for an offense +committed against the laws for the government of the naval service +prior to his detachment, and for an offense committed against these +articles he may be tried by a naval court-martial after such +detachment ceases. + +(_d_) All retainers to the camp and all persons accompanying or +serving with the armies of the United States without the territorial +jurisdiction of the United States, and in times of war all such +retainers and persons accompanying or serving with the armies of the +United States in the field, both within and without the territorial +jurisdiction of the United States, though not otherwise subject to +these articles. + +(_e_) All persons under sentence adjudged by courts-martial. + +(_f_) All persons admitted into the Regular Army Soldiers' Home at +Washington, D. C. + + +ENLISTMENT WITHOUT DISCHARGE. + +ART. 29. Any soldier who, without having first received a regular +discharge, again enlists in the Army, or in the militia when in the +service of the United States, or in the Navy or Marine Corps of the +United States, or in any foreign army, shall be deemed to have +deserted the service of the United States, and, where enlistment is in +one of the forces of the United States mentioned above, to have +fraudulently enlisted therein. + + +FRAUDULENT ENLISTMENT. + +ART. 54. Any person who shall procure himself to be enlisted in the +military service of the United States by means of willful +misrepresentation or concealment as to his qualifications for +enlistment, and shall receive pay or allowances under such enlistment, +shall be punished as a court-martial may direct. + + +OFFICER MAKING UNLAWFUL ENLISTMENT. + +ART. 55. Any officer who knowingly enlists or musters into the +military service any person whose enlistment or muster in is +prohibited by law, regulations, or orders shall be dismissed from the +service or suffer such other punishment as a court-martial may direct. + + +MUSTER ROLLS--FALSE MUSTER. + +ART. 56. At every muster of a regiment, troop, battery, or company the +commanding officer thereof shall give to the mustering officer +certificates, signed by himself, stating how long absent officers have +been absent and the reasons of their absence. And the commanding +officer of every troop, battery, or company shall give like +certificates, stating how long absent noncommissioned officers and +private soldiers have been absent and the reasons of their absence. +Such reasons and time of absence shall be inserted in the muster rolls +opposite the names of the respective absent officers and soldiers, and +the certificates, together with the muster rolls, shall be transmitted +by the mustering officer to the Department of War as speedily as the +distance of the place and muster will admit. Any officer who knowingly +makes a false muster of man or animal, or who signs or directs or +allows the signing of any muster roll knowing the same to contain +false muster or false statement as to the absence or pay of an officer +or soldier, or who wrongfully takes money or other consideration on +mustering in a regiment, company, or other organization, or on signing +muster rolls, or who knowingly musters as an officer or soldier a +person who is not such officer or soldier, shall be dismissed from the +service and suffer such other punishment as a court-martial may +direct. + + +FALSE RETURNS--OMISSION TO RENDER RETURNS. + +ART. 57. Every officer commanding a regiment, an independent troop, +battery, or company, or a garrison shall, in the beginning of every +month, transmit, through the proper channels, to the War Department an +exact return of the same, specifying the names of the officers then +absent from their posts, with the reasons for and the time of their +absence. Every officer whose duty it is to render to the War +Department or other superior authority a return of the state of the +troops under his command, or of the arms, ammunition, clothing, funds, +or other property thereunto belonging, who knowingly makes a false +return thereof shall be dismissed from the service and suffer such +other punishment as a court-martial may direct. And any officer who, +through neglect or design, omits to render such return shall be +punished as a court-martial may direct. + + +DESERTION. + +ART. 58. Any person subject to military law who deserts or attempts to +desert the service of the United States shall, if the offense be +committed in time of war, suffer death or such other punishment as a +court-martial may direct, and, if the offense be committed at any +other time, any punishment, excepting death, that, a court-martial +may direct. + + +ADVISING OR AIDING ANOTHER TO DESERT. + +ART. 59. Any person subject to military law who advises or persuades +or knowingly assists another to desert the service of the United +States shall, if the offense be committed in time of war, suffer +death, or such other punishment as a court-martial may direct, and if +the offense be committed at any other time any punishment, excepting +death, that a court-martial may direct. + + +ENTERTAINING A DESERTER. + +ART. 60. Any officer who, after having discovered that a soldier in +his command is a deserter from the military or naval service or from +the Marine Corps, retains such deserter in his command without +informing superior authority or the commander of the organization to +which the deserter belongs, shall be punished as a court-martial may +direct. + + +ABSENCE WITHOUT LEAVE. + +ART. 61. Any person subject to military law who fails to repair at the +fixed time to the properly appointed place of duty, or goes from the +same without proper leave, or absents himself from his command, guard, +quarters, station, or camp without proper leave, shall be punished as +a court-martial may direct. + + +DISRESPECT TOWARD THE PRESIDENT, VICE PRESIDENT, CONGRESS, SECRETARY +OF WAR, GOVERNORS, LEGISLATURES. + +ART. 62. Any officer who uses contemptuous or disrespectful words +against the President, Vice President, the Congress of the United +States, the Secretary of War, or the governor or legislature of any +State, Territory, or other possession of the United States in which he +is quartered shall be dismissed from the service or suffer such other +punishment as a court-martial may direct. Any other person subject to +military law who so offends shall be punished as a court-martial may +direct. + + +DISRESPECT TOWARD SUPERIOR OFFICERS. + +ART. 63. Any person subject to military law who behaves himself with +disrespect toward his superior officer shall be punished as a +court-martial may direct. + + +ASSAULTING OR WILLFULLY DISOBEYING SUPERIOR OFFICER. + +ART. 64. Any person subject to military law who, on any pretense +whatsoever, strikes his superior officer, or draws or lifts up any +weapon or offers any violence against him, being in the execution of +his office, or willfully disobeys any lawful command of his superior +officer, shall suffer death or such other punishment as a +court-martial may direct. + + +INSUBORDINATE CONDUCT TOWARD NONCOMMISSIONED OFFICER. + +ART. 65. Any soldier who strikes or assaults, or who attempts or +threatens to strike or assault, or willfully disobeys the lawful order +of a noncommissioned officer while in the execution of his office, or +uses threatening or insulting language, or behaves in an insubordinate +or disrespectful manner toward a noncommissioned officer while in the +execution of his office, shall be punished as a court-martial may +direct. + + +MUTINY OR SEDITION. + +ART. 66. Any person subject to military law who attempts, to create or +who begins, excites, causes, or joins in any mutiny or sedition in any +company, party, post, camp, detachment, guard, or other command shall +suffer death or such other punishment as a court-martial may direct. + + +FAILURE TO SUPPRESS MUTINY OR SEDITION. + +ART. 67. Any officer or soldier who, being present at any mutiny or +sedition, does not use his utmost endeavor to suppress the same, or +knowing or having reason to believe that a mutiny or sedition is to +take place, does not without delay give information thereof to his +commanding officer shall suffer death or such other punishment as a +court-martial may direct. + + +QUARRELS, FRAYS, DISORDERS. + +ART. 68. All officers and noncommissioned officers have power to part +and quell all quarrels, frays, and disorders among persons subject to +military law and to order officers who take part In the same into +arrest, and other persons subject to military law who take part in the +same into arrest or confinement, as circumstances may require, until +their proper superior officer is acquainted therewith. And whosoever, +being so ordered, refuses to obey such officer or noncommissioned +officer or draws a weapon upon or otherwise threatens or does violence +to him shall be punished as a court-martial may direct. + + +ARREST OR CONFINEMENT OF ACCUSED PERSONS. + +ART. 69. An officer charged with crime or with a serious offense under +these articles shall be placed in arrest by the commanding officer, +and in exceptional cases an officer so charged may be placed in +confinement by the same authority. A soldier charged with crime or +with a serious offense under these articles shall be placed in +confinement, and when charged with a minor offense he may be placed in +arrest. Any other person subject to military law charged with crime or +with a serious offense under these articles shall be placed in +confinement or in arrest, as circumstances may require; and when +charged with a minor offense such person may be placed in arrest. Any +person placed in arrest under the provisions of this article shall +thereby be restricted to his barracks, quarters, or tent, unless such +limits shall be enlarged by proper authority. Any officer who breaks +his arrest or who escapes from confinement before he is set at liberty +by proper authority shall be dismissed from the service or suffer such +other punishment as a court-martial may direct; and any other person +subject to military law who escapes from confinement or who breaks his +arrest before he is set at liberty by proper authority shall be +punished as a court-martial may direct. + + +INVESTIGATION OF AND ACTION UPON CHARGES. + +ART 70. No person put in arrest shall be continued in confinement more +than eight days, or until such time as a court-martial can be +assembled. When any person is put in arrest for the purpose of trial, +except at remote military posts or stations, the officer by whose +order he is arrested shall see that a copy of the charges on which he +is to be tried is served upon him within eight days after his arrest, +and that he is brought to trial within 10 days thereafter, unless the +necessities of the service prevent such trial; and then he shall be +brought to trial within 30 days after the expiration of said 10 days. +If a copy of the charges be not served, or the arrested person be not +brought to trial, as herein required, the arrest shall cease. But +persons released from arrest, under the provisions of this article, +may be tried, whenever the exigencies of the service shall permit, +within 12 months after such release from arrest: _Provided_, That in +time of peace no person shall, against his objection, be brought to +trial before a general court-martial within a period of five days +subsequent to the service of charges upon him. + + +REFUSAL TO RECEIVE AND KEEP PRISONERS. + +ART. 71. No provost marshal or commander of a guard shall refuse to +receive or keep any prisoner committed to his charge by an officer +belonging to the forces of the United States, provided the officer +committing shall, at the time, deliver an account in writing, signed +by himself, of the crime or offense charged against the prisoner. Any +officer or soldier so refusing shall be punished as a court-martial +may direct. + + +REPORT OF PRISONERS RECEIVED. + +ART. 72. Every commander of a guard to whose charge a prisoner is +committed shall, within 24 hours after such confinement, or as soon as +he is relieved from his guard, report in writing to the commanding +officer the name of such prisoner, the offense charged against him, +and the name of the officer committing him; and if he fails to make +such report he shall be punished as a court-martial may direct. + + +RELEASING PRISONER WITHOUT PROPER AUTHORITY. + +ART. 73. Any person subject to military law who, without proper +authority, releases any prisoner duly committed to his charge, or who, +through neglect or design, suffers any prisoner so committed to +escape, shall be punished as a court-martial may direct. + + +DELIVERY OF OFFENDERS TO CIVIL AUTHORITIES. + +ART. 74. When any person subject to military law, except one who is +held by the military authorities to answer, or who is awaiting trial +or result of trial, or who is undergoing sentence for a crime or +offense punishable under these articles, is accused of a crime or +offense committed within the geographical limits of the States of the +Union and the District of Columbia, and punishable by the laws of the +land, the commanding officer is required, except in time of war, upon +application duly made, to use his utmost endeavor to deliver over such +accused person to the civil authorities, or to aid the officers of +justice in apprehending and securing him, in order that he may be +brought to trial. Any commanding officer who upon such application +refuses or willfully neglects, except in time of war, to deliver over +such accused person to the civil authorities or to aid the officers of +justice in apprehending and securing him shall be dismissed from the +service or suffer such other punishment as a court-martial may direct. + +When under the provisions of this article delivery is made to the +civil authorities of an offender undergoing sentence of a +court-martial, such delivery, if followed by conviction, shall be held +to interrupt the execution of the sentence of the court-martial, and +the offender shall be returned to military custody, after having +answered to the civil authorities for his offense, for the completion +of the said court-martial sentence. + + +MISBEHAVIOR BEFORE THE ENEMY. + +ART. 75. Any officer or soldier who misbehaves himself before the +enemy, runs away, or shamefully abandons or delivers up any fort, +post, camp, guard, or other command which it is his duty to defend, or +speaks words inducing others to do the like, or casts away his arms or +ammunition, or quits his post or colors to plunder or pillage, or by +any means whatsoever occasions false alarms in camp, garrison, or +quarters, shall suffer death or such other punishment as a +court-martial may direct. + + +SUBORDINATES COMPELLING COMMANDER TO SURRENDER. + +ART. 76. If any commander of any garrison, fort, post, camp, guard, or +other command is compelled by the officers or soldiers under his +command to give it up to the enemy or to abandon it, the officers or +soldiers so offending shall suffer death or such other punishment as a +court-martial may direct. + + +IMPROPER USE OF COUNTERSIGN. + +ART. 77. Any person subject to military law who makes known the parole +or countersign to any person not entitled to receive it according to +the rules and discipline of war, or gives a parole or countersign +different from that which he receives, shall, if the offense be +committed in time of war, suffer death or such other punishment as a +court-martial may direct. + + +FORCING A SAFEGUARD. + +ART. 78. Any person subject to military law who, in time of war, +forces a safeguard shall suffer death or such other punishment as a +court-martial may direct. + + +CAPTURED PROPERTY TO BE SECURED FOR PUBLIC SERVICE. + +ART. 79. All public property taken from the enemy is the property of +the United States and shall be secured for the service of the United +States, and any person subject to military law who neglects to secure +such property or is guilty of wrongful appropriation thereof shall be +punished as a court-martial may direct. + + +DEALING IN CAPTURED OR ABANDONED PROPERTY. + +ART. 80. Any person subject to military law who buys, sells, trades, +or in any way deals in or disposes of captured or abandoned property, +whereby he shall receive or expect any profit, benefit, or advantage +to himself or to any other person directly or indirectly connected +with himself, or who fails whenever such property comes into his +possession or custody or within his control to give notice thereof to +the proper authority and to turn over such property to the proper +authority without delay, shall, on conviction thereof, be punished by +fine or imprisonment, or by such other punishment as a court-martial, +military commission, or other military tribunal may adjudge, or by any +or all of said penalties. + + +RELIEVING, CORRESPONDING WITH, OR AIDING THE ENEMY. + +ART. 81. Whosoever relieves the enemy with arms, ammunition, supplies, +money, or other thing, or knowingly harbors or protects or holds +correspondence with or gives intelligence to the enemy, either +directly or indirectly, shall suffer death, or such other punishment +as a court-martial or military commission may direct. + + +SPIES. + +ART. 82. Any person who in time of war shall be found lurking or +acting as a spy in or about any of the fortifications, posts, +quarters, or encampments of any of the armies of the United States, or +elsewhere, shall be tried by a general court-martial or by a military +commission, and shall, on conviction thereof, suffer death. + + +MILITARY PROPERTY--WILLFUL OR NEGLIGENT LOSS, DAMAGE, OR WRONGFUL +DISPOSITION OF. + +ART. 83. Any person subject to military law who willfully or through +neglect suffers to be lost, spoiled, damaged, or wrongfully disposed +of any military property belonging to the United States shall make +good the loss or damage and suffer such punishment as a court-martial +may direct. + + +WASTE OR UNLAWFUL DISPOSITION OF MILITARY PROPERTY ISSUED TO SOLDIERS. + +ART. 84. Any soldier who sells or wrongfully disposes of or willfully +or through neglect injures or loses any horse, arms, ammunition, +accouterments, equipments, clothing, or other property issued for use +in the military service shall be punished as a court-martial may +direct. + + +DRUNK ON DUTY. + +ART. 85. Any officer who is found drunk on duty shall, if the offense +be committed in time of war, be dismissed from the service and suffer +such other punishment as a court-martial may direct; and if the +offense be committed in time of peace he shall be punished as a +court-martial may direct. Any person subject to military law, except +an officer, who is found drunk on duty shall be punished as a +court-martial may direct. + + +MISBEHAVIOR OF SENTINEL. + +ART. 86. Any sentinel who is found drunk or sleeping upon his post, or +who leaves it before he is regularly relieved, shall, if the offense +be committed in time of war, suffer death or such other punishment as +a court-martial may direct; and if the offense be committed in time of +peace he shall suffer any punishment, except death, that a +court-martial may direct. + + +PERSONAL INTEREST IN SALE OF PROVISIONS. + +ART. 87. Any officer commanding in any garrison, fort, barracks, camp, +or other place where troops of the United States may be serving who, +for his private advantage, lays any duty or imposition upon or is +interested in the sale of any victuals or other necessaries of life +brought into such garrison, fort, barracks, camp, or other place for +the use of the troops, shall be dismissed from the service and suffer +such other punishment as a court-martial may direct. + + +INTIMIDATION OF PERSONS BRINGING PROVISIONS. + +ART. 88. Any person subject to military law who abuses, intimidates, +does violence to, or wrongfully interferes with any person bringing +provisions, supplies, or other necessaries to the camp, garrison, or +quarters of the forces of the United States shall suffer such +punishment as a court-martial may direct. + + +GOOD ORDER TO BE MAINTAINED AND WRONGS REDRESSED. + +ART. 89. All persons subject to military law are to behave themselves +orderly in quarters, garrison, camp, and on the march; and any person +subject to military law who commits any waste or spoil, or willfully +destroys any property whatsoever (unless by order of his commanding +officer), or commits any kind of depredation or riot, shall be +punished as a court-martial may direct. Any commanding officer who, +upon complaint made to him, refuses or omits to see reparation made to +the party injured, in so far as the offender's pay shall go toward +such reparation, as provided for in article 105, shall be dismissed +from the service or otherwise punished as a court-martial may direct. + + +PROVOKING SPEECHES OR GESTURES. + +ART. 90. No person subject to military law shall use any reproachful +or provoking speeches or gestures to another; and any person subject +to military law who offends against the provisions of this article +shall be punished as a court-martial may direct. + + +DUELING. + +ART. 91. Any person subject to military law who fights or promotes or +is concerned in or connives at fighting a duel, or who having +knowledge of a challenge sent or about to be sent, fails to report the +fact promptly to the proper authority, shall, if an officer, be +dismissed from the service or suffer such other punishment as a +court-martial may direct; and if any other person subject to military +law shall suffer such punishment as a court-martial may direct. + + +MURDER--RAPE. + +ART. 92. Any person subject to military law who commits murder or rape +shall suffer death or imprisonment for life, as a court-martial may +direct; but no person shall be tried by court-martial for murder or +rape committed within the geographical limits of the States of the +Union and the District of Columbia in time of peace. + + +VARIOUS CRIMES. + +ART. 93. Any person subject to military law who commits manslaughter, +mayhem, arson, burglary, robbery, larceny, embezzlement, perjury, +assault with intent to commit any felony, or assault with intent to do +bodily harm, shall be punished as a court-martial may direct. + + +FRAUDS AGAINST THE GOVERNMENT. + +ART. 94. Any person subject to military law who makes or causes to be +made any claim against the United States or any officer thereof, +knowing such claim to be false or fraudulent; or + +Who presents or causes to be presented to any person in the civil or +military service thereof, for approval or payment, any claim against +the United States or any officer thereof, knowing such claim to be +false or fraudulent; or + +Who enters into any agreement or conspiracy to defraud the United +States by obtaining, or aiding others to obtain, the allowance or +payment of any false or fraudulent claim; or + +Who, for the purpose of obtaining, or aiding others to obtain, the +approval, allowance, or payment of any claim against the United States +or against any officer thereof, makes or uses, or procures, or advises +the making or use of, any writing or other paper, knowing the same to +contain any false or fraudulent statements; or + +Who, for the purpose of obtaining, or aiding others to obtain, the +approval, allowance, or payment of any claim against the United States +or any officer thereof, makes, or procures, or advises the making of, +any oath to any fact or to any writing or other paper, knowing such +oath to be false; or + +Who, for the purpose of obtaining, or aiding others to obtain, the +approval, allowance, or payment of any claim against the United States +or any officer thereof, forges or counterfeits, or procures, or +advises the forging or counterfeiting of any signature upon any +writing or other paper, or uses, or procures, or advises the use of +any such signature, knowing the same to be forged or counterfeited; or + +Who, having charge, possession, custody, or control of any money or +other property of the United States, furnished or intended for the +military service thereof, knowingly delivers, or causes to be +delivered, to any person having authority to receive the same, any +amount thereof less than that for which he receives a certificate or +receipt; or + +Who, being authorized to make or deliver any paper certifying the +receipt of any property of the United States furnished or intended for +the military service thereof, makes or delivers to any person such +writing, without having full knowledge of the truth of the statements +therein contained and with intent to defraud the United States; or + +Who steals, embezzles, knowingly and willfully misappropriates, +applies to his own use or benefit, or wrongfully or knowingly sells or +disposes of any ordnance, arms, equipments, ammunition, clothing, +subsistence stores, money, or other property of the United States +furnished or intended for the military service thereof; or + +Who knowingly purchases or receives in pledge for any obligation or +indebtedness from any soldier, officer, or other person who is a part +of or employed in said forces or service, any ordnance, arms, +equipment, ammunition, clothing, subsistence stores, or other property +of the United States, such soldier, officer, or other person not +having lawful right to sell or pledge the same; + +Shall, on conviction thereof, be punished by fine or imprisonment, or +by such other punishment as a court-martial may adjudge, or by any or +all of said penalties. And if any person, being guilty of any of the +offenses aforesaid while in the military service of the United States, +receives his discharge or is dismissed from the service, he shall +continue to be liable to be arrested and held for trial and sentence +by a court-martial in the same manner and to the same extent as if he +had not received such discharge nor been dismissed. + + +CONDUCT UNBECOMING AN OFFICER AND GENTLEMAN. + +ART. 95. Any officer or cadet who is convicted of conduct unbecoming +an officer and a gentleman shall be dismissed from the service. + + +GENERAL ARTICLE. + +ART. 96. Though not mentioned in these articles, all disorders and +neglects to the prejudice of good order and military discipline, all +conduct of a nature to bring discredit upon the military service, and +all crimes or offenses not capital of which persons subject to +military law may be guilty shall be taken cognizance of by a general +or special or summary court-martial, according to the nature and +degree of the offense, and punished at the discretion of such court. + + +DISCIPLINARY POWERS OF COMMANDING OFFICERS. + +ART. 104. Under such regulations as the President may prescribe, and +which he may from time to time revoke, alter, or add to, the +commanding officer of any detachment, company, or higher command may, +for minor offenses not denied by the accused, impose disciplinary +punishments upon persons of his command without the intervention of a +court-martial, unless the accused demands trial by court-martial. + +The disciplinary punishments authorized by this article may include +admonition, reprimand, withholding of privileges, extra fatigue, and +restriction to certain specified limits, but shall not include +forfeiture of pay or confinement under guard. A person punished under +authority of this article who deems his punishment unjust or +disproportionate to the offense may, through the proper channel, +appeal to the next superior authority, but, may in the meantime be +required to undergo the punishment adjudged. The commanding officer +who imposes the punishment, his successor in command, and superior +authority shall have power to mitigate or remit any unexecuted portion +of the punishment. The imposition and enforcement of disciplinary +punishment under authority of this article for any act or omission +shall not be a bar to trial by court-martial for a crime or offense +growing out of the same act or omission; but the fact that a +disciplinary punishment has been enforced may be shown by the accused +upon trial, and when so shown shall be considered in determining the +measure of punishment to be adjudged in the event of a finding of +guilty. + + +REDRESS OF INJURIES TO PERSON OR PROPERTY. + +ART. 105. Whenever complaint is made to any commanding officer that +damage has been done to the property of any person or that his +property has been wrongfully taken by persons subject to military law, +such complaint shall be investigated by a board consisting of any +number of officers from one to three, which board shall be convened by +the commanding officer and shall have, for the purpose of such +investigation, power to summon witnesses and examine them upon oath or +affirmation, to receive depositions or other documentary evidence, +and to assess the damages sustained against the responsible parties. +The assessment of damages made by such board shall be subject to the +approval of the commanding officer, and in the amount approved by him +shall be stopped against the pay of the offenders. And the order of +such commanding officer directing stoppages herein authorized shall be +conclusive on any disbursing officer for the payment by him to the +injured parties of the stoppages so ordered. + +Where the offenders can not be ascertained but the organization or +detachment to which they belong is known, stoppages to the amount of +damages inflicted may be made and assessed in such proportion as may +be deemed just upon the individual members thereof who are shown to +have been present with such organization or detachment at the time the +damages complained of were inflicted, as determined by the approved +findings of the board. + + +ARREST OF DESERTERS BY CIVIL OFFICIALS. + +ART. 106. It shall be lawful for any civil officer having authority +under the laws of the United States, or of any State, Territory, +District, or possession of the United States, to arrest offenders, +summarily to arrest a deserter from the military service of the United +States and deliver him into the custody of the military authorities of +the United States. + + +SOLDIERS TO MAKE GOOD TIME LOST. + +ART. 107. Every soldier who in an existing or subsequent enlistment +deserts the service of the United States or without proper authority +absents himself from his organization, station, or duty for more than +one day, or who is confined for more than one day under sentence, or +while awaiting trial and disposition of his case, if the trial results +in conviction, or through the intemperate use of drugs or alcoholic +liquor, or through disease or injury the result of his own misconduct, +renders himself unable for more than one day to perform duty, shall be +liable to serve, after his return to a full-duty status, for such +period as shall, with the time he may have served prior to such +desertion, unauthorized absence, confinement, or inability to perform +duty, amount to the full term of that part of his enlistment period +which he is required to serve with his organization before being +furloughed to the Army Reserve. + + +SOLDIERS--SEPARATION FROM THE SERVICE. + +ART. 108. No enlisted man, lawfully inducted into the military service +of the United States, shall be discharged from said service without a +certificate of discharge, signed by a field officer of the regiment or +other organization to which the enlisted man belongs or by the +commanding officer when no such field officer is present; and no +enlisted man shall be discharged from said service before his term of +service has expired, except by order of the President, the Secretary +of War, the commanding officer of a department, or by a sentence of a +general court-martial. + + +OATH OF ENLISTMENT. + +ART. 109. At the time of his enlistment every soldier shall take the +following oath or affirmation: "I, ---------, do solemnly swear (or +affirm) that I will bear true faith and allegiance to the United +States of America; that I will serve them honestly and faithfully +against all their enemies whomsoever; and that I will obey the orders +of the President of the United States and the orders of the officers +appointed over me, according to the Rules and Articles of War." This +oath or affirmation may be taken before any officer. + + + + +CHAPTER XV. + +ENGLISH-FRENCH VOCABULARY. + + +COMMON WORDS. + + Afternoon (this) Cet apres-midi. + Army (an) Une armee. + Bandage Un bandage. + Bath Un bain. + Bayonet Une baionnette. + Bed Un lit. + Blanket Une couverture. + Boy Un garcon. + Bullet Une balle, + Un pruneau (soldier slang). + Camp Un camp, + Un campement. + Cartridge Une cartouche. + Child Un enfant, + Une enfant. + Cook Un cuisinier, + Un cuistot (slang), + Une cuisiniere, (fem.). + Dance Un bal, + Une danse (one dance). + Dark Obscur. + Day Un jour. + Dead Mort. + Deserter Un deserteur. + Door Une porte. + Farm Une ferme. + Firearms Des armes a feu. + Field gun Une piece de campagne. + Flag Un drapeau. + Un etendard (standard). + Forest Une foret, + Un bois (woods), + Un boqueteau (clump of trees). + Friend Un ami, + Une amie. + Girl Une jeune fille. + Guide Un guide. + Gun Un fusil. + Halt! Halte! + Hand Une main. + Hat Un chapeau, + Un kepi (cap), + Un casque (helmet), + Un feutre (campaign hat). + Head La tete. + Headquarters Le quartier-general. + Horse Un cheval. + Interpreter Un interprete. + Knife Un couteau. + Lake Un lac. + Man Un homme. + Meat De la viande. + Name Un nom. + Night La nuit. + Noon Midi. + Machine gun Une mitrailleuse. + Mess call La soupe. + Password Le mot de passe. + Pay Le pret (enlisted men), + La solde (officers). + Prisoner Un prisonnier. + Recruit Une recrue, + Un bleu (slang), + Un bleuet (slang), + Un blanc-bec (slang). + Restaurant Un restaurant, + Un cafe. + Road Un chemin, + Une route. + Retreat La retraite. + Reveille Le reveil, + La diane + Saber Un sabre. + Saddle Une selle. + Shoe Des chaussures (shoes in general), + Des souliers (low shoes), + Des bottines (high shoes), + Des brodequins (marching shoes). + Shotgun Un fusil de chasse. + Sick Malade. + Soup Une soupe, + Un potage. + Spy Un espion. + Supper Le souper. + Sword Une epee. + Tent Une tente. + Shelter tent Une tente-abri. + + +NUMERALS. + + One Un, une. + Two Deux. + Three Trois. + Four Quatre. + Five Cinq (pronounce _sank_). + Six Six (pronounce _cease_). + Seven Sept (pronounce _set_). + Eight Huit (pronounce _weet_). + Nine Neuf. + Ten Dix (pronounce _deess_). + Eleven Onze. + Twelve Douze. + Thirteen Treize. + Fourteen Quatorze. + Fifteen Quinze. + Sixteen Seize. + Seventeen Six-sept. + Eighteen Dix-huit. + Nineteen Dix-neuf. + Twenty Vingt (pronounce _vant_). + Twenty-one Vingt-et-un. + Thirty Trente. + Thirty-one Trente-et-un. + Thirty-two Trente-deux. + Forty Quarante. + Fifty Cinquante. + Sixty Soixante. + Seventy Soixante-dix. + Seventy-one Soixante-et-onze. + Seventy-two Soixante-douze. + Eighty Quatre-vingts. + Eighty-one Quatre-vingt-un. + Ninety Quatre-vingt-dix. + Ninety-one Quatre-vingt-onze. + One hundred Cent. + One hundred and one Cent un. + Two hundred Deux cents. + Two hundred and one Deux cent un. + One thousand Mille. + Two thousand Deux mille. + One thousand one hundred Mille cent; onze cents. + Thousands of soldiers Des milliers de soldats. + A million Un million. + Two million men Deux millions d'hommes. + A score Une vingtaine. + About forty men Une quarantaine d'hommes. + Hundreds of men Des centaines d'hommes. + + +CURRENCY, MEASURES, AND WEIGHTS. + + 1 cent Un sou; cinq centimes. + 10 cents Dix sous; cinquante centimes. + 20 cents (about) Un francs. + 1 dollar Cinq francs. + +(The French have gold pieces of 10 francs and 20 francs; bank notes of +50 francs, 100 francs, and higher. The gold pieces are probably +replaced by bank notes now.) + + 1 meter (1.0936 yards) Un metre. + 1 kilometer (0.62138 mile) Un kilometre. + + NOTE.--For all ordinary purposes, the "Kilometre" = 5/8 of a + mile; the "Centimetre" = 4/10 of an inch. + + 1 league (2.48552 miles) Une lieue. + 1 hectare (2.4711 acres) Un hectare. + 1 gram (15.43239 grain Troy) Un gramme. + 1 kilogram (2.204621 pounds + avoirdupois) Un kilogramme. + 220.46 pounds avoirdupois Un quintal; 100 kilos. + 2,204.6 pounds avoirdupois Une tonne; 1,000 kilos. + +(Coal is sold by the _tonne_; grain and hay by the _quintal_. Dix +quintaux de ble, de foin=10 quintals of grain, of hay.) + + 1.0567 quart (liquid) Un litre. + 26.417 gallons Un hectolitre. + 0.9081 quart (dry) Un litre. + 2.8379 bushels Un hectolitre. + +(The _litre_, which is the principal unit of both fluid and dry +measures, is the contents of 1 cubic _decimetre_ (decimetre = 1/10 +metre).) + + +DAYS, MONTHS, AND SEASONS. + + Sunday Dimanche. + Monday Lundi. + Tuesday Mardi. + Wednesday Mercredi. + Thursday Jeudi. + Friday Vendredi. + Saturday Samedi. + January Janvier. + February Fevrier. + March Mars. + April Avril. + May Mai. + June Juin. + July Juillet. + August Aout (pronounced _oo_). + September Septembre. + October Octobre. + November Novembre. + December Decembre. + The seasons Les saisons. + Winter L'hiver. + Spring Le printemps. + Summer L'ete. + Fall L'automne. + Year Un an; une annee. + Month Un mois. + Week Une semaine. + Day Un jour. + Hour Une heure. + Minute Une minute. + Second Une seconde. + + +COMMON PHRASES + + Good morning, sir, + madam, miss. Bonjour, monsieur, madame, + Good afternoon mademoiselle. + Good evening, sir Bonsoir, monsieur. + Good night, sir Bonne nuit, monsieur. + Pardon me Pardon; je vous demande pardon. + Don't mention it Je vous en prie. + How do you do? Comment allez-vous? + Comment ca va? + Comment vous portez-vous? + Very well, thank you Tres bien, merci. + Je vais bien, merci. + Ca va bien, merci. + Je me porte bien, merci. + Do not trouble yourself Ne vous genez pas. + Ne vous derangez pas. + I am very glad to see you Je suis bien aise de vous voir. + Je suis content (heureux) de vous + voir. + What time is it? Quelle heure est-il? + It is 10 o'clock Il est dix heures. + Take care; look out Prenez garde. + Do not bother me Ne me derangez pas. + Stop here Arretez-vous ici. + Does Mr. -- live here? M. -- demeure-t-il ici? + Come in Entrez. + You are very kind Vous etes tres aimable. + At what time does the first + train start? A quelle heure part le premier + What is the name of this train? + station? Comment s'appelle cette station + (gare)? + I want Je desire..Je veux (stronger). + I do not want it. Je n'en veux pas. + Let me know what I owe you. Dites-moi ce que je vous dois. + Are you not mistaken? Ne faites-vous pas erreur? + Ne vous trompez-vous pas? + Please give me Veuillez me donner. + Move on. Avancez. + Circulez. (Policeman.) + I want something to eat. Je desire quelque chose a manger. + Where is it? Ou est-ce? + Go and look for it. Allez le chercher. + Take this letter to the post + office. Portez cette lettre a la poste. + How much is it? Combien? + Combien cela coute-t-il? + It is dear. C'est cher. + Thank you. Merci. + Je vous en remercie. + Don't mention it. Il n'y a pas de quoi. + De rien. + Allow me to present my friend. Permettez-moi de vous presenter + mon ami ----. + I am glad to make your + acquaintance. Je suis enchante de faire votre + connaissance. + How far is it? A quelle distance est-ce? + What can I do for you? Que puis-je faire pour vous? + Do you speak English? Parlez-vous anglais? + I do not speak French very Je ne parle pas tres bien le + well. francais. + Where do you come from? D'ou venez-vous? + How did you come? Comment etes-vous venu? + On foot, in a carriage, in an A pied, en voiture, en auto, en + auto, by rail, by boat, on a chemin de fer, en bateau, a + bicycle, horseback, in an bicyclette, a cheval, en aeroplane. + aeroplane. + + +MILITARY TITLES, RANKS, AND GRADES. + + General officers Les officers generaux. + General staff L'etat-major general. + Field officers Les officiers superieurs. + Company officers Les officiers subalternes. + Enlisted men Les hommes de troupe. + Noncommissioned officers Les sous-officiers. + Private soldiers Les simples soldats. + Colonel Le colonel (addressed[15] as "Mon + colonel"). + Major Le commandant ("Mon commandant"). + Captain Le capitaine ("Mon capitaine"). + Le piston (slang). + First lieutenant Le lieutenant (en premier) ("Mon + lieutenant"). + Second lieutenant Le sous-lieutenant ("Mon lieutenant"). + A doctor Un (medecin) major. + A sergeant Un sergent (addressed as "Sergent"). + Un marechal des logis (mounted + service). + A corporal Un caporal ("Caporal"). + Un brigadier (mounted service). + A private Un simple soldat. + A body of troops Une troupe. + French troops Des troupes francaises. + A wagoner Un conducteur. + Un fourgonnier. + A horseshoer Un marechal-ferrant. + A saddler Un sellier. + A signaler Un signaleur. + A deserter Un deserteur. + A soldier of Infantry Un fantassin. + Cavalry Un cavalier. + Artillery Un artilleur. + Engineers Un sapeur-mineur. + Quartermaster Corps. Un homme de l'intendance. + Signal Corps Un homme du corps des signaux. + Hospital Corps Un infirmier. + Line of Communications Un garde des voies et communications, + G. V. C. + Infantry L'infanterie. + Cavalry La cavalerie. + Artillery L'artillerie. + Engineers Le genie. + Signal Corps Le corps des signaux. + Hospital Corps Le corps de sante. + Le service de sante. + Aviation Corps Le corps d'aviation. + + [Footnote 15: See note, p. 388.] + + +MILITARY TERMS. + + The headquarters Le quartier general. + The train Le train des equipages. + Railway service Le service des chemins de fer. + Telegraph service Le service des telegraphes. + Rural guards La gendarmerie. + Des gendarmes. + A paymaster Un tresorier. + A chaplain Un aumonier. + An army Une armee. + General So-and-so's army L'armee--(l'armee Foch). + An army corps Un corps d'armee. + A division Une division. + A brigade Une brigade. + A regiment Un regiment. + A battalion Un bataillon. + A company Une compagnie. + A platoon Un peloton. + A section Une section. + A squad Une escouade. + A detachment Un detachement. + Barracks Une caserne. + A camp Un camp (more or less permanent). + Un campement (temporary). + A cantonment Un cantonnement. + Line (Une) ligne. + Column (Une) colonne. + As skirmishers En tirailleurs. + Follow me, as skirmishers A moi, en tirailleurs. + Scouts Des eclaireurs. + A patrol Une patrouille. + The advance guard L'avant-garde. + The rear guard L'arriere-garde. + Flankers Des flanc-gardes. + The main body Le gros (de la colonne). + Combat train Le train de combat. + Field train Le train regimentaire. + Outposts Des avant-postes. + Cossack posts Des avant-postes a la cosaque. + A sentinel Une sentinelle. + Un factionnaire. + On post En faction. + De faction. + Guard mounting La garde montante (also _new + guard_). + The sentinel challenges: "Halt! La sentinelle crie: "Halte! Qui + Who's there?" vive?" + The answer is: "France" La reponse est: "France." + Advance with the countersign Avance au ralliement. + +(The person challenged gives the _mot d'ordre_, which is the name of +some general, and the sentinel replies with the _mot de ralliement_, +which is the name of a battle or a city.) + + Go away; you can't pass (Passe) au large. + Halt, or I fire Halte, ou je fais feu. + Put down your arms Deposez vos armes. + Hands up! Levez les bras. + Face about (Faites) demi-tour. + Come here Venez ici. + A spy Un espion. + A flag of truce Un drapeau blanc. + Un drapeau parlementaire. + + +UNIFORMS, ARMS, CLOTHING, AND EQUIPMENT. + + Clothing Les vetements, l'habillement. + Change your clothes Changez de vetements. + Overcoat (worn by French + infantry) Une capote. + Trousers Un pantalon. + Breeches Une culotte. + Shirt Une chemise. + Blouse Un dolman, une vareuse. + Cap Un kepi. + Campaign hat (United States) Un (chapeau de) feutre. + Helmet Un casque (de tranchee). + Cap with visor worn by French + off duty. Un bonnet de police. + Tam-o'-shanter worn by Alpine + chasseurs. Un beret. + Shoes in general. Des chaussures. + Service shoes Des brodequins. + Leggins Des guetres. + Wrap putties Des bandes molletieres. + Leather putties Des houseaux (or housseaux). + Full-dress uniform La grande tenue. + Dress uniform La petite tenue. + Field uniform La tenue de campagne. + Overcoat (mounted men) Un manteau. + Overcoat (officers) Un manteau. + Un manteau-capote. + Fatigue coat Le bourgeron. + Fatigue trousers (overalls) Un pantalon de treillis. + Fatigue uniform La tenue de corvee. + Magazine rifle Un fusil a repetition. + The barrel Le canon. + The bolt Le verrou. + The ramrod La baguette. + The butt La crosse. + The gun sling La bretelle. + The trigger La detente. + Rear sight La hausse. + Front sight Le guidon. + A bayonet Une baionnette. + Rosalie (slang). + Ball cartridge Une cartouche a balle. + Blank cartridge Une cartouche a blanc. + Dummy cartridge Une fausse cartouche. + Belt Un ceinturon. + Cartridge box Une cartouchiere. + First-aid packet Un paquet de pansement. + The pack Le sac. + A haversack Un etui-musette. + Canteen Un bidon. + Tin cup Un quart. + Mess can Une gamelle. + Equipment L'equipement. + Compass Une boussole. + Field glasses Des jumelles (de campagne). + Whistle Un sifflet. + Revolver Un revolver. + + +QUESTIONS ABOUT THE ROADS, ETC. + + Pardon me, sir, do you speak Pardon, monsieur, parlez-vous + English? anglais? + (German, French, Italian, Russian) (Allemand, francais, italien, + russe.) + All right, then show me, please, Tres bien, alors indiquez-moi, je + the road to ---- vous prie, le chemin de ----. + Is it far from here? Est-ce loin d'ici? + How long does it take to go Combien faut-il de temps pour y + there? aller? + How many kilometers? Combien de kilometres? + Is there a short cut? (road) Y a-t-il un chemin de traverse? + Is there a short cut? (trail) Y a-t-il un sentier plus court? + Where does this road go? Ou mene cette route? + Are we on the right road to go Sommes-nous sur le bon chemin + to ----? pour aller a ----? + Does this road go through Compiegne? Cette route passe-t-elle par + Compiegne? + Shall we find any villages on Trouverons-nous des villages sur + our road? notre chemin? + Are there any other roads going Y a-t-il d'autres chemins pour + to ----? aller a ----? + Is this road in good condition? Cette route est-elle en bon etat? + Are there hills? Y a-t-il des cotes (des coteaux)? + Are they steep? Sont-elles raides? + Does the road go through open La route, traverse-t-elle un pays + or wooded country? decouvert ou boise? + Can we get through with artillery? Peut-on passer avec de + l'artillerie? + Can we get through with heavily Peut-on passer avec de grosses + loaded wagons (auto voitures chargees (avec des + trucks)? camions-automobiles)? + Is this road practicable for artillery? Cette route est-elle praticable + pour l'artillerie? + Can infantry march on the sides L'infanterie peut-elle marcher + of the roads? sur les cotes de la route? + Is the ground practicable Le terrain est-il praticable? + Is the ground marshy Le terrain est-il marecageux? + What is the nature of the ground Quelle est la nature du sol? + Does the telegraph line follow Est-ce que la ligne telegraphique + this road as far as X? (le telegraphe) suit cette + route jusqu'a X? + Where does your railroad come + from? D'ou vient votre chemin de fer? + Where does it go to? Ou va-t-il? + Is it single tracked or double Est-il a une voie ou a deux voies + tracked the whole way? sur tout le parcours? + Where is the station? Is it far? Ou est la gare? Est-elle loin + d'ici? + How can the river be crossed? Comment peut-on passer la + riviere? + Is there a bridge? a ferry? Y a-t-il un pont? un bac? + Are there fords? Y a-t-il des passages a gue + (des gues)? + Can we get boats? Peut-on trouver des bateaux? + In that wood are there clearings, Dans ce bois, y a-t-il des + ravines, brooks, marshes, pools? clairieres, des ravins, des + ruisseaux, des mares? + Are there any places near here Y a-t-il des endroits pres d'ici + for watering horses? pour abreuver les chevaux? + Is the water good? L'eau est-elle bonne? + Is this water drinkable? Est-ce de l'eau potable? + Are there watering troughs? Y a-t-il des abreuvoirs? + Where is there good grass for the Ou y a-t-il de bonne herbe pour + animals? les animaux? + Can we buy provisions? Peut-on acheter des vivres? + Is there a field where we can Y a-t-il un champ ou nous pouvons + camp? camper (installer notre + campement)? + Can you give me any information Pouvez-vous me donner des + about the enemy? renseignements sur l'ennemi? + Please find me a guide who Veuillez me trouver un guide qui + knows the country? connaisse le pays. + We are going to follow this trail + (tracks). Nous allons suivre cette piste. + Crossroads Un carrefour. + + +TOWNS. + + Where is the post-office and Ou est le bureau des postes et + telegraph office? telegraphes? + The postmaster Le directeur des postes et + telegraphes. + The mail Le courrier. + When was the last mail distributed? A quelle heure a-t-on fait la + derniere distribution? + General delivery Poste restante. + Are there any letters for ----? Y a-t-il des lettres pour ----? + I should like to send a telegram. Je voudrais expedier un + telegramme. + Have you received a telegram Avez-vous recu un telegramme + for ----? (une depeche) pour ----? + A telegraph instrument Un appareil (telegraphique). + Can you tell me where the Pourriez-vous me dire ou se + mayor's office is? trouve la mairie? + I couldn't tell you; I am a Je ne saurais vous renseigner; + stranger here. je ne connais pas la ville. + Good morning, sir, are you the Bonjour, Monsieur, etes-vous le + mayor? maire? + No, sir, I am his assistant. Non, Monsieur, je suis son adjoint. + I should like to speak to the Je voudrais parler au maire lui-meme. + mayor himself. + Listen, sir. A detachment will Ecoutez, monsieur. Un detachement + arrive here to-morrow morning arrivera, ici demain matin + at 5 o'clock. a cinq heures. + Can you arrange to lodge 2,000 Pouvez-vous prendre des dispositions + men for two days? pour loger 2,000 hommes + pendant deux jours? + A policeman Un sergent de ville, un agent de + la paix. + + +RAILROADS. + + The station agent Le chef de gare. + The conductor Le conducteur. + The engineer Le mecanicien. + The fireman Le chauffeur. + The brakeman Le serre-freins. + The telegraph operator Le telegraphiste. + An engine Une locomotive. + Passenger cars Des wagons (de voyageurs). + Flat cars Des trucks. + Box cars Des wagons de marchandises. + Stock cars Des wagons a bestiaux. + An express train Un train express. + A through train Un train direct. + A local train Un train omnibus. + A passenger train Un train de voyageurs. + A freight train Un train de marchandises. + To entrain the troops Embarquer les troupes. + To detrain the troops Debarquer les troupes. + To get on a train Monter dans un train. + To get off a train Descendre d'un train. + The railroad track La voie (ferree). + A side track Une voie de garage. + A ticket Un billet. + A round trip ticket Un billet d'aller et retour. + One way only Aller seulement. + The ticket window Le guichet. + At what time does the Paris A quelle heure part le train pour + train start? Paris? + It is late (15 minutes late). Il est en retard (de quinze minutes). + Do we have to change cars? Faut-il changer de train? + The train stops Le train s'arrete. + All aboard! En voiture! + The train starts Le train s'ebranle. + + +RATIONS AND FOOD. + + Provisions (in general) Les vivres. + The ration La ration. + Fresh beef De la viande fraiche. + Bacon Du lard. + Flour De la farine. + Soft bread Du pain frais. + Hard bread (crackers) Du biscuit. + Field bread Du pain de guerre. + Corn meal De la farine de mais. + Coffee Du cafe. + Sugar Du sucre. + Eggs Des oeufs. + Chickens Des poulets. + Potatoes Des pommes de terre. + Peas Des pois. + String beans Des haricots verts. + Vegetables (in general) Des legumes. + An apple Une pomme. + A pear Une poire. + A cherry Une cerise. + A peach Une peche. + Cheese Du fromage. + Wine Du vin. + Beer De la biere. + A glass of beer Un bock. + I am hungry. J'ai faim. + Bring me something to eat, Apportez-moi quelque chose a + please. manger, s'il vous plait. + I am thirsty. J'ai soif. + Please give me, a glass of water. Veuillez me donner un verre d'eau. + Waiter, I'll take a beefsteak. Garcon, je desire un bifteck. + Some black coffee Du cafe noir. + Coffee with milk Du cafe au lait. + Rolls Des petits pains. + Crescent rolls Des croissants. + + +HOSPITALS. + + A field hospital Une ambulance. + A hospital (in general) Un hopital (plural: des hopitaux). + A dressing station Un poste de secours. + A first-aid dressing Un pansement sommaire. + Red Cross La Croix Rouge. + A doctor Un medecin. + Un docteur. + A surgeon Un chirurgien. + A military surgeon Un (medecin) major. + Assistant surgeon Un aide-major. + A male nurse, hospital corps man Un infirmier. + A female nurse Une infirmiere. + An ambulance Une ambulance. + A stretcher (litter) Un brancard. + A litter bearer Un brancardier. + A roll of bandages Un rouleau de bandage. + A first-aid packet Un paquet de pansement. + A wounded man Un blesse. + I am sick Je suis malade. + I have a fever J'ai la fievre. + I have chills and fever J'ai des frissons de fievre. + I am constipated Je suis constipe. + I have diarrhea J'ai la diarrhee. + + +POINTS OF THE COMPASS. + + North Le nord. + South Le sud. + East L'est. + West L'ouest. + Northeast Le nord-est. + Southeast Le sud-est. + Northwest Le nord-ouest. + Southwest Le sud-ouest. + + +TRENCH WARFARE. + + Trench warfare La guerre des tranchees. + La guerre de position. + La guerre de taupe (_moles_). + Trench Une tranchee. + Communication trench Un boyau (de communication). + The parapet Le parapet. + A loophole Un creneau. + Une meurtriere. + A grenade Une grenade. + A grenadier, bomber Un grenadier. + Barbed wire Du fil de fer barbele. + Barbed wire entanglement Un reseau de fils de fer barbeles. + Trench mortar Un mortier. + Un crapouillaud. + _Minenwerfer_ (German). + Bomb Une bombe. + Howitzer Un obusier. + Machine gun Une mitrailleuse. + Fieldpiece Une piece de campagne. + 75 millimeter field gun Une piece de soixante-quinze. + Siege gun Une piece de siege. + 120 long Cent vingt long. + 120 short Cent vingt court. + 77 (German) Soixante-dix-sept (allemand). + Shell Un obus. + Une marmite (slang). + Un colis a domicile (slang). + Shrapnel Un shrapnell. + Un rageur (slang). + Periscope Un periscope. + Trench knife Un couteau de tranchee. + Dugout Un abri dans les tranchees. + Un cagibi (slang). + Une cagna (slang) + Un gourbi (slang). + Une guitoune (slang). + + NOTE.--In addressing an officer of grade superior to his own, an + officer must use the possessive adjective; a senior addressing a + junior uses the title of the grade only. Thus: A major to a + colonel says "Mon colonel," but the colonel to the major would + say "Commandant." + + + + +APPENDIX. + +FORM FOR LAST WILL AND TESTAMENT. + + +Last Will and Testament + +OF + + _____________________________________________________________________ + + _I_, __________________________________________________________________ + + _of_ _____________________________________________________________________ + + _do make, publish, and declare this my last will and testament. + I give, devise, and bequeath to_[16] _______________________________________ + + ________________________________________________________________________ + + ________________________________________________________________________ + + ________________________________________________________________________ + + ________________________________________________________________________ + + ________________________________________________________________________ + + ________________________________________________________________________ + + ________________________________________________________________________ + + ________________________________________________________________________ + + [Footnote 16: Here insert specific legacies and devises.] + + _And I do give, devise, and bequeath all the rest and residue of + my estate, both real and personal, to_ ___________________________________ + + ________________________________________________________________________ + + ________________________________________________________________________ + + ________________________________________________________________________ + + _heirs and assigns forever_,[17] ____________________________________________ + + ________________________________________________________________________ + + ________________________________________________________________________ + + ________________________________________________________________________ + + [Footnote 17: If the residue of the estate is given to + several persons, add here the manner in which it is to be + divided, as "in equal shares as tenants in common."] + + _I hereby appoint_____________________________________________________ + + ________________________________________________________________________ + + _______________________________________________________________ _executor + + of this my last will and testament, and I desire that_ ______________________ + _shall not be required to give bond for the performance of the + duties of that office_. + + + _Witness my hand this_[18]_________________________________________________ + + [Footnote 18: If the will is made in Nevada, or if the + testator has real estate in that State, he should affix his + seal.] + + _day of_ __________________________________, _191_ + + ______________________________________________ + + + _Signed, published, and declared by_ ______________________________________ + + _________________________________________________________________________ + + _the above-named testator, as and for his last will and testament, + in the presence of us, who, at his request and in his + presence, and in the presence of each other, have subscribed + our names as witnesses thereto._[19]_ + + _________________________________________________________ + + Residence: _____________________________________ + + _________________________________________________________ + + Residence: _____________________________________ + + _________________________________________________________ + + Residence: _____________________________________ + + ________________________________________________________________________ + + [Footnote 19: If the will is made in Louisiana, unless it is + wholly in the handwriting of the testator, there should be + seven witnesses and a notary at the "sealing up." If wholly + in his handwriting, no formalities are required.] + + + + +INDEX. + + + Abbreviations on maps, 323 + Advance guards, 210 + Advance party of advance guard, 211 + Advice to riflemen, 241 + Aiming rifle, 235 + Alignments, 235 + Ammunition, 20 + Arm signals, 154 + Arms (_see_ Field kit), 30 + Articles of War: + Extracts from, 353 + Reading, 353 + Assembling Infantry equipment, 33 + + + Ball cartridges, 20 + Battle sight, 20 + Bayonet, manual of: + Attacks, 75 + Combat, 84 + Combined movements, 83 + Defenses, 79 + Fencing exercises, 85 + Foot movements, 85 + General rules, 85 + Instruction without bayonet, 81 + Instruction with rifle, 74 + Instruction without rifle, 74 + Suggestions for fencing at will, 93 + Blanket roll, 33 + + + Calling the shot, 241 + Care of feet, 47 + Care of rifle, 21 + Company, school of: + Close order drill-- + Alignments, 146 + Cossack post, 215 + Course in small-arms firing, 243 + Courtesies in conversation, 18 + Courtesy, military, 13 + + + English-French vocabularies, 371 + Equipment: + Assembling, 33 + Part of, 33 + + + Facings, 61 + Feet, care of, 47 + Field kit, 30 + Field service: + Outposts-- + Combat, 181 + Principles of Infantry training, 180 + Fire: + Control, 192 + Direction, 191 + Discipline, 192 + Ranges, 193 + Firing with rests, 243 + First-aid rules, 338 + Flank guards, 213 + Forage ration, 41 + Form for last will and testament, 389 + French-English vocabulary, 371 + + + Guard duty (extracts from Manual of Interior): + Classification of interior guards, 255 + Color sentinels, 271 + Commander of the guard, 258 + Compliments from guards, 284 + Corporal of the guard, 266 + Countersigns, 282 + Details, 255 + Flags, 296 + Guard mounting, 259 + Formal, 256 + Informal, 256 + Guard patrols, 283 + Guarding prisoners, 289 + Introduction, 254 + Musician of the guard, 271 + Orderlies, 271 + Orders for sentinels, 273 + Paroles, 282 + Prisoners, 286 + Privates of the guard, 273 + Relieving the old guard, 306 + Retreat gun, 298 + Reveille gun, 298 + Rosters, 255 + Sergeant of the guard, 263 + Watchmen, 283 + Guard mounting, 298 + Formal, 299 + Informal, 297 + + + Hygiene, personal, 43 + + + Individual cooking, 30 + Recipes, 34 + International Morse code, 327 + + + Laws governing Army, 350 + Line of observation, 102 + Loadings and firings, 95 + Loyalty, 11 + + + Manual of arms, 30 + Manual of the Bayonet. (_See_ Bayonet, Manual of.) + Manual of Interior Guard Duty. (_See_ Guard duty.) + Manual of Tent Pitching. (_See_ Tent Pitching, Manual of.) + Maps: + Abbreviations, 323 + Contours, 313 + Datum plane, 314 + Directions, 309 + Distances, 312 + Ground forms, 316 + Hachures, 314 + Making (sketching), 322 + Orienting, 311 + Reading, 313 + Ridges, 317 + Scales, 313 + Signs, 323 + Slopes, 315 + Stream lines, 319 + Valleys, 316 + Vertical intervals, 315 + Marching, 223 + Preparation for, 223 + Markmanship, preliminary training, 233 + Message blanks, 235 + Metal fouling solution for cleaning rifle, 26 + Military courtesy, 13 + Morse, international code. (_See_ General service code.) + + + National anthem, 17 + Noncommissioned officers: + Corporal of guard, 352 + Insignia, 353 + Precedence, 352 + Rank, 353 + Sergeant of guard, 352 + + + Oath of enlistment, 9 + Obedience, 9 + Observation, line of. (_See_ Line of observation.) + Officers: + Insignia, 353 + Precedence, 352 + Rank, 353 + Orienting maps, 311 + Outguards, 215 + Outposts, 213 + + + Pack, 35 + Close, 35 + Open, 35 + Patrolling, 199 + Patrols: + Advance guards, 210 + Outposts, 213 + Personal hygiene, 43 + Pickets, 215 + Pistol: + Cleaning, 104 + Practice, 104 + + + Rations: + Carried on person, 37 + Cooking, 37 + Emergency, 41 + Forage, 41 + Grain, 42 + Kinds of, 38 + Reading maps, 309 + Rear guards, 312 + Regulations governing Army, 350 + Rifle: + Aiming, 242 + Care of, 241 + Cleaning, 242 + Coordination in firing, 241 + Trenches, 219 + + + Salutes: + Hand, 14 + Rifle, 14 + Saber, 15 + Sentinels, 16 + Saluting, 13 + Rules governing, 15 + Scales on maps, 324 + Soda solution for cleaning rifle, 26 + Soldier, school of: + Duties of instructor, 57 + Eyes right or left, 61 + Facings, 61 + Instruction without arms, 58 + Manual of arms, 30 + Position of the soldier on attention, 59 + Rifle salute, 71 + Salute with the hand, 14 + Salute with saber, 16 + Steps and marchings, 61 + Back step, 64 + Change step, 65 + Quick time, 62 + Side step, 63 + The half step, 63 + To halt, 64 + To march by the flank, 64 + To march to the rear, 64 + To mark time, 63 + The bayonet, 75 + The inspection, 72 + The rests, 70 + To dismiss the squad, 72 + Solutions for cleaning rifle, 26 + Squad, school of: + Alignments, 146 + Instruction, 74 + Kneeling and lying down, 74 + Loadings and firings, 95 + Observation, 102 + The assembly, 172 + The oblique march, 158 + The use of cover, 101 + To cease firing, 100 + To deploy as skirmishers, 169 + To fire at will, 99 + To fire by clip, 99 + To fire by volley, 98 + To form squad, 142 + To load, 96 + To set the sight, 98 + To stack and take arms, 73 + To suspend firing, 99 + To take intervals and distance, 65 + To unload, 97 + Steps and marchings, 61 + Subsistence. (_See_ Rations.) + Surplus kit, 32 + Swabbing solution for cleaning rifle, 26 + + + Target practice: + Advice to riflemen, 241 + Aiming rifle, 235 + Battle sight, 236 + Calling the shot, 240 + Coordination, 241 + Firing positions, 238 + Preliminary training in markmanship, 233 + Sight adjustment, 233 + Table of sight corrections, 235 + Targets, 244 + The course in small-arms firing, 243 + Trigger squeeze, 237 + Targets, 244 + Tent Pitching, Manual of: + Conical wall tent, 177 + Folding tents, 178 + Pitch all type Army tents (except shelter and conical wall tents), 176 + Striking tents, 178 + Trigger squeeze, 237 + Two-arm semaphore code, 231 + + + Uniforms, 27 + Care of, 27 + Disposing of, 27 + Dress, 28 + Full dress, 28 + How worn, 28 + Service, 28 + Use of cover, 101 + + + Visual signaling (_see_ Signals): + In general, 328 + Flag, 329 + Vocabulary--English-French, 391 + + + + +[Transcriber's note: Obvious printer's errors have been corrected. +Hyphenation and accentuation have been standardised, all other +inconsistencies are as in the original. The author's spelling has been +maintained. + +Bold text is marked with =.] + + + + + +End of the Project Gutenberg EBook of Manual for Noncommissioned Officers +and Privates of Cavalry of the Army of the United States 1917 +to be also used by Engineer Companies (Mounted) for Cavalry Instruction and +Training, by U. S. War Department + +*** END OF THIS PROJECT GUTENBERG EBOOK MANUAL FOR NONCOMMISSIONED *** + +***** This file should be named 35139.txt or 35139.zip ***** +This and all associated files of various formats will be found in: + http://www.gutenberg.org/3/5/1/3/35139/ + +Produced by Chris Curnow, Christine P. Travers and the +Online Distributed Proofreading Team at http://www.pgdp.net + + +Updated editions will replace the previous one--the old editions +will be renamed. + +Creating the works from public domain print editions means that no +one owns a United States copyright in these works, so the Foundation +(and you!) can copy and distribute it in the United States without +permission and without paying copyright royalties. Special rules, +set forth in the General Terms of Use part of this license, apply to +copying and distributing Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works to +protect the PROJECT GUTENBERG-tm concept and trademark. Project +Gutenberg is a registered trademark, and may not be used if you +charge for the eBooks, unless you receive specific permission. If you +do not charge anything for copies of this eBook, complying with the +rules is very easy. You may use this eBook for nearly any purpose +such as creation of derivative works, reports, performances and +research. They may be modified and printed and given away--you may do +practically ANYTHING with public domain eBooks. Redistribution is +subject to the trademark license, especially commercial +redistribution. + + + +*** START: FULL LICENSE *** + +THE FULL PROJECT GUTENBERG LICENSE +PLEASE READ THIS BEFORE YOU DISTRIBUTE OR USE THIS WORK + +To protect the Project Gutenberg-tm mission of promoting the free +distribution of electronic works, by using or distributing this work +(or any other work associated in any way with the phrase "Project +Gutenberg"), you agree to comply with all the terms of the Full Project +Gutenberg-tm License (available with this file or online at +http://gutenberg.org/license). + + +Section 1. General Terms of Use and Redistributing Project Gutenberg-tm +electronic works + +1.A. By reading or using any part of this Project Gutenberg-tm +electronic work, you indicate that you have read, understand, agree to +and accept all the terms of this license and intellectual property +(trademark/copyright) agreement. If you do not agree to abide by all +the terms of this agreement, you must cease using and return or destroy +all copies of Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works in your possession. +If you paid a fee for obtaining a copy of or access to a Project +Gutenberg-tm electronic work and you do not agree to be bound by the +terms of this agreement, you may obtain a refund from the person or +entity to whom you paid the fee as set forth in paragraph 1.E.8. + +1.B. "Project Gutenberg" is a registered trademark. It may only be +used on or associated in any way with an electronic work by people who +agree to be bound by the terms of this agreement. There are a few +things that you can do with most Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works +even without complying with the full terms of this agreement. See +paragraph 1.C below. There are a lot of things you can do with Project +Gutenberg-tm electronic works if you follow the terms of this agreement +and help preserve free future access to Project Gutenberg-tm electronic +works. See paragraph 1.E below. + +1.C. The Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation ("the Foundation" +or PGLAF), owns a compilation copyright in the collection of Project +Gutenberg-tm electronic works. Nearly all the individual works in the +collection are in the public domain in the United States. If an +individual work is in the public domain in the United States and you are +located in the United States, we do not claim a right to prevent you from +copying, distributing, performing, displaying or creating derivative +works based on the work as long as all references to Project Gutenberg +are removed. Of course, we hope that you will support the Project +Gutenberg-tm mission of promoting free access to electronic works by +freely sharing Project Gutenberg-tm works in compliance with the terms of +this agreement for keeping the Project Gutenberg-tm name associated with +the work. You can easily comply with the terms of this agreement by +keeping this work in the same format with its attached full Project +Gutenberg-tm License when you share it without charge with others. + +1.D. The copyright laws of the place where you are located also govern +what you can do with this work. Copyright laws in most countries are in +a constant state of change. If you are outside the United States, check +the laws of your country in addition to the terms of this agreement +before downloading, copying, displaying, performing, distributing or +creating derivative works based on this work or any other Project +Gutenberg-tm work. The Foundation makes no representations concerning +the copyright status of any work in any country outside the United +States. + +1.E. Unless you have removed all references to Project Gutenberg: + +1.E.1. The following sentence, with active links to, or other immediate +access to, the full Project Gutenberg-tm License must appear prominently +whenever any copy of a Project Gutenberg-tm work (any work on which the +phrase "Project Gutenberg" appears, or with which the phrase "Project +Gutenberg" is associated) is accessed, displayed, performed, viewed, +copied or distributed: + +This eBook is for the use of anyone anywhere at no cost and with +almost no restrictions whatsoever. You may copy it, give it away or +re-use it under the terms of the Project Gutenberg License included +with this eBook or online at www.gutenberg.org + +1.E.2. If an individual Project Gutenberg-tm electronic work is derived +from the public domain (does not contain a notice indicating that it is +posted with permission of the copyright holder), the work can be copied +and distributed to anyone in the United States without paying any fees +or charges. If you are redistributing or providing access to a work +with the phrase "Project Gutenberg" associated with or appearing on the +work, you must comply either with the requirements of paragraphs 1.E.1 +through 1.E.7 or obtain permission for the use of the work and the +Project Gutenberg-tm trademark as set forth in paragraphs 1.E.8 or +1.E.9. + +1.E.3. If an individual Project Gutenberg-tm electronic work is posted +with the permission of the copyright holder, your use and distribution +must comply with both paragraphs 1.E.1 through 1.E.7 and any additional +terms imposed by the copyright holder. Additional terms will be linked +to the Project Gutenberg-tm License for all works posted with the +permission of the copyright holder found at the beginning of this work. + +1.E.4. Do not unlink or detach or remove the full Project Gutenberg-tm +License terms from this work, or any files containing a part of this +work or any other work associated with Project Gutenberg-tm. + +1.E.5. Do not copy, display, perform, distribute or redistribute this +electronic work, or any part of this electronic work, without +prominently displaying the sentence set forth in paragraph 1.E.1 with +active links or immediate access to the full terms of the Project +Gutenberg-tm License. + +1.E.6. You may convert to and distribute this work in any binary, +compressed, marked up, nonproprietary or proprietary form, including any +word processing or hypertext form. However, if you provide access to or +distribute copies of a Project Gutenberg-tm work in a format other than +"Plain Vanilla ASCII" or other format used in the official version +posted on the official Project Gutenberg-tm web site (www.gutenberg.org), +you must, at no additional cost, fee or expense to the user, provide a +copy, a means of exporting a copy, or a means of obtaining a copy upon +request, of the work in its original "Plain Vanilla ASCII" or other +form. Any alternate format must include the full Project Gutenberg-tm +License as specified in paragraph 1.E.1. + +1.E.7. Do not charge a fee for access to, viewing, displaying, +performing, copying or distributing any Project Gutenberg-tm works +unless you comply with paragraph 1.E.8 or 1.E.9. + +1.E.8. You may charge a reasonable fee for copies of or providing +access to or distributing Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works provided +that + +- You pay a royalty fee of 20% of the gross profits you derive from + the use of Project Gutenberg-tm works calculated using the method + you already use to calculate your applicable taxes. The fee is + owed to the owner of the Project Gutenberg-tm trademark, but he + has agreed to donate royalties under this paragraph to the + Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation. Royalty payments + must be paid within 60 days following each date on which you + prepare (or are legally required to prepare) your periodic tax + returns. Royalty payments should be clearly marked as such and + sent to the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation at the + address specified in Section 4, "Information about donations to + the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation." + +- You provide a full refund of any money paid by a user who notifies + you in writing (or by e-mail) within 30 days of receipt that s/he + does not agree to the terms of the full Project Gutenberg-tm + License. You must require such a user to return or + destroy all copies of the works possessed in a physical medium + and discontinue all use of and all access to other copies of + Project Gutenberg-tm works. + +- You provide, in accordance with paragraph 1.F.3, a full refund of any + money paid for a work or a replacement copy, if a defect in the + electronic work is discovered and reported to you within 90 days + of receipt of the work. + +- You comply with all other terms of this agreement for free + distribution of Project Gutenberg-tm works. + +1.E.9. If you wish to charge a fee or distribute a Project Gutenberg-tm +electronic work or group of works on different terms than are set +forth in this agreement, you must obtain permission in writing from +both the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation and Michael +Hart, the owner of the Project Gutenberg-tm trademark. Contact the +Foundation as set forth in Section 3 below. + +1.F. + +1.F.1. Project Gutenberg volunteers and employees expend considerable +effort to identify, do copyright research on, transcribe and proofread +public domain works in creating the Project Gutenberg-tm +collection. Despite these efforts, Project Gutenberg-tm electronic +works, and the medium on which they may be stored, may contain +"Defects," such as, but not limited to, incomplete, inaccurate or +corrupt data, transcription errors, a copyright or other intellectual +property infringement, a defective or damaged disk or other medium, a +computer virus, or computer codes that damage or cannot be read by +your equipment. + +1.F.2. LIMITED WARRANTY, DISCLAIMER OF DAMAGES - Except for the "Right +of Replacement or Refund" described in paragraph 1.F.3, the Project +Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation, the owner of the Project +Gutenberg-tm trademark, and any other party distributing a Project +Gutenberg-tm electronic work under this agreement, disclaim all +liability to you for damages, costs and expenses, including legal +fees. YOU AGREE THAT YOU HAVE NO REMEDIES FOR NEGLIGENCE, STRICT +LIABILITY, BREACH OF WARRANTY OR BREACH OF CONTRACT EXCEPT THOSE +PROVIDED IN PARAGRAPH 1.F.3. YOU AGREE THAT THE FOUNDATION, THE +TRADEMARK OWNER, AND ANY DISTRIBUTOR UNDER THIS AGREEMENT WILL NOT BE +LIABLE TO YOU FOR ACTUAL, DIRECT, INDIRECT, CONSEQUENTIAL, PUNITIVE OR +INCIDENTAL DAMAGES EVEN IF YOU GIVE NOTICE OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH +DAMAGE. + +1.F.3. LIMITED RIGHT OF REPLACEMENT OR REFUND - If you discover a +defect in this electronic work within 90 days of receiving it, you can +receive a refund of the money (if any) you paid for it by sending a +written explanation to the person you received the work from. If you +received the work on a physical medium, you must return the medium with +your written explanation. The person or entity that provided you with +the defective work may elect to provide a replacement copy in lieu of a +refund. If you received the work electronically, the person or entity +providing it to you may choose to give you a second opportunity to +receive the work electronically in lieu of a refund. If the second copy +is also defective, you may demand a refund in writing without further +opportunities to fix the problem. + +1.F.4. Except for the limited right of replacement or refund set forth +in paragraph 1.F.3, this work is provided to you 'AS-IS' WITH NO OTHER +WARRANTIES OF ANY KIND, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO +WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTIBILITY OR FITNESS FOR ANY PURPOSE. + +1.F.5. Some states do not allow disclaimers of certain implied +warranties or the exclusion or limitation of certain types of damages. +If any disclaimer or limitation set forth in this agreement violates the +law of the state applicable to this agreement, the agreement shall be +interpreted to make the maximum disclaimer or limitation permitted by +the applicable state law. The invalidity or unenforceability of any +provision of this agreement shall not void the remaining provisions. + +1.F.6. INDEMNITY - You agree to indemnify and hold the Foundation, the +trademark owner, any agent or employee of the Foundation, anyone +providing copies of Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works in accordance +with this agreement, and any volunteers associated with the production, +promotion and distribution of Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works, +harmless from all liability, costs and expenses, including legal fees, +that arise directly or indirectly from any of the following which you do +or cause to occur: (a) distribution of this or any Project Gutenberg-tm +work, (b) alteration, modification, or additions or deletions to any +Project Gutenberg-tm work, and (c) any Defect you cause. + + +Section 2. Information about the Mission of Project Gutenberg-tm + +Project Gutenberg-tm is synonymous with the free distribution of +electronic works in formats readable by the widest variety of computers +including obsolete, old, middle-aged and new computers. It exists +because of the efforts of hundreds of volunteers and donations from +people in all walks of life. + +Volunteers and financial support to provide volunteers with the +assistance they need, are critical to reaching Project Gutenberg-tm's +goals and ensuring that the Project Gutenberg-tm collection will +remain freely available for generations to come. In 2001, the Project +Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation was created to provide a secure +and permanent future for Project Gutenberg-tm and future generations. +To learn more about the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation +and how your efforts and donations can help, see Sections 3 and 4 +and the Foundation web page at http://www.pglaf.org. + + +Section 3. Information about the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive +Foundation + +The Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation is a non profit +501(c)(3) educational corporation organized under the laws of the +state of Mississippi and granted tax exempt status by the Internal +Revenue Service. The Foundation's EIN or federal tax identification +number is 64-6221541. Its 501(c)(3) letter is posted at +http://pglaf.org/fundraising. Contributions to the Project Gutenberg +Literary Archive Foundation are tax deductible to the full extent +permitted by U.S. federal laws and your state's laws. + +The Foundation's principal office is located at 4557 Melan Dr. S. +Fairbanks, AK, 99712., but its volunteers and employees are scattered +throughout numerous locations. Its business office is located at +809 North 1500 West, Salt Lake City, UT 84116, (801) 596-1887, email +business@pglaf.org. Email contact links and up to date contact +information can be found at the Foundation's web site and official +page at http://pglaf.org + +For additional contact information: + Dr. Gregory B. Newby + Chief Executive and Director + gbnewby@pglaf.org + + +Section 4. Information about Donations to the Project Gutenberg +Literary Archive Foundation + +Project Gutenberg-tm depends upon and cannot survive without wide +spread public support and donations to carry out its mission of +increasing the number of public domain and licensed works that can be +freely distributed in machine readable form accessible by the widest +array of equipment including outdated equipment. Many small donations +($1 to $5,000) are particularly important to maintaining tax exempt +status with the IRS. + +The Foundation is committed to complying with the laws regulating +charities and charitable donations in all 50 states of the United +States. Compliance requirements are not uniform and it takes a +considerable effort, much paperwork and many fees to meet and keep up +with these requirements. We do not solicit donations in locations +where we have not received written confirmation of compliance. To +SEND DONATIONS or determine the status of compliance for any +particular state visit http://pglaf.org + +While we cannot and do not solicit contributions from states where we +have not met the solicitation requirements, we know of no prohibition +against accepting unsolicited donations from donors in such states who +approach us with offers to donate. + +International donations are gratefully accepted, but we cannot make +any statements concerning tax treatment of donations received from +outside the United States. U.S. laws alone swamp our small staff. + +Please check the Project Gutenberg Web pages for current donation +methods and addresses. Donations are accepted in a number of other +ways including checks, online payments and credit card donations. +To donate, please visit: http://pglaf.org/donate + + +Section 5. General Information About Project Gutenberg-tm electronic +works. + +Professor Michael S. Hart is the originator of the Project Gutenberg-tm +concept of a library of electronic works that could be freely shared +with anyone. For thirty years, he produced and distributed Project +Gutenberg-tm eBooks with only a loose network of volunteer support. + + +Project Gutenberg-tm eBooks are often created from several printed +editions, all of which are confirmed as Public Domain in the U.S. +unless a copyright notice is included. Thus, we do not necessarily +keep eBooks in compliance with any particular paper edition. + + +Most people start at our Web site which has the main PG search facility: + + http://www.gutenberg.org + +This Web site includes information about Project Gutenberg-tm, +including how to make donations to the Project Gutenberg Literary +Archive Foundation, how to help produce our new eBooks, and how to +subscribe to our email newsletter to hear about new eBooks. |